JP7030383B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine in which a setting state such as a hit probability is set to any one of a plurality is known by a setting change operation by a game hall manager. (For example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 6-91049

However, there is a problem that the conventional gaming machine having the setting information lacks convenience.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having setting information, which can improve the convenience of the gaming machine as compared with the conventional case. ..

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are shown below. The action and the like will be explained as necessary. Further, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention are appropriately shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

In the invention according to claim 1,
A lottery is performed based on the game ball launched into the game area entering the starting port in the game area, and a symbol variable game is performed in which the symbol is variablely displayed based on the result of the lottery. In a gaming machine that executes a predetermined hit game when a hit result is derived as a result of
A launching means that can launch a game ball,
A setting determination mode generating means for generating a setting determination mode capable of determining setting information regarding the execution probability of the winning game based on the first operation being performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.
A setting confirmation mode generating means for generating a setting confirmation mode in which the setting information can be confirmed separately from the setting determination mode based on the second operation being performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.
Equipped with
Although the launching means launches a game ball on condition of contact with a predetermined contact detection unit, the launching means does not launch the game ball even if it is in contact with the contact detection unit during the setting confirmation mode. To be
When the setting confirmation mode ends, if the contact detection unit is continuously in contact from the setting confirmation mode, the contact with the contact detection unit from the end of the setting confirmation mode is performed. As an effective contact, the launching means launches a game ball,
Further, it is equipped with a base value display means capable of displaying a base value calculated by calculation using the number of game balls used for the game.
The setting information is not deleted even if a ram clear process for clearing predetermined game information is performed .
Further, the setting confirmation mode generating means generates the setting confirmation mode before the interrupt processing capable of executing the processing related to the game progress is executed.
The interrupt process can be executed after the setting confirmation mode ends.
After the setting confirmation mode is completed and the interrupt process is executed, the setting confirmation mode cannot be generated at least until the power is turned on again.
It is characterized by that.
Further, in the invention according to claim 2,
A lottery is performed based on the game ball launched into the game area entering the starting port in the game area, and a symbol variable game is performed in which the symbol is variablely displayed based on the result of the lottery. In a gaming machine that executes a predetermined hit game when a hit result is derived as a result of
A launching means that can launch a game ball,
A setting determination mode generating means for generating a setting determination mode capable of determining setting information regarding the execution probability of the winning game based on the first operation being performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.
A setting confirmation mode generating means for generating a setting confirmation mode in which the setting information can be confirmed separately from the setting determination mode based on the second operation being performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.
Equipped with
Although the launching means launches a game ball on condition of contact with a predetermined contact detection unit, the launching means does not launch the game ball even if it is in contact with the contact detection unit during the setting confirmation mode. To be
When the setting confirmation mode ends, if the contact detection unit is continuously in contact from the setting confirmation mode, the contact with the contact detection unit from the end of the setting confirmation mode is performed. The launching means launches the game ball on condition that the launching means is disabled so that the gaming ball does not fire and the contact detection unit is newly contacted.
Further, it is equipped with a base value display means capable of displaying a base value calculated by calculation using the number of game balls used for the game.
The setting information is not deleted even if a ram clear process for clearing predetermined game information is performed .
Further, the setting confirmation mode generating means generates the setting confirmation mode before the interrupt processing capable of executing the processing related to the game progress is executed.
The interrupt process can be executed after the setting confirmation mode ends.
After the setting confirmation mode is completed and the interrupt process is executed, the setting confirmation mode cannot be generated at least until the power is turned on again.
It is characterized by that.

According to the inventions according to claims 1 and 2, the convenience of the gaming machine having the setting information can be improved as compared with the conventional case.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of an effect operation unit is in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a top view which looked at the effect operation unit in the plate unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit seen from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring seen from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the top front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front and bottom. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front and bottom. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the movable ball-extracting piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the board unit from the rear lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main composition and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main composition and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 10 (a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) viewed from the front by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which enlarges and shows the vicinity of a tank rail in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a front view of the game board which made the center accessory etc. opaque in the pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the front right. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a schematic explanatory diagram of the wiring routing from a function display unit in a main control board. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory etc. are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the back. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 107. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 107. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball circulates, and the obstacle nail by cutting the table unit parallel to the surface of a game panel. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball on the right side in the table unit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball circulating in the first guide passage in the guide passage group, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball circulating in the second guide passage in the guide passage group. be. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball accepted by the prize winning opening, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion of the third distribution device in (a) from a plane, and (c). Is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the second sorting device in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the timing of the operation of the prize winning opening, the first distribution device, and the second distribution device according to the type of "small hit". (A) is an explanatory view showing the flow of a game ball in the attacker unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in (a). (A) to (d) are explanatory views showing an embodiment of a guide passage group different from FIG. 117. (E) and (f) are explanatory views which show the embodiment of the further different guide passage group. (A) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out ball detection unit, and (d) is a rear view. It is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit seen from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit seen from the back, and (f) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit and the position near the lower right front. It is a figure, (g) is the perspective view which looked at the out-ball detection unit from the lower right rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out-sphere detection unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out-ball detection unit, and (b) is a perspective view showing a state in which the out-ball detection unit is in contact with the game panel. It is an enlarged cross-sectional view seen from the right side by assembling it on a game board and cutting it up and down at the center of the right sensor of the out port. It is a perspective view which shows the vicinity of the out opening from the front in the state which was assembled on the game board. (A) is a perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit as viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light guide plate and a pattern substrate in a light guide plate effect unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light. Light guide plate of the back unit It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the 2nd picture is light-emitting and decorated in the light guide plate of the production unit. Light guide plate of the back unit It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the first pattern is luminescently decorated in the light guide plate of the effect unit. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. FIG. 3A is an enlarged view of a part of a region where SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and is a view (b) of this enlarged view seen from the right side of the main control board. It is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of the board which aggregated the SMD type electronic component which substitutes a lead type electronic component in a predetermined area, and aggregates the lead type electronic component into an alternative SMD type electronic component. It is a schematic diagram (b) which shows the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate which has been miniaturized. FIG. 138 (a) is an enlarged view showing the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board. It is a perspective view of the main control board box of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. 142. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 148. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control unit following FIG. 149. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the pre-determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing for big hits, (B) is a big hit symbol symbol determination table used for lottery processing for big hit types, and (C) is a small hit. It is a small hit symbol symbol determination table used for lottery processing about a kind. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit start processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit middle processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. This is an example of an error notification mode. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a table showing the winning probability and the like according to the set value of the gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the procedure of changing a setting value. It is a fluctuation pattern table used for determining the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment which the right detection sensor is provided in the 1st guide passage. This is a concrete example of the effect when the warning effect using the right detection sensor is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment in which the detection sensor is provided in the 1st guide passage and the 2nd guide passage. This is a specific example of the effect when the warning effect using the right detection sensor and the left detection sensor is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment in which the ball clogging clearing hole is provided in the 1st guide passage and the 2nd guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment in which the ball clogging clearing hole is provided in the 1st guide passage and the 2nd guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment which the 2nd out port is provided near the entrance of the 1st guide passage and the 2nd guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment which the 2nd outlet is provided near the exit inside the 1st guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of the operation when an abnormality occurs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of the operation when an abnormality occurs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment in which the 2nd out port and the 3rd out port are provided separately from the out port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of the calculation in the case where the 2nd out port and the 3rd out port are provided separately from the out port. It is an emission color pattern table in which an emission color pattern of a light guide plate is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment in which a plurality of decorative bodies are provided around the display area of an effect display device. This is a concrete example of the effect of the light guide plate and a plurality of decorative bodies at the time of executing the light emission effect. It is a pattern displayed on the light guide plate and the effect display device at the time of executing the imitation effect. This is a concrete example of the effect of the light guide plate and the effect display device at the time of executing the imitation effect. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the setting information determination process executed by the main control MPU. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting value hold suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image data which combined the display mode of the hold notice effect and the display mode of a set value hold suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting value continuous suggestion effect. It is a table showing the winning probability and the like according to the set value of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the winning probability and the like according to the set value of the gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of fraudulent activity while changing the setting of a set value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is not monitored during the confirmation display of the set value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is partially monitored during the confirmation display of the set value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting value is changed. It is a front view of the game board of a modification. This is an example of a table used in the lottery process. This is a modification of the setting value suggestion effect. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position. be. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after being disassembled into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is hit. A frame composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is referred to as a front frame.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame in which the shape of the front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4 and the main body are formed by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame and the hinge member 60 below the outer frame. The hinge under-frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated to the front, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 having a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side and a power supply board 630 provided with a power supply switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. I have.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and at the same time, pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which the game ball B is performed by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into a substantially square shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. On the rear side of the main control unit 1300 having the cage main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the game panel 1100. Attached to the front of the peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B ( For example, it is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 for granting a predetermined number of game balls B). The obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000.

A player can drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. As described above, it is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 182.

Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, or displays the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the back effect. It is possible to entertain the player by having the unit 3200 or the like perform a light emitting effect.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame in which the shape of the front view extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 is increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. It is provided with a pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side is further formed. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to the outside. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, in the outer frame right assembly 20, the outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a certain width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It is provided with a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the left side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 is increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. It is provided with a pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is attached to the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook hook member 24 and the lower hook hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. A flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hook piece portion 25b in the front-rear direction. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating up and down at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is mounted on the mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling it. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 has an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. It is equipped with a mechanism 44.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating up and down at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and is removed from the position toward the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as wide as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. It forms a space 40a. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface moves backward. It is provided with a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forward protruding upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. When the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or on the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders that are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extend back and forth. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a locking member 52 and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a that is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 described later of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 has a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b behind the bearing groove 51c by the mounting screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space that can accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion posterior to the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. It is provided with a hinge pin 60c under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through the horizontal portion 60a up and down. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is columnar and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the member 43 behind the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the cloaca and the cloaca is gradually narrowed, the cloaca is rolled to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the cloaca can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a front view extending vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates back and forth, and a front right of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted near the right end of the rear view in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached above the relay board 106 after the handle on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game to be driven into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and a handle mounting member 102. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the rear view of the board 104, and the rear handle relay board mounted on the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached above the relay board 106 after the handle on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The cylinder lock 130 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates back and forth between the insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the ball passage port 101g for the upper plate that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that penetrate the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. With a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylinder portion 102a and are arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 102a. The outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a are provided.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same tilted state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. It can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211.

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the outer shape of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. The purpose is to relay the connection between the decorative board 413 of the decorative portion in the window, the decorative board 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a portion extending up and down in an inverted L shape) are rear. It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and has a wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112 with the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and hooks 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are hooked. The hooking member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear pieces that are formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces that face each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the rear piece on the left side is mounted on the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the rear piece on the right side is mounted on the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the portion of the insertion hole penetrating the front and rear on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched out metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled so as to be along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. , Is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a rectangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. In the state where the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the flange member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged and rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 under the door frame is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b in a state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular columnar cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 is inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to be rotated.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A game ball that has entered from the entrance 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 that is open and the front cover 141 that is open in the front and rear while closing the rear end of the front cover 141. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. The rear cover 142 one by one a ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is equipped with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing rear unit 240 And the portion of the ball ejection taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144, which is below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball ejection port 141b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The actuating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the axis of rotation extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance entrance 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position and the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is rotatably attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is attracted to the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 is centered on the right end portion. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 accepts one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 137) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 rotatably supported by the shaft or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c is moved downward with the operation transmission unit. Will move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball pulling member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 on which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the plate is vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is the partition portion. It is possible to prevent it from bouncing off at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) recessed forward in the upper right corner when the ball striking port 142a in the rear cover 142 is viewed from the rear. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It is provided with a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end of the front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act such as operating the string to move the illegal game ball B in and out of the first starting port or the like is performed. A string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b, and then a V-shape formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the ball, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and communicates with the normal taxiway of the lower full tank path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit, and the through ball passage 150a. It is provided with a full tank ball receiving port 150b that is open toward the rear on the lower right side of the front view of the penetrating ball passage 150a and can communicate with the full tank taxiway of the lower full tank ball path unit of the main body frame 4. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opened upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and did not reach the game area 5a even though it was launched by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4. A foul ball socket 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c. It is provided with a ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the dish unit.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower ends are rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the person in charge of the game hall, or the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the full tank of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The actuating protrusion 613a of the 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f that can be contacted (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the actuating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the downstream end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the region 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It is provided with a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 is a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161 respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer sides of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To mount the glass unit 160 on the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit mounting member 163 mounted on the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body portion 171 having a predetermined outer periphery and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, which will be described later, an out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and the handle decorative board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having multiple LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front side of the handle decorative board 184. The handle cover 185, which is attached to the cover pedestal 183, is provided.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is viewed clockwise through the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urging in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and the tip side of the handle unit 180 protrudes outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from a cylindrical base 181a extending back and forth, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and an outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c can be inserted into the three groove portions 181c, respectively. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes in a state where it cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f and the like.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and is the opposite side of the anti-city area. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges outward so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed in the shape of the first protrusion 182a and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the third protrusion 182a has a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed into a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 is rounded forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately causing the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 to emit light.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 is attached. The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 182 or the like, the static electricity acting from the player is detected and the static electricity acting on the steering wheel 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of the 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original method to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 determines. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before operating the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is almost the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged under the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201, a plate base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the lower plate main body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 251 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For an annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the effect operation ring 330, the decorative board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has a ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Guidance passage portion 201a (FIG. 46). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is submerged below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) to the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle whose plan view shape extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protruding forward, and the mounting base 213 mounted on the front side of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the plate base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 240, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230, is provided.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (shallow with the rear open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. The speaker port 211b to which the punching metal is attached on the front side, the lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the center of the left and right sides of the front view and extends to the rear in a tubular shape, and the lower plate. A notch 211d cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion extending in a tubular shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth under the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted and in the lower right corner of the front view. Cylinder insertion through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted and the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 which penetrates back and forth near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance / entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the dish ball is pulled out, the dish is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball pulling guide path 241c of the unit 240, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied to the ball feeding guide path 241b from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is removed.

[3-5c-2. Precision plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 is retracted backward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part near the right end is closed is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end and a through opening 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball removal unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, the through port 213b is inserted with a wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish lower left decorative board 283, and the dish lower right decorative board 288. , And to relay the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the mounting base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of cash and prepaid cards that were put into the rented game ball B and return them.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and having translucency, a ball lending button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is returned after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231 and a front that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 in the vertical direction. The slider 232 and the like are provided. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends up and down, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removal button 222, and the lower end is the actuating receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball removal. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 mounted so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It is equipped with.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from the portion where the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, so that the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass can be used. A game from a position below the ball feeding taxiway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a ball feeding taxiway 241b that guides the accepted game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward. It is provided with a taxiway 241c for guiding the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance / exit 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the ball removal taxiway 241c protrudes to the right of the rear view from the portion where the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side of the rear view is lower. It is open on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball removal taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. The operation transmission unit 242b and the like are provided. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuating receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects to the rear of the rear base 241 and operates on the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The door 143c is in contact with the door.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a. Further, since the countersunk ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the working rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launcher 540 side via the entrance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmitting portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding taxiway 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that is open below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball ejection port 141b is guided into the lower plate ball supply port 211c from the notch portion 211d through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is passed through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the actuating receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the working rod 143c in contact with the working transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively, separated from each other to the left and right. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in which the shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated to the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the plate upper left decoration unit 270, the plate lower left decoration unit 280, the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and the plate right lower decoration unit are formed on the front surfaces of each. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so as to become wider in the vertical direction toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a front notch portion 252e cut upward from the lower front end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched in a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. It is formed between the cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b back and forth and the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and the pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with an effect operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to completely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating up and down in the right front corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It is provided with a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically located at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole is formed through. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with a slit extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e in the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower plate ball removal lid 265 backward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 moves backward with the left end side as the center. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 located directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in the open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. To. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state of matching the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removal lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical, left-right extending dish upper left decorative body 271 and a dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271. It is equipped with a dish upper left decorative board 273 which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the central axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate is formed to be milky white.

The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted from the rear inside the dish upper left decorative body 271, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper left decorative body 271 can be luminescently decorated.

In the state where the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the plate upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the plate upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical, left-right extending dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish upper right decorative body 276 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative board 278, which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular bulging forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from the rear inside the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be light-emitting and decorated.

In the state where the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the plate upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the plate upper right decorative unit 276, when a plurality of LEDs of the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

A part of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, in a state of being assembled on the door frame 3, protrudes upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250. It is possible to form a step in which the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate and the decorative unit 275 on the upper right of the plate are raised from the upper side bulging portion 252a. As a result, the player can hook his finger by using the step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when operating the effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. Further, the step between the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the plate upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Lower left decorative unit of the plate and lower right decorative unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, respectively. Be done. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The lower left dish decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right to have translucency, a lower left dish decorative body 281, and a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decorative body 281. It is equipped with a lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish, which is attached to the rear side of the lower left reflector 282 of the dish and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower left decorative body 281 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view, and is on the left side. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semi-arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left dish decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower left dish decorative substrate 283. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 281 on the lower left of the plate can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The left end of the dish lower left decorative unit 280 is located below the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative unit 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right and has transparency, and the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate and the lower right of the plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate. It includes a reflector 287 and a decorative substrate 288 on the lower right side of the plate, which is attached to the rear side of the reflector 287 on the lower right side of the plate and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semi-arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the dish is formed in a milky white color.

The lower right reflector 287 of the dish is inserted from the rear inside the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the dish. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 286 on the lower right of the plate can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 seems to have the right end submerged in the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the lower right decorative unit 286, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are made to emit light, the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate is emitted. The entire front surface of the plate can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 capable of rotation operation by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 capable of pressing operation by the player, and accepts the operation of the player and moves the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible for the player to participate not only in the operation of driving the game ball but also in the production during the game. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the inner circumference.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. It includes a transmission gear 350 for an operation ring that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in the shape of a container with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. A reflector 313 on the center of the dish mounted from the rear inside the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the reflector 313 on the center of the dish and capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light toward the front. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of illuminating the plate are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in the shape of a semicircle at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the lower cover 311 of the unit is assembled to the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semi-circular shape in which the shape of the unit front cover 312 bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a semi-circular arc extending forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semi-arc shape, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the lower plate center upper decorative body 312a forward. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a bulging semicircle extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by dividing a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extending the split surface toward the center in a semicircular shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in the shape of a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The reflector 313 on the center of the plate blocks the light from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate from leaking to the rear (inside). The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in a semicircular shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking to the rear (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 316 under the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312b under the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of extending in a semi-arc shape in the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, the dish When the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center and the LED of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be luminescent and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decorative body 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decorative body 271 and the plate upper right decorative body 276, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is the plate lower left decorative body 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper portion is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. It is provided with a portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring, which is open upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body portion 321 has a vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom wall from below, and a portion on the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter whose outer circumference substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above and front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below and front. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is set to about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the 332 and are rotatably mounted around the axis extending vertically on the ring mounting base 331, and the rotation base 332 that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward. It is equipped with a regulated ring retaining member 334.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is equipped with a ring inner cover 337 and a cover. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced outward from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates up and down in a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs constituting the outer and upper parts of the circle extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a decorative portion 335b that is provided, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer lower cover 336 of the ring has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower parts of a circle extends in an annular shape, and the outer lower surface portion 336a projects upward and toward the center from the inside and in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b and a plurality of arranged portions. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the outer lower cover 336 of the ring is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover mounting portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc constituting the inner and upper parts of a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in the range of 1/8 of the circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotary base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for driving the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to rotate and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a speed change gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the speed change gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. A gear cover that rotatably mounts 345, a speed change gear 344 and a transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with a rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, a speed change gear 344 and a transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It is equipped with 346.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed with a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the spacing between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them first detects the detection piece 345b. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the transmission gear for the operation ring by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocate and vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player in the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling according to the content of the player participation type production, or to give a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear mounting member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and at the same time, the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer circumference on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353 on the upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, thereby passing through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and above the ring constituting the rotation operation unit 302. The cover 335, the outer and lower cover 336 of the ring, and the inner cover 337 of the ring can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output a sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a more diverse effect to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front and upper, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front and lower. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference and is arranged on the target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is movably attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362 in the vertical direction, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted to urge the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and having an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted vertically above the elevating base 364 by a pair of guide shafts 362. The center button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urge the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373 are substantially the same. The center button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed cylinder shape with the upper end side closed by diameter and is attached to the upper end of the center button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. It is equipped with a central button decorative substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. The effect operation button unit 360 comprises the center button main body 373 and the center button cover 375 to form the center pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side and has a three-dimensional decoration and has translucency, and is moved up and down so as to cover the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. It is attached to the base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 includes an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380, and constitutes an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is a pressure detection sensor 381 attached to the button unit base 361 to detect the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and an elevating cam drive gear member 370 attached to the button unit base 361. It is equipped with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is attached. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg portion 361b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the center shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 is vertically penetrated in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c abutting on the upper base 363, and at the same time, a space where the bottom portion 373b of the center button body 373 can move is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a cylindrical shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and a first cam 371b. The second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis, and the third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b. (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The center button body 373 has a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrudes rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and is inserted through the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts on the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f abuts on the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is the elevating base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button main body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The center button body 373 is formed opaquely. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

In the central button decorative board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can make the central button cover 375 emit light by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 has an annular substrate portion 378a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364, and a cylindrical portion 378a that extends upward from the inner circumference of the substrate portion 378a. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state where the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button main body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. In the state where the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially coincided with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

Further, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward in this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

When the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in this descending position, the elevating cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevating drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. One cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d. At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the center button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. The press detection piece 373e is not detected by the press detection sensor 381 because it is separated from the press detection piece 373e.

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the center button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 while the center button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 via the outer peripheral button cover 380 raises and lowers the spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The press detection piece 373e of the 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the press detection piece 373e is not detected by the press detection sensor 381.

To return the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decorative board 314, a dish center lower decorative board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, press detection sensor 381, and elevating detection sensor 382, relaying the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 65C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface thereof, which can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral board cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeatedly rotating forward and reverse within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is not only rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342, but can also be rotated by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 separated in the circumferential direction is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 to make the rotation operation heavier or give a click feeling.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that is easy for the player to do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated while the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the descending position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to illuminate and decorate only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65A, the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) descends to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressing is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. No pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect the press. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). .. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect the press.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , Player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation unit 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be an obstacle to perform the rotation operation. The operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the front surface of the door frame left side base 401. The door frame left side decorative board 402 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative board 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a formed in the front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semi-arc bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of the door.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and makes it appear that a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration members 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window decoration portion 410b, and the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window decoration members 412. It is provided with an internal reflector 414 inserted into each of the side window interior decoration portions 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side reflector 415, which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and extends vertically, and the door frame right side base 411, and is attached to the door frame. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-back directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and also has a through opening 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat plate in the vertical and front-back directions so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. It is provided with an inner panel on the right side of the door frame and 417, which extend in a shape and penetrate in the left-right direction to form a through opening 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. It is provided with a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decorative member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration members 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decorative member 412 in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The decorative member 412 in the side window is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame, which is behind the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrate 413 of the decorative portion in the side window are considered to be full-color LEDs. In the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decorative portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decorative portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a through which the LED of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 faces forward are formed.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and back and forth, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. In the door frame right side outer panel 416, the through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and back and forth, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The decorative body 419 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that the portion 1/4 from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated by light emission. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off, so that the side window The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (the end of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window decoration portions 410b in the 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make the entire game area 5a difficult for the player to see, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as those next to each other to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, and the attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a top bottom cover removed. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the left and right sides and the front upper portion of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top bottom plate 454, which is connected to the lower end of the door frame, is attached.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door. A door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 has a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and the door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is provided with a top right reflector 460, which is arranged in and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. To cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, the lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and the door frame top. The door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and the door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It is provided with a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move backward as the front ends move downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semi-arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature toward the center in the left-right direction from both left and right ends, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the outer left and right sides of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top center decorative board 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative board 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top center speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b in the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. The purpose is to relay the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integrated decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, plate upper right decorative body 276, plate center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large-diameter upper dish center upper decorative bodies 312a and dish center lower decorative bodies 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. Door frame left side decorative body 404 of door frame left side unit 400 and door frame right side decorative body of door frame right side unit 410 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of decorative body 312a and dish center lower decorative body 312b. The door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 and the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged in the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b, and the rotation operation unit 302, the outer circumference. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, in the effect operation unit 300, the size increases from the lower end toward the upper side, so that it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the player's head (face) seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since it is easy to understand the whole picture of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player immediately rotates when the player participation type effect is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding forward from the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and at the same time, pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which is attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It is equipped with a three-dimensional 520.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front view upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and is attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 is a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 has a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It is equipped with a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is inserted from the front to the rear into the frame of the outer frame 2, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the shape of the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. It is provided with a connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth and for holding the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a whose front view shape is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It includes a mounting portion 501c and a gaming board restricting section 501d that projects upward from the center in the left-right direction of the gaming board mounting section 501c and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501g and the main frame base 501 of the speaker unit 620a of the speaker unit 620a facing forward are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i that penetrates back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extension portion 501j that is rotatably attached and is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a to mount the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted in the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame opening switch 4a is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 4a is released from the pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is attached with a main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached. Has been done. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 4b releases the pressing force and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. The detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends up and down near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being fastened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is exerted due to the folding habit. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is closer to the door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle between the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 122 above the frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 is attached. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to rotatably attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 is attached. The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and the lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c for the outer frame of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 for the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove portion 530a is inserted into the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frail 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and an illegal tool is used from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also enters the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 (the main body frame 4). It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. It is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat plate-shaped launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 in front view and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the launch base 541 and extends forward, the hitting mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launching solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front side of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided at the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 that is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and is open upward in a box shape that extends to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is located at the upper end of the tank rail 553, separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the left-right direction and leftward in the front view. The second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is diagonal to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 555, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal board 558 attached to the left side of the front view of the ball tank 552 on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 is provided with a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 has a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball ejection passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes a box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is equipped with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of a ball (see FIG. 92).

In the ball guidance unit 570, the shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 in front view is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends back and forth at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Will be.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence / absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence / absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the payout motor 584, which is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581 and whose rotary shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and has a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the width of the left and right and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball ejection passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view, and is seen in the back view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. Main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to form a narrower gap from each other to the rear and front, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The guide wall 581a on the main body side and the guide wall 582a on the rear lid side branch from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball ejection passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at a portion of the payout passage 580a extending from above toward the rotation axis and then extending to the right in the rear view. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a with an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are formed. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball pulling passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction of the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 90).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball ejection passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball ejection passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball-extracting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball-pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball-pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball-pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball-pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the pull-out passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pull-out movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, since the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly, so that the pachinko machine can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving to the outside through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, and the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downwardly from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects to the right from the right side of the front view, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and downwards from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view from the center of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e, which is open downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 92).

In the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side of the front view on the lower surface. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is open just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e is open just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B discharged (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is released downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is low, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. The 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a closing spring 614, which is in force.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left when viewed from the front on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball ejection passage 610c extends forward along the front right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction in the front view by the closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The front view of the actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f. Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected by the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent to the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. Will be.

Then, the game ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a moves. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 is normally arranged through the upper ball storage passage 600b and directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that is in communication. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper normal payout passage 600c is connected to the upper ball storage passage 600b which is connected to the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the full tank ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharging port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further discharged. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B (the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full. The player is informed that the tank is full) by voice (for example, "Please pull out the ball!"), And the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is in a state where the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected. Temporarily stop until it becomes.

When discharging the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 upward from the position of the lower end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction of the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball ejection passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball-pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a than the ball-pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball-pulling movable piece 592 Is less likely to be damaged.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 has a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker cover 621 facing forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and is composed of a plurality of vertically extending slits, and is a circular speaker mounting portion 621a and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it steps backward in a stepped manner. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 in which the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621 in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The space of the above and the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of the 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which deep bass sounds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, the speaker unit 620a is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess for space 621b in the speaker cover 621, and the speaker box 623. A through-cylinder 623a that communicates with the through-hole 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates back and forth is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit mounted on the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guidance portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It is provided with a 628 and a ball discharge port 629 for downwardly discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball ejection guidance unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the ejection ball receiving portion 628 has a left end in front view continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627, and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B ejected from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and the ejecting ball receiving portion 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 has a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632. (See FIG. 97) and. The payout control board box 632 is composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. Then, the instructed number of game balls B is to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board 633 is housed in the payout control board box 632 and is configured as a caulking case.

Further, the payout control board 633 includes an error LED display (not shown) for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, an RWM clear button 633z or the like having a pressing operation unit having a plurality of functions. In the present embodiment, a lead type RWM clear button 633z is adopted, and each lead of the RWM clear button 633z is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633. The pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is exposed from the opening formed in the transparent cover body, and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is housed in the payout control board box 632 with the payout control board 633. Can be pressed.

The RWM clear button 633z is stored in the RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is the microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and in the RAM built in the main control MPU, which is the microprocessor provided in the main control board 1310. A function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information, a function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching the set value, and an error for clearing the error displayed on the error LED display. It also has a function as a release switch. That is, in the present embodiment, the setting change function (function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching the setting value) related to the game specifications is mounted on the payout control board 633 which is a separate board from the main control board 1310. Has been done. Further, the separate board does not have to be the payout control board 633, and the board is not housed in the board case, the board is housed in the board case, and the board is housed in the board case configured as the caulking case. Can be considered. However, since the setting change function (the function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching the setting value) is an important function as a gaming machine, it is desirable that the security is high, and it is better for the board case than the board that is not stored in the board case. The housed board has higher security, and the board with higher security is the board housed in the board case configured as a caulking case. Since the payout control board 633 is a board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case, it can be said that the security is high. Further, the main control board 1310 is attached to the game panel 1100, while the payout control board 633 is attached to the main body frame 4, which also contributes to the improvement of security.

The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 mounted on the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 mounted on the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends up and down the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is the payout base 551. The back cover mounting portion 551i and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600 are pivotally supported and mounted so as to be openable and closable. A locking screw 642 is provided on the left side of the back cover 640 and at a portion corresponding to the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600. The left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600, and the locking screw 642 is screwed to the back cover mounting portion 601a to the back. The cover 640 is fixed. The back cover 640 can be rotated about 180 degrees from the closed state covering the rear side of the game board 5 to the open state in which the rear side of the game board 5 is opened.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. The slit 641 is not formed in the region corresponding to the main control board box 1320 described later.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 that project rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the outer frame 2, and door frame that protrudes forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is equipped with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled on the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 555, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at the position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 555. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It is equipped with.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in a front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores the game ball B supplied from the island equipment such as the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. This overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the lateral length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the length.

In the front view of the tank rail 553, the right end side (upstream side) communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lower toward the left side of the front view. Further, in the plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends to the left from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends parallel to the axis line extending in the left-right direction to the left end. .. In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the game balls B are mainly arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side and changes to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions become one line toward the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B circulating through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the generation of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the reaction force flows inside. By dispersing the pushed directions of the plurality of game balls B to be pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging (ball shavings) to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball gummy) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be achieved. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 can be visually recognized. When a movable defect occurs in the movable production unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to play the action effect of.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the detour portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because it is tilted so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is lowered in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball and the bottom surface. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g between the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the discharge portion 551j. It covers the upper side of an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. It is equipped with a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with the shape of the front view extending vertically. It is extended to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501m, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. The upper ends of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o are higher than those of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o on both lateral sides in the left-right direction, and extend in a strip shape in the front-rear direction, and are outside the game ball B in the left-right direction. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a length in the left-right direction longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the ball and the ball B is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction and the overflow surface portion 501 m. The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. As for the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes from the slanted rear end so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By releasing it to a wide area of the tank rail 553, it is possible to suppress the generation of ball shavings in the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion of the rear wall 552c in the front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that has submerged under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from inside the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (of the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked on the upper side. The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has the right end side in the front view from the position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b, and the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the anteroposterior direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape extending parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape in a plan view, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The area surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending in the lateral direction and the vertical direction on the same surface as the front wall 552b, respectively, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the upper surface of the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 555 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )is doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be stepped rearward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. After extending backward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backwards.

The external terminal board 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 555 in the state of being assembled on the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 103. The left corner portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side thereof is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to being supplied from the island facility, first of all, it exceeds the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be discharged to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and can be discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by tilting the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other (increase in the ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shaving) due to the engagement between the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edges other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 beyond the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501m to the detour passage 552g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h where the game ball B in the detour passage 552g rolls). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and biting each other due to the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B in the tank rail 553, and the game balls B are clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since they are changed to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned so as to be in a line with respect to the width direction as the plurality of game balls B are directed toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal board 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552 g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be far from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed to the rear and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (right direction in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. It can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, which causes a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the gaming board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 117. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board from the back. .. FIG. 111 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring routing from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory and the like are transparent. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 107, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 107. FIG. 117 is a front view of a game board showing a game area in which a game ball is distributed and an obstacle nail by cutting a table unit in parallel with the surface of the game panel.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a normal winning opening that grant a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B are given. The opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, a bonus winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, it is for performing a game that enjoys the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a so as to be accepted.

The game board 5 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into a front component 1000 having a substantially square shape in front view, and a rear end of the game area 5a attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. It is equipped with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 117 and the like) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It comprises a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 115, 137, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the front unit 2000 that is mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 that is mounted on the rear surface of the game panel 1100. And, further equipped.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached below the effect display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 includes a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and an accessory winning opening sensor 2513. , 1st V winning opening sensor 2514, 1st losing opening sensor 2515, 2nd V winning opening sensor 3003, 3rd losing opening sensor 3004, out opening left sensor 3032, and out opening right sensor 3033, starting port solenoid 2412, attacker The purpose is to relay the connection with the solenoid 2414, the accessory winning opening solenoid 2512, the first distribution solenoid 2532, the second distribution solenoid 2545, the third distribution drive motor 2555, and the like.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the gaming area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the gaming area. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the normal winning opening 2003, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at a further different position in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004, which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by the game ball B being accepted by the normal winning opening 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port. A large winning opening 2005 that allows the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B in 2004, and the first start opening 2002 or the second start. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the mouth 2004 allows the game ball B to be accepted. The first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, which are given an opportunity to accept the game ball B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting illegally acting magnetism in the game area 5a. It is equipped with.

Further, the table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is mounted slightly above the left side of the front view of the side unit 2200. An attacker that is attached to the right side of the front view of the 2300 and the start port unit 2100 that is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a and has a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. It is mounted above the unit 2400, the start port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the accessory winning opening 2006, the first V winning opening 2007, and the second V. It is equipped with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a winning opening 2008.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B accepted in the second starting opening 2004, and the like. It is equipped with a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B accepted by the large winning opening 2005. The center bonus 2500 has a bonus winning slot sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B accepted by the bonus winning slot 2006, and a first V winning slot that detects the game ball B accepted by the first V winning slot 2007. It includes a sensor 2514 and a first loss opening sensor 2515 that detects a game ball B received by the first loss opening 2535.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and the start opening unit 2100. The first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B accepted in the one starting port 2002 and the second V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B accepted in the second V winning opening 2008 of the center accessory 2500. And a third loss opening sensor 3004 for detecting the game ball B received by the third loss opening 2556 of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 137).

Further, the back unit 3000 is driven into the game area 5a and becomes the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. An out-ball detection unit 3030 that detects an unaccepted game ball B (a game ball B for which a privilege has not been granted), a light guide plate effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a light guide plate effect unit 3100. It is equipped with a back effect unit 3200, which is installed in the back box 3010 behind.

In the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, and the second V of the third distribution device 2550 in the center accessory 2500. The back lower ball discharge unit 3120 that receives the accepted game ball B and discharges it downward to the winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2556, the first losing opening 2535 in the center accessory 2500, and the first V winning opening 2007. A back right ball discharge unit 3130 that receives the game ball B received in the center and discharges it downward, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) that detects magnetism that acts illegally on the warp inlet 2501 in the center accessory 2500. Is equipped.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparently formed. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the front view of the out guide portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closing position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the outer rail 1001. Backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008 and the out ball detection unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 described later.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projection piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1103 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch and is the lower part of the lower full tank path unit 610. The front end openings of the normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in the front view, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 118 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached to the game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 117 and the like).

The game panel 1100 is formed of a wood board material having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm) such as veneer plywood, and the outer shape is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1100 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1101 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the game panel 1100 is formed with a plurality of openings 1102 that penetrate the game panel 1100 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the game panel 1100 includes a cutout portion 1103 that is cut out upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The cutout portion 1103 is formed so as to coincide with the cutout portion 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutout portion 1010 and the cutout portion are penetrated and the lower portion thereof is penetrated. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a decorative sheet with a pattern or decoration according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out ball detection unit 3030 of the out port 1008 and the back unit 3000, and the game ball discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. All of B can be received, and can be discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 111, 113 to 115. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 accommodates a main control board 1310 that controls the game content, payout of the game ball B, etc., a setting change board 1311 that can set the game performance, and a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. It is equipped with a main control board box 1320, which is attached to the board holder 1200.

When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when the game board 5 is viewed from behind, the rectangular main control board 1310 long in the left-right direction is on the left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Of the area surrounded by the upper side, the right side, and the lower side, the area is formed and arranged so as to occupy about four-fifths of the area from the left side to the right side, and the remaining one-fifth area. Therefore, the square setting change board 1311 is arranged in the area of the corner portion where the upper side and the right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

As described above, the outer frame 2 has the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, so that the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 are coaxially connected to each other. Since the main body frame 4 can be rotatably supported and opened and closed forward with the left side of the front view as the center, the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 52 below the main body frame of the main body frame 4 The left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction is the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction on the opposite side is the open side of the main body frame 4. Be on the side. That is, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, whereas the shaft support side of the main body frame 4 ( The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the closed side).

Further, as described above, the back cover 640 that can be opened and closed on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4. It is a thing. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640. Further, as described above, the back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end of the main body frame base 501 whose right side extends vertically and vertically extending around the axis extending vertically. Since the left side is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600, the right side of the front view is the shaft support side of the back cover 640 ( The closed side), and the left side of the front view, which is the opposite side to this, is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is open. The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

In this embodiment, green color is used as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are green resist except for various land patterns. However, as the resist of the setting change board 1311, a white color different from that of the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting board 1311 are white. It is solidly painted with resist except for various land patterns.

Here, it will be described that a color different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted as the resist of the setting change substrate 1311. Both the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are boards housed in the main control board box 1320. The manager of the game hall, the clerk of the game hall, and other staff members say that the main control board 1310 is a board that controls the progress of the game (controls the content of the game and the payout of the game ball B) and is of high importance in crime prevention. Awareness of is very high. Therefore, it is not necessary to distinguish the fact that this board is the main control board 1310 from other boards and call attention to it. On the other hand, since the setting change board 1311 is a board having a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1 that the gaming performance can be set, it is housed in the main control board box 1320, but its importance in crime prevention is high. Awareness of the fact that it is a high substrate is extremely low. Therefore, it is necessary to distinguish the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311 from other boards and call attention to it.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, green color generally used as the resist of the substrate is adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, and white color different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310 as the resist of the setting change substrate 1311 is adopted. Adopted. As a result, among the boards accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 becomes more prominent than the main control board 1310, and the setting change board 1311 is also highly important for crime prevention in addition to the main control board 1310. It can contribute to raising awareness of the fact that it is a substrate.

In the above-described embodiment, a white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be distinguished from each other. If possible, it may be yellow, red, blue, transparent, or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but instead of the resist of the setting change board 1311, the setting change board 1311 is used. It may be printed as silk printing in white so as to cover almost the entire front surface (mounting surface) and / or the back surface (solder surface), or as silk printing in any of black, blue, yellow, and red. You may print it.

Next, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded of polycarbonate resin, the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed). Or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is then closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 is enhanced. The cover body is formed with a plurality of heat dissipation vents capable of discharging the air in the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and a winning accessory winning opening sensor. 2513, 1st V winning opening sensor 2514, 1st losing opening sensor 2515, 2nd V winning opening sensor 3003, 3rd losing opening sensor 3004, out opening left sensor 3032, out opening right sensor 3033, starting port solenoid 2412, attacker With solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2512, first distribution solenoid 2532, second distribution solenoid 2545, third distribution drive motor 2555, magnetic sensor 2010, out port left sensor 3032, out port right sensor 3033, etc. It is connected.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the set value. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) (the harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). It may be electrically connected via (electrical wiring). The force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a is absorbed (softened) by the harness (electrical wiring), and the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 Can be difficult to convey to). By this connector connection (connection between boards), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The connector connection, which is a connection between boards, includes a connection using a normal connector not provided with a floating mechanism and a connection using a special connector provided with a floating mechanism. A normal connector without a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the plug into the socket and pushing it in. When the socket fits with the plug, The structure is such that there is no amount of movement in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed in (for example, in the vertical direction). On the other hand, a special connector equipped with a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the socket into the plug and pushing it in, and the socket fits with the plug. At the time of fitting, it is possible to absorb the error (fitting axis deviation) that occurs when pushing in by moving the socket in a predetermined distance range in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (for example, in the vertical direction). It has a structure. In the present embodiment, a normal connector not provided with a floating mechanism is adopted as a connector connection that is a connection between boards, but a special connector provided with a floating mechanism may be adopted.

The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with a distance dimension of one side having about one-fifth of the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and the upper side thereof is the main control board 1310. It is arranged on the same straight line as the upper side, and its lower side is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at a position centered on the distance dimension in the vertical direction thereof, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is the main control board 1310. It is located on the right side of the setting change board 1311 at a position corresponding to the connector SMCN. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key at a center point where the center lines in the vertical and horizontal directions of the square-shaped setting change board 1311 intersect is arranged. On the main control board 1310, a setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) above the center line in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 and closer to the connector MSCN is arranged. A setting display 1310 g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is placed above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310. A base monitor 1310h is arranged which is lower than the center and has a decimal point (so-called dot) 7-segment LED display arranged in a row from the center to the right side.

In the present embodiment, a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). In the initial position, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion slot and the setting key can be removed from the insertion slot. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted in the insertion port, other equipment is arranged in a row facing the island equipment of the game hall. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and operating the second ON operation, and the determination key ON signal can be set. Is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). Can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, two functions completely different from the function of turning on the setting key and the function of turning on the decision key can be realized only by a single setting key switch 1311a depending on the direction in which the setting key silin is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the decision key can be performed collectively by using only the setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a corresponds to the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, although it is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. A wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for the opening so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. It has a structure that is. Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is transparently molded as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting key switch. As a wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal of 1311a, the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 ( The connection to the main control board 1310 (the terminal of the connector MSCN) is also formed separately, and the wiring pattern (that is, the setting of the setting key switch 1311a) in which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted is also formed in the main control board 1310. The wiring pattern in which the key ON signal is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) are also close to each other. It is formed so as not to be (separated from each other), and the wiring pattern from which the signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is transmitted is not so close to each other (separated from each other). ) Is formed.

Here, the procedure for accessing (operating) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 will be briefly described. In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4 as described above, whereas the axis of the main body frame 4 is arranged. The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the support side (closed side). Further, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640 as described above. Further, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is open. The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side. That is, when the back cover 640 is opened, the back cover open side of the back cover 640 is the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, so that the main body frame 4 is larger than the outer frame 2 (about). Unless it is opened (nearly 90 degrees), the open side of the back cover 640 interferes with the outer frame 2, and the state in which the back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 cannot be opened. In other words, a person who accesses (operates) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 only by a gap sufficient for inserting an arm, and the setting change board 1311. Even if you try to access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a, the back cover 640 cannot be opened. That is, a person who accesses (operates) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 first secures a space in which the back cover 640 can open the state of covering the rear side of the game board 5. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 greatly (nearly about 90 degrees) with respect to 2.

In this way, since the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, the setting change board 1311 is compared with the case where the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4. When an unauthorized person who attempts to illegally access (operate) the key switch 1311a of the setting uses an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a wire, the main body frame 4 is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Even if an illegal tool is inserted and sent from the open side of the main body frame 4, it is necessary to send the illegal tool deeply because the path from the open side of the main body frame 4 to the setting key switch 1311a becomes long. As a result, the operating time for sending the illegal tool to the setting key switch 1311a becomes long, so that such an illegal act can be easily detected by a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall.

Further, since the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640, the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is covered by the back cover 640. There is. As a result, an unauthorized person who attempts to illegally access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 uses an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a wire between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Even if an illegal tool is inserted and sent from the open side of the main body frame 4, the illegal tool is blocked by the back cover 640 before reaching the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, so that the illegal tool is used. Can be prevented from being inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a.

Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion port for inserting the setting key, and the insertion port of this setting key cylinder is covered by the back cover 640. In order to access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to open the back cover 640. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 greatly (nearly about 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2. By involving such a plurality of operations, the security of access (operation) to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 can be enhanced, and the deterrence against fraudulent acts by an unauthorized tool can be enhanced.

As described above, the back cover 640 is mounted by being pivotally supported by the back cover mounting portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600 so that the left side of the front view can be opened and closed. The lock screw 642 is screwed to the back cover mounting portion 601a to fix the back cover 640, and the lock screw 642 is also arranged on the open side of the back cover 640 to form the main body frame 4. It is arranged on the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 which is opposite to the open side of the main body frame 4. Therefore, an unauthorized person who attempts to illegally access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 inserts an unauthorized tool between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the open side of the main body frame 4. Even if it is inserted and fed, the path from the open side of the main body frame 4 to the locking screw 642 of the back cover 640 becomes long, so that it is necessary to feed an illegal tool deeply. In this respect as well, since the operation time for sending the illegal tool to the lock screw 642 becomes long, it is possible to make it easier for the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to detect such an illegal act, and the setting change board. By enhancing the security of access (operation) to the setting key switch 1311a of 1311, it is possible to enhance the deterrence against fraudulent acts by unauthorized tools.

The setting change board 1311 in which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged is housed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310, and the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. ing. On the other hand, the payout control board 633 in which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged is housed in the payout control board box 632, and the payout control board box 632 is behind the power supply board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. It is attached to the side. In this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate boards, and the objects to which the boards are mounted are also different so that the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are separated from each other. Can be done. When the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are collectively arranged on one board, only one board may be illegally modified, which is not preferable in terms of crime prevention. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate boards, and the board is mounted on a different target. Therefore, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM are used. The security against the clear button 633z is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) controls the game preparation and the game (following the control of the game preparation, the game is controlled). The control of the game preparation can be made into a state in which the set value can be changed based on the signal from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. Judgment, processing in step S16A), and following this first step, from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (here, it functions as a setting switching button for selecting and switching the set value). It is composed of a second step (determination of step S216 in setting change processing described later, processing of step S218) in which a set value can be selected and switched based on a signal. Following the control of the game preparation, the game control is composed of the main control side main process in the main control side power-on processing described later, the main control side timer interrupt process described later, and the like.

Although it is possible to enhance such crime prevention, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate boards, and the setting key is adopted so that the target to which the board is mounted is different. Since the switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, it is not necessary to tell where the setting key switch 1311a is located, whereas the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as the setting switching button, is located where. It may be difficult for the store manager of the game hall, the clerk of the game hall, etc. to know whether or not they are arranged because they may be unfamiliar with them.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Specifically, a sticker that can tell the location of the RWM clear button 633z is affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and on this rectangular sheet, for example, red translucent characters (height: 7 mm) are printed, "The RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board." ing. As a result, the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button) can be notified to the clerk of the game hall, the clerk of the game hall, etc., so that the clerk of the game hall, the clerk of the game hall, etc. can tell. When operating the RWM clear button 633z, the RWM clear button 633z can be easily found, so that the eyes do not have to turn around. Therefore, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Even if this sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320, it does not hinder the visibility of the main control board 1310. Further, instead of the characters printed on the rectangular sheet of this sticker, symbols such as arrows may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z, but instead of this, the main control When molding the cover body of the board box 1320, concave characters or convex characters may be molded together (that is, the cover body and the characters may be integrally molded). .. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. The characters (height: 7 mm) "The RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board" may be printed in white on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1311 as silk printing, or on the payout control board 633. Characters (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" may be printed in white on the surface (mounting surface) as silk printing. The silk printing color may be the same color or different colors. Further, instead of the silk-printed characters, symbols such as arrows may be used. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. The character part may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1311 and the characters (height: 7 mm) may be formed by resist as "The RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board". The character portion may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 633 and formed by resist as a character (height: 7 mm) “RWM clear button (setting switching button)”. The color of the resist may be the same, but it is preferable to use different colors because the substrates can be distinguished. Further, instead of the blank character, a blank symbol masked with a symbol such as an arrow may be used. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a seal is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z, but instead of this, the main control Similar seals on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 1310 or the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 (this seal is a transparent rectangular sheet, and this rectangular sheet has, for example, red translucent characters (high). (S: 7 mm), "The RWM clear button (setting switching button) is printed on the payout control board") may be affixed, or the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633 is translucent in red. You may attach a transparent rectangular sheet called "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" with various characters (height: 7 mm). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z, but instead of this, the RWM clear button is used. The announcement sound may be played from various speakers to indicate where the button 633z is arranged, or the announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, with the pachinko machine 1 turned on, a staff member such as a game hall manager or a game hall clerk operates the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 to display the effect display device 1600. Display various setting screens and select an item for the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button). As a result, an announcement voice saying "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button doubles as a setting switching button" that tells where the RWM clear button 633z is located is played from various speakers. , An announcement image (which may be taken as a photograph) indicating the location of the RWM clear button 633z is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After grasping the location of the RWM clear button 633z from such announcement voices and announcement images, the store manager of the game hall, the clerk of the game hall, etc. shut off the power of the pachinko machine 1 and change the set value. It can be done smoothly. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When changing the setting of, the announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as the setting switching button, is arranged. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process that can change and determine a set value, a predetermined command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to perform peripheral operations. The control board 1510 controls where the RWM clear button 633z is located. "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button doubles as a setting switching button. Operate the RWM clear button to set. The announcement voice "Please change the value." Is repeatedly played from various speakers. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement voice and proceeds with various processes based on the received command by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510. Will be done. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known. In addition, following such an announcement voice, an announcement voice that conveys the operation method of the setting key after the setting value is determined may be played from various speakers. Further, the image "setting" may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the announcement voice is being played.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When changing the setting of, the announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as the setting switching button, is arranged. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process that can change and determine a set value, a predetermined command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to perform peripheral operations. The control board 1510 controls where the RWM clear button 633z is located. "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button doubles as a setting switching button. Operate the RWM clear button to set. The announcement voice "Please change the value." Is repeatedly played from various speakers. This eliminates the need to search for the sticker attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Although such announcement voices are repeatedly played from various speakers, a sticker affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 before the next announcement voice starts to be played, assuming that the content of the announcement voice may be overlooked. The location of the RWM clear button 633z can be known by visually observing. In addition to the announcement voice, "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as the setting switching button. Operate the RWM clear button to change the set value." You may also be guided to the content that tells you where the sticker indicating the location of the button is affixed. When the RWM clear button is operated, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement voice. Even if a person who changes the setting of the set value becomes accustomed to changing the setting of the set value due to the work and is jarring, if he / she operates the RWM clear button immediately after starting the work, this will be an opportunity. , The announcement voice can be stopped promptly, and if it is unavoidable that the work needs to be done after the game hall is open, the work should be started so as not to bother the player. If the RWM clear button is operated immediately, the announcement voice can be stopped promptly with this as an opportunity. In addition, following such an announcement voice, an announcement voice that conveys the operation method of the setting key after the setting value is determined may be played from various speakers. Further, the image "setting" may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the announcement voice is being played.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate boards, and the objects to which the boards are mounted are also different so that the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged. However, if the security can be improved, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button (in this case, the setting switching button from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633) can be used on one board. Functions are removed.) Can be aggregated and placed. For example, in the setting change board 1311, the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side is almost the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the vertical distance dimension thereof is the main control board 1310. Shorter than the distance dimension in the left-right direction of, the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311. Has a matching shape. That is, the setting change board 1311 has a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is the main. Along the right side of the control board 1310, a position at the center of the vertical distance dimension is arranged on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder which is below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and has a setting key cylinder to be rotated by inserting a setting key near the lower side of the setting change board 1311 is arranged, and the setting change board 1311 has a setting key switch 1311a. A setting switching button having a pressing operation unit is arranged above the center line and near the upper side of the setting changing board 1311. That is, in the same board called the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a is arranged near the lower side, while the setting switching button is arranged near the upper side and is arranged apart from each other. When the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are arranged separately on the same board in this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are integrated on one board. Compared to the case where and are placed close to each other and placed in a separate body, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized modification. Therefore, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are integrated on one board and placed in a separate body. Even if it is a thing, it may be possible to improve the crime prevention property.

Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, and the setting display 1310g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing the setting of the setting value will be briefly described, and then the case of confirming and displaying the current setting value will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current set value, so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can own it. Allowed and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting of the set value, the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). 4 is released, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the operation. That is, the person who actually changes the setting of the set value first confirms the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then for the outer frame 2. The work of opening the main body frame 4 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to set by the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, as the above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition", it may be a condition that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is further operated and the operation signal is input. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is used. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed, so that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the setting key is turned ON. It may be possible to change the setting of the set value when the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is satisfied.

A person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then sets the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Perform the opening work, then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a of FIG. 7 is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on. Of these, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is transmitted from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is entered in. Each time the person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z, the main control MPU1310a increases by 1 from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z. Then, when the set value 6 which is the maximum value is reached, the setting value 1 which is the initial value is returned, the value is increased by 1 again, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value rotates the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the setting key with the setting key switch 1311a turned on). Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the rotation position of the cylinder to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotated 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). The signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the initial position (that is, the setting key) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the switch 1311a is returned to the setting key cylinder rotation position). After pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z to display the set value on the setting display 1310g, simply turn off the setting key switch 1311a to determine the setting value and remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder. It becomes possible to improve workability.

A person who changes the setting of the set value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from the state of displaying the set value to the state of not displaying the set value to the setting display 1310 g, and switches from the state of turning on the setting change permission lamp 1310z to the state of turning off the setting value.

A person who changes the setting of the set value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting of the setting value. To complete.

When confirming the currently set value, the outer frame 2 is used when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that causes a momentary power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the operation. That is, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). , The work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first operation. By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), and then the outer frame 2. Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on. Of these, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1310z is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. , The set value is not changed at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310 g is not changed either.

When the person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the setting key is turned on. Turn the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder) to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches from the state of displaying the set value to the state of not displaying the set value to the setting display 1310g.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and currently sets the setting. Complete the work of confirming and displaying the set values.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is the outer frame when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be the first. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned on by turning it on, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is, as described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (instantaneous). After the power is restored after the power is restored, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. It is necessary that the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the setting key is turned on by the first ON operation. As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted. There is a common requirement that the setting key is inserted into the switch, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the setting key is turned on by the first ON operation. The difference is that the set value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Further, there are two types of setting key switches, a lead type and a surface mount type (so-called SMD type). The setting key switch 1311a in the present embodiment basically adopts a lead type switch. The setting key switch 1311a has an operation of inserting or removing the setting key into the insertion slot. Therefore, the force associated with this operation acts on the substrate on which the setting key switch 1311a is provided, so that the substrate is bent. In the lead type, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board. On the other hand, in the SMD type, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged so as to project outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch and is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

As a result, in the lead type, if the setting key is caught in the insertion slot when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion slot, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and the back surface of the board ( Since it is soldered to the solder surface), the lead of the setting key switch is arranged so as to protrude toward the outer shape, and compared to the SMD type that is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board, the setting key switch The load applied to the part where each lead is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board increases, and this load works strongly from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board, causing the board itself to bend significantly. Will be. On the other hand, in the SMD type, even if the setting key is caught in the insertion slot when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion slot, each lead of the setting key switch protrudes outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch. Since it is placed and soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board, each lead of the setting key switch is placed inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board. The load applied to the part where each lead of the setting key switch is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board is smaller than that of the setting key switch, and this load is transferred from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. The board itself is hard to bend even if it works toward you.

In addition, if the board itself bends significantly due to an external force acting on the board, there is a concern that the soldered part where the SMD type electronic components are soldered will have a large peeling load of the land pattern, so a lead type as a setting key switch. When using the one, it is desirable to mount it on a board on which SMD type electronic components are not mounted. In addition, the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern in the solder part where each lead part of the setting key switch is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board is smaller than that of the SMD type, and the solder part of the setting key switch Considering the strength of the soldered part, it is desirable to use a lead type as the setting key switch because it can be made strong against peeling.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, basically, a read type is adopted as the setting key switch 1311a. In the present embodiment, since the read type electronic component is mounted on the setting change board 1311 without mounting the SMD type electronic component, the lead type electronic component is mounted on the setting change board 1311 as the setting key switch 1311a. Even if the setting key is caught in the insertion slot and the board itself bends greatly as described above when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion slot, the lead soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. There is no possibility that other electronic components of the type will come off from the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. As described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) (connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). The connectors may be electrically connected to each other via a harness), so that the signal or the like from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

The rectangular main control board 1310 long in the left-right direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 faces from the left side to the right side in the area surrounded by the left side, the upper side, the right side, and the lower side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. It is formed and arranged so as to occupy about four-fifths of the area, and the upper side and the right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected to the remaining one-fifth area. A square-shaped setting change board 1311 is arranged in the area of the corner portion. The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with a distance dimension of one side having about one-fifth of the lateral distance dimension of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and is a long rectangle in the left-right direction. It is smaller than the main control board 1310 having a shape. In the present embodiment, the lead type setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the square-shaped setting change board 1311 having such a small shape, and the setting key is temporarily inserted into the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and pushed in. Even if the board itself bends or the setting key is caught in the slot when the setting key is pulled out from the slot of the setting key switch 1311a and the board itself bends, the setting change board 1311 is formed on a small board. As a result, the size of the deflection can be suppressed to be smaller than that of the main control board 1310. As a result, the cover body or base body of the main control board box 1320 abuts on the front surface (mounting surface) or the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 at the position corresponding to the setting change board 1311 to prevent bending. Since it is not necessary to provide each of the ribs that can be formed, a screw hole can be provided on the setting change board 1311 around the position where the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, and the setting key switch 1311a is housed in the transparent main control board box 1320. It can contribute to the visibility of the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the read type setting key switch 1311a is adopted and arranged on the setting change board 1311 separately from the main control board 1310, the setting value can be changed. Even if the setting change board 1311 is bent due to the operation (operation) that the setting key is inserted and removed from the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board 1310 is not bent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being bent due to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

On the other hand, in the case where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on any of the boards such as the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the power supply board 630 instead of the setting change board 1311. If SMD type electronic components are mounted on the board, use SMD type as the setting key switch 1311a instead of the lead type, mount it on the surface (mounting surface) of the board, and temporarily insert it. Even if the setting key is caught in the insertion slot when the setting key is pulled out from the mouth, the board itself is not easily bent as described above, so other SMD type electronic components soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board are the board. There is no risk of peeling from the surface (mounting surface) of.

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" is a probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery, a probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit by lottery, and a normal probability from the time of change. It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when shifting to time, the distribution rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (that is, to be acquired by the player). The probability (degree of advantage) that can increase the number of game balls that can be played is preset. In the present embodiment, a setting value 1, a setting value 2, a setting value 3, a setting value 4, a setting value 5, and a setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is of various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won is defined, and a jackpot symbol. The big hit symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the decision, the small hit judgment table that specifies the ratio of the small hit judgment value that indicates that the small hit was won, and the ratio of the judgment value of the determination of the small hit symbol are specified. It is used to select the small hit symbol determination table, the normal time transition judgment table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the transition decision from the probability change time to the normal time, etc.), or to use various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations associated with the set values are assigned to the various determination values at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other. Some have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of another electrical drive source. Some are set to. Further, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6, but the setting values may be smaller than this and may be in the larger range. It may be a thing. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the setting value, but also checks the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of power recovery to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an error, and if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an error (or trust) in the contents stored in the RAM built in the unit. It is not possible to do this), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 among the game balls launched in the game area 5a. The number of game balls is displayed. Of the game balls fired in the game area 5a, the game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033, and this detection signal is detected by the panel. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but this setting key switch 1311a was set from the initial position to the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only within the range up to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the key is turned on may be used. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'is counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a'can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a'by 60 degrees in the direction and turning it off, and the signal of this decision key ON is from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be described as "variation example (1) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the setting change board 1311 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed via the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. The wire intrusion prevention part covers the opening so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the opening and the "gap" formed in the opening. It will be a molded structure. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, when other buttons are arranged on the main control board 1310 in addition to the enter key button, the enter key button and the others are not confused with the enter key button and the other buttons. A sticker with the name of each button printed is affixed to the position corresponding to each button (the name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Also, so that the enter key button and the other buttons are not confused, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation portion of either the enter key button or the other button (a cover for pressing the pressing operation portion). It is necessary to open the button.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, and the outer shape of the enter key button and other buttons or the shape of the pressing operation unit may be adopted. A different type of switch may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a push operation unit as a decision key button may be adopted. Other types of switches that do not have a push-button as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide part, a rotary switch having a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. You can raise the switch. When the decision key button and other buttons are provided on the setting change board 1311, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the other buttons are set as routing in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the other button is transmitted are not routed close to each other (separate from each other). It is formed. Further, when the decision key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a'can be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (2)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Detection from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the finger is touching, and detection from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The signal may be branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is on the handle 182. When not touching, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON (even if the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor) is included. Good) may be described as "variation example (3) of decision key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it was sent to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. The firing reference pulse is branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the determination key is turned on based on these firing reference pulses. The presence or absence may be determined. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse in which 100 game balls B can be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as "variation example (4) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the movement of the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko machine 1 was detected. When a range-finding sensor capable of performing is provided on the game board 5, and the detection signal from the range-finding sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board, the detection signal from the range-finding sensor is received. It may be branched in the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and it may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON based on this detection signal. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted by the light emitting unit passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, so that the movement of the player can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the ranging sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal, and when it is determined that there is an operation, the determination key is turned ON. While it can be determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the ranging sensor may be described as "variation example (5) of the determination key"). ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned on the key to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. This makes it possible to improve security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided in the setting change board 1311, but may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633 instead of the setting change board 1311. .. When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the received serial information to set the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and the main control MPU 1310a. It is possible to determine which of the OFFs is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "a modification of the determination key (6)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned on the key to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and OFF was sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. This makes it possible to improve security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided in the setting change board 1311, but may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633 instead of the setting change board 1311. .. For the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit, for example, the pulse width is set to 1 ms when the information conveys the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys the enter key ON. In the case of information that conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a receives the setting key ON, the determination key ON, and the input pulse signal. It is possible to determine which of the information is transmitted, which is the information to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the pulse output circuit may be described as "variation example (7) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on by 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off so that it returns to the setting key cylinder rotation position) that turns off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the decision key ON signal, and OFF The voltage level of the signal is set on the main control board 1310 by using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V) between the boards extending from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a turns on / off the setting key ON signal, turns on / off the decision key ON signal, and turns off the signal. May be determined to be ON / OFF. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be described as "a modification of the determination key (8)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed via the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. With a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the RWM clear button 633z having the pressing operation unit. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z so that the enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z are not confused. It is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the decision key button and the RWM clear button 633z are not confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the enter key button or the RWM clear button 633z (to press the pressing operation portion). It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, and the outer shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push-button as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide part, a rotary switch having a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. You can raise the switch. Further, when the decision key button and the RWM clear button 633z are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the RWM clear button 633z are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is transmitted are not routed close to each other (mutually). Formed (separately). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a'can be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (9)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the three functions of the RWM clear button 633z are also used. Among the functions (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch), an error release switch having a pressing operation unit is provided separately from the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633, and the error release switch is used. A signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON based on this signal. As described above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started and completed after the power is restored (various controls). If there is no error in the state of the pachinko machine 1 after completing the power-on processing of the board and performing the interrupt processing), it is completely impossible to operate the pressing operation part of the error release switch. do not have. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, while the main control MPU 1310a is based on the signal from the error release switch. When the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the determination key ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the determination key (10)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the three functions of the RWM clear button 633z are also used. Among the functions (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch), an error release switch having a pressing operation unit is provided separately from the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633, and the error release switch is used. The signal logic is monitored by the payout control MPU633aa of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to create a command, and is created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the determination key is ON. As described above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started and completed after the power is restored (various controls). If there is no error in the state of the pachinko machine 1 after completing the power-on processing of the board and performing the interrupt processing), it is completely impossible to operate the pressing operation part of the error release switch. do not have. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch in the frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later, and conveys that fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, but the payout control MPU633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives a command to that effect. When it is done, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the mode 2 of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the determination key (11)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z is in a state of operating as the RAM clear switch) is provided on the payout control board 633, and the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the rotation position of the key cylinder to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise), and the decision key ON signal is the main control from the setting change board 1311. It was supposed to be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310, but instead of this, among the functions of the RWM clear button 633z, the function of the RAM clear switch is used as a separate RAM clear switch, and the payout control board 633 is used. A signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch has been operated is input to the payout control MPU633aa of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch). When the setting change that can change and decide the setting value is performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (the entire RAM). Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area.). Therefore, the RAM clear switch is determined because the main control MPU1310a always clears the predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU1310a by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is pressed. The main control MPU 1310a can be diverted as a key, and the main control MPU 1310a has a pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch based on a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch provided in the payout control board 633 has been operated. While it can be determined that the enter key is ON when the pressing operation is being performed, the RAM is cleared based on a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch provided on the payout control board 633 has been operated. When the pressing operation unit of the switch is not pressed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. This makes it possible to improve security with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON.

The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch provided in the payout control board 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch are exposed. A wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the opening corresponding to this and the "gap" formed in the opening. Structure.

The position where the RAM clear switch is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the RWM clear button 633z. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z so that the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z are not confused. It is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Also, to avoid confusion between the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation unit of either the RAM clear switch or the RWM clear button 633z (to press the pressing operation unit). It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape or pressing operation of the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the RAM clear switch. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a RAM clear switch include, for example, various types of switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. You can raise the switch. Further, when the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch and the wiring pattern to the RWM clear button 633z are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is transmitted are not routed close to each other (mutually). Formed (separately). Further, when the RAM clear switch is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (a mode of the RAM clear switch (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the determination key (12)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z is in a state of operating as the RAM clear switch) is provided on the payout control board 633, and the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the rotation position of the key cylinder to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise), and the decision key ON signal is the main control from the setting change board 1311. It was supposed to be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310, but instead of this, among the functions of the RWM clear button 633z, the function of the RAM clear switch is used as a separate RAM clear switch, and the payout control board 633 is used. The payout control MPU633aa of the payout control board 633 is a port for power-on processing of the payout control unit, which will be described later. The command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310 by monitoring in the input process, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command is received. May determine whether or not the decision key is ON. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch). When the setting change that can change and decide the setting value is performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (the entire RAM). Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area.). Therefore, the RAM clear switch is determined because the main control MPU1310a always clears the predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU1310a by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is pressed. The main control MPU 1310a can be diverted as a key, and the main control MPU 1310a is a signal (RAM) that conveys that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch provided in the payout control board 633 is operated in the frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later. When the payout control MPU633aa determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is operated based on the clear signal) and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU633aa determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch has not been operated based on the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch provided on the board 633 has been operated, and determines that fact. When the command to be transmitted is received, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key ON (the aspect 2 of the RAM clear switch (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included)) is described in "Modification example (13) of the decision key." May be described).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to rotate the setting key cylinder. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the position to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off, and then counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees toward), and the signal of this decision key ON can be turned from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Although it was supposed to be input to the control MPU 1310a, instead of this, the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 pass through (via) the payout control board 633, and the main of the main control board 1310. Whether or not the determination key is ON may be determined based on the detection signals from the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 that are input to the control MPU 1310a and to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. As described above, the game ball launched into the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, and the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port are out. Based on the detection signal from any one of the right sensors 3033, it can be determined that the determination key is ON when the out port 1008 collects the game ball, while the door frame 3 has the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When it is not open (that is, it is closed) and / or when the out port 1008 is not collecting the game ball based on the detection signals of the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'that can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (out port switch). (The aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the determination key (14)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to rotate the setting key cylinder. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the position to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off, and then counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees toward), and the signal of this decision key ON can be turned from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Although it was supposed to be input to the control MPU 1310a, instead of this, the payout control MPU633aa of the payout control board 633 transfers the logic of the detection signal from the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 to the payout control described later. A command is created by monitoring in the port input processing of the power-on processing of the unit, and the command created in the command transmission processing of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and this command is received. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 may determine whether or not the determination key is ON. As described above, the game ball launched into the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the game ball is collected by the out port 1008 based on the detection signals from the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU633aa determines and receives a command to convey that fact, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the payout control MPU633aa determines that the game ball has not been collected by the out port 1008. When a command to that effect is received, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'that can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (out port switch). 2 (may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the determination key (15)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154 and the ball cut detection sensor The detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 or the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The input may be determined by the main control MPU 1310a based on these detection signals whether or not the determination key is ON, or the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU633aa of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and creates a command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that has been transmitted to the main control board 1310 and received this command may determine whether or not the determination key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set so that the setting key switch 1311a'can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the payout unit). A mode (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as “a modification of the decision key (16)”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is the main body frame opening switch 4b. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the determination key is ON, while the main body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the state is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (main body frame open). The mode of the switch (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a has the door frame opening switch 4a. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, it can be determined that the determination key is ON, while the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When the state is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (door frame open). The mode of the switch (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned on is turned on. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn it on again to set the key switch 1311a. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control board. It may be prepared for 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as "a modification of the determination key (18)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned on is turned on. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) and turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn it on again to set the key switch 1311a. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control board. In addition to preparing for 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the initial position and turning it off. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while the OFF signal is input. If not, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'that can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (setting key switch). 2 (may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the determination key (19)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the wire or the like cannot invade through the "gap" formed in the opening and the main control board 1310. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be near the other button when another button is arranged on the main control board 1310 in addition to the decision key button. A sticker with the name of each button printed on the cover of the main control board box 1320 is affixed to the position corresponding to the enter key button and the other buttons so that the enter key button and the other buttons are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Also, so that the enter key button and the other buttons are not confused, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation portion of either the enter key button or the other button (a cover for pressing the pressing operation portion). It is necessary to open the button.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, and the outer shape of the enter key button and other buttons or the shape of the pressing operation unit may be adopted. A different type of switch may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a push operation unit as a decision key button may be adopted. Other types of switches that do not have a push-button as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide part, a rotary switch having a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. You can raise the switch. Further, when the decision key button and other buttons are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the other buttons are mainly routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The control board 1310 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (aspect 2 of the decision key button (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (20)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the RWM clear button input to the main control MPU 1310a Even if it is determined whether or not the enter key is ON based on the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of 633z (the RWM clear button 633z is in a state of operating as the RAM clear switch) has been operated. good. As will be described later, the RWM clear button 633z is used when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, since the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, the main control MPU1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RWM clear button 633z. Can be diverted as a decision key, and in the main control MPU1310a, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z presses the RWM clear button 633z based on the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. When it is set to, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is based on the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. This makes it possible to improve security with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'that can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch). 3 (may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the determination key (21)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a normal winning opening provided on the game board 5 2003 ordinary winning opening sensor 2401, various winning opening sensors (for example, second starting opening sensor 2402, large winning opening sensor 2403, first entrance / receiving sensor 2406, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002) The main control MPU1310a to which the detection signals from the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 of the out port 1008 may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (various sensors, etc.). (The aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the determination key (22)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and sends the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the winning opening and the game ball B to the out opening 1008.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The operation of the movable body (accessory) is controlled by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a solenoid, and the movable body (accessory) is controlled based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, ranging sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, the operating position, or the like, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (optical combination). The mode of the object sensor (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and the optical sensor is in the original position of the movable body (role). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a was detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set so that the setting key switch 1311a'can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the magnetic sensor). A mode (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as “a modification of the decision key (24)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 was shaken or hit. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, and the ball enters various winning openings and gates provided in the game board 5. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor for detecting fraudulent activity, the main control MPU1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and determines based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. It may be determined whether or not the key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set so that the setting key switch 1311a'can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (vibration sensor). A mode (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as “a modification of the decision key (25)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 was irradiated with radio waves to play a game. The game board 5 and the payout device 580 are provided with radio sensors for detecting fraudulent acts of illegally acquiring the game ball B by causing the various sensors of the various winning openings provided on the board 5 and the various sensors provided on the payout device 580 to malfunction. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence / absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence / absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set so that the setting key switch 1311a'can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the radio wave sensor). A mode (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (26)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 was made. The detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 381 that detects the pressing operation of the above, and the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that detect the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation button unit 360. It is input to the peripheral control board 1510, branched from the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. May be good. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (effect operation button). The mode of the unit (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (27)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body, but the setting change board 1311 is different. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like in the crimped portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and is provided with a plurality of parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be closed. The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. , The setting change board 1311 can be modified by intruding a wire or the like from the "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the enter key button. The structure is such that the wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so as not to be possible. Note that, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, and when the cover body is configured to be open or closed from the base body, the structure of the base body is relative to the base body. A setting change board cover body open / close switch capable of detecting the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover may be configured to be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured to be. The fact that the cover body is released from the base body based on the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover body can be included in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (setting change board box). The embodiment may be described as "a modification of the determination key (28)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and the setting key switch 1311a is set in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The wiring pattern in which the key ON signal is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted are routed. The setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (that is, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the setting key switch 1311a are determined. The wiring pattern in which the key ON signal is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is transmitted are also routed. Although it was formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted. The wiring pattern of any one of them is different from the connector SMCN of the main control board 1310 via the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. The body may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 (connection between boards), or another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and another connector provided on the main control board 1310 may be connected. , May be electrically connected via a harness (the mode of wiring the wiring pattern may be described as "variation example (29) of the determination key").

Further, from the above-mentioned modified examples (1) to (29) of the determination key, an embodiment selected and combined as appropriate may be adopted. May be described).

Further, in the above-mentioned set values, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not a big hit is a lottery and the probability for determining whether or not a small hit is a lottery, the lottery is determined when shifting from the probability change time to the normal time. It is possible to change the probability of The probability (degree of advantage) is preset. In the present embodiment, a setting value 1, a setting value 2, a setting value 3, a setting value 4, a setting value 5, and a setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values from the set value 1 to the set value 6, the other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, a game specification such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in which a probability (advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as a plurality of setting values in advance and the setting needs to be changed, is advantageous to the player. There is a game specification in which the probability (degree of advantage) exists only in a single setting value in advance and the setting does not need to be changed at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are used. Will depend on the game specifications, and therefore will have a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is required that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which only a single set value exists in advance and the setting change is not necessary at all, the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage). Since it is not necessary to use it at all, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 should be assigned as the following contents by design change by the software. Can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (an area excluding a specific area among all the areas of the RAM), a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after the RAM is cleared). It can be used as a set value (which can give variation to the starting method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, for the operation of the movable body (accessory) controlled by the main control MPU1310a and the lighting of the light emitting body such as a lamp or LED, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable body (role)). The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "operation of the object), lighting of the light emitter)" is assigned, and the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "operation of the movable body (role)" is assigned and set as the setting value 2. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitting body" is assigned as the value 3, and the "detailed operation of the movable body (role) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.) is assigned as the setting value 4. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "check for interference with the structure and other movable bodies (roles), operation order with other movable bodies (roles), etc.)" is assigned, and the setting value 5 is " An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 for specifying "lighting of the light emitter in units of one light emitter (lighting of the light emitter in units of predetermined output ports of the main control MPU 1310a (that is, for each output port)") is assigned, and "lighting of the light emitter" is assigned as the setting value 6. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "no operation" is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM may be described as "variation example (1) by common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a operates a movable body (accessory) and lights a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED by repeatedly performing an actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM and a timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a (described as the setting change completion command in FIG. 145) controls the peripheral by the contents (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to operate the movable body (accessory) controlled by the substrate 1510 and to light the light emitting body. Depending on the mode of the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared, the starting method of the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of times from the end of the change of the symbol to the demonstration (demo effect performed in the player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 1, the time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 3. The time setting pattern 3 that specifies "" is assigned, the time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 5. A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as the setting value 6 is assigned (a modification of the time change setting mode in which the player waits after the end of the symbol change is set to "Modification example by common hardware configuration (2)". ) ”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of setting the change of the time from the end of the change of the symbol to the state of waiting for the player, it is possible to give a variation to the time from the end of the change of the symbol to the demonstration.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of contents of the demonstration (demo effect performed in the player waiting state) performed after the end of the change of the symbol. In this case, the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect, motion effect of the movable body (role)" is assigned as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious effect" as a setting value 3 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern that specifies "serial effect, motion effect of a movable body (character)" as a setting value 4. 4 is assigned, and the demo effect setting pattern 5 that specifies "historical drama style effect" is assigned as the setting value 5, and the demo effect setting that specifies "historical drama style effect, movable body (character)" as the setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the content of the demo effect may be described as "modification example (3) by common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demo effect (demo effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the demo effect, it is possible to give variation to the content of the demo effect performed after the end of the change of the symbol.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume control switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, the volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the "volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3. The volume setting pattern 3 for specifying "volume 4" is assigned, the volume setting pattern 4 for specifying "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the volume setting pattern 5 for specifying "volume 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of setting the change of the default volume may be described as "variation example (4) by common hardware configuration"). The volume is set to increase from the set value 1 to the set value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is set to the default volume with a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to the setting value 1 is moved in the direction of decreasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of increasing the volume), and the movement to the minimum volume side end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the player stops in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to the set value 6 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch is increased (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is decreased), and the movement to the maximum volume side end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be the maximum volume or the volume may be a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. Depending on the mode of changing the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of volume of the error notification sound in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, those that do not depend on it), and a pachinko machine that emits error notification sounds by setting the maximum volume is used in the game hall. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a clerk to notice, it may be jarring to a player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. , The error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, the error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and "error notification volume setting pattern 4" is assigned as the setting value 5. The error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and the error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as the setting value 6 (error notification volume volume). The mode of the change setting may be described as "variation example (5) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the set value 1 (the volume that does not mute and the volume at which the error notification sound can be recognized when stopped in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to the setting value 6 (the maximum volume and the maximum volume). The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward (the volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the distance from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is several meters). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a controls to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value at which a plurality of default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be set. The brightness can be increased or decreased from the default brightness for the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 3. A default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" is assigned as a setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern that specifies "brightness 5" as a setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and the default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the default brightness may be described as "variation example (6) by common hardware configuration". be). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for changing the default brightness, and turns on, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the illuminant to turn on, blink, and set the gradation point of the illuminant. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the default brightness, the default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1 to the lamp controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, and the error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, and the error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification brightness 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. The error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as the setting value 6 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "variation example (7) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the lamp changes from the set value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is not turned off, but the brightness of the lamp is low and the lamp can recognize the error notification when stopped in front of the pachinko machine) to the set value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification, and turns on, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting body to turn on, blink, and make a gradation point of the light emitting body. Depending on the mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in the error notification, the brightness of the light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for the various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (7) due to the common hardware configuration, the setting value display permission condition predetermined in the setting value confirmation display processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a is satisfied. Occasionally, it is displayed on the setting display 1310g, but it may always be displayed on the setting display 1310g from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time when the power is turned off (setting value display). The embodiment may be described as "modification example (8) due to common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification key modification example (30).

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a performs all of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power on processing described later. Clear the area except for a specific area, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. Further, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored to power, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later to perform the setting change processing of the main control built-in RAM. Clear all areas except for specific areas, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored. In any case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then interrupt enable setting or the like is performed. The game will proceed at. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 is used. The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 may be pressed (“Example of modification of predetermined set value change permission condition””. May be described as).

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined set value display permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current set value set in the set value confirmation display process performed as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later. Display on the vessel 1310 g. Further, as described above, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 needs to be pressed by the pressing operation unit when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the pressing operation period is limited. rice field. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 is used. The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 may not be pressed (“A modification of a predetermined setting value display permission condition”. May be described). In this case, when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one of the main control side timer interrupt processes described later, but the main control side power supply described later. In the on-time processing, the game is advanced by performing the initial setting and the start setting of the built-in WDT before the initial setting and the start setting, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. Note that the main control MPU 1310a does not yet set the interrupt enable when the preset value display permission condition modification is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed. Therefore, the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. Instead, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is inserted. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning it 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and performing the first ON operation. , The setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is read and is not stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information to be described later. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch 4b and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after (occurrence of momentary power failure). Assuming that the setting key is turned on by the key cylinder being rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated. When the pressing operation is being performed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on processing described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then interrupt enable setting. When the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a is used in the main control side power-on processing described later. The game proceeds by performing the set value confirmation display process and then setting the interrupt permission. By adopting this aspect, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process even once when the progress of the game is started. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by setting the interrupt permission or the like, the current set value set is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of balls of the game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 in the ball number counting process of the main control side power-on processing described later. The number of game balls that are output to the base monitor 1310h and collected by the out port 1008 in the port output processing of the main control side power-on processing described later is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (may be described as "a modification of how to use the base monitor"). .. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current set value set in the period from when the power is restored to when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission or the like using the base monitor 1310h. At the same time, when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of the game balls collected by the out port 1008 can be displayed. Therefore, the setting display 1310 g is used. It is not necessary to provide it, which can contribute to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the method of using the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification key modification (30).

Further, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the method of using the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the modification examples (1) to (8) by the above-mentioned common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107, 110, and 111. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a status display consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a normal lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs and a normal holding display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "hit" or the like. It is equipped with a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, the design, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LED provided.

Here, as a noise countermeasure when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are mainly electrically connected to each other. A plurality of wirings (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “wiring”) for transmitting control signals from the control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 will be described in detail.

As shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via the connector 1400a provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is located on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the upper right corner of the game board 5. When it is drawn to the upper side, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is put together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 that is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the 1100 or directly attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. It is routed downward.

Then, when the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and the function display unit connector MFCN is bent along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. After being routed to the lower part of, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

In this way, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a long wiring length, and in particular, from the upper right corner of the game board 5, the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the back box. The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward toward the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is formed by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is collectively attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and is routed along the right side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the main control board box 1320. In the region where the wiring FCBL is routed in this way, when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Will be placed in.

Behind the function display unit 1400, a decorative board 1131 on which a plurality of decorative LEDs are mounted is arranged. When the wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the decorative substrate 1131, is bent upward on the rear surface of the game panel 1100, it is formed on the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010. When it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in a state of being close to (or in contact with) the above-mentioned wiring FCBL, it faces downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is bent by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Ru. Then, the wiring UPCBL is separated from the above-mentioned wiring FCBL path, is bent toward the left side on the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500, and is bent along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. It is routed, routed above the predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, and then electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

In this way, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the decorative substrate 1131 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 and the panel drive substrate 1720 has a long wiring length, and in particular, from the upper right corner of the game board 5. The wiring FCBL routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 and vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are grouped together and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Similar to the wiring FCBL described above, the area where the wiring UPCBL is routed is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. It will be placed in front of the payout unit 560.

As described above, the payout unit 560 is composed of a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guiding passage of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the guided game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

Further, as described above, the game ball B is polished in the island equipment of the game hall or rubbed against each other in the circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to cause electromagnetic noise. Is released. Therefore, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game ball B can be retained are mounted.

Further, the main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. I have. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"), and such a built-in reset. The forced reset by the circuit is a mechanism that cannot be invalidated by being controlled by the user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is performed without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and the main control side power on processing described later is executed again. Will be to be done. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a always occurs. Therefore, the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Will be completely erased (cleared). That is, if it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, RAM clear will be executed when the main control MPU 1310a is started again.

Further, in the present embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzz Inline Package) type package is adopted as the main control MPU 1310a package, and when the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a are mounted. It is in a state of protruding from the soldering surface (the surface opposite to the mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. That is, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a project toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

In this way, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are mounted. Therefore, when electromagnetic noise is emitted by electrostatic discharge, the function display is arranged in front of the payout unit 560. The wiring FCBL that electrically connects the unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 may be invaded, and the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 are electrically connected. Wiring may invade UPCBL. As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise invading the wiring FCBL may pop out and invade the wiring UPCBL, and conversely, the electromagnetic wave noise invading the wiring UPCBL may pop out and invade the wiring FCBL.

For example, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is assumed to be mainly in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is routed in a straight line from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, the right side of the main control board box 1320 and about from the upper side of the main control board box 1320. Bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper or lower side of the main control board box 1320 where it has a quarter length), from the center to the left side of the lower side of the main control board 1310. After passing above the function display unit connector MFCN arranged closer to it, it is bent toward the lower side of the main control board box 1320, pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, and then the function display unit connector MFCN. When the wiring FCBL is electrically connected to the wiring FCBL, when the wiring FCBL is electrically connected to the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL is routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. Then, when passing through the region in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, electromagnetic noise is mainly transmitted through the wiring FCBL. The main control MPU 1310a may invade various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the control board box 1320, and the main control MPU 1310a may be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of the invading electromagnetic noise.

If a wiring accommodating groove is formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 instead of the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the wiring FCBL is used. , The function is displayed after being accommodated along the wiring accommodating groove, not the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320. It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, when electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is accommodated and routed along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the main control MPU1310a is routed. When passing through the region in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of the main control board, electromagnetic noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. The main control MPU 1310a may invade various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the direction, and the main control MPU 1310a may be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of the invading electromagnetic wave noise.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is used as the main control board as the positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is arranged from the center of the lower side of the 1310 toward the left side, and above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. That is, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 in the main control MPU 1310a. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

As a result, the main control MPU1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, so that the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL is the main control with the function display unit connector MFCN. It is possible to prevent the MPU 1310a from invading various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space separated from the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Further, by arranging the main control MPU 1310a away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic wave noise invades the wiring FCBL, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected. , On the main control board 1310, or in the space where the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other in the main control board 1310, it is possible to attenuate the electromagnetic wave noise invading through the wiring FCBL. ing. Also in this respect, the main control MPU1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged so that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter, referred to as “first wiring separation distance dimension”). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so that the electromagnetic wave that has entered the wiring FCBL This is to prevent noise from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the first wiring separation distance dimension from the wiring FCBL.

Further, as described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is located in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. On the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 mounted on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 without being routed (or accommodated along the wiring accommodating groove formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200). When it is routed downward along, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and after being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN. Since it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN, the wiring FCBL routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and the wiring FCBL projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is possible to secure a large distance dimension (hereinafter, referred to as "second wiring separation distance dimension") from the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a. The second wiring separation distance dimension has a larger distance dimension than the first wiring separation distance dimension. As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL penetrates into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrudes from the wiring FCBL toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the second wiring separation distance dimension. Can be prevented from doing so. Also in this respect, the main control MPU1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by wiring FCBL, but the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to connect in a targeted manner. In this case, it is preferable that the panel relay board 1710 is provided with an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL described above (that is, a plurality of control signals transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide elements capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic noise for each of the wiring FCBLs). This makes it possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise that enters through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Examples of such an element include a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like. From the observation results of the waveform of electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs), and as a filter circuit, a signal having a larger waveform width than such a waveform width is used. Designed to pass through.

Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, etc., an EMC countermeasure component (coil, bead, capacitor, etc.) can be mentioned, and when a coil or bead is used, electricity is applied to a plurality of wiring FCBLs. It is inserted so as to be connected in series, and when a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wiring FCBLs. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit composed of a combination of a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of a plurality of wiring FCBLs, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. The circuits configured by combining the above may be inserted respectively.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 and 114. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 137) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding from the left side surface to the left and one right fixed piece 1602 protruding from the right side surface to the right. The effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixed pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of 3010, move the right fixed piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and view the lock mechanism 3020 from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it upward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow path of the game ball on the right side in the table unit. FIG. 121 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball circulating in the first guide passage in the guide passage group, and FIG. 121 (b) is an explanation showing the flow of the game ball circulating in the second guide passage in the guide passage group. It is a figure. FIG. 122 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball accepted by the prize winning opening, and FIG. 122 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion of the third distribution device in (a) from a plane. c) is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the second sorting device in (a).

Further, FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the timing of the operation of the prize winning opening, the first distribution device, and the second distribution device according to the type of “small hit”. FIG. 124 (a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game ball in the attacker unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in (a). The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a part of the rear end protrudes into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. The first start port 2002, which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and the first start port 2002, which is attached to a further different position in the game area 5a and is always open to accept the game ball B. The normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2002 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the normal lottery result drawn by the normal winning opening 2003. Alternatively, the large winning opening 2005 and the first starting opening that can accept the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004. A prize opening 2006 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the character. It includes a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008, which give an opportunity to accept the game ball B accepted by the winning opening 2006.

A plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the game area 5a and on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The ordinary winning opening 2003 is arranged near the right end in the game area 5a, below the center in the vertical direction. The second starting port 2004 is arranged at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003. The large winning opening 2005 is arranged between the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 at a height slightly lower than that of the first starting port 2002. The accessory winning opening 2006 is arranged above the normal winning opening 2003. The first V winning opening 2007 is arranged at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the normal winning opening 2003. The second V winning opening 2008 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the first starting opening 2002.

The table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 that is mounted slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. , The attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a and has the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005. And, above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, it is attached slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a. It is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having 2008.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted.

By attaching the start port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 is in a state of being opened upward. Located just below the center of. Therefore, when the game ball B is discharged downward from the central discharge portion 2503a of the stage 2503, it is accepted by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The start port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received by the first start port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100, and guides the game ball B to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the back lower ball of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. It can be handed over to the discharge unit 3120.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends to the left of the starting port unit 2100 along the inner rail 1002 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be accepted at all times. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side open upward, and the general winning opening 2001 on the left side opens toward the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball accepted in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

In the state where the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 120 and the like).

The attacker unit 2400 is formed in a triangular shape in which the external shape in front view increases in height from the lower side toward the right. In this attacker unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 is always open upward in the upper right corner. The second starting port 2004 is provided on the lower left side at a distance larger than one game ball B from the normal winning opening 2003, and is always open toward the front. The large winning opening 2005 is provided near the lower left lower end of the second starting opening 2004, and can be opened and closed toward the front.

In the attacker unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 is opened with a size slightly larger than that of the game ball B. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is opened with a size slightly larger than that of the game ball, and the large winning opening 2005 is about 3 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It is open at.

The attacker unit 2400 has a large normal winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B accepted by the normal winning opening 2003, and a second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B accepted by the second starting opening 2004. It includes a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B accepted by the winning opening 2005, and a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects illegal magnetism (see FIG. 137 and the like).

The attacker unit 2400 is a normal lottery in which the second start opening door 2411 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 and the second start opening door 2411 are drawn by accepting the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003. A starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes according to the result, a large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and a game ball B that opens and closes the large winning opening door 2413 to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. It includes an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by acceptance.

As shown in FIGS. 120, 121, 124, etc., the attacker unit 2400 is provided above the second starting port 2004 at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003, and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left. The second starting port upper guide shelf 2421, the second starting port upper guide shelf 2422 provided on the left side of the second starting port upper guidance shelf 2421 and extending vertically, and the second starting port upper guidance shelf 2421. It is provided below the second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 extending downward from the right end, the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422, and to the right of the large winning opening 2005. It is equipped with a large winning opening guide shelf 2424, which is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left.

The guide shelf 2421 on the second starting port is located at the center of the second starting port 2004 and the large winning opening 2005 in the left-right direction from the portion on the right side of the right end of the second starting port 2004, beyond the left end of the second starting port 2004. It extends to the left to the vicinity. The guide shelf 2421 on the second starting port prevents the game ball B from being accepted from above into the second starting port 2004.

The left standing wall portion 2422 of the second starting port is provided from the guidance shelf 2421 on the second starting port to the left at intervals so that one game ball B can pass through. The left standing wall portion 2422 of the second starting port extends vertically from a position higher than the guidance shelf 2421 on the second starting port to a position lower than the guidance shelf 2421 on the second starting port and higher than the lower end of the second starting port 2004. ing. The upper end of the left standing wall portion 2422 of the second starting port is bent to the right.

The second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 extends vertically from the right end of the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the second starting port 2004. The right standing wall portion 2423 of the second starting port prevents the game ball B from being accepted from the right side into the second starting port 2004.

The large winning opening guide shelf 2424 has a height slightly lower than the lower end of the second starting opening 2004, from a portion to the left of the left end of the second starting opening 2004, and one game ball B from the lower end of the second starting opening 2004. At a height that is slightly lower, the left-right direction extends to the left of the left standing wall portion 2422 of the second starting port to substantially the same portion as the right end of the large winning opening 2005, so that the left end side is lower. As shown in the figure, the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 is curved so that the right end side rises upward, and the inclination angle becomes steeper toward the right.

Further, the attacker unit 2400 is open to the left on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and guides the game ball B to a position lower than the large winning opening 2005 below the large winning opening guide shelf 2424. It is equipped with a right passage 2430.

The attacker right passage 2430 is between the first opening 2431 which is long vertically and opens to the left above the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421. The second opening 2432 that opens upward to the left, the third opening 2433 that opens upward below the second starting port 2004, and the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 below. A fourth opening 2434 that is long vertically and opens to the left on the right side of the winning opening 2005, and a discharge port that communicates with the lower end of the fourth opening 2434 and opens to the left. It has 2435 and. In the attacker right passage 2430, the game ball B can enter the inside from the first opening 2431, the second opening 2432, the third opening 2433, and the fourth opening 2434, and the discharge port portion 2435. It is possible to release the game ball B to the outside only from.

The attacker right passage 2430 is formed in the shape of a plurality of steps with the left side lowered. In detail, the attacker right passage 2430 extends downward from the portion above the normal winning opening 2003 on the right side of the ordinary winning opening 2003, and extends to the left at the portion at a height below the ordinary winning opening 2003. After bending and wrapping around to the lower side of the normal winning opening 2003, and bending downward with the second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 as a part of the left wall at the lower side of the normal winning opening 2003, the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 At a portion lower than the center, the portion bends to the left again and bends downward below the portion on the right side of the center of the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 to extend to the lower end of the attacker unit 2400.

The attacker right passage 2430 is provided with a plurality of ridges 2436 protruding into the passage and extending to the left and right at intervals in the vertical direction on the inner walls on the front side and the rear side of the portion extending vertically. The plurality of ridges 2436 are provided so that the heights of the front side and the rear side are staggered. The plurality of ridges 2436 can be guided downward in a zigzag manner while suppressing an increase in the downward speed of the game ball B by abutting the game ball B.

The attacker right passage 2430 is on the right side of the large winning opening 2005, and the plurality of protrusions 2436 provided at the portion where the fourth opening 2434 is long vertically is provided with an end portion on the fourth opening 2434 side. It has a protrusion 2437 that further protrudes into the passage (see FIG. 124 and the like). The presence of the protrusion 2437 can prevent the game ball B in the attacker right passage 2430 from being discharged from the fourth opening 2434 to the outside (to the left), and at the same time, it passes through the fourth opening 2434. The game ball B can be entered into the attacker right passage 2430 from the outside. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is discharged from the attacker unit 2400 into the game area 5a without having a chance to be accepted by the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005.

In addition, since the attacker right passage 2430 has a fourth opening 2434 opened vertically at a portion passing through the right side of the large winning opening 2005, a game ball released to the left from the large winning opening guide shelf 2424. The fourth game ball B, in which B abuts on a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the large winning opening 2005 and flows to the right of the large winning opening 2005 above the large winning opening 2005. It can be received by the opening 2434 and entered into the attacker right passage 2430. Then, as described above, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is discharged to the outside only from the discharge port portion 2435 at the lower end, and is therefore guided to the right by the obstacle nail N above the large winning opening 2005. The game ball B does not bounce back to the big winning opening 2005 side due to the presence of the attacker right passage 2430.

Therefore, when the game ball B released from the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 is guided to the right of the large prize opening 2005 by the obstacle nail N when the large prize opening 2005 is open, the attacker right passage 2430 is reached. It will not enter and be accepted by the Grand Prize 2005. For this reason, even if a passage for the game ball B (here, the attacker right passage 2430) is provided adjacent to the large winning opening 2005, the wall of the passage (fourth opening 2434) is on the large winning opening 2005 side. It is possible to provide a passage for the game ball B adjacent to the big prize opening 2005 while suppressing the excessive acceptance of the game ball B to the big prize opening 2005 without being accepted by the big prize opening 2005. The pachinko machine 1 has a passage that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines.

The second starting port door 2411 has a plate shape extending left and right from the lower side of the second starting port 2004 to the vicinity of the left standing wall portion 2422 of the second starting port, and moves back and forth by the starting port solenoid 2412. The second starting port door 2411 is inclined so as to be lowered from the left end side toward the right second starting port 2004 side, and at the portion of the second starting port 2004, it is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear. is doing. The second starting door 2411 is retracted in the normal state (closed state). Therefore, the game ball B that has entered between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 falls onto the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424 without abutting on the second starting opening door 2411. Therefore, it does not enter (accept) the second starting port 2004.

On the other hand, in the normal hit state (open state), since the second start opening door 2411 is advancing, the game ball B that has entered between the second start opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start opening left standing wall portion 2422. Is in contact with the second starting port door 2411 and is guided to the second starting port 2004 side by the second starting port door 2411 to enter (accept) the second starting port 2004. In this way, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed by advancing and retreating the second starting port door 2411. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid is ON (when energized). Let me.

The big prize opening door 2413 is a rectangular shape that is long to the left and right, and is rotatably attached around an axis in the left and right direction with a long side on one side as an axis. The big winning opening door 2413 can close the big winning opening 2005 that is open toward the front by making the short side upright by the attacker solenoid 2414, and the other long side is forward. By rotating it so as to move, the large winning opening 2005 can be opened and the game ball B can be accepted. The large winning opening door 2413 closes the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

In the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B accepted by the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. Further, the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

In the state where the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the normal winning opening 2003 is below the two exits of the guide passage group 2520 on the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, which will be described later, and the stage of the center accessory 2500. It is located at a height higher than 2503, and the second starting port 2004 is located at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 and at the height between the center accessory 2500 and the stage 2503, and the big winning opening 2005. Is located below the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. Further, when attached to the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the parts above the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 (second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421), and the large winning opening 2005. It is set up.

[5-8e. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. can.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a cannot enter the frame. It has become.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view so that the warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter and the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released. It includes a warp outlet 2502 that is open inside, and a stage 2503 that can roll the game ball B discharged from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction and then release it into the game area 5a (FIG. 117, etc.). See).

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. In the state, the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so as to be slightly higher than both the left and right sides. In this stage 2503, the portion slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction (central emission portion 2503a) and the lowest portion on both the left and right sides (side emission portion 2503b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (central discharge portion 2503a) in the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is discharged from the central discharge portion 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 constitutes a part of the upper outer peripheral surface, and has an upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 that is inclined so as to be lower from a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction toward the right. , A guide passage group 2520 provided in the upper right corner and composed of two passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. The upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 forms an upstream space portion 2505 having a predetermined size in which the game ball B can be distributed between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. The guide passage group 2520 guides the game ball B above the attacker unit 2400.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the middle of one passage of the guide passage group 2520, and the first special lottery is drawn when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The game ball B that can be accepted by the game ball B according to the lottery result and the second special lottery result and the game ball B accepted by the character prize opening 2006 are shaken to either the V winning side or the losing side. The first distribution device 2530 to be divided and the game ball B distributed to the V winning side by the first distribution device 2530 are distributed to either the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening side. The device 2540 and the third distribution device 2550 that distributes the game ball B distributed to the second V winning opening side by the second distribution device 2540 to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the losing side are provided. ing.

Further, the center accessory 2500 accepts the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 with the accessory winning opening door 2511 that can open and close the accessory winning opening 2006 and the accessory winning opening door 2511. The bonus winning slot solenoid 2512 that opens and closes according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, and the bonus winning slot sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B accepted by the bonus winning slot 2006. , The first loss opening sensor 2515 that detects the game ball B accepted by the first loss opening 2535 and the game ball B that is sorted by the second distribution device 2540 and received by the first V winning opening 2007 are detected. It is equipped with a first V winning opening sensor 2514.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the upper entrance is provided with the first guide passage 2521 at the portion of the abutment portion 1006. The upper entrance is composed of a second guide passage 2522 provided adjacent to the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. The guide passage group 2520 (first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522) are all formed of colorless and transparent members, and the game ball B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front.

The first guide passage 2521 extends vertically shortly downward from the abutment portion 1006 of the front component 1000, then bends at a right angle to the right, and when it hits the right rail 1005, it bends downward to the right rail 1005. It extends along, bends to the left near the height of 3/4 from the bottom of the height of the game area 5a, extends to the left so as to be lowered at a loose angle, and is a game from the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. It bends downward at the position on the left side of the ball B and extends to the height of the center of the game area 5a, then bends to the right and extends to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bends downward and the exit moves downward. It is formed in a shape that opens toward it. The first guide passage 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The accessory winning opening 2006 is provided at a portion of the first guide passage 2521 extending to the left, extending left and right over substantially the entire length of the portion in the left-right direction, and opening upward. ing. The accessory winning opening door 2511 is formed in a plate shape that extends back and forth and extends to the left and right so that the left end is lowered, and the accessory winning opening 2006 that opens upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. Can be opened and closed. The accessory winning opening door 2511 can close the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving forward, and when the accessory winning opening 2006 is closed, the portion extending to the left in the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B distributed from the upstream side can be guided to the exit side of the first guide passage 2521 by forming the bottom surface of the door.

The accessory winning opening door 2511 opens the accessory winning opening 2006 by retreating by driving the bonus winning opening solenoid 2512, and the game ball B that has been distributed through the first guide passage 2521 is used as the accessory winning opening 2006. Can be accepted by. This accessory winning opening door 2511 closes the accessory winning opening 2006 when the accessory winning opening solenoid 2512 is OFF (when not energized), and serves when the accessory winning opening solenoid 2512 is ON (when energized). Open the prize opening 2006.

The second guide passage 2522 has an upward opening at a portion spaced left from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 on the right end side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. The second guide passage 2522 extends substantially straight down from the entrance at the upper end, bends backward at a height lower than the height of the portion where the first guide passage 2521 first bends to the right, and then the game. A part extending downward on the left side of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the first guide passage 2521 in a state of bending downward on the rear side of the front surface of the panel 1100 and lining up with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction. It extends downward so that the left-right directions are substantially aligned, bends to the right in a crank shape at a portion at the center height of the game area 5a, then bends downward, and then lower right in the first guide passage 2521. After bending forward at a part below the part extending toward the direction, it extends to the lower right side of the first guide passage 2521 in a state where the front-rear direction is flush with the first guide passage 2521. It bends to the right to extend along the underside of the site and then bends downward to adjoin the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521, forming the exit into a downwardly open shape. ing.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are located on the left side of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the first guide passage 2521 and extend vertically, and are arranged in the front-rear direction so as to overlap each other from the front. It has a portion 2520a. In this weighted portion 2520a, both the game ball B circulating in the first guide passage 2521 and the game ball B circulating in the second guide passage 2522 can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the front. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine which passage the game ball B circulating in the Shigemi portion 2520a is circulating.

In the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis on the upper side of the weighted portion 2520a, and on the lower side of the weighted portion 2520a. It is twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis in the direction opposite to the upper side. The respective exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 open downward above the normal winning opening 2003 in the attacker unit 2400.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided with a plurality of protrusions 2520b at intervals in the distribution direction of the game ball B, respectively. Can be suppressed (see FIG. 112).

The first distribution device 2530 is provided at a height between the prize winning opening 2006 and the lower right portion of the first guide passage 2521, and the first guide passage 2521 (game). It is provided behind the front surface of the panel 1100).

The first distribution device 2530 has an accommodating portion 2531a capable of accommodating only one game ball B on the outer peripheral surface, and has a distribution rotating body 2531 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction and a distribution rotating body 2531. The first distribution solenoid 2532 (see FIG. 137 etc.) for rotating the distribution rotating body 2531 between the state in which the accommodating portion 2531a is facing to the right and the state in which it is facing upward, and the shaking. The cylindrical peripheral wall portion 2533 that covers the outer periphery of the divided rotating body 2531 and the game ball B accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 are shaken through the upper portion of the distributed rotating body 2531 in the peripheral wall portion 2533. The first distribution guide path 2534 that guides to the upper outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the lower portion of the first distribution guide path 2534 that are open rearward to accommodate the distribution rotating body 2531 in the accommodating portion 2531a. The first loss opening 2535 into which the unaccommodated game ball B enters and the ball game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 are distributed, and the portion on the right side of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the peripheral wall portion 2533. It is equipped with a first Atari passage 2536 that penetrates and extends to the right.

The distribution rotating body 2531 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose outer peripheral surface is narrowed rearward. The right end side of the first Atari passage 2536 bends backward and then bends downward to communicate with the second distribution device 2540 side.

In the first distribution device 2530, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is OFF (non-energized), the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 faces to the right. In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 abuts on the upper part of the outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotating body 2531 through the first distribution guide path 2534, the outer circumference of the distribution rotating body 2531 is contacted. Since the surface is formed in the shape of a truncated cone narrowed to the rear, the game ball is guided to the rear by the inclination of the outer peripheral surface, and enters the first loss opening 2535.

On the other hand, in the state where the first distribution solenoid 2532 is ON (energized), the distribution rotating body 2531 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the accommodating portion 2531a faces upward (FIG. 122 (a). reference). In this state, when the game ball B accepted in the accessory winning opening 2006 passes through the first distribution taxiway 2534, only one is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a. When the game ball B is further guided by the first distribution guide path 2534 from the bonus winning opening 2006 side while the game ball B is housed in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531, the game ball After B comes into contact with the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a, it enters the rear first loss opening 2535. The game ball B that has entered the first loss opening 2535 is handed over to the back right ball discharge unit 3130 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and the first loss opening sensor provided in the back right ball discharge unit 3130. After being detected by 2515, it is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200.

When the game ball B is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a, the distribution rotating body 2531 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the first distribution solenoid 2532, and the accommodating portion 2531a faces to the right. The game ball B accommodated in 2531a rolls from the accommodating portion 2531a to the right side of the first Atari passage 2536, and circulates in the first Atari passage 2536. The game ball B circulating through the first Atari passage 2536 is sent to the next second distribution device 2540.

In this way, in the first distribution device 2530, the game ball B accepted in the accessory winning opening 2006 can be distributed to either the second distribution device 2540 side or the first loss opening 2535 side. can.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 120, the second distribution device 2540 is provided below the first distribution device 2530 and behind the vicinity of the exit of the guide passage group 2520. The second distribution device 2540 is provided behind the first distribution guide path 2534, the first Atari passage 2536, and the like of the first distribution device 2530.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the second distribution device 2540, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 and distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 side is distributed. The second distribution guide path 2541 extending vertically, the first V winning opening 2007 opened on the right side surface of the lower part of the second distribution guiding path 2541, and the first V winning opening 2007 extending to the right. After that, the first V winning passage 2542 extending downward and the first V winning opening sensor provided in the first V winning passage 2542 and detecting the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007. 2514 and.

Further, the second distribution device 2540 is provided on the second loss port 2543 that opens upward at the lower end of the second distribution guide path 2541 and on the upper side of the second loss port 2543. A distribution door 2544 that can open and close the loss port 2543, a second distribution solenoid 2545 for moving the distribution door 2544 forward and backward to open and close the second loss port 2543, and a second distribution port 2543 extending to the left. It is provided with a second loss passage 2546, which is later bent downward. The distribution door 2544 has a flat plate shape that advances and retreats back and forth, and is inclined so that the right side is lowered.

In the second distribution device 2540, when the second distribution solenoid 2545 is OFF (non-energized), the distribution door 2544 is retracted and the second loss port 2543 is opened upward. In this state, when the game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 side flows down the second distribution guide path 2541, it enters the second loss opening 2543 and passes through the second loss passage 2546. It is sent to the strikeout device 2550 side.

On the other hand, in the state where the second distribution solenoid 2545 is ON (energized), the distribution door 2544 is advanced above the second loss port 2543, and the distribution door 2544 closes the second loss port 2543 for the game. The ball B cannot be accepted. In this state, when the game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 side flows down the second distribution guide path 2541, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the distribution door 2544 and then the distribution door 2544. It will be guided to the right by the inclination and will enter (accept) the first V winning opening 2007. Then, the game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 circulates through the first V winning passage 2542 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and then the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the back right ball discharge unit 3130.

When the ball game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 is received by the first V winning opening 2007 and detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 has a predetermined opening / closing pattern. A "big hit game" that opens and closes is executed. The second distribution device 2540 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent guide passage group 2520.

As described above, in the second distribution device 2540, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 is inserted into the first V winning opening 2007 or the second loss opening. It can be distributed to any of the 2543 (third distribution device 2550) sides.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 122, the third distribution device 2550 is provided above the stage 2503 in the frame of the center accessory 2500. The third distribution device 2550 communicates with the lower end of the second loss passage 2546 of the second distribution device 2540, and has a crank-shaped third distribution guide path 2551 that guides the game ball B to the left and a first. It is provided in the middle of the strikeout taxiway 2551, and is provided above the stage 2503 within the frame of the third distribution detection sensor 2552 that detects the game ball B circulating inside and the center accessory 2500. It is provided with a crune 2553, which is in the shape of a container recessed downward and is supplied with a game ball B guided by a third distribution taxiway 2551.

Further, the third distribution device 2550 is provided with a distribution rotation blade 2554 rotatably provided around the axis in the vertical direction at the center of the upper surface of the crune in a plan view, and a distribution rotation is provided below the crune 2553. The third distribution drive motor 2555 (see FIG. 115) that rotates the blades 2554, the second V winning opening 2008 that is open at the front end of the peripheral wall of the Kroon 2553, and the second V winning opening 2008 on the peripheral wall of the Kroon 2553. The third struck out ball discharge passage that separately guides the game ball B received by the third loss opening 2556, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third loss opening 2556, which are open on both the left and right sides of the above, downward. It is equipped with 2557.

Further, although not shown, the third distribution device 2550 has a spur gear-like rotary gear that rotates integrally with the distribution rotary blade 2554 below the crune 2553 and a spur gear-like spur gear that meshes with the rotary gear. It is provided with a driven gear, a flat plate-shaped detection piece protruding downward from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the lower surface of the driven gear, and a third distribution rotation detection sensor for detecting the detection piece.

The third distribution taxiway 2551 extends shortly downward from directly below the lower end of the second loss passage 2546, then bends to the left, extends to the vicinity of the right end of the Kroon 2553, and then descends toward the inside of the Kroon 2553. It is formed in a crank shape that is bent to. The third distribution taxiway 2551 is formed so as to discharge the game ball B to the right front corner in the crune 2553 in a plan view. The third distribution detection sensor 2552 is provided at the entrance of the third distribution guide path 2551.

The Kroon 2553 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long oval dish with the lowest center. The distribution rotary blade 2554 is provided with a pair of projecting pieces 2554a (see FIG. 108 and the like) protruding at right angles to the rotation axis, and a konpeito-like decoration having a plurality of protrusions protruding from the sphere. It has a portion 2554b and. The distribution rotation blade 2554 is constantly rotated in a certain direction by the third distribution drive motor 2555, and the third distribution rotation detection sensor monitors whether or not the distribution rotation blade 2554 is rotating. ing. When the game ball B in the crune 2553 comes into contact with the projecting piece 2554a while the distribution rotation blade 2554 is rotating, the game ball B can be flipped toward the peripheral wall side of the crune 2553. The third loss openings 2556 provided on the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008 are each formed to have the same size as the second V winning opening 2008.

In the third distribution device 2550, the distribution rotation blade 2554 at the center of the crune 2553 is constantly rotated by the third distribution drive motor 2555. Then, when the game ball B is distributed to the second loss opening 2543 by the second distribution device 2540, it is supplied from the second loss passage 2546 to the crune 2553 through the third distribution guide path 2551. At that time, the game ball B supplied to the crune 2553 is detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552. Based on the detection of the game ball B by the third distribution detection sensor 2552, the effect corresponding to the distribution of the game ball B by the croon 2553 is executed.

The game ball B supplied from the third distribution taxiway 2551 to the crune 2553 swivels (circulates) in the crune 2553 while narrowing the turning radius, and when it comes into contact with the projecting piece 2554a of the distribution rotating blade 2554, the croon 2553 It is flipped to the peripheral wall side of. Then, when the game ball B is flipped forward by the distribution rotation blade 2554, it enters (accepts) either the second V winning opening 2008 or the two third losing openings 2556. In this third distribution device 2550, the game ball B is distributed to the second V winning opening 2008 with a probability of 1/3.

The game ball B that has entered the second V winning opening 2008 is handed over to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 via the third distribution ball discharge passage 2557, and the back lower ball is discharged. After being detected by the second V winning opening sensor 3003 provided in the unit 3120, it is discharged onto the board holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third loss opening 2556 is handed over to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 via the third distribution ball discharge passage 2557, and is under the back. After being detected by the third loss opening sensor 3004 provided in the ball discharge unit 3120, the ball is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

As described above, in the third distribution device 2550, the game ball B distributed to the second loss opening 2543 by the second distribution device 2540 is either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2556. Can be distributed to.

[5-8f. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117, 120 to 124, and the like. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided on the upper right side with respect to the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion on the left side and a portion below the center accessory 2500, and a portion between the attacker unit 2400 and the center accessory 2500. Has been done. Further, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 place the game ball B driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 from the warp entrance 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the center of the windmill W. It is adjusted to mainly enter the right part, and with a lower probability, it is adjusted to enter the part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W.

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower end of the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500 and the normal winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 are games that have circulated through the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. The ball B is adjusted to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, the normal winning opening 2003, and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with the same probability, and the second guide passage. The game ball B that has circulated 2522 is adjusted so as to enter the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 and the normal winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and driven from the left side to the upper part along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 117, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500. N induces the user to enter either the warp entrance 2501 of the center accessory 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W, and the part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. You will be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is guided to the right by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted by the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then handed over to the back lower ball discharging unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and the general winning opening sensor. After being detected by 3001, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given. The game ball B guided to the portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game ball B not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and accepted by the first start port 2002. Further, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W may pass between a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally and flow down onto the side unit 2200, and the side unit 2200 may flow down. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp exit 2502. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, the central discharge portion 2503a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so that there is a high probability that the first Accepted by the start port 2002. When the game ball B is discharged from the left and right side discharge portions 2503b of the central discharge portion 2503a, it is accepted by the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then handed over to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 for the first start. After being detected by the mouth sensor 3002, it is discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3002, the first special lottery result is drawn and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2503 and not accepted by the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

It should be noted that the game ball B on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is unlikely to be accepted by the normal winning opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004, and is rarely opened to the large winning opening 2005. May be accepted.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 has a probability of being accepted by the second starting port 2004 with respect to the probability that the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is accepted. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher.

On the other hand, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is driven with the strength that the game ball B enters above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 (upstream space portion 2505) of the center accessory 2500, The game ball B circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

More specifically, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutment portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed striking). Then, the game ball B in contact with the abutment portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 (see FIG. 121 (a)). The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening door 2511 that closes the accessory winning opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then the guide passage group. It is discharged from the right exit at the lower end of the 2520 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 has a first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the attacker unit 2400 and a normal prize. It is guided to enter either the mouth 2003 or the part on the left side of the normal winning mouth 2003 with a similar probability.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2505 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted backward and is twisted backward in the first guide passage 2520a. After lining up with 2521 in the front-rear direction, it is twisted forward and discharged from the left exit of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is a portion on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 or the normal winning opening 2003 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the attacker unit 2400 and the game ball B. It is guided to enter any of the above, and rarely, it is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

Then, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is placed on the lower right rail 1004 from the discharging port portion 2435 that is lower than the large winning opening 2005. It is discharged and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has entered the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game ball B by the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a normal lottery is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

Further, the game ball B that has entered the portion on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 further abuts on the plurality of obstacle nails N and flows down onto the guide shelf 2421 on the second starting opening. In rare cases, the game ball B that has entered the left side portion of the normal winning opening 2003 passes through the second opening 2432 between the normal winning opening 2003 and the guide shelf 2421 on the second starting opening, and enters the attacker right passage 2430. May enter. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down onto the second start port upper guide shelf 2421 passes between the second start port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start port left standing wall portion 2422 and flows down onto the large winning opening guide shelf 2424. ..

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 and the "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery, the second starting opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, so that the second starting is started. The game ball B that has passed between the oral guide shelf 2421 and the left standing wall portion 2422 of the second starting port may be accepted by the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2402, the second special lottery result is drawn and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

The game ball B that has flowed down on the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 passing between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 is the large winning opening 2005 from the left end of the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424. It is released to the part above. Then, when the game ball B is released from the large winning opening guide shelf 2424, the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. If the "big hit" is drawn, or if the game ball B is accepted in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the big winning is won. The game ball B released to the left from the mouth guide shelf 2424 will be accepted by the big winning opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game ball B by the large winning opening sensor 2403, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given. The game ball B discharged to the attacker unit 2400 side through the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is accepted by any of the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005. If not, the game is discharged downward from the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the rear and lower part of the game panel 1100 which is outside the game area 5a.

Although the case of hitting to the right has been described above, the game ball B hit with a strength that jumps over the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 that is open near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is also used. It will enter the first guide passage 2521, and the result will be the same as above.

As described above, due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B circulating the second guide passage 2522 is better than the first guide passage 2521. , There is a high possibility that it will be accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003.

By the way, when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as a result of the first special lottery or the second lottery, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521. The provided accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the distribution rotating body 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 and the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the "small hit" is drawn, the character winning opening 2006 opens and closes, so that the player can receive the game ball B in the character winning opening 2006. "Right-handed" can be performed so that the game ball B is distributed in the first guide passage 2521 provided with the mouth 2006.

In the present embodiment, the "small hit" has a higher probability of being drawn than the "big hit", and the "small hit" includes "first small hit", "second small hit", and "third small hit". Three patterns are set, and in each pattern, the prize winning opening 2006 is roughly divided and opens and closes twice.

First, the opening and closing of the accessory winning opening 2006 in each "small hit" will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 123, in the "first small hit", after a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms) and then closed. After a short time (1252 ms) has elapsed, it is opened again for a short time (80 ms) and then closed. In the "second small hit", after a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed, and the "first small hit" is performed. After a long time (5420 ms) has elapsed, it is opened for a long time (9414 ms) and then closed. In the "third small hit", after a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed, and the "second small hit" is performed. After a long time (19366 ms) has elapsed, it will be in the open state for a long time (9404 ms) and then closed.

The second open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "first small hit" is started after the time when the "first small hit" is completed from the start of execution. Further, the second open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "third small hit" is started after the time when the "second small hit" is completed from the start of execution.

In addition, in FIG. 123, in the second long-time open state in the "second small hit" and the "third small hit", eight open states (80 ms) are repeated at regular intervals (1252 ms). .. That is, the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes twice in the "first small hit" and nine times in the "second small hit" and the "third small hit" (becomes an open state).

Next, the operation of the distribution rotating body 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 in the "small hit" rotates counterclockwise at the same time as the execution starts, and the accommodating portion 2531a is directed upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms) 1. After the first accommodating state, the accommodating portion 2531a is rotated clockwise and the accommodating portion 2531a is turned to the right, and after a predetermined time (4560 ms) elapses, the second time is longer than the first time (13446 ms). After being in a state of being able to be accommodated for a short time (500 ms) and being in an unaccommodable state for the same time as the second time (13446 ms), the state of being able to be accommodated for the third time is achieved.

The distribution rotating body 2531 ends in the first open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "small hit" and becomes unaccommodable. Further, the distribution rotating body 2531 will be in the second accommodating state after the time when the "first small hit" is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of the "first small hit", the control of the distribution rotating body 2531 is completed before the second accommodating state is reached, and the second and third accommodating states are not executed. The second opening state of the distribution rotating body 2531 is started before the second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "second small hit", and the second open state is the closed state. After that, it becomes uncontainable.

Further, the distribution rotating body 2531 will be in the accommodating state for the third time after the time when the "second small hit" is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of the "second small hit", the control of the distribution rotating body 2531 is completed before the third accommodating state is reached, and the third accommodating state is not executed. That is, the distribution rotating body 2531 can be accommodated once for the "first small hit", twice for the "second small hit", and three times for the "third small hit". The distribution rotating body 2531 is started in the third accommodating state before the second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "third small hit", and the second open state is completed. After it is closed, it becomes uncontainable.

Next, the operation of the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 in the "small hit" is the first closed state (3020 ms) in which the second loss port 2535 is closed by protruding forward at the same time as the execution starts. It becomes a state where it can be distributed to the first V winning opening 2007), and then it retreats and becomes an open state where the second loss opening 2535 is opened (a state where it is distributed to the third distribution device 2550) for a predetermined time (23006 ms). ) Elapses, the second closed state is set for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first open state, and then the open state is set.

The distribution door 2544 is opened after the first closed state ends in the middle of the first open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "small hit". Further, in the second distribution device 2540, the second closed state of the distribution door 2544 is started from the middle of the second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "third small hit", and the accessory winning opening is started. After the second open state of 2006 is closed, the distribution door 2544 is changed from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, in the second distribution device 2540, the second closed state of the distribution door 2544 is executed only at the time of "third small hit", and the distribution is performed at the time of "first small hit" or "second small hit". The second closed state of the branch door 2544 is not executed.

For this reason, in the "first small hit", the opening and closing of the prize winning opening 2006 is executed twice in a short time, so that the game is distributed through the first guide passage 2521 by "right-handed". It is unlikely that the ball B will be accepted by the prize winning opening 2006. In addition, since the first open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "second small hit" and the "third small hit" is also a short time, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006. Is low. Further, the time during which the first accommodating state of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "small hit" is the accessory winning opening. Since it is shorter than the time of the first open state of 2006, the game ball B accepted by the character winning opening 2006 at the time of the first opening of the character winning opening 2006 is the accommodating portion of the distribution rotating body 2531. It is even less likely to be housed in 2531a. Then, since the time for completing the first accommodating state of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the first closing state of the distribution door 2544 in the second distribution device 2540 is the same, the distribution rotating body 2531 The game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a is not distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 side in the first accommodating state.

On the other hand, since the second open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "second small hit" and the "third small hit" takes a long time, the game ball B wins the prize through the first guide passage 2521. It is likely to be accepted by Mouth 2006. At this time, the distribution rotating body 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 is in a state where it can be accommodated before the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened, and then the accessory winning opening 2006 is in a closed state from the open state. Since it becomes unaccommodable after the above, it is highly possible that the game ball B accepted in the accessory winning opening 2006 in the second open state is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531. ..

As described above, in this example, it is unlikely that the game ball B will be accepted by the bonus opening 2006 in the first open state of the bonus winning opening 2006 in the "second small hit" and the "third small hit". In addition, it is even less likely that the game ball B accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 will be accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 when the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time. Nevertheless, at the same time as the execution of the small hit game state is started, the distribution rotating body 2531 is rotated counterclockwise so that the accommodating portion 2531a is in the accommodating state with the accommodating portion 2531a facing upward, and the accommodating portion 2531a is provided for a predetermined period (3020 ms). After turning upward, it rotates clockwise to make the accommodating portion 2531a in an unaccommodating state directed to the right. That is, although it is unlikely that the distribution rotating body 2531 distributes the game ball B to the first Atari passage 2536 side immediately after the start of the small hit game state, the distribution rotating body 2531 distributes the game ball B to the first Atari passage 2536. The distribution operation by the distribution rotating body 2531 is shown in advance by executing the distribution operation to the side.

Similarly, although it is unlikely that the distribution rotating body 2531 distributes the game ball B to the first Atari passage 2536 side immediately after the start of the small hit game state, the second distribution device is simultaneously started to execute the small hit game state. By projecting the distribution door 2544 of 2540 forward and closing the second loss opening 2535, it is possible to distribute to the first V winning opening 2007, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) elapses, the second loss opening 2535 is retracted. Is open so that it can be distributed to the third distribution device 2550. That is, although it is unlikely that the distribution door 2544 distributes the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 side immediately after the start of the small hit game state, the distribution door 2544 distributes the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007. The sorting operation by the sorting door 2544 is performed in advance by executing the sorting operation to the side.

In this example, the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 are produced at the same time as the execution of the small hit game state, that is, at the start of the small hit game state (the opening effect of the small hit game state, for example, "Character winning opening". It operates during the execution of the game (the effect of explaining the game in the small hit game state such as "Aim for 2006"), and after the operation of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544, the accessory winning opening 2006 is the first time. It becomes the open state of. As a result, the possibility of distributing the game ball B to the first Atari passage 2536 side by the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution of the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 side by the distribution door 2544 is low. is doing. There is no possibility that the game ball B is distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 side by the distribution rotating body 2531 and the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 side by the distribution door 2544. Alternatively, if it is extremely low, the accessory winning opening 2006 may be opened for the first time at the same time as the operation of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544.

Further, only one of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, some of the movable parts (distribution rotating body 2531, distribution door 2544) that distribute the game balls that have won the prize winning opening 2006 are operated in advance to show the distribution operation. Other moving parts may not be operated in advance. For example, the distribution door 2544, which has a high possibility of allowing a game ball to enter the V winning opening (first V winning opening 2007 in this example) by operating (high expectation of V winning), should not be operated in advance. , It is less likely that the game ball will enter the V winning opening (second V winning opening 2008 in this example) than the sorting door 2544 (V winning expectation is low). Only the sorting rotating body 2531 is operated in advance. You may do so. As a result, although it is possible to know in advance a part of the distribution destinations of the game balls that have won the variable winning opening 2006, it is possible to make the other distribution destinations unknown, and the other distribution destinations are clarified. By increasing the number of distribution destinations, it is possible to surprise the players and raise their expectations, and at the same time, it is possible to draw attention to the game balls to be distributed and enjoy their movements, and to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Can be done.

In addition, the movable part (distribution door 2544) with high expectation of V winning is concealed by not operating it in advance, and the player is made to assume that the game ball enters the third distribution device 2550. When the third small hit is executed, the movable part (distribution door 2544) with high expectation of V winning operates to allow the game ball to enter the V winning opening (first V winning opening 2007 in this example). In addition to giving unexpectedness, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by allowing the game ball to enter an unexpected distribution destination. In addition, the distribution to the first V winning opening 2007 side is concealed as the distribution destination, and it can be assumed that there are only two, the first loss opening 2535 side and the third distribution device 2550 side, from the third small hit. However, even if the second small hit with a low expectation of V winning is executed and the game ball is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 side, the player is not discouraged.

Further, in this example, the distribution rotating body 2531 is arranged in such a manner that the player can easily see it, whereas the distribution door 2544 has a flat plate shape that advances and retreats to the front and back of the game board 5 and has an area on the front side. Because it is narrow, it is difficult to notice the operation even if it is operating. As a result, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the side of the first V winning opening 2007, which can be entered by the distribution door 2544 protruding forward. Therefore, when the third small hit occurs, the distribution door 2544 operates and when the game ball enters the first V winning opening 2007, it becomes difficult to notice the behavior of the game ball, and the game ball becomes the first V. It is possible to give the player the feeling that a V prize is suddenly generated and a 15R jackpot is executed without noticing that the player has entered the winning opening 2007.

In addition, by operating the distribution rotating body 2531 in advance during the opening effect of the small hit game state, the distribution rotating body 2531 is added to the instruction content in the opening effect, for example, "Aim at the character winning opening 2006". The player can easily recognize the driving destination, that is, the position to be aimed at during the small hit game state by the operation of.

By drawing a "small hit" as described above, when the prize winning opening 2006 is opened, the game ball B that has flowed down the first taxiway 2521 is accepted by the prize winning opening 2006. After being detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, it is sent to the first distribution guide path 2534 of the first distribution device 2530. When the game ball B is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is given.

Of the "small hits", in the "second small hit", when the accessory winning opening 2006 is in the second open state, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is in the open state, so that the distribution rotation is performed. When the body 2531 rotates from the accommodating state to the unaccommodable state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a passes through the first atari passage 2536 and passes through the first atari passage 2536 to the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540. Is circulated from the second loss port 2543 at the lower end to the second loss passage 2546 and sent to the third distribution device 2550 side.

The game ball B sent to the third distribution device 2550 side is detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552 and then supplied onto the crune 2553 through the third distribution guide path 2551 and inside the croon 2553. Turn. Then, by being repelled by the distribution rotation blade 2554 that is constantly rotating by the third distribution drive motor 2555, it is accepted by either the second V winning opening 2008 or the two third loss openings 2556. Then, the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 is handed over to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 through the third distribution ball discharge passage 2557. (2) After being detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003, it is discharged onto the board holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third loss opening 2556 is handed over to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 through the third distribution ball discharge passage 2557, and the third After being detected by the loss opening sensor 3004, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 3003, the privilege of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

On the other hand, in the "third small hit", when the accessory winning opening 2006 is in the second open state, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is in the closed state, so that the distribution rotating body 2531 Rotates from the accommodating state to the unaccommodating state, and the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the first Atari passage 2536. Then, it abuts on the upper surface of the distribution door 2544 in the closed state and is guided to the right, and enters (accepts) the first V winning opening 2007. The game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 passes through the first V winning passage 2542 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and then the back right ball of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is discharged. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the unit 3130. When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the privilege of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

Therefore, in order to open and close the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is made to accept the game ball B, such as "small hit" or "big hit". It is necessary to have the lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result of. When the game ball B is driven so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500, there is an opportunity to be accepted by the first starting port 2002, but there is no opportunity to be accepted by the second starting port 2004.

On the other hand, when the game ball B is driven so as to flow down the right side of the center accessory 2500, a guide passage group 2520 composed of two guide passages 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is located on the right side of the center accessory 2500. Although it is provided, there is an opportunity to be accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 even if it passes through the aisle, but the first guidance is made by "right-handing" which is easy to drive. If the passage 2521 is circulated, there is a possibility of entering the attacker right passage 2430, which is sent to the out opening 1008 without a chance to be accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003, etc., and the game ball B is circulated in the second guide passage 2522. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B. Further, in order for the second starting opening 2004 to accept the game ball B, it is necessary to have the normal winning opening 2003 accept the game ball B and derive the normal lottery result of "normal hit", so that the game ball B is used. The acceptance probability of the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, under the normal state, the game ball B is driven into the player so that the game ball B flows down on the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 can be enjoyed. It is possible to raise expectations for acceptance of.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and a "small hit" is drawn as a result of the first special lottery, the character winning opening 2006 opens and closes, so that the game is played in the character winning opening 2006. It is possible to change the driving operation of the game ball B to "right-handed" so that the ball B can be accepted, and to drive the game ball B into the first guide passage 2521 provided with the accessory winning opening 2006. It is possible to raise expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B into the prize winning opening 2006.

The game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 may be accepted by the normal winning opening 2003 on the downstream side even if it is not accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006, and further, the normal winning opening 2003. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the second starting port 2004, which has been opened according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to, and as a result of the second special lottery, "small hit" or "big hit". May be drawn.

When the game ball B driven into the first guide passage 2521 is received by the accessory winning opening 2006, it is sent to the first distribution device 2530, so that the game ball B is placed in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531. Depending on whether or not it is contained, the player can be thrilled.

When the game ball B sent to the first distribution device 2530 is housed in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531, the game ball B is sent to the next second distribution device 2540. The player can be thrilled depending on whether the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 or the second losing opening 2543 in the distribution device 2540. In this second distribution device 2540, even if the game ball B is distributed to the second loss opening 2543, the game ball B passes through the second loss passage 2546 and has a second V winning opening 2008. Since it is sent to the distribution device 2550, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the second V winning opening 2008, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

The game ball B distributed to the second loss opening 2543 in the second distribution device 2540 is supplied to the crune 2553 of the third distribution device 2550 and turns on the crune 2553. Then, when it is flipped toward the peripheral wall side by the distribution rotary blade 2554 in the center of the Kroon 2553, the player can be thrilled and thrilled depending on whether or not it is accepted by the second V winning opening 2008, and the player is entertained. be able to.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted by the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, or by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first special When a "big hit" is drawn as a result of the lottery and the result of the second special lottery, the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that a lot of game balls B are paid out. The game ball B can be driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be accepted by the opening and closing large winning opening 2005.

At this time, the probability that the game ball B will reach the grand prize opening 2005 is higher for the player than for the person who circulates the first guide passage 2521 to the person who circulates the second guide passage 2522. It is possible to refrain from "hit right" and adjust the striking strength so that the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, and the striking operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed.

By the way, since the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 has a weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, the weighted portion 2520a is provided. Looking at 2520a, it is difficult to determine which passage the game ball B circulates, so the player should have hit the second guide passage 2522 but entered the first guide passage 2521. It is possible to make people think that this is the case, and it is possible to draw attention to the game ball B circulating in the guide passage group 2520. In addition, the game ball B hit by aiming at the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 can excite the player depending on whether or not the game ball B comes out from the exit of the second guide passage 2522. , It is possible to raise the expectation for the game, and when it comes out from the unexpected exit of the first guide passage 2521, it can give the player a surprise and surprise the player, and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[5-8 g. Another embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory]
Subsequently, the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 of the embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. 125 (a) to 125 (d) are explanatory views showing an embodiment of a guide passage group different from FIG. 117, and FIGS. 126 (e) and 126 (f) are explanatory views showing an embodiment of a further different guide passage group. Is. In addition, in FIGS. 125 and 126, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (a), the distance at which the upper end entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is separated from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 to the left is longer than that in FIG. 117. It was done. The guide passage group 2520 can also exert the same effect as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (b), the angle of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 is such that the abutting portion 1006 can easily bounce off the abutting game ball B toward the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. Is changed, and the portion of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 between the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is inclined so that the second guide passage 2522 side (left side) is lower. It was made to. As a result, the game ball B easily enters the second guide passage 2522 side, and the adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B into which the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 becomes wider. (Ii) It is possible to facilitate the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the guide passage 2522.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (c), in the guide passage group 2520 of FIGS. 117 and 125 (a) and (b), the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are directed upward. While the opening was made, the upstream side of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 was extended to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective entrances were lined up and down. It is designed to open to the left in the state.

In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) constitutes a part of the first guide passage 2521, and a part of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is one of the second guide passages 2522. It constitutes a part. Further, in this embodiment, the left-right length of the upstream space portion 2505 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) is first guided from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. It is the length to the entrance of each of the passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and is narrower than the upstream space portion 2505 shown above in FIG. 117 and the like.

In this embodiment, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, is it the driving strength that abuts on a narrow portion on the left side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510? Since it is necessary to drive the game ball B with a driving strength that directly enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 that opens to the left, the game ball is compared with the embodiment of FIG. 117 or the like. The adjustment range of the driving strength of B becomes narrow. Further, the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2505 on the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 separates the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. When it comes into contact with the left end of the wall portion (the part between the two entrances), it may deviate from the upstream space portion 2505 depending on the momentum and angle of the bouncing game ball B to the left. That is, even if the game ball B is driven with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2505, it deviates to the left from the upstream space portion 2505 and does not enter either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be distributed. For this reason, the difficulty level of the driving operation of the game ball B becomes high, so that the player's motivation for the driving operation of the game ball B can be increased, and the player can drive the game medium. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress the decline in interest.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (d), in the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (c), a branch portion 2524 that communicates with the second guide passage 2522 in a one-way manner is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521. Is. The branch portion 2524 is provided directly above the portion of the second guide passage 2522 that is bent downward from the right end of the portion extending to the left and right (upper right peripheral wall portion 2510). In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is driven with the strength of entering the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is second at the branch portion 2524 (when the driving strength is weak) depending on the driving strength. Since the branch is made to the guide passage 2522 side, the difficulty level of distribution of the game ball B to the second guide passage 2522 can be made lower than that of the embodiment of FIG. 125 (c).

In addition, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522, it is necessary to drive the game ball B weaker than the driving strength of the game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521, and the first guide passage 2521 and the like. Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the portion of the second guide passage 2522 that is bent downward, the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 is located at the portion that is bent downward. It does not bounce upward (branch portion 2524 side) and does not enter the first guide passage 2521 side through the branch portion 2524. That is, the branch portion 2524 communicates from the first guide passage 2521 to the second guide passage 2522 in one way.

Further, in this embodiment, when the first guide passage 2521 is entered into the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 having the branch portion 2524 in the middle and the first guide passage 2521 is circulated, the first guide passage 2521 side is formed at the portion of the branch portion 2524. Alternatively, since the branch is made to either side of the second guide passage 2522, the player can be thrilled depending on which side the game ball B branches to at the branch portion 2524, and the first guide can be excited. It is possible to entertain the flow of the game ball B in the passage 2521 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in this embodiment, even if the game ball B enters the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 even though the player hits the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522. Since there is a possibility that the branch portion 2524 of the first guide passage 2521 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side, the player may be disturbed depending on whether or not the branch portion 2524 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side. It is possible to excite and entertain the player, and when the branch portion 2524 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side, the mistake of the player's driving operation is covered and the desired second guide passage 2522 is provided. Since the game ball B is distributed, it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she has gained, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 126 (e), the second guide passage 2522 is provided with a bypass portion 2525 that crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. Therefore, all the game balls B driven into the upstream space portion 2505 above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 circulate through the first guide passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player side. Since the distribution of the game ball B can be made conspicuous from the above, it becomes possible to make the player think that if the game ball B distributes the bypass portion 2525, there may be something good after that. It is possible to perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 having the bypass portion 2525, and it is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of the interest. can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 126 (f), the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided behind the first guide passage 2521, and the respective entrances are arranged in the front-rear direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is provided on the front side of the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inclined to the right rear in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 of the front component 1000 in the upstream space portion 2505, and the game ball distributed along the front surface of the game panel 1100. B is guided to the second guide passage 2522 side. Further, the abutment portion 1006 of the front component 1000 is inclined so that the portion near the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 moves to the right as it goes backward, and faces the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has been hit vigorously can be reflected toward the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. In this embodiment, since the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap side by side in the front-rear direction, the game is driven into the upstream space portion 2505 above the center accessory 2500. It can be difficult to determine which passage the ball B has entered, and the player can be noticed.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116 and the like. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B accepted by the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a first opening unit 2100 provided in the starting opening unit 2100. The first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B accepted by the one starting port 2002 and the second V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B accepted by the second V winning opening 2008 of the center accessory 2500. And a third loss opening sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B received by the third loss opening 2556 of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 137).

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has an open front surface and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and the back surface of the back box 3010. It is equipped with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the cage effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 is driven into the game area 5a and becomes the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. An out-ball detection unit 3030 that detects an unaccepted game ball B (a game ball B for which a privilege has not been granted), a light guide plate effect unit 3100 provided at the front end of the back box 3010, and a light guide plate effect unit 3100. It is equipped with a back effect unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010 at the rear of the rear box.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped projecting rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside of the frame to the left on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached, in the vicinity of the center of the right side in the left-right direction.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached up and down on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the back effect unit 3200, and the like at appropriate positions.

[5-9a. Out ball detection unit]
Next, the out-ball detection unit 3030 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131 and the like. 127 (a) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out ball detection unit, and (d). ) Is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit from the back, and (f) is a view from the out-ball detection unit and the lower right front position. It is a perspective view, and (g) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 128 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the out sphere detection unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 128 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out sphere detection unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

Further, FIG. 129 (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out ball detection unit, and FIG. 129 (b) is a perspective view showing a state in which the out ball detection unit is in contact with the game panel. FIG. 130 is an enlarged cross-sectional view seen from the right side after being assembled on the game board and cut up and down at the center of the right sensor of the out port. FIG. 131 is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the out port from the front in a state of being assembled on the game board.

The out ball detection unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 is driven into the game area 5a, and has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, and an accessory. This is for detecting a game ball B (a game ball B to which a privilege has not been given, also referred to as an "out ball") that has not been accepted by the winning opening 2006. In the present embodiment, the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is detected. The out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the front surface of the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100.

The out ball detection unit 3030 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 from the rear, and the unit main body 3031 attached to the front surface of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the out port left sensor attached to the unit main body 3031. It includes a 3032 and an out port right sensor 3033, and a cover 3034 attached to the unit main body 3031 so as to cover the rear side of the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033.

The unit main body 3031 has a tubular tubular portion 3031a that is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 and extends in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction, and a partition portion 3031b that divides the inside of the tubular portion 3031a into left and right. , The flange portion 3031c protruding from the rear end of the tubular portion 3031a in a flat plate shape in the left-right direction, and the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 recessed from the rear end side of the tubular portion toward the front are inserted. The insertion recess 3031d and the like are provided. The tubular portion 3031a has a front end having substantially the same size as the out port 1008 in the front component 1000, is long to the left and right, and is inclined so that the inner surface on the lower side is lowered toward the rear side.

The partition portion 3031b is provided near the rear end of the tubular portion 3031a, and is partitioned to a size that allows one game ball B to pass on both the left and right sides. The partition portion 3031b is curved so that the front end side protrudes forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and protrudes forward. The insertion recess 3031d is inclined so that the front surface side is perpendicular to the lower inclined inner surface of the tubular portion 3031a and moves backward as it goes upward.

The out port left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B circulating on the left side of the partition portion 3031b in the tubular portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. The out port right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B circulating on the right side of the partition portion 3031b in the tubular portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. The out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 are non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches.

The cover 3034 is curved so as to guide the game ball B that has passed through the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 downward, and has a partition plate 3034a in the center in the left-right direction.

In the out-ball detection unit 3030, the flange portion 3031c of the unit main body 3031 is attached to the front surface of the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 (see FIG. 130). Further, in the out ball detection unit 3030, in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, the tubular portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100, and the front surface of the flange portion 3031c is the game panel 1100. It is in contact with the rear surface (see FIGS. 129 and 130).

In the state where the out ball detection unit 3030 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper part of the front end of the tubular portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 projects forward from the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (FIG. 130). See). That is, the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 is inserted into the tubular portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. Further, the lower end of the cover 3034 passes through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 (see FIG. 130).

In the game area 5a, the out ball detection unit 3030 has the game ball B guided backward by the out guide unit 1003 after flowing down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 or the lower right rail 1004. It is supplied into the cylinder portion 3031a, is detected by either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033, and is discharged downward by the cover 3034. The out-ball detection unit 3030 discharges the game ball B to the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, without bringing the game ball B into contact with the board holder 1200.

According to the out-ball detection unit 3030 of the present embodiment, the player is driven into the game area 5a to enter the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the like. Since it is possible to detect a game ball B (“out ball”) that has not been accepted by any of the prize winning openings 2006, for example, acceptance of the game ball B into a specific winning opening is continuously detected. If the "out ball" is not detected even though the ball is out, it means that the cheating is being performed on a specific winning opening, and it is possible to notify that the cheating is being carried out.

In addition, since the number can be counted by detecting the "out ball", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory. From the number of "safe balls" counted by the detection of the game ball B accepted in the winning opening 2006 and the number of "out balls", the ratio of "safe balls" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known.

Further, in the out ball detection unit 3030, since the partition portion 3031b partitions between the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 provided on the left and right, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500. Can be guided to the out-port left sensor 3032 side, and the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the out-port right sensor 3033 side. The game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the object 2500 can be mainly detected, and the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be mainly detected by the out port right sensor 3033. Therefore, it is determined whether the player tends to be "left-handed" or "right-handed" based on the number of game balls B detected per hour by the out-mouth left sensor 3032 and the out-mouth right sensor 3033. Based on the determination, it is possible to promote the optimum driving operation for the game situation and entertain the intended game.

Further, since the protrusion of the partition portion 3031b to the front is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over the game ball B, when a large number of game balls B enter the out port 1008 per hour, the relatively game ball of the partition portion 3031b The game ball B can be released to the left side or the right side where the distribution amount of B is small, and the game ball B can be discharged without delay at the out port 1008.

Further, since the lower end of the cover 3034 is projected downward from the discharge portion 1201 of the board holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening The game ball B (“safe ball”) received in 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 flows backward in the out ball detection unit 3030 to the out opening left sensor 3032 and the out opening right sensor. It is possible to prevent it from being detected by 3033, and it is possible to accurately detect only the "out ball".

In this embodiment, the out-ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the out-ball detection unit 3030 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has an out recess 1101, the out ball detection unit 3030 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1101. At the same time, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

Further, in the game board 5, all the game balls B (“global balls”) driven into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B (“global balls”) discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected, since only the "out ball" is detected by the out ball detection unit 3030, the numbers of "out ball", "safe ball", and "global ball" are compared. This makes it possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5.

[5-9b. Light guide plate production unit]
Subsequently, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134. FIG. 132 (a) is a perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 (b) is a perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the pattern substrate in the light guide plate effect unit from the front. FIG. 134 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light, and FIG. 134 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light.

The light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The light guide plate effect unit 3100 has a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 3102 attached to the unit base 3101, and a unit base 3101 above the light guide plate 3102. It is attached to the first pattern substrate 3103 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted, and to the unit base 3101 on the left side of the light guide plate 3102. , A second pattern substrate 3104 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the left side surface of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted.

Further, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 covers the front of the transparent plate-shaped diffuser lens 3105 provided between the first pattern substrate 3103 and the light guide plate 3102, the first pattern substrate 3103, and the diffuser lens 3105. It is attached to the upper side of the unit base 3101 as described above, and is attached to the left side of the unit base 3101 so as to cover the front of the back upper decorative body 3106 having a relief-like decoration on the front surface and the second pattern substrate 3104. It is provided with a strip-shaped left substrate cover 3107.

Further, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the unit base 3101, and is the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, and the center accessory 2500. The back lower ball discharge unit 3120 that receives the accepted game ball B and discharges it downward to the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loss opening 2556 of the three distribution device 2550, and is attached to the lower right side of the unit base 3101. The back right ball discharge unit 3130 and the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 that receive the game ball B accepted by the first loss opening 2535 and the first V winning opening 2007 in the center accessory 2500 and discharge it downward. It is installed and is installed in the cooling fan 3140 for cooling the third distribution drive motor 2555 of the center accessory 2500 and the part behind the warp inlet 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and acts illegally. It is equipped with a magnetic sensor (not shown) that detects magnetism.

The light guide plate 3102 has only the first pattern 3102a (see FIG. 134 (a)) formed by innumerable uneven first reflecting portions that reflect only the light from above and the light from the left. It is provided with a second pattern 3102b (see FIG. 134 (b)) formed by a myriad of uneven second reflecting portions that reflect the light forward. That is, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 can display the first pattern 3102a by emitting light when the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 is made to emit light, and when the LED of the second pattern substrate 3104 is made to emit light, the second pattern is emitted. The 3102b can be displayed by light emission.

In the light guide plate 3102, the innumerable first reflecting portions forming the first pattern 3102a and the innumerable second reflecting portions forming the second pattern 3102b are each formed with fine irregularities. When the LED of the first picture board 3103 and the LED of the second picture board 3104 are not emitted, they look transparent, and the back effect unit 3200 and the effect display device 1600 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side. The effect image and the like displayed on the can be visually recognized in good condition.

As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the first pattern 3102a is a pattern that imitates the circumference of one eye of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the second pattern 3102b is a pattern composed of the characters "CHANGE!" As shown in FIG. 134 (b).

Further, the light guide plate 3102 includes a lower notch 3102c notched upward from the lower side and a right notch 3102d notched from the right side to the left. The lower notch 3102c is for preventing contact with the crune 2553 of the third distribution device 2550 in the center accessory 2500, and the right notch 3102d is the rear in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500. The purpose is to prevent contact with the twisted second guide passage 2522.

The first pattern substrate 3103 is divided into three in the left-right direction. The second pattern substrate 3104 is divided into two in the vertical direction. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 and the second pattern substrate 3104 are full-color LEDs.

The back lower ball discharge unit 3120 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B accepted by the first starting opening 2002. The second V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B accepted by the second V winning opening 2008, and the third losing opening sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B accepted by the third losing opening 2556. Is provided.

The back lower ball discharge unit 3120 may discharge the game ball B accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third losing opening 2556 onto the board holder 1200. can. An out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the front surface of the back lower ball discharge unit 3120.

[5-9c. Back production unit]
Subsequently, the back effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 113 and the like. The back effect unit 3200 is mounted in the back box 3010 behind the light guide plate effect unit 3100. The back effect unit 3200 has a plurality of hemispherical decorative bodies so as to surround the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 in the front view. Behind these decorative bodies is provided a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. Therefore, by appropriately emitting the LED of the decorative substrate, it is possible to make a plurality of decorative bodies emit light and decorate, and it is possible to show the player the light emission effect by the decorative body.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. FIG. 135 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the second pattern is luminescently decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit. FIG. 136 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the first pattern is luminescently decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit. The game board 5 produces a light guide plate for the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, which are drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The unit 3100 and the back effect unit 3200 perform a predetermined light emission effect.

Specifically, as a light emitting effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, it is mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view of the light guide plate 3102. The plurality of LEDs are made to emit light, and the second pattern 3102b is made to emit light and decorate. As a result, the characters "CHAHCE!" Are illuminated and decorated in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be made to suggest the arrival of a chance, which may be good. It is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as a light emitting effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 136, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side of the light guide plate 3102 are made to emit light. , The first pattern 3102a is light-emittingly decorated. As a result, the eyes of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are emitted and displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised and the player can be surprised. In addition to being able to give a strong impact, it is possible to make people think that an advantageous gaming state such as a "big hit game" will occur, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the light emitting effect by the light guide plate 3102 as described above and the light emitting effect of the decorative body can be appropriately combined, and the effect displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. It can also be combined with an image (display effect). As a result, it is possible to present various patterns of effects to the player by appropriately combining light emission effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and at the same time, the player can be given various effects. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout and the like of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU1310a, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive to drive various solenoids. The circuit, the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value and the error display, and the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 are displayed. It is equipped with a base monitor 1310h. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in reset circuit”). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to a content that does not make sense, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly treated as being affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is performed without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and the main control side power on processing described later is executed again. Will be to be done. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (as described later). Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control) does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633 from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Only the MPU1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will be maintained in the activated state.

Further, the main control MPU1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, "hardware with built-in main control" that updates a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game. It is described as "random number circuit".) Is built-in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 65535 is preset), and an initial value is generated. The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, in the main control built-in hard random number circuit, when the main control MPU1310a is reset, first, a clock signal (main) input to the main control MPU1310a with one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on the control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. After extracting all the values in, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random number for jackpot determination. It is designed to be set as.

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input by the detection signals from the various sensors to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the main control input circuit does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the main control system reset, so that various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as a circuit to be used.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received by the first start port 2002, and a second start that detects the game ball B received by the second start port 2004. The mouth sensor 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005 The large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B that has been used, the winning combination sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B that has been accepted by the winning feature winning opening 2006, and the game ball B that has been accepted by the first V winning opening 2007. The first V winning opening sensor 2514 to detect, the first losing opening sensor 2515 to detect the game ball B accepted by the first losing opening 2535, the second to detect the game ball B accepted by the second V winning opening 2008 V winning opening sensor 3003, third losing opening sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B accepted by the third losing opening 2556, out opening left sensor 3032 and out opening right that detects the game ball B accepted by the out opening 10008. One of the sensor 3033, the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 is detected. The detection signals from the out port left sensor 3032, the out port right sensor 3033, and the like are input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Further, the detection signal from the setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. Further, the signal from the RWM clear button 633z provided on the payout control board 633 is also input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The RWM clear button 633z is a RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 (main control built-in RAM). The function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in each predetermined area, the function as an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the set value. It also has a function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching. Therefore, the signal from the RWM clear button 633z input to the main control board 1310 includes a signal for transmitting RAM clear as a RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) and a signal for transmitting an error release as an error release switch (RAM clear signal). Although there is an error release signal) and a signal (setting value selection switching signal) that conveys the selection switching of the set value as a setting switching button, the main control board 1310 is set as a RAM clear signal that is an important signal related to itself. While monitoring the input of the value setting change signal, it does not monitor the input of the error release signal that is the control target of the payout control board 633 that is not related to itself.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, the payout control input circuit 633ab, which will be described later, and the payout control. When they are input to the main control board 1310 as they are without going through the output circuit 633ac), they are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, and are directly input to the main control board 1310 via the main control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, each of the general winning opening sensor 3001, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the first entrance / exit sensor 2406, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 2010, the out opening left sensor 3032, and the out opening right sensor 3033. The detection signal is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are output from the main control solenoid drive circuit. , Each drive signal to the accessory winning opening solenoid 2512, the first distribution solenoid 2532, and the second distribution solenoid 2545 is output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or a predetermined value thereof. From the output terminal of the output port, the status display of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol display, the normal hold display, the first special symbol display, the first special hold number display, the second special symbol display, the second special Each drive signal is output to the hold number indicator and the round indicator without going through another board, that is, directly. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) can be output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, or a game ball can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that tells that this launch is permitted is set to the launch permission logic when launching is permitted, while the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that reverses the launch permission logic when firing is not permitted. Is set to. As for the logic of the launch permission signal, as an initial value (default), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted.

In this embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and the first A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the one loss opening sensor 2515, the second V winning opening sensor 3003, the third loss opening sensor 3004, the out opening left sensor 3032, and the out opening right sensor 3033. On the other hand, the contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the normal winning opening 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the normal winning port 2003 are used. The detection of the game ball B by the winning opening sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the ordinary winning port sensor 2401.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 is used. B detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the large winning opening sensor 2403. Further, since the game ball B launched in the game area 5a is collected in a large amount by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, the game ball B is detected by the out port left sensor 3032. , And the detection of the game ball B by the out-mouth right sensor 3033 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life may be used.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or something. Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the detailed description of the main control MPU 1310a will be described later, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "main control side") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described as "capacitor"). With this main control side capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is input to the main control MPU1310a as a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on. When it is done, it is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B is a payout control unit 633a that controls various payouts, a launch control by the launch solenoid 542, and a launch control by the ball feed solenoid 145. It includes a control unit 633b, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, and an RWM clear button 633z that has a pressing operation unit that also has a plurality of functions. The RWM clear button 633z is a RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor provided in the main control board 1310 (main control built-in). A function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in each predetermined area of the RAM), and a function as an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and settings. It also has a function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching values.

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as the RAM clear switch is the RAM clear determination period after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (the main control side power-on processing described later by the main control MPU 1310a after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on). Is started and the period until the determination in step S14 in the same process is performed)).

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as the setting switching button is the setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period elapses (when the main control side power is turned on after the RAM clear determination period elapses due to the main control MPU1310a). In the setting change process of step S37 in the process, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311. Is limited to the period until it is determined that the setting key cylinder has been rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). There is.

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as the error release switch is a valid period from the time when the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching valid period have elapsed. Even if a signal indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is input to the payout control unit 633a (payout control MPU described later) during the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching valid period, the signal is invalidated. Has been done.

As described above, the period in which the RWM clear button 633z operates as the setting switching button is limited to the setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed. However, in this setting switching valid period, the main control MPU 1310a is a setting key switch provided on the setting change board 1311 in the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing described later after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed. Setting key of 1311a Since the setting key inserted into the insertion port of the cylinder is used to continuously monitor the rotation position of the setting key cylinder, the interrupt enable setting for permitting the start of the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. (Step S52 in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side) cannot be performed, and the fraud detection process in step S112 in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, cannot be performed. In other words, the setting switching valid period is the period during which fraud cannot be detected.

During this setting switching valid period, that is, the period during which fraud cannot be detected, there is a possibility that a fraudster may make some kind of fraudulent modification to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, first, as described above, the back cover 640 can be opened to cover the rear side of the game board 5. In order to secure a space, the main body frame 4 must be opened greatly (nearly about 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, during the setting switching valid period, that is, the fraud detection undetectable period, the main body frame 4 is largely opened (nearly about 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2, so that the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 If you try to make some kind of fraudulent modification, the fraudulent activity will become extremely conspicuous in the game hall, so you can take measures against such fraudulent activity. Therefore, it can contribute to the prevention of fraudulent activities.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), the payout MPU is included. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in payout control") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout serially via the payout control I / O port, or the RWM clear button 633z. In addition to the signal indicating that the pressing operation unit of the is operated is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input. A signal indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. It is input to the MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the power failure of the main control board 1310. The power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit 1310e is input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumericals, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" has occurred (specifically, a defect has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the areas from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "payout control side") as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 633 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is described as "capacitor"). With this payout control side capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power cutoff process even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the built-in payout control RAM is paid out when a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the power is turned on is input to the payout control MPU. It is completely erased (cleared) from the control built-in RAM. The signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a launch It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted is input to the launch control input circuit and then input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In the firing timing control circuit, the firing condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is satisfied, and the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are connected based on the CR connection signal. If the launch condition 2 that is electrically connected is satisfied and the launch condition 3 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B is not satisfied. Since the firing reference pulse for launching is not output toward the game area 5a, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be launched.

In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the firing reference pulse generates a driving current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 is stored. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

In the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 is provided with the launch control unit 633b, which controls the launch by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, but the power supply board 630 is provided. It may be configured. In this case, the emission permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or is shown in the figure. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 137, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like on one semiconductor chip. The integrated peripheral control IC, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, the sound source IC that plays high-quality sound, and the sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects that this sound source IC refers to. It has a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripherals are based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC outputs the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, serial I / O for the lamp drive board. To transmit data from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, or to output a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5. The game board side drive data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720, or the operation ring drive motor provided on the door frame 3. Door side drive data for outputting drive signals to 342 and operation button elevating drive motor 367, etc., and lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting to color LEDs, etc. provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. A screen for transmitting door-side light emission data for outputting a signal and door-side drive light emission data composed of the frame decorative drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side or displaying it on the effect display device 1600. In addition to sending control data (display command) indicating the above to the effect display control unit 1512 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit, control signals (sound commands) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM are also sent. Output to the sound source IC.

The detection signal from the third distribution detection sensor 2552 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 is input to the peripheral control IC via the panel drive board 1720. Further, the detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit is based on this operation signal. The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and the vibration speaker 354 and the top center speaker 462 provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played from the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjusting switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal and 4ch stereo). By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic acoustic effect (acoustic effect) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used in combination to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are multiple serial input / outputs different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and control data (display command). Multiple corresponding non-residential area transfer schedule data, etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a height of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along a pixel and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a sub-scan that is performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as the main scan. It is output to each pixel of. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, outputs are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[6-4. Mounting of SMD type electronic components]
Here, countermeasures for discontinued electronic components will be described. First, due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for a board treated as a main board such as a power supply board, a main control board, and a payout control board, a lead type electronic component is mounted on the mounting surface on the front side thereof, and the back surface is mounted. It is necessary to solder on the solder side which is the side. However, as described above, lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of gaming machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and fusion gaming machines, but other general electric machine manufacturers can reduce the size. A surface mount type (so-called SMD type) is used. For this reason, production may be discontinued due to a decrease in the number of lead-type electronic components produced. Therefore, a lead-type electronic component capable of configuring an SMD-type electronic component as a lead-type electronic component can be mounted on a mounting surface of a substrate treated as a main board.

However, when configured as this lead-typed electronic component, the outer shape (shape) of the lead-typed electronic component is larger than the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component, and some or more of the protrusions are formed. It may be formed and have a distorted outer shape (shape). When lead-typed electronic components having such an outer shape (shape) are mounted on the mounting surface of a board treated as a main board, it may be difficult to arrange them on the board due to the positional relationship with other electronic components. Therefore, it may be difficult to configure the SMD type electronic component as the lead type electronic component described above. Therefore, in addition to such lead-type electronic components, among lead-type electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, SMD-type electronic components are limitedly treated as the main substrate. It may be permitted to mount on the mounting surface.

Here, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 141. FIG. 138 is an enlarged view (a) of a part of a region where SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and this enlarged view is viewed from the right side of the main control board (b). FIG. 139 is a schematic view (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate in which SMD-type electronic components are integrated in a predetermined area, in which lead-type electronic components are substituted, and FIG. 139 is an SMD that substitutes for lead-type electronic components. FIG. 140 is a schematic view (b) showing the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of a substrate in which type electronic components are integrated and miniaturized, and FIG. 140 is an enlarged view of FIG. 138 (a) as a main control substrate. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of a main control board box of a main control unit. In addition, in FIG. 138 and FIG. 140, various other electronic parts are omitted except for the electronic parts necessary for explanation for the sake of readability of the drawings.

The SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is an alternative having the same function as the lead type Schmidt trigger inverter (DIP (Dual Inline Package) type), and this lead type Schmidt trigger inverter. Is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is one of the main circuits constituting the main control input circuit to which the detection signals from the various sensors described above are input, and is mainly controlled by some illegal means. When it is removed from the board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 always determines that there is no ball entering for the sensor that transmits the ball entering the game ball, and the improper is the approach of the magnet or the improper vibration. Anything that conveys fraudulent activity, such as, is always determined to be fraudulent. A plurality of types of electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are mounted on the main control board 1310 as lead-type electronic components.

In this embodiment, green is adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are green resist except for various land patterns. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b), the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (hereinafter, simply referred to as “Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30”) and a Schmitt trigger. A lead-type high-frequency bypass capacitor MC30 (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor MC30") capable of removing the noise voltage generated by the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 itself is mounted in the vicinity of the inverter MIC30. ing. In FIG. 138 (a), the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 and the capacitor MC30 are omitted for the sake of readability in the drawings.

In the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, six Schmitt trigger inverter circuits are integrated and housed in one SMD package. In this embodiment, SOP (Small) having 14 pins as an SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.
(Outline Package) is adopted (hereinafter, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 may be referred to as "SOP14"). In the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, seven leads from two opposing sides of the SMD package body have a lead-to-lead distance dimension (so-called "lead pitch", 1.27 mm in this embodiment) and bend outward. After being placed on a rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 corresponding to each lead, the surface of each lead and the main control board 1310 ( (Mounting surface) A rectangular land pattern formed only on 1310x is soldered to each. The width dimension of each lead is 0.43 mm, and the width dimension of the rectangular land pattern is larger than the width dimension of each lead, 0.76 mm (the length dimension of the rectangular land pattern is 1.27 mm). Is. In the present embodiment, the size of the SMD package main body has a width dimension of 5.3 mm, a length dimension of 10.8 mm, and a height dimension of 1.5 mm, from two sides of the SMD package main body. Including the length of the protruding lead, the width dimension of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 has 7.8 mm.

Although the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the back surface of the main control board 1310 is used as the solder surface in order to mount the lead type electronic components on the main control board 1310. It is described as "the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310" (hereinafter, the same applies).

In the capacitor MC30, two leads projecting from the main body having a rectangular shape have a lead-to-lead distance dimension (so-called “lead pitch”, 5 mm in this embodiment) and project in a straight line parallel to the outside. It is formed and is formed on both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) through the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the two leads. Of the ring-shaped land patterns (also referred to as through holes; the same applies hereinafter), the ring-shaped land patterns formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y. Two leads and a main control board protruding from the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 after the two leads are inserted toward the ring-shaped land pattern. Ring-shaped land patterns formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of 1310 are soldered to each other. The diameter of the two leads is 0.5 mm, and the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 0.7 mm, which is larger than the diameter of the two leads (the outer diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 1. 3 mm).

The surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has a ground (GND) other than a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and a region where various land patterns are formed. In addition to being formed as a so-called solid ground, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 also has a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and other areas except for areas where various land patterns are formed. It is formed as a so-called solid earth with the region as ground (GND). The solid earth formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid earth formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are both sides (front surface (mounting surface)) of the main control board 1310. Electrically through a plurality of through holes formed on the back surface (solder surface) (holes penetrating both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310 (copper-plated holes)). By being connected, they are the same ground (GND). The diameter of the through hole is 0.3 mm, which is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern. In the through hole, the solid earth formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid earth formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same ground (GND). In addition to the above, there are a plurality of wiring patterns used for routing various wiring patterns on both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. It is printed as a solid line (or a black solid line), and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30 and in the lower left. Specifically, in the region MSLKMIC30, the lead that is the 1st terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is located on the lower left side and the 7th terminal (ground) so that the longitudinal direction of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is the left-right direction in FIG. 138 (a). It is instructed to arrange the lead that becomes the (GND) terminal) on the lower right side, the lead that becomes the 8th terminal on the upper right side, and the lead that becomes the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) on the upper left side. ..

The rectangular land pattern corresponding to each lead, which is the 1st to 6th terminals and the 8th to 13th terminals of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, is electrically connected to each wiring pattern that transmits the corresponding control signal. The rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that becomes the 7th terminal (ground (GND) terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to the solid earth formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that becomes the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is electrically connected to the wiring pattern that supplies power.

The surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is engraved with the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols; for example, "ABC") and the product number (the number published in the catalog, for example, "74XYYYZZ"). , Or it is printed in a predetermined color (depending on the manufacturer). However, since the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SMD package called SOP14 and is small in size, the surface area of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is small.

Further, since the main control board 1310 is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, as will be described in detail later, the main control board 1310 is prevented from a person who illegally modifies and acquires an illegal game ball. It is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body in which a plurality of ventilation holes for heat dissipation are formed. The ventilation holes for heat dissipation can release the air in the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

Then, when confirming the part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) of various electronic components of the main control board 1310, the surface of the main control board 1310 (in the state where the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320) The manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) and product number (number published in the catalog) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 when visually observing the mounting surface) side through a transparent cover body. Is small and difficult to see.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is provided with an information region on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 in FIG. 138 (a), and a Schmidt trigger inverter is provided in this information region. MIC30 part number (number published in the catalog) Silk screen so that MSLKMIC30p is easy to see compared to the size of the part number (number published in the catalog) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as printing. Therefore, the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

In addition to the product number (number published in the catalog), the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In this case, white (or black) as silk printing so that the size is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is preferable that it is printed with. As a result, the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC30 is arranged so as to be arranged in the vicinity of the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead which is the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The area MSLKMC30 indicating the position (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is printed as a silk print with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30. The part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the upper right side. Specifically, in the region MSLKMC30, one lead is electrically connected to the wiring pattern for supplying power so that the two leads of the capacitor MC30 are in the vertical direction in FIG. 138 (a). It is instructed to insert the ring-shaped land pattern and the other lead into the lower ring-shaped land pattern paired with the upper ring-shaped land pattern.

The wiring pattern to which the upper ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected is also electrically connected to the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Further, the lower ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected to the solid earth formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Here, the advantages of mounting the SMD type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) of the board treated as the main board will be briefly described. As described above, the SMD type electronic component can be made smaller than the lead type electronic component. Therefore, the electronic component mounting density when the SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. Can be extremely suppressed as compared with the electronic component mounting density when the lead type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. Therefore, when an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as this lead type electronic component is mounted on the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the lead type electronic component is mounted, the lead type electronic component is mounted. Since the SMD type electronic component is small, it is possible to increase the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the SMD type electronic component is mounted, and from the lead type electronic component to the SMD type electronic component. The area between the replaced parts can also be increased (that is, it is possible to mount an electronic component having a large gap on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate due to the replaced parts). This makes it possible to visually check the SMD type electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate from multiple directions. Therefore, unauthorized modification of the SMD type electronic components, the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate and the SMD type It is possible to check the mounting state (soldered state) with the electronic component, the state of various wiring patterns to the SMD type electronic component, and the state of various land patterns. Therefore, the use of SMD type electronic components can contribute to the ease of finding unauthorized alterations.

In addition, the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the SMD type electronic component is mounted can be increased, and the area between the lead type electronic component replaced with the SMD type electronic component is also increased. Therefore, for these areas (the surface of the substrate (mounting surface)), the part number (number published in the catalog) of the SMD type electronic component is engraved or stamped on the surface of the package body of the SMD type electronic component. It can be printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the printed product number (number published in the catalog), and this product number (listed in the catalog) can be printed. Along with the number), the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) can be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Therefore, it can contribute to the ease of recognition of SMD type electronic components.

When the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate is mounted on the SMD type electronic component, the distance between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate is extremely short (for example, Schmidt trigger). In the inverter MIC30, the distance between the back surface of the main body and the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is 0.1 mm to 0.2 mm.), The back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface of the board ( There is a problem that it is difficult to find such an illegal circuit even if some kind of illegal circuit is formed in the gap with the mounting surface).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is adopted as a method for preventing the formation of some illegal circuit between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

We adopted a configuration in which each wiring pattern that transmits control signals is not arranged in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). In the area where the control signal is transmitted), a configuration is adopted in which each wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal is not arranged at all.

In the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, a wiring pattern that electrically connects to the ground (GND) and a wiring pattern that supplies power are not arranged at all. .. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). A wiring pattern that electrically connects to the ground (GND) and a wiring pattern that supplies power are not arranged in the area passing through the ground (GND).

We adopted a configuration in which no through holes are arranged in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), through-hole MTHs are arranged at the upper right and upper left of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and the front surface of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. A configuration is adopted in which the through-hole MTH is not arranged at all in the area (mounting surface) (in other words, the area passing through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). As described above, the through-hole MTH is electrically connected by holes (copper-plated holes) penetrating both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the same ground (GND) can be used. In addition to this through-hole MTH, a plurality of through-hole MTH'not shown is also provided on the main control board 1310 in order to route various wiring patterns on both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310. Although existing, such through-hole MTH'also passes through the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower part of the main body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30). A configuration is adopted in which the through-hole MTH'is not arranged at all in the area where the through hole MTH'is arranged.

Of each lead of the SMD type electronic component, a wiring pattern that electrically connects to one lead is formed in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component to form the SMD type. Adopted a configuration that does not pull out the electronic parts of. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), a region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 with various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30. (In other words, the region that passes through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30) is not arranged at all, and a configuration is adopted in which the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is arranged from above or below.

Of the leads of SMD type electronic components, in order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one lead to the other lead, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface of the corresponding substrate (mounting surface) ), We adopted a configuration in which each wiring pattern that transmits control signals is not placed at all. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), a region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 with various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30. (In other words, the region that passes through the lower part of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30) is not arranged at all, and a configuration is adopted in which the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is arranged from above or below.

By soldering each lead of the SMD type electronic component to the rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern is passed through. We adopted a configuration in which the control signal cannot be taken out. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 to form a land pattern. We adopted a configuration in which the control signal cannot be taken out without going through each wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the inverter. In other words, a configuration was adopted in which the control signal could not be taken out from a portion different from each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to illegally form a new circuit such as a short-circuited circuit or a broken circuit in the gap between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. Can be difficult. In addition, since various wiring patterns to SMD type electronic components can be visually observed, the intention of a fraudster to provide an unauthorized circuit for SMD type electronic components should be abandoned. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against SMD type electronic components.

Further, by not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and this SMD are not arranged at all. A control signal to the SMD type electronic component so that another illegal IC (SMD type electronic component) is not mounted between the back surface of the main body of the type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the corresponding board. And illegal control signals to other ICs can be combined and used in the area of the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the corresponding substrate.

Further, by not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, another illegal IC (SMD type electronic component) As a type, it is easy to arrange the control signal between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. You can make it impossible to select things.

Further, a wiring pattern electrically connected to one of the leads of the SMD type electronic component is formed in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. By not extracting the SMD type electronic component to the outside, it is possible to prevent the control signal for transmitting the wiring pattern extracted to the outside from being illegally used.

Further, each lead of the SMD type electronic component is soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 via each wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern. By extracting the control signal without using it, the control signal cannot be extracted from a part different from each lead of the SMD type electronic component, so that the control signal for transmitting the wiring pattern cannot be used illegally. can do.

Further, in order to shorten the wiring pattern for electrically connecting one lead and the other lead among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface of the corresponding substrate ( By not arranging each wiring pattern that transmits control signals in the area of the mounting surface), each wiring pattern that is electrically connected to each lead of the SMD type electronic component can be arranged from above or below the SMD type electronic component. By arranging it, it is possible to prevent an illegal circuit from being formed around the lead. Of the leads of SMD type electronic components, unused leads (also referred to as "empty terminals") can be electrically connected to a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to ground (GND). Or, when electrically connecting to the wiring pattern that supplies power, arrange it from above or below the SMD type electronic components so that an illegal circuit cannot be formed around the empty terminal. Can be done.

Further, by not arranging through holes at all in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the main body of this SMD type electronic component are arranged. To prevent other illegal ICs (SMD type electronic components) from being mounted between the back surface and the front surface (mounting surface) of the corresponding board, it is possible to prevent the control signal from being taken out through the through hole. It is possible to prevent other illegal ICs from being fixed (soldered) to the through hole, and the control signal from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate can be used as a through hole for the control signal. It can be prevented from being used as a take-out.

Further, by not arranging the wiring pattern for electrically connecting to the ground (GND) and the wiring pattern for supplying power in the region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. , Another illegal IC (SMD type electronic component) is mounted between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of this SMD type electronic component. It can be prevented from becoming a drive source for other illegal ICs.

Next, a configuration in which SMD type electronic components are integrated and mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a board treated as a main board will be described. As described above, the SMD type electronic components can be miniaturized, so that the size of the substrate itself can be miniaturized by being collectively mounted. Here, the main control board 1310 will be described as the main board, and when the main control board 1310 is visually observed in a state of being housed in the main control board box 1320, the visibility measure of the product number by the SMD package is taken. Other configurations (hereinafter, referred to as “configuration of product number visibility measures by SMD package according to the second to third embodiments”) will be described. In addition, in FIGS. 139 (a) and 139 (b), it is described as the embodiment shown in FIGS. For those having the same function as ()), the same reference numerals are given and the above-mentioned setting display 1310 g, base monitor 1310 h and the like are omitted from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawings.

[Comparison between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the second embodiment]

In the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, this lead is applied to the surface (mounting surface) 1310x region of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmidt trigger inverter, which is a lead type electronic component, is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the orientation designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the type electronic component, is arranged is a solid white line (or black) as silk printing. The component number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30 and in the lower left.

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 and information is to the right. A region is provided in this information area, and the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easier to see than the above.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the main control MPU 1310a which is a lead type electronic component and various lead type connectors are used. The surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310'by consolidating alternative SMD type electronic components that have the same functions as electronic components such as various read type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs. ) Implemented in 1310x'. The external dimensions (vertical dimension, horizontal dimension, and thickness dimension) of the main control board 1310'are the same as the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. ..

The main control board 1310'has various electronic components in the region of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'on the left side of the center line, with a straight line passing through the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side as the center line. In addition to being formed as a component placement area 1310xa'for arranging various connectors, the component number and part number (listed in the catalog) are in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' on the right side of this center line. It is formed as a component list area 1310xb', which is an information region represented like a component list of electronic components configured by arranging the numbers).

Specifically, in the component placement area 1310xa', a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type main control MPU1310a included in the lead type, various lead type connectors MCN1 to MCN4 (a plurality of other connectors not shown), and a resistor MR0. -MR4 (other not shown), capacitors MC0-MC5, MC30 (other not shown), diode D0 (other not shown), Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (other not shown) IC) is implemented. In the component placement area 1310xa', the area (not shown) indicating the position (which may include the orientation designation) in which these various electronic components and various connectors are placed is a solid white line (or a solid black line) as silk printing. In addition to being printed with, the corresponding part numbers are printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of these various electronic parts and various connectors. In addition, various connectors use lead type ones, but this is because when wiring is connected to the connector, the stress caused by this wiring (this stress is routed in the wiring path until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is because the reaction force of the wiring generated by the reaction acts on the connector to prevent it from peeling off from the board.

In the part list area 1310xb', a part list of electronic parts composed of a part number and a part number (number published in a catalog) arranged is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The size of the part number and the part number is larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part placement area 1310xa'. Is printed in white (or black). A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. .. By this delimiter, the part number and the part number (number published in the catalog) can be distinguished and identified.

In addition to the product number (number published in the catalog), the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Further, in addition to describing the information of such parts, precautions regarding the gaming machine may be described. For example, a description may be made for the purpose of calling attention, such as "The main control board is an important board for security, and care should be taken when handling it."

In this way, the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310'can be divided into the component placement area 1310xa'and the component list area 1310xb', so that the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' can be divided. It is possible to easily recognize various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the device.

Instead of silk printing printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x'of the main control board 1310', the foil removing region and the foil removing in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment described later will be described. Characters may be adopted, or a resist-removed area using a double-coated resist and a white resist-removed character using a double-coated resist in the configuration of the product number visibility measure according to the sixth embodiment. And may be adopted.

[Comparison between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the third embodiment]

In the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, this lead is applied to the surface (mounting surface) 1310x region of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmidt trigger inverter, which is a lead type electronic component, is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the orientation designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the type electronic component, is arranged is a solid white line (or black) as silk printing. The component number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30 and in the lower left.

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 and information is to the right. A region is provided in this information area, and the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easier to see than the above.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 139 (b), the main control MPU1310a which is a lead type electronic component and various lead type connectors are used. The surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310'by consolidating alternative SMD type electronic components that have the same functions as electronic components such as various read type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs. ) Implemented in 1310x'. By aggregating SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x'of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310'can be reduced. The external dimensions (vertical dimension, horizontal dimension, and thickness dimension) of the main control board 1310'are the horizontal dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Only the dimensions are half the length (the vertical dimensions and the thickness dimensions are the same).

Various electronic components and various connectors are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x'of the main control board 1310'. The arrangement of these various electronic components and various connectors is arranged in the component arrangement area 1310xa'formed on the main control board 1310'in the configuration of the visibility measure of the product number by the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above. (That is, the area (not shown) indicating the position (which may include the orientation specification) where these various electronic components and various connectors are arranged is the same arrangement as the same arrangement as white (or silk printing). , Black), and the corresponding part numbers in the vicinity of these various electronic components and various connectors are also printed in white (or black) as silk printing with the same arrangement. In addition, various connectors use lead type ones, but this is because when wiring is connected to the connector, the stress caused by this wiring (this stress is routed in the wiring path until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is because the reaction force of the wiring generated by the reaction acts on the connector to prevent it from peeling off from the board.

On the back surface (solder surface) 1310y'of the main control board 1310', a component list which is an information region formed on the main control board 1310' in the configuration of the visibility measure of the product number by the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above. The parts list of electronic parts composed of the part numbers printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the area 1310xb'and the part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are arranged in white (or black) as silk printing. , Black). The size of the part number and the part number (number published in the catalog) is compared with the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310'. Large (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. .. By this delimiter, the part number and the part number (number published in the catalog) can be distinguished and identified. In addition to the product number (number published in the catalog), the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Further, in addition to describing the information of such parts, precautions regarding the gaming machine may be described. For example, a description may be made for the purpose of calling attention, such as "The main control board is an important board for security, and care should be taken when handling it."

Further, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y'of the main control board 1310', each lead of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a (described as the part number "MIC1" in the figure) and the lead type electronic component are used. Each lead of a certain capacitor MC0 to MC5, MC30 and resistors MR0 to MR4 protrudes from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y'of the main control board 1310'and is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310'. There is a part (indicated as a middle black circle (●) in the figure), but the part number and part number (numbers listed in the catalog) are the main control board 1310'so that they do not overlap (avoid) this part. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part list area 1310xb'formed in.

In this way, the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x'of the main control board 1310'is used as the area for component placement, and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310'is the component number and the product number (listed in the catalog). The front surface (mounting surface) 1310x'of the main control board 1310'and the back surface of the main control board 1310' Since the role of the (solder surface) 1310y'can be separated, various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'can be easily recognized.

Further, by integrating SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x'of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced, so that the lead type can be used. The number of ring-shaped land patterns required when mounting electronic components can be determined and reduced. As a result, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y'of the main control board 1310', the number of parts where various leads of the lead type electronic components are projected and soldered is reduced, so that the back surface of the main control board 1310' (solder surface) Soldering surface) 1310y'can be formed as a flat surface.

In addition, since various leads of lead-type electronic components protruding from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y'of the main control board 1310'are soldered, they are reflected and dazzling when exposed to light from a fluorescent lamp or the like, and are soldered. Although there may be an adverse effect that it becomes difficult to see the attached part, as described above, various leads of lead type electronic components are projected and soldered on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y'of the main control board 1310'. Since the back surface (solder surface) 1310y'of the main control board 1310'can be formed as a flat surface by reducing the number of the formed portions, even if light from a fluorescent lamp or the like hits the flat surface, There is no adverse effect that the parts list of electronic parts composed of the silk-printed part numbers and the part numbers (numbers published in the catalog) arranged in order is difficult to see.

Instead of silk printing printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x'and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y'of the main control board 1310', the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment described later is used as a measure for visibility of the product number. The foil removing area and the foil removing character may be adopted in the configuration, or the resist removing area and the resist removing area using the double-coated resist in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment and the double coating. A white resist-free character using a resist may be adopted.

By the way, a general electric machine maker uses a multilayer board capable of forming various wiring patterns in each layer. However, the main control board and payout control board used in gaming machines are two-layer boards (“double-sided boards” that form various wiring patterns on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the board in order to enhance security. ”) Is adopted, and it is necessary to mount various electronic components only on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate regardless of whether the electronic components are lead-type electronic components or SMD-type electronic components. For example, in order to enhance security, it is necessary to mount the ZIP type main control MPU1310a included in the read type on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and it is profitable to mount the read type electronic components. For those with, this lead type electronic component is mounted without using the SMD type electronic component.

When SMD type electronic components and lead type electronic components coexist on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or payout control board, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or payout control board Compared with the case where only the lead type electronic component is mounted on the surface, the number of leads of the lead type electronic component protruding from the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board and the payout control board is reduced. As a result, it is possible to increase the area used as an area for forming various wiring patterns on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board and the payout control board, and also to acquire the area used as an area used for other functions. Can be done.

Therefore, for example, in the area where the above-mentioned area is increased on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, various SMD type ICs and various SMD type connectors are not mounted on the main control board produced as a mass production machine. It is possible to provide a mounting land pattern and the like forming region 1310ya'(see FIG. 139 (b)) in which various land patterns for mounting can be formed and a pad pattern for extracting a signal can be formed. In the main control board produced as a mass-produced machine, various lands in the mounting land pattern forming region 1310ya'are not mounted on the various land patterns and pad patterns in the mounting land pattern forming region 1310ya'. The pattern or pad pattern becomes an unmounted pattern, and the mounting land pattern or the like forming area 1310ya'is an empty area.

When such an unmounted pattern is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, various electronic components and various connectors on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board are formed depending on the region where the unmounted pattern is formed. However, when such an unmounted pattern is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, the surface of the main control board (the surface of the main control board) is restricted. The entire area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board can be effectively used without being restricted by the arrangement of various electronic components and various connectors on the mounting surface) and the routing of various wiring patterns.

Further, since such an unmounted pattern is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, it cannot be visually recognized from the front surface (mounted surface) of the main control board, and the existence of the unmounted pattern can be hidden. , Preferred for security.

It should be noted that a part of such unmounted patterns may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board for convenience. For example, the connector (SMD type connector) may be easier to connect to the wiring if it is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board.

Further, a part of such unmounted patterns may be formed as a lead type electronic component or a lead type connector for convenience. For example, there are cases where soldering strength is required, such as a connector that is frequently inserted and removed.

Next, when the main control board 1310 is visually inspected in the main control board box 1320, the manufacturer name (abbreviation and symbol) due to the small surface area of the package body of the small Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 which is an SMD package. Other configurations of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as "4th to 6th embodiments") in which measures for visibility of the product number are taken by the SMD package that the product number (number published in the catalog) becomes small and difficult to see. "Structure of measures for visibility of product numbers by the SMD package" will be described. In addition, in FIGS. 140A to 140C, it is described as the embodiment shown in FIGS. 138 (a) and 138 (b) (hereinafter, "configuration of product number visibility measures by SMD package according to the first embodiment"". Those that perform the same function as ()) are designated with the same reference numerals.

[Comparison between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the position (orientation designation) for arranging the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is also specified on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The area MSLKMIC 30 indicating (including) is printed as a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC 30 is silk printed. Is printed in white (or black).

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 and information is to the right. A region is provided in this information area, and the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easier to see than the above.

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) so as to be arranged near the lead and the corresponding rectangular land pattern) is used as silk printing. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. ..

On the other hand, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further main. The area MSLKMIC30'indicating the position (including the orientation designation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged at the position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310 is a white chain wire as silk printing. (Or, the black chain line) is printed, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30'and in the upper left. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part numbers and arrange them in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components for printing. On the other hand, since the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased for printing.

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Instead of the product number MSLKMIC30p, the product number MSLKMIC30p is the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and an information region is provided below the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC30'. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the product number (number published in the catalog) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body. Therefore, the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

The product number MSLKMIC30p may be the same as or larger than the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility measures by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. You may. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p can be increased for printing.

In addition to the product number (number published in the catalog), the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In this case, white (or black) as silk printing so that the size is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is preferable that it is printed with. As a result, the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The area MSLKMC30'indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed at the position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30 (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is a solid white line (or a solid black line) as silk printing. In addition to being printed, the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30'and in the upper left. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so that the size of the component number is used in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. While it is necessary to make it smaller and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing, the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, so the size of the component number is increased. This is because it can be printed.

[Comparison between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the position (orientation designation) for arranging the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is also specified on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The area MSLKMIC 30 indicating (including) is printed as a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC 30 is silk printed. Is printed in white (or black).

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 and information is to the right. A region is provided in this information area, and the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easier to see than the above.

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) so as to be arranged near the lead and the corresponding rectangular land pattern) is used as silk printing. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. ..

On the other hand, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further main. The area MSLKMIC30'indicating the position (including the direction designation) in which the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged at the position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310 is a chain wire as a soldering area. At the same time, the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a soldering character in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30'and on the upper left side.

The foil removal region is a layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed, and is a chain wire with a wiring pattern that is copper foil, except for the wiring pattern for transmitting control signals, the wiring pattern for supplying power, and various land patterns. It is an area formed by pulling out the copper foil around it. The region MSLKMIC30'formed as the foil removing region has a cutout portion 1310yMIC30 in a part on the left side in FIG. 140 (b). As a result, the region MSLKMIC 30'becomes a katakana U-shape, and the solid earth formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 via the cutout portion 1310yMIC 30 and the inner region of the U-shaped region MSLKMIC 30'. And can be in a state of being electrically connected. This is because the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so that the ground (GND) is on the back surface (solder surface) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 corresponding to the mounted area. This is because it is possible to prevent the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 from malfunctioning due to noise (to make it stronger against noise) by securing the region as much as possible.

The foil removal character is formed as a removal character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around the character. The part number formed as the foil removing character is formed as a foil removing character larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part numbers and arrange them in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components for printing. On the other hand, since the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form the foil-free character.

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Instead of the product number MSLKMIC30p, the product number MSLKMIC30p is the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and an information region is provided below the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC30'. It is formed as a soldering character so that it is easy to see compared to the size of the product number (number published in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body. The foil removal character is formed as a removal character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around the character. Therefore, the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

The product number MSLKMIC30p formed as the foil removal character is the same as the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. It may be present or it may be large. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so that the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is used in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. While it is necessary to make it smaller and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing, the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, so the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is increased. This is because it can be formed as a foil-free character.

In addition to the product number (number published in the catalog), the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as foil-free characters. In this case, the characters are formed as foil-free characters so as to be easily visible compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Is preferable. As a result, the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The region MSLKMC30'indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged at the position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30 (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is formed by a chain wire as a soldering region, and this region MSLKMC30 is formed. A part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a soldering character in the vicinity of'and on the upper left side. The foil removal region is a layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed, and is a chain wire with a wiring pattern that is copper foil, except for the wiring pattern that transmits control signals, the wiring pattern that supplies power, and various land patterns. It is an area formed by pulling out the copper foil around it. The foil removal character is formed as a removal character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around the character. The part number formed as the foil removing character is formed as a foil removing character larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the part numbers and arrange them in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components for printing. On the other hand, since the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form the foil-free character.

The wiring patterns that form the foil removal area and the foil removal characters are electrically insulated from various electronic components, and are also a wiring pattern that transmits control signals, a wiring pattern that supplies power, and various types. It is electrically insulated from the land pattern and the solid earth formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

[Comparison between the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment]
In the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the position (orientation designation) for arranging the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is also specified on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The area MSLKMIC 30 indicating (including) is printed as a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC 30 is silk printed. Is printed in white (or black).

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC 30 and information is to the right. A region is provided in this information area, and the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easier to see than the above.

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) so as to be arranged near the lead and the corresponding rectangular land pattern) is used as silk printing. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. ..

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, green color is adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are adopted. ) The whole is painted with green resist except for various land patterns.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140 (c), the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further main. The area MSLKMIC30'indicating the position (including the orientation designation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed at the position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310 is painted white twice. A white resist using a white resist that is formed by a chain wire as a white resist removing region using a resist and has a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 applied twice in the upper left in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30'. It is formed as a blank character.

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Instead of the product number MSLKMIC30p, this product number MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the front surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and below the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC30'. It is formed as a white resist-free character using a white resist coated twice so as to be a size that is easy to see compared to the size (number published in the catalog).

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Region MSLKMC30'is a region where the capacitor MC30 is placed at a position corresponding to the MSLKMC30 (the orientation is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity). In addition to being formed by a chain wire, the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a white resist-free character using a white resist coated twice in the vicinity of this region MSLKMC30'and on the upper left side.

Specifically, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is entirely covered with a white resist (that is, a double-coated white resist) as the first of the double-coated white resists. For the first time, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns). Then, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is located at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 as the second time among the white resists coated twice. , The area MSLKMIC30'indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) in which the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is masked as a white resist removing area in a chain line, and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is located in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30'and is in the upper left. The part number corresponding to is masked as a white resist-free character, and an information area is provided below this area MSLKMIC30', and the part number MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is masked as a white resist-free character in this information area. The area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the inverter MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) at the position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. 'Is a chain line masked as a white resist removing region, and the part number corresponding to the inverter MC30 is masked as a white resist removing character in the vicinity of this region MSLKMC30' in the upper left.

In the masked state, the entire back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is covered with the white resist by solid coating the white resist except for various land patterns. That is, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns.

As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the entire surface is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the white of the second layer is formed. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area MSLKMIC30'indicating the position (including the direction designation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is white. A part number formed by a chain wire as a resist removal area, a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a white resist removal character, and is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number published in the catalog). The MSLKMIC30p is formed as a white resist-free character, and the region MSLKMC30'indicating the position where the inverter MC30 is placed (the direction is not specified because the inverter MC30 has no polarity) is formed by a chain wire, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed. Formed as white resist-free characters. Therefore, the part number (number published in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

When the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a character without white resist, it is formed to be larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form a white resist-free character.

When the product number MSLKMIC30p is formed as a character without white resist, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. It may be the same as or larger than. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so that the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is used in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. While it is necessary to make it smaller and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing, the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, so the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is increased. This is because it can be formed as a character without a white resist.

In addition to the product number (number published in the catalog), the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as white resist-free characters. In this case, the characters are formed as white resist-free characters so as to be easily visible compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Is preferable. As a result, the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably visually recognized.

When the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a character without white resist, it is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form a white resist-free character.

In the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns, but the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is also coated with various lands with a white resist. It may be configured to be solidly painted except for the pattern. In this case, the area indicating the position (which may include the orientation designation) of various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is silk printing and the surface (mounting) of the main control board 1310. The surface) is printed with dark solid lines such as dark green, black, and gray, and the component numbers corresponding to various electronic components are printed as silk on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Printed as dark text. With this configuration, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the other boards are solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns, which is mainly applied to these other boards. It can have the feature that the control board 1310 can be made to stand out. Further, among various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (in addition to this product number, the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols)) is also described. ) May also be printed as silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

In addition to configuring the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 to be solidly coated with a white resist except for various land patterns, the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is covered with 1. It may be configured to be printed as silk printing by using a resist of a different color of two coats in which the resist color of the second (base) and the second resist is different. For the first time (base), the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 was printed in white as silk printing except for various land patterns, and then on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 is used for the second time with the area indicating the position (which may include the orientation designation) of the various electronic components to be mounted and the component number corresponding to the various electronic components masked. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the above may be printed as silk printing in any of black, blue, yellow, and red, except for various land patterns. Even with this configuration, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the other boards are solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns, which is mainly applied to these other boards. It can have the feature that the control board 1310 can be made to stand out. In addition, the area indicating the position where the various electronic components are arranged (the orientation may be specified) and the part number corresponding to the various electronic components can be visually recognized.

Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns, but the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is also coated with various lands with a white resist. It may be configured to be solidly painted except for the pattern. In this case, a region indicating a position (which may include orientation designation) for arranging various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is set on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. A solid line is formed as a white resist removing region, and a part number corresponding to various electronic parts is formed as a white resist removing character on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Further, among various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (in addition to this product number, the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols)) is also the main component. It may be formed as a white resist-free character on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310.

[Measures to prevent alteration of SMD type electronic components]
Next, a miniaturized electronic component called an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 to replace it with an illegal electronic component and acquire an illegal game ball. Explain the points to prevent the act.

As described above, the Schmidt Trigger Inverter MIC30, which is an SMD type electronic component mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, has a width dimension of 5.3 mm and a length dimension as the size of the SMD package body. Has a height dimension of 1.5 mm, and the width dimension of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 has a width dimension of 7.8 mm including the length of the lead protruding from the two sides of the SMD package body.

Since the main control board 1310 is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, it is necessary to prevent the main control board 1310 from a person who illegally modifies and acquires an illegal game ball, and it is necessary to prevent the main control board 1310 from passing through for heat dissipation. It is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body in which a plurality of pores are formed and a transparent base body. As shown in FIG. 141, in the main control board box 1320, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303. The caulking portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism and includes a plurality of the caulking portions 1303. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then the main control board box 1320 is opened. Needs to destroy its sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

However, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire on the main control board box 1320, and the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is illegal. If it is replaced with an electronic component, there is a risk that an illegal game ball will be acquired by a person who makes such an unauthorized modification.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z having an inner diameter (2 mm in the present embodiment) smaller than the size of the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are formed in the transparent cover body 1301. Adopted the configuration to be used. As a result, even if the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire on the main control board box 1320, the SMD type Schmitt The trigger inverter MIC 30 cannot be taken out from the main control board box 1320 via the ventilation hole 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from being replaced with an illegal electronic component.

Further, as described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is one of the main circuits constituting the main control input circuit to which the detection signals from various sensors are input, and is removed from the main control board 1310 by some illegal means. Then, the main control MPU1310a always determines that there is no entry of the game ball among the various sensors, and the fraud always transmits the fraudulent activity such as the approach of the magnet or the illegal vibration. It is designed to determine that cheating is being carried out. As a result, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and if the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is missing, the person who makes an unauthorized modification does not enter the ball. By maintaining the state, an illegal game ball will not be acquired, and by executing the notification of the illegal act, the fact that the illegal modification has been made is notified to the hall computer of the game letter (hall) and the game is played. You can also tell the staff such as the clerk in the hall. Further, when the main control MPU1310a determines that among various sensors, the one that conveys the fraudulent act such as the approach of the magnet or the fraudulent vibration is always fraudulent, the launch permission signal is determined as described above. The logic of is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) to control the game ball so that it cannot be launched toward the game area 5a. Therefore, if an illegal modification is performed, the game is played. It will be in a state where it cannot be done at all.

In the above-described embodiment, the point that the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as an SMD type electronic component has been described, but as another SMD type electronic component, it has been described. For example, when a resistor is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, this SMD type resistor is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and is passed through the ventilation hole 1301z to the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to make the inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z smaller than the size of the resistance of the SMD type so as not to protrude from the inside to the outside.

Since such an SMD type resistance is small, even if it peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is visually confirmed whether or not it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. It may be difficult to distinguish. Further, when the SMD type resistor peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 jumps out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation hole 1301z, it becomes the inner lower side of the main control board box 1320. Since there is no trace of the SMD type resistor that has peeled off, it becomes more difficult to visually determine whether or not it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, for example, when the JIS standard 1/8 watt 2012 type is adopted as the resistance of the SMD type, the length dimension is 2.0 mm and the width dimension is 1.2 mm in this 2012 type. With such a small SMD type resistor, even if there is a problem that the main control board 1310 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) due to the deflection of the main control board 1310, it can be removed from the inside of the main control board box 1320. The inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z is smaller than the smaller of the length dimension and the width dimension of the small SMD type resistor (here, the width dimension is 1.2 mm) so as not to pop out to the outside. (Here, for example, 1.0 mm).

As a result, even if a small SMD type resistor is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is surely prevented from jumping out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation hole 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to visually recognize the peeled-off small SMD type resistor inside the main control board box 1320, and if the main control board box 1320 is shaken in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction, this can be obtained. A sound is generated when an SMD type resistor with a small peeling off collides with the inner wall of the main control board box 1320 or the main control board 1310, and this noise gives an opportunity to recognize the small SMD type resistor that has peeled off. Obtainable. In addition to this small SMD type resistor, when electronic components such as SMD type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are used instead of electronic components such as lead type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs. Makes the inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z smaller than the smallest of these.

In this way, even if a small SMD type electronic component is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is surely jumped out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation hole 1301z. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that the defect that the SMD type electronic component is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 due to the deflection of the main control board 1310 can be found.

In the above-described embodiment (including the configuration of the product number visibility measure by the SMD package according to the first to sixth embodiments), the SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Although the above points have been described, SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a board treated as a main board such as a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633.

[Test connector]
The pachinko machine 1 is tested in a specific testing institution and cannot be shipped to the game hall without the approval of this specific testing institution. The main control board 1310 is provided with a test connector 1310k for extracting various signals related to the game. The test connector 1310k is an SMD type electronic component. The test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged in parallel in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board). When the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested in a specific testing institution, it is usually mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and is mounted on the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k. While the test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to the game hall, the main control board 1310 is formed. The transparent cover body 1301 is not mounted on the test harness cover body side opening 1301k. Therefore, in the main control board 1310 produced as a mass production machine, a region for mounting the test connector 1310k is formed as an empty area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested in a specific testing institution, the test connector 1310k is used as a mounting land pattern or the like forming region 1310ya on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310. '(See FIG. 139 (b)) and a test harness base body side opening 1302k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k on the transparent base body 1302 facing the test connector 1310k. The structure to be formed was adopted. As a result, the surface of the main control board 1310 is produced even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested in a specific testing institution and when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine shipped to a game hall. Since the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is not formed as an empty area on the (mounting surface), other SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. .. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 can be increased.

Further, with this configuration, in preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific test institution, the test worker first starts with the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 145 to the main control board box 1320. After removing the test harness, the test harness electrically connected to the test device installed in a specific test institution is subsequently connected through the test harness base body side opening 1302k formed in the transparent base body 1302. Then, it is electrically connected to the test connector 1310k mounted on the mounting land pattern and the like forming region 1310ya'on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310. Subsequently, the test worker attaches the main control board box 1320 to the board holder 1200. In this state, the test harness can be held (held) by being sandwiched between the transparent base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 and the board holder 1200, and thus heads toward the test connector 1310k. By applying a load in the direction in which the test harness is pushed in, the electrical connection between the test connector 1310k and the test harness becomes unstable due to the vibration caused by the movable body operated by various electric drive sources provided in the pachinko machine 1. In addition to being able to prevent this from happening, it is also possible to prevent the test harness that extracts various important signals related to the game from being twisted and broken in the test of the pachinko machine 1.

In this embodiment, as the test connector 1310k, a straight SMD type connector (each pin of the connector is arranged in parallel in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board). However, the main type is a right-angle SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board). It is the back surface (solder surface) of the control board and is mounted near any of the left side, the lower side, the right side, and the upper side, and the side wall of the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k (transparent cover body 1301). The left side wall, the lower side wall, the right side wall, and the upper side wall facing the test connector 1310k) are configured to form a test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k. It may be adopted. Even with this configuration, even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested in a specific testing institution, and when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to a game hall, it is mainly produced. Since the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is not formed as an empty area on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310, other SMD type electronic components can be placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Can be implemented. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 can be increased. Further, in preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific test institution, the test operator first performs a specific test without removing the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 114. The test harness electrically connected to the test device installed in the engine is placed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board via the test harness cover body side opening 1301k formed in the transparent cover body 1301. It can be electrically connected to the mounted test connector 1310k.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine in which a test firing test terminal (test connector) to which a cable for transmitting game information to a test device in a specific test institution is connected is provided in a game control device (game control board) has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-128621 (paragraph [0054], and FIG. 6)). By the way, in the game machine described in this document, the test connector is mounted on the surface of the game control board when it is tested in a specific testing institution, whereas when it is used in a game hall, it is mounted. Since the test connector is not mounted on the surface of the game control board and becomes an empty area, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of the game control board cannot be increased due to this empty area.

Further, conventionally, a gaming machine for mounting a surface mount type electronic component on a substrate has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, in the surface mount type electronic components in the gaming machines described in this document, although there are cases where an identifier such as a product number corresponding to the surface mount type electronic component is attached, the size of the surface mount type electronic component is large. There was a problem that it was difficult to visually recognize the identifier because of its small size.

Further, conventionally, a gaming machine for mounting a surface mount type electronic component on a substrate has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface mount type electronic component in the gaming machine described in this document is mounted on a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, the surface mount type electronic component is mounted by some illegal means. There was a risk that an illegal game ball would be acquired by peeling it off from the game control board and replacing it with an illegal electronic component.

Further, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a tact switch or the like is provided on a substrate so that a tact switch or the like can be felt by operating a pressing operation unit and turning the switch on or off by a click feeling at the time of operation (for example, special feature). Kai 2017-023427 (paragraph [0071] and FIG. 20)). By the way, the electronic components such as the tact switch described in this document are of the lead type in which each of the reeds is inserted from the front surface to the back surface of the substrate into a through hole provided in the substrate and soldered on the back surface side of the substrate. It is an electronic component. When such a lead-type electronic component is mounted on a board such as a game control board that controls the progress of a game, the board bends as the lead-type electronic component is operated, and the board bends due to this bending. There was a risk that the soldered parts of other electronic components mounted on the circuit board would come off and cause electrical problems.

Further, conventionally, a gaming machine in which various control boards are arranged at predetermined positions on the back surface of the gaming board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-128621 (paragraphs [0032] to [0034], and FIGS. 3)). By the way, since the game control board that controls the progress of the game is an important board for determining whether or not to give a profit to the player, it is housed in a board case having a sealing structure and is used for fraudulent acts such as unauthorized modification. Preventive measures are required.

Further, conventionally, a gaming machine for mounting a surface mount component on a substrate has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface mount component in the game machine described in this document is mounted on a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, it is within the area of the surface of the game control board on which the surface mount component is mounted. When the wiring pattern is routed around, the distance between the back surface of the surface mount component and the front surface of the game control board is small, so even if this wiring pattern is modified by some unauthorized means, it becomes difficult to see and it becomes difficult to see the surface mount type electronic components. The problem arises that it is not possible to prevent fraudulent activity against.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117, 120 to 124, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and it can be driven strongly enough to rotate in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously driven per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N to cause the game ball. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, While abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails N, the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, the central discharge portion 2503a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so that there is a high probability that the first Accepted by the start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, and the open large winning opening 2005. be.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are accepted in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 is on the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (upstream space above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510). Upon entering the section 2505), the center accessory 2500 is discharged above the normal winning opening 2003 of the center accessory 2500 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520. After contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the normal winning opening 2003, the normal winning opening 2003 is accepted with a certain probability.

In the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 and the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 opened at a distance to the left. It is composed of the second guide passage 2522 and the second guide passage. As a result, when the game ball B is driven (so-called right-handed) with the strength of contacting the abutment portion 1006, the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, enters the upstream space portion 2505, and hits the abutment portion 1006. If the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not touch (a strength that is weaker than a right-handed hit), it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2505 circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, it is configured that the distribution of the second guide passage 2522 is more likely to be accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003 than the first guide passage 2521.

When the game ball B is received by the ordinary winning opening 2003 and detected by the ordinary winning opening sensor 2401, a predetermined number (for example, one) of games is played from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. When the ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201 and a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port closed in the attacker unit 2400. The 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by accepting the game ball B in the ordinary winning opening 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example,). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

If the game ball B is accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003 between the time when the game ball B is accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003 and the time when the ordinary lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result may be started. Since it is not possible, the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and even if the game ball B is accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is released onto the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 without having a chance to be accepted by the second starting opening 2004 or the large winning opening 2005. It is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 passes between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422, and then passes through the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424. , Passes in front of the closed large winning opening 2005 and is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004.

Then, when the game ball B passes between the guide shelf 2421 on the second start opening and the left standing wall portion 2422 of the second start opening, the normal lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B at the normal winning opening 2003 is ". When the second start opening door 2411 is advancing in "normal hit", the game ball B is guided by the second start opening door 2411 and the game ball B is accepted by the second start opening 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

The game ball B not guided by the second starting door 2411 falls on the big winning opening guide shelf 2424, passes in front of the closed big winning opening door 2413 from the left end of the big winning opening guide shelf 2424, and is right. It is discharged onto the lower rail 1004 and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, the game ball B, which is guided to the second starting port 2004 side by the second starting opening door 2411 but is not accepted by the second starting opening 2004 due to the second starting opening door 2411 retreating on the way, is the second. It enters the attacker right passage 2430 from the third opening 2433 on the lower side of the starting port 2004, is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004 without passing in front of the closed large winning opening door 2413, and is discharged from the out opening 1004. It is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the normal winning opening 2003 and the guide shelf 2421 on the second starting opening, and the second opening 2432 of the attacker right passage 2430 is open. The game ball B passing through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 has a low probability of entering the attacker right passage 2430 through the second opening 2432. The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without being involved in the big winning opening 2005.

From the above, the game ball B distributed through the first guide passage 2521 is not so accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003. Therefore, by accepting the game ball B into the ordinary winning opening 2003, the second starting port 2004 The normal lottery result in which the game is open is rarely derived, and the game ball B is not well accepted in the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, since the game ball B distributed through the second guide passage 2522 is accepted by the normal winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than that of the first guide passage 2521, the second starting port 2004 is passed by the normal winning opening 2003 of the game ball B. There is a high possibility that the normal lottery result (“normal hit”) will be drawn, and the game ball B will be accepted in the second starting port 2004.

For this reason, the player will perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, so that the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2505 In addition, the driving strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a by the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522. It doesn't become. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the driving operation of the game ball B so that the player is less likely to get bored, and to entertain the player with the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Can be made to.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 is in an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit". , "Small hit", "Time reduction (time reduction) hit")) will be drawn. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "missing", "first small hit", "second small hit", and " There are "third small hit", "2R big hit", "15R big hit", and the like. In this embodiment, the lottery probability of the "small hit" ("first small hit", "second small hit", "third small hit") is higher in the second special lottery result than in the first special lottery result. Is set high.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is "small hit", "small hit". The winning combination winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern according to the type (see FIG. 123). Since the accessory winning opening 2006 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, if a "small hit" is drawn, "right-handed" and the first guide passage. The game ball B is driven into 2521.

When the "small hit" is the "first small hit", the opening and closing time of the prize winning opening 2006 is short, and it is almost impossible to accept the game ball B. In the case of "second small hit" or "third small hit", the game ball B is accepted to the character winning opening 2006 by "right-handing" because the character winning opening 2006 is open for a long time. Probability is high. When the game balls B are accepted in the prize winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

When the "small hit" is "second small hit" or "third small hit", when the game ball B is accepted by the prize winning opening 2006, one of the accepted game balls B is the first distribution. It is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the apparatus 2530. When the "small hit" is the "second small hit", the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 passes through the second distribution device 2540 and the third distribution device 2550. Supplied on the Kroon 2553. After that, it is repelled by the distribution rotary blade 2554 and distributed to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2556. When the game ball B is accepted (distributed) in the second V winning opening 2008, the "15R jackpot" is executed. On the other hand, when the game ball B is accepted in the third loss opening 2556, the "15R jackpot" or the like is not executed and the game returns to the previous state.

On the other hand, when the "small hit" is the "third small hit", the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 moves to the first V winning opening 2007 side in the second distribution device 2540. It is sorted and "15R jackpot" is executed.

The first special lottery result and the first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, and accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. (Ii) If the result of the special lottery is "2R big hit" or "15R big hit", a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed or after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B to the large winning opening 2005 is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern) that makes the game balls B unacceptable is closed. A "big hit" game is performed in which a predetermined number of times (referred to as one round) (referred to as one round) is repeated (a predetermined number of rounds, for example, two rounds or 15 rounds).

Since this large winning opening 2005 is mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500, the player is allowed to drive the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. Can be done. When the game ball B is accepted in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by having the large winning opening 2005 accept the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. can.

In the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the first guide passage 2521 side is easier to perform the driving operation than the second guide passage 2522 side, but the second guide passage 2522. Since it is less likely to be accepted by the big winning opening 2005 than on the side, it is possible to let the player choose which passage to perform the driving operation, and it is difficult for the player to get bored by various games. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, in the case of "15R big hit" or "2R big hit" during the time saving state, after the "big hit" game is completed, the game balls B are accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and a lottery is performed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player is shortened than usual until the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is reached, and then the following The time until the "hit" is drawn is shortened.

In addition, in the "big hit" game aiming at the big winning opening 2005, since the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 exist on the way to the big winning opening 2005, the big winning opening 2005 is aimed at. There is a high possibility that the game ball B will be received by the second starting port 2004, and if the next "big hit" or "small hit" is drawn during the "big hit" game, the player is in an advantageous gaming state. Will continue for a long time, and the player can be more entertained.

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the period from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. As for the suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the combination of the lit LEDs suggests the special lottery result.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the suggestion of the special lottery result is performed as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

It should be noted that the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed). It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to stand out by 367, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the effect unit 3200, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is suppressed. can do.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the correct operation is performed when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 may display to that effect.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 of the present invention are used in the guide passage of the present invention, and the normal winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 in the present embodiment. The second starting port 2004 and the large winning opening 2005 correspond to the privilege granting unit of the present invention, respectively.

[9. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a from the left side along the peripheral edge is the first in the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. When it is accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 provided on the downstream side through either the guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, a predetermined privilege (along with the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) is received. Since a normal lottery for whether or not to open / close the second starting port 2004) is given, the player is made to drive the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 having the normal winning port 2003. You can play a game.

Since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are twisted so as to be lined up in the front-rear direction at the weighted portion 2520a in the middle of being lined up in the left-right direction. On the upper entrance side, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the left-right direction, and the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly distinguished from each other. The driving operation of the game ball B can be made easy to separate, and the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the desired first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 can be enjoyed.

On the other hand, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, since the weighted portion 2520a is twisted so as to be lined up in the front-rear direction, the player with respect to the game ball B circulating in the portion. From this, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which guide passage is circulating, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game ball B circulating in the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. can. The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 make the game ball B being guided (distributed) visible from the front, and the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the route of each guide passage at a glance because the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap each other in the parts of the heavy viewing portions 2520a that are lined up in the front and back. Can be. Further, on the exit side of the lower part of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted so as to be lined up in the left-right direction. Although the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly distinguished, since they are twisted twice on this upstream side, the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the entrance side , The relationship with the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the exit side can be difficult to determine and unclear.

Therefore, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is difficult to know where the game ball B comes out when the game ball B is driven (entered) into one of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It is difficult to recognize what the game result will be after the group 2520 is distributed, and if the game ball B is hit into which of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a normal prize will be won. Since it is difficult to know whether it is likely to be accepted by the mouth 2003, when the game ball B is hit, it is possible to make people care about which guide passage the game ball B is circulating, and the player is distributed. You can pay attention to the game ball B that you are playing.

Further, by paying attention to the game ball B in which the player distributes either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, the guide passage (second guide) that is highly likely to be accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003. It is possible to excite the player depending on whether or not the game ball B comes out from the exit of the passage 2522), and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game, and at the same time, it is possible to raise an unexpected exit (exit of the first guide passage 2521). ), It is possible to surprise the player by giving the player a surprise, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522 having an exit that is likely to be accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003, it is necessary to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B, so that the player It is possible to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B to drive the ball B. Therefore, it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation of the game ball B, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored by the change in the driving operation of the game ball B, and the game ball can be given to the player. It is possible to entertain the driving operation of B and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 have a portion of the weighted portion 2520a arranged in the front-rear direction, the width of the guide passage group 2520 in the left-right direction is possible in the portion. Since it can be made narrower, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the accessory winning opening 2006, the first distribution device 2530, etc. are arranged in the secured space. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 more entertaining to the player by making it possible to play and arrange a directing device.

[10. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 147 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 142, and FIG. 144 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. 145 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing, and FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, and setting value confirmation. The display process will be described. In the following description, the main control MPU 1310a may be simply referred to as "main control MPU".

[10-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for determining whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and an initial value for hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of this special random number. A determined random number, a reach determination random number used to determine whether to generate reach (reach loss) when the jackpot game state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern used to determine a variable display pattern of a special symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400 when a big hit game state is generated. A symbol random number to be used for determining the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (determination of the hit type) derived and displayed by the symbol display, and a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value of this symbol random number. Etc. are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that can accept the game ball of the second starting port 2004, and a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol hit is determined. The initial value determination random number for determining the normal symbol hit to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for normal use, and the normal symbol for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers for variable display patterns are available.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the special random number is updated directly by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value and preliminarily at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. When other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another and all the values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again and the main control is performed. Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to do.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU when it is operated when the power is turned on, or in the process when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of various information as numerical values is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when they do not match, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. An initial value derivation process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number based on the ID code extracted from, and this derived fixed value. Is set. That is, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code is always overwritten and updated in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code and a two-step security measure by the execution.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as an initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random value for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the normal winning opening 2003, the movable piece can be opened and closed to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004. It is not possible to generate a gaming state that becomes.

[10-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning signal. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S14). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch) that has three functions, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. It works as a function of the RAM clear switch to completely erase the information. In this determination, the main control MPU determines that RAM clear is not performed when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated is HI. When it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the RAM clear is performed when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is LOW. It is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. Since the time is extremely short within the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is actually pressed. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z.

In the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, the main control MPU sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, and is stored in the game information related to the game such as probability fluctuation and unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). It is a flag indicating whether to delete various information including information indicating the value of the information output judgment counter), and is set to a value of 1 when deleting various information and a value of 0 when various information is not deleted. .. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, in the main control MPU, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. Then, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and the first ON operation is performed to set the setting key switch. 1311a is turned on, and the setting key is turned on based on the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. While it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b. And / or by determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the signal of setting key ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination in step S18, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU sets the value 1 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU sets the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (described later, a setting value dedicated area in a specific area) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. Is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time of the first ON operation), and the setting of the setting value is changed. It is set to a value of 1 when it is permitted to do so, and to a value of 0 when it is not permitted to change the setting of the set value. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs a wait time wait process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is waiting until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. When the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 boots in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the payout control board 633 is the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). ) Is ready to receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. In the determination of step S24, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

In the determination in step S24, when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and to a value of 0 when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted.

In the determination of step S25, the main control MPU has a value of 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value of 0. (Step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when various information is erased and a value 0 when various information is not erased. In the determination in step S26, the main control MPU calculates the checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not erased (step S28). This checksum considers various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the total.

Following step S28, in the main control MPU, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off time processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, checksum value (sum value), game backup information such as the backup flag BK-FLG value, etc. in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power cutoff process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the power is turned off, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

In the determination in step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU has a backup flag BK-FLG that is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the processing for power off on the main control side has not been normally completed, an error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. A detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310 g.

The power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is set from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). After the first ON operation is performed by rotating the pachinko machine 60 degrees in the clockwise direction, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, so that the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. In the determination of step S18 described above, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and sets by the signal of the setting key ON. By determining that the setting key 1311a is ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and in step S20A described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 1. In the determination of step S25 described above, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and the setting change of step S37 described later is performed. Following the process, in the process of step S38 described later, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed by clearing all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (the RAM error can be cleared). Hereinafter, it will be described as "first RAM error canceling method").

As a method different from this first RAM error clearing method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. As a result, the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. Therefore, in the determination in step S26 described above, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that various information will be erased, and in the processing of step S38 described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is used. By clearing the area except for the specific area, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed (hereinafter, referred to as "second RAM error clearing method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU determines in the determination of step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the processing for power off on the main control side has not been completed normally, the error display in step S33 is performed and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When telling that the content stored in is abnormal (or unreliable), there are two cancellation methods, the first RAM error cancellation method and the second RAM error cancellation method. Can be done by. As a result, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error canceling method using the RWM clear button 633z.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power cutoff process has been normally completed, the main control MPU has a built-in main control as a power recovery time. The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). This setting reads the power recovery information from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU, and sets the power recovery information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset power" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm). The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU itself is reset, and then the main control MPU itself is restored is also included.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various subsequent processes. Therefore, the backup flag BK-is normally terminated when the main control side power is turned off, which will be described later. If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area will be cleared.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, the main control MPU performs the setting change process when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted. (Step S37). This setting change process, which will be described in detail later, is performed based on the signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switching button, and error canceling switch) that also has three functions, and here, setting switching for selecting and switching a set value. It works as a button function. Every time the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a signal to that effect (setting value selection switching signal) is input, the set value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a The changed setting value is determined based on the signal of the determination key ON from the setting key switch 1311a because the setting key cylinder of is operated from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, and is built in the main control MPU. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, the main control built-in RAM Clear all areas except for a specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU is performed by writing a value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all the areas of the main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is completed, the main control built-in RAM is always used. Except for a specific area among all the areas of the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding the specific area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" is a count of the number of balls of the game ball collected by the set value dedicated area in which the set value is stored and the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. It consists of an out-ball counting area where the results (total number) are stored. The set value dedicated area stores the set value whose setting is changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball counting area is the ball of the game ball collected by the out port 1008 counted in the ball number counting process described later. The counting result (total number) of the number is stored.

The main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU is a logic of a signal (RAM clear signal) that conveys that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch. Indicates to clear the RAM, and when erasing various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing is not completed normally, the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is used. The unique ID code stored in advance is taken out, and the initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on the taken out ID code is performed. The fixed value is set to the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number to be used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. Further, the main control MPU advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU to set the initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU is operating normally (hereinafter, "" It is described as "WDT control register"), the timer setting value is set, the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is started, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU (by the time when the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value) ( Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is started and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, the timer clear setting value is set. The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time by the WDT with built-in main control by the time set by the timer set value and starting the time again. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built in the main control MPU (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510). ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control MPU sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine test institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state is input to the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU in order to be updated by the hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring, the startup of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and are predetermined. When all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the numerical range predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values in are extracted one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is created as the transmission information by creating the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output judgment counter notification command. Remember in. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. be. In such a case, first of all the various information, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU sets interrupt enable (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. Will be done. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S54, when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. The above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit, random number for determining initial value for determining normal symbol, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, in the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including game information and other information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process in which the output of the power failure clear signal is started is performed in the power failure clear process in step S12.

Following step S60, the main control MPU stops the drive signal output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h, and the like (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on processing again. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power cutoff process".

As described above, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when it is affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power cutoff process. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. .. In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not executed because the main control side power off processing is not executed, so the previous time. The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the power cutoff process on the main control side when the power is turned off, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the system is restarted after being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are excluded. It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Further, in the determination of step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the set value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1). At that time, that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, in the process of step S38, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. In this way, when the push operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as the RAM clear switch, the push operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the machine), the main control MPU is the main control MPU when the setting change is made (when the main control MPU performs the setting change processing). Be sure to clear the specified area of the control built-in RAM. This is when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 If is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a state in which the probability fluctuation (probability change) is hit), it is necessary to delete (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business start. Therefore, a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall needs to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch. In addition, when the setting value is decided to be changed, if the setting change processing is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change processing is performed is obtained. It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as the game information from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is currently set in addition to changing the set value. Since it is an important key that can confirm the set value, only a limited number of people including the manager of the game hall are allowed to possess it, and it is limited to 2 to 3 people. In this embodiment, the set value is set. Even if the change is not decided, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall needs to erase (clear) the game backup information. When the clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, the game backup information is erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. ) Can be done.

Here, it will be described that the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent process is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the photoelectric terminal MC2, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, receives the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as DC + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. That is, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V, so that the island of the game hall is island. It is possible to complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the equipment is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power supply cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) (boot timer: in this embodiment). 2.5 seconds is set.) If a momentary power failure or power failure occurs just before the standby time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the charged charge is applied as DC + 5V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing may not be completed. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is completed in step S28. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch at the time of power recovery, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated by a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall to clear the RAM. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention display by a staff member such as a hall clerk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the process is provided. The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. This makes it impossible to proceed with the game. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly set as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) due to the progress of this game can be obtained by supplying power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control board performs the processing of steps S58 to S68, which is the backup processing for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, and the main control side power cutoff processing composed of an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can be completed, when the main control MPU of the main control MPU is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are performed. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum of step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. Never initializes. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU to contents the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power cutoff processing can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, until now. As you can see, it is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period in the event of a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power recovery, and the main control is performed. The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22. It is determined in step S24 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the determination returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24. By repeating the above steps, the game cannot be advanced.

By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt enable is enabled in step S52. By blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process that is set and described later, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) We have adopted a mechanism that can prevent various information) including information indicating the value of the counter (such as information) from being updated. When the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power failure in this way, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) Various information including information indicating the value of the counter) is covered by software so that it will not be changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and game information) by surely completing the main control side power outage processing. By configuring it in two parts, a part covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) is not changed at all). , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are surely prevented from being changed. Can be done.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and the main control is built-in as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2404 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2405. Here, first, the problem when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2404 and the information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2405, that is, the problem. , The problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of turning on the power of the main control return destination command at the time of turning on the power is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2405. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is mainly controlled in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven and the grand prize opening 2005 is opened and closed by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. It will shift from the closed state to the open state by the member.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from, the jackpot game state. It is not possible to display at all which round of the throat. That is, for example, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and a large winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the number of game balls entered in the large winning opening 2005 is used as the main control board. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the fourth round (fourth round) in the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2405 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. A large winning opening 1 closure display command is issued from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the transition from the present state to the closed state (that is, the closing start between the rounds of the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2100). When the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member. A command for displaying the fifth round of opening the special winning opening 2005 is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing that the state is changed to the above state (that is, the opening of the fifth round of the large winning opening 2005 is started). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Further, for example, a screen telling the player that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, the player indicates that the movable piece is open). When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece to open the second start port. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the 2004 is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 uses the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the starting port solenoid 2404 is started to be driven and the movable piece is closed by restoring the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. (Ii) The start port 2004 will be closed.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to be transmitted in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the gaming state is possible, and in such a case, the gaming state is returned to the gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004). There was also the problem of not knowing what kind of game a person would play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on time. A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large winning opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the state is to be changed, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is). Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but a screen telling that the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven in the big hit game state and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys to the player the message "It's a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning opening.") It is possible to instruct a player who is displayed in the display area and sits on the front of the pachinko machine to enter the game ball into the large winning opening 2005 after the power is restored. (Ii) In a state where the game ball can be accepted into the starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 As a return destination, a screen telling that the drive of the start port solenoid 2404 is started to open the movable piece and the second start port 2004 is open (for example, "the movable piece is open." The peripheral control board 1510 displays the message "Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second starting port" to the player in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the front of the pachinko machine. It is possible to instruct the player who is seated in the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored thereafter, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. It can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes, steps S58 to S68, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power cutoff process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the checksum values are always cleared in step S38 except for a specific area among all the areas of the main control built-in RAM.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, in these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then the number of main prize balls at power-on. The information output judgment counter notification command is sent. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is a RWM clear button on the payout control board 633 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on). Of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving states, high-probability non-time-saving states, and high-probability non-time-saving states It is composed of information indicating whether to recover in the state (probability and time saving state) and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). In addition to the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of)).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for mounting the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. Therefore, the worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the operator of the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device becomes the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And a series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state will be In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which of the same work is for the copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[10-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 142 and 143.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 144 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which is the routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main process in the power-on process on the main control side is used. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. .. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU is, for example, a detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and a second starting opening sensor 2402. Detection signal, detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, detection signal from the first loss opening sensor 2515, second Detection signal from V winning opening sensor 3003, detection signal from third loss opening sensor 3004, detection signal from out opening left sensor 3032 and out opening right sensor 3033, detection signal from magnetic sensor 2010, payout control board 633 Signal from RWM clear button 633z (Since the signal from this RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, it may be masked and read may be omitted.) , Detection signal from door frame opening switch 4a, detection signal from main body frame opening switch 4b, signal from setting key switch 1311a, detection signal from out port left sensor 3032, detection signal from out port right sensor 3033, described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process is read, and the input information of the main control built-in RAM is stored as input information. Store in the area. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are read, the start port winning command corresponding to the other is used as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is stored from the second start port sensor 2402. When there is a detection signal of, the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

In this embodiment, when all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those that have been subjected to empty terminal processing), this switch input processing is started. First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read in the fourth time is compared with the result read in the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including the one to which the empty terminal processing is performed) is set for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, a double reading for comparison and a double reading for comparison over the second to fourth times. Therefore, the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, Detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, detection signal from the first losing opening sensor 2515, second V winning opening sensor Detection signal from 3003, detection signal from third loss port sensor 3004, detection signal from out port left sensor 3032 and out port right sensor 3033, detection signal from magnetic sensor 2010, RWM clear button 633z of payout control board 633. (For example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button, it becomes a setting switching signal for selecting and switching the setting value), a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, and a main body frame. The detection signal from the open switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the detection signal from the out port left sensor 3032, the detection signal from the out port right sensor 3033, and the prize ball command transmitted by the prize ball control process described later are paid out. It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys that the control board 633 has been normally received.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs an input terminal defect monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU, the state of which the empty terminal process is performed is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logical state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal defect monitoring process, information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 is performed to determine whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of various input ports. Do based on. When it is determined that the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal processing is performed is not LOW, the main control MPU is classified into a notification display indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The malfunction command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the symbol random number described above is updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to the winning determination (winning determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the initial value determination random number for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the winning random number update process updates the initial value determination random number for hit determination. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not used in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 143. The random number is updated in the random number update process and the random number update process in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs a ball count counting process (step S107). In this ball count processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the detection signal from the out port left sensor 3032 is input based on this input information, and the game area 5a is partitioned and formed on the game board 5. When the out port left sensor 3032 detects the game ball collected by the out port 1008 provided in, the value 1 is set to the value of the collection ball counter that counts the number of the game balls collected by the out port 1008. The game ball collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 by inputting the detection signal from the out port right sensor 3033 while performing the addition (increment) calculation is taken out. When the right sensor 3033 detects it, a calculation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the value of the collection ball counter that counts the number of balls of the game ball collected by the out port 1008 is performed. That is, in the ball count processing, when the out-port left sensor 3032 detects the game ball collected by the out-port 1008 and the out-port right sensor 3033 detects the game ball collected by the out-port 1008, , Performs an operation of adding the value 2 to the value of the collection ball counter. The main control MPU uses the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 in the out ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. At the same time as storing, the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, the main control MPU creates a ball collection command to notify when the value of the collection ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10. Then, it is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. In the main control MPU, when the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (value 65535 in this embodiment) and further adds (increments) the value by 1 to the value of the collection ball counter, the collection ball The value of the counter overflows and becomes a value 0, and the operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, a prize ball command that pays out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls. Therefore, in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this prize ball. When the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the command is not input within the specified time, a self-check command for checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. It is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

Further, in the prize ball control process in step S108, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. In order to convey that fact, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other categories, is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2003, provided in the game board 5. Based on the game balls that have entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 (hereinafter, referred to as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5"). , The number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and in the prize ball control process of step S108, the information is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. .. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of, and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. When the number exceeds (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform that fact, and as transmission information. It is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the excess number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the above-mentioned main control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of main prize balls. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, etc.). And frame state 2 command)), it is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. When it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation goto") is performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1. The value of this radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that the radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), Create a radio wave irradiation goto notification command classified into a notification display indicating that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and store it as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input, the fraudulent act using a magnet (hereinafter, “magnet goto””. It is determined that the above is performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter is added (incremented) by the value 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, is included in the game backup information, and is initially set when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), A magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display indicating that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnet goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the ability of the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to find the magnet goto at an early stage. It has become.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, for example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (big winning opening). When a large winning opening abnormality winning is generated (when a game ball enters in 2005), a winning abnormality display command classified into a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. ..

In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and / or the magnet goto is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the fraud detection, while the radio wave irradiation goto and the magnet. When the goto is not detected, the value 0 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the fraud detection has not been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. Further, even when the occurrence of the abnormal winning of the large winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set in the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of the fraudulent activity.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the fraud has not been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Occasionally, it is set in the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, fraudulent activity. When it is determined that the detection is, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. The main control MPU reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a is input to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame opening switch 4a is detected, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b is input and the main body frame opening switch 4b detects that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. In this case, the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. The logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored), is performed. Until it is started, it is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is mainly used. It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit). It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery"), and the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and small hit type. Judgment (determines the hit type) whether or not it matches any of the hit type judgment values.

When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2402. In the case of, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variation display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the variation display pattern. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so as to light the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open Nth display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the big prize opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2 times, 2 of the round display of the function display unit 1400. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp so that the round indicator lamp is lit, and store it in the output information storage area as output information. When the round is 15 times, the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 Function display unit 1400 that sets the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp so that the 15-round display lamp is lit, stores it in the output information storage area as output information, and lights the presence or absence of time reduction in a predetermined color. Set the output of the lighting signal to the status display of, and store it in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the ordinary winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this ordinary winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the ordinary winning opening sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number is extracted and the main control is built in as the normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

The normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with a 0th to 3rd section (4 sections), and a normal winning opening is provided in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, it is normal when the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port. The winning opening winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this ordinary winning opening winning information is set, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage is placed in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage, and the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning opening prize information of the section is in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the ordinary winning opening winning information in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, respectively. It is shifted and the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning opening. The normal winning mouth winning information in the second section of the normal winning opening information storage is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning opening information storage in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening information storage, and the normal winning opening winning information storage is the first. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage will be empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is used as a reserved ball and the normal winning opening unit 1400 is used. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information so as to light the hold display, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is extracted from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the open operation state, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified to be related to the normal symbol tuning effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above is performed as transmission information. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect are created and transmitted. While storing as information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above, while being taken out normally. When the value of the symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. , Create various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect, store them in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and turn on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to be stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of winning the normal lottery) is halved.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs a set value confirmation display process (step S117). In this set value confirmation display process, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but for reading input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on this input information. The detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is in the initial position (that is, the rotation of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation by rotating 60 degrees clockwise from the position), and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used to turn the setting key switch 1311a out. A predetermined setting value display permission condition is determined by determining that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the frame 2 and determining that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key is determined by the setting key ON signal. By determining that the switch 1311a is not turned on, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied. In the set value confirmation display process, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310 g. Is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process is terminated as it is and the process returns to this routine.

Following step S117, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information. Outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2005, and outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece when it is in the big hit game state. In addition to doing, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as output signals are output to the payout control board 633, and the launch permission signal set in the launch permission logic or the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) is output to the payout control board 633. A display signal can be output to the base monitor 1310h that displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, or stored in a set value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. A lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g is output.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information is classified into various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 tuning effect-related, and jackpot-related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands (for example, a large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display Various commands classified into commands, test-related commands, and various other commands (for example, the main control board 1310 is scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game ball entered into the various winning openings provided in the game board 5. Every time the number of game balls reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as the main prize ball number information. Numerical information output command, etc.), various commands classified into specific history (for example, ball collection command to notify every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, set value is set. A setting change command that tells that the change has been made, an error display command that tells that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable), and a specific area of the main control built-in RAM The ON operation command of the setting key that informs that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area, which will be described later, is confirmed) is stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And the sum value calculated by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configure various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure. The main peripheral serial transmission port built into the main control MPU at least transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main peripheral serial data. Can be done. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure after the power is turned on, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 143. In the reservation setting of the command to be executed, in order to notify that the power has been restored, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter are used. Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command are stored as main peripheral serial data in that order. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, then to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, and the various information is accommodated. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first of all the various information, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent.

When a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command. The number of balls of the game ball collected at the out port 1008 is counted for each ball collection command, and the ball collection information stored and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) (counted value (that is, at the out port 1008). Information that associates the total number of collected game balls with the updated date and time) is updated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the business hours of the game hall are closed without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted value (that is, the game ball collected at the out port 1008) is used. The ball collection information associated with the total number of balls) and the updated date and time is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall is opened, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 sells the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball recovery information is created again from the start date, and the ball recovery information is stored and held as the ball recovery history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). As the counted value stored and stored as the ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day may be used, or the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day may be used. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is a backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup process is executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command at power-on, which indicates the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are the electric drive sources by the port output process of step S118 in this routine, is output to the peripheral control board 1510. You can do it. That is, the main control board 1310 has the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 142 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 143. Power-on status command, which is classified as power-on, to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the work area setting of. A command to return to the main control when the power is turned on and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command, and then the main control return destination when the power is turned on. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value that configures the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration in the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. Can be displayed in the production. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is restored immediately after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 142 shows. In step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 143, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on is performed. , When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the main control board inspection device is used as the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command as main peripheral serial data. It sends, then sends to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then outputs the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. Judgment counter Sends to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the notification command. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process constitutes information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[16-4. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIG. 142.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 145 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this set value, it may be read out or taken out, but when the set value is taken out, the taken out set value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates the checksum (step S202). This checksum calculates the total of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is a checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 142. It is the same process as the calculation of.

Following step S202, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is stored in the main control MPU in the main control side power off processing (power off) in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. 143. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 142. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG has a built-in main control in the main control side power cutoff process, which will be described later, for game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. It is a flag indicating whether or not the memory is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. Will be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU has a backup flag BK-FLG that is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the processing for power off on the main control side has not been normally completed, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). .. Here, the "normal range" is a value whose setting can be changed, and in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting. It is preset to a value up to the value 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination in step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed when the power is cut off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU has set values 1 to 6 in which the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are in the normal range. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the values, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when it is determined that the main control MPU is not in the normal range, the set value 1 which is an initial value is set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, any one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. Although it is determined whether or not it is a value, the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. When, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed. Occasionally, the process of step S210 may be proceeded, and the set value 1 which is the initial value may be set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed, or in the determination of step S208, the main control When the MPU determines that the range is normal, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). ..

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S216). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switching button, and error canceling switch) that also has three functions, and here, setting switching for selecting and switching a set value. It works as a button function. This determination reads a signal (setting value selection switching signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated, and the setting change signal of the set value is input from the RWM clear button 633z. Determine if it has been done. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the selection switching signal of the set value from the RWM clear button 633z is input, while the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operating. When the selection switching signal is not input, it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated.

In the determination of step S216, when it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, the main control MPU performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value to update (step S218). ). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 to the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and updates the setting value for the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU determines whether or not the enter key has been operated. Determination (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU is set counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch is operated by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) and turning it off, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise (turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise) to perform the second ON operation. 1311a is turned on based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the decision key has been operated. When the signal of the determination key ON from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the determination key is not operated.

In the determination of step S222, when it is determined that the determination key is not operated, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S216 again and determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, the processing of steps S218 and S220 is performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the determination key is used. When it is determined that is not operated, the determination of step S216 is returned again, and until the enter key is operated, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the set value is set to a value of 1 each time. It is added and updated one by one and displayed on the setting display 1310g. If the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is set on the setting display 1310g. Is displayed in. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored by the time the determination key is determined in step S222, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S222, when it is determined that the determination key has been operated, the main control MPU stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. Since the updated setting value is updated with respect to the setting value set in, the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the processing in step S224 is completed and the power is restored, the updated setting value when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the area dedicated to the setting value in the specific area of.

Following step S224, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU has an initial position (that is, a setting key) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off so that the switch 1311a is returned to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder). It is performed based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, but the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the determination returns to the determination of step S226 again, and the determination of step S226 is repeated until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S226, when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden for the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU sets the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is the first ON). It is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time of operation), and when the setting change of the setting value is permitted. The value is set to 1 and the value is set to 0 when the setting change of the set value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, it is not permitted to change the setting value after that.

Following step S232, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as that of the determination in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the setting. It is preset to a value up to the value 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, so that the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 which is the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that the range is normal, the serial communication initial setting is performed (step S234), and then a setting change command is created to set transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main peripheral serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine is terminated. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 143, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is FIG. 144. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in 1. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is mainly performed prior to the serial communication initial setting in step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, this is prioritized before the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on is set in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 143. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the setting value storage completion. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the set value history information (information corresponding to the set value and the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when it is determined that the main control MPU is not in the normal range, an error display process is performed (step S240), and the main control MPU enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. A detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310 g.

[16-5. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 144.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 146 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the value 1 is set when the set value is confirmed and displayed. When the value is not confirmed and displayed, the value is set to 0.

In the determination of step S350, the main control MPU opens the main body frame 4 and turns on the setting key when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the set value is not confirmed and displayed. (Step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, detects from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the signal and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation after being rotated 60 degrees, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Is determined to be open, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be ON by the signal of setting key ON, so that it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that there is no such condition, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU terminates this routine as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the set value is confirmed and displayed, the value 1 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and then the current installed value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as that of the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 182. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting The values up to 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are preset. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). It is determined whether or not the set value (set value stored in) is within the normal range from the set value 1 to the set value 6, and when it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is. do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU determines that the range is normal, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU creates an ON operation command for the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360). ), End this routine. The ON operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 144. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has started (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information (setting value is confirmed) of the setting key stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). Information that associates the fact with the date and time) is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ball collection history information, the set value history information, the error display history information, and the ON operation history information of the setting key described above are received. The predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the display of the specific history information such as the above can be permitted is satisfied. In the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510, a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied performs a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. By performing this, control is performed to switch to the specific history information display image for selecting and displaying the specific history information from the images displayed so far and to display the specific history information in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, the main control MPU has an OFF operation of the setting key when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting value is confirmed and displayed. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that is turned on. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by the OFF operation, and the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S362, the main control MPU terminates this routine as it is when it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off, but does not confirm and display the set value when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off. The value 0 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. The acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then an OFF operation command for the setting key is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , Set the OFF operation command of the setting key (step S368), and end this routine. The OFF operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 144. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the OFF operation command of the setting key, the above-mentioned predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling to display the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch back to the original image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, when it is determined that the main control MPU is not in the normal range, the interrupt disallow setting is set (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 144, which has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU performs an error display process (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop that continues to clear the main control built-in WDT (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared, but this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started, so by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU, the time by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and by restarting the time by the main control built-in WDT, the main control is controlled by the main control built-in WDT. The MPU does not have to be forcibly reset. Further, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. A detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310 g.

[16-6. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 142, and is a process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 142 (FIG. 145). It is a process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 146, and is a process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 146.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 147 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch is performed. While it is possible to tell that the launch is permitted, if the logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) that is the reverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to convey that the launch is stopped (not permitted). ..

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 142 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 142. When started as (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 145), the main control MPU interrupts step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 143. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 144 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. Since the emission permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the emission control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function, a reset function is provided at the time of power recovery. The main control output circuit has been reset, and its logic is the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the reverse of the launch permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 142 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 142. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 145), the main control MPU recovers power in step S400 and then displays an error, which is the present routine. In order to surely prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the processing is started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), and the predetermined output port thereof. It is output from the output terminal of the above to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 146, the main control MPU is set in step S357 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 146. In the judgment, it is judged that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU has already set the interrupt permission in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 143, it has already been shown in FIG. 146 before the error display processing of this routine is started. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 in the set value confirmation display process, when the error display process of this routine is terminated, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Therefore, the main control side shown in FIG. 144 is shown. The timer interrupt process cannot be performed, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the process cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 146, the main control MPU has an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S400. In order to surely prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It is output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error to the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed to the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), then creates an error display command to set transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting transmission information (error display command) as main peripheral serial data to peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine is terminated.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 145 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 143. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 145 and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 144. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120. The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 142, and is performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 142 (FIG. 145). The process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 146) and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot proceed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication initial setting in step S406 is performed, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is used as the main peripheral serial data for the peripheral control board. It is being sent to 1510.

The error display command is a command for notifying that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information (information corresponding to the error display command and the received date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is stored. ) Is updated.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 says "RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." In the blue background image. In addition to controlling the display of message images in white characters, the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a staff member." Is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510. It is controlled to flow from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.) by forcibly setting the maximum volume without depending on the volume. The process of notifying a RAM error by an error display command is the process having the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command for transmitting another error and then receives an error display command, the RAM Gives the highest priority to error notification.

[11. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit of FIG. 148, and FIG. 150 shows the payout control unit following FIG. 149. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 151 is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[11-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 148 to 150 under the control of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633. .. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. .. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated (step S512). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch) that also has three functions, and is stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM. It works as a function of the RAM clear switch to completely erase the information. In this determination, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is HI, it is determined that the RAM is not cleared, and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z determines. On the other hand, when it is determined that the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, it is determined that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is LOW, and the RWM clear button 633z is used. It is determined that the pressing operation unit is being operated.

In the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, a prize ball information storage area). The logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area is set. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout information (such as the PRDY signal output setting information), and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU is set to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM with built-in payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power cutoff process (when the power is turned off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the power cutoff process of the control unit is normally completed, and to 0 when the power cutoff process of the payout control unit is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has been normally completed, the payout control built-in RAM is used as the time of power recovery. The work area of (step S530) is set. In this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area, Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU determines when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to erase the payout information, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is. When it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has not been normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt enable setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Will be done. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for timing 2 ms by the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU inputs a power failure warning signal. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays 10 game balls). The prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 each time it is output.

Specifically, a counter for determining the number of prize balls information for determining whether or not to output the number of prize balls information is provided, and the payout motor 584 actually uses the counter for determining the number of prize balls information. The number of game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. Is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, the prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and stored and updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeding the number is shown). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED display.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z (for example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error canceling switch, it becomes an error canceling signal for informing that the error displayed on the error LED display has been cleared). Detection signal from blade rotation detection sensor 590, detection signal from payout detection sensor 591, detection signal from full tank detection sensor 154, BRQ signal from CR unit, BRDY signal and CR connection signal, transmitted by command transmission processing described later. The main control board 1310 conveys that the main control board 1310 has normally received the various commands, and the main payment ACK signal and the like are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball gummy determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball gummy state is generated by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is determined. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number by the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing the time such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591. Judgment when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that do not match due to the mismatch with the number of balls detected in Inconsistency counter set as a condition Time management of reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the ball gadget determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, so the ball gummy determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gadget judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input is determined. judge. The payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (For example, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure while the payout operation of the game ball is being executed by the payout device 580, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU momentarily stops or loses power when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process. Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and it becomes impossible to continue paying out the game balls, the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery The value is restored to the value stored as the payout backup information, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC, immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the stoppage or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power stop or stop even if the power is restored. Therefore, various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stoppage. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the mismatch counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. Based on, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball Gami movement determination setting process is performed. As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit is output as the PRDY signal. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. Outputs to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, and the payout device 580 can be output to the CR unit. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after the power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine. When 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. While the logic state of the signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal as LOW in order to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of. The logical state of the EXS signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored with the payout control board 633. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out of ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. The number of balls of the game ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above by the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 becomes a predetermined number or more. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball, the full tank detection sensor 154 is used in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the time counting of the full tank determination time described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is not full in the stored game ball is stored in the state information storage area.

Whether or not the number of balls of the game ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to check for full tank and out of balls this time. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned on, and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition from OFF to ON is performed, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the ball-out determination time described above. Then, when the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 ON in this full tank and ball-out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball breaks to that effect. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of balls of the game ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. The ball-out information that conveys that fact is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs the main operation setting process (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball shavings are set, retry motions are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. ..

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and the display data is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of balls of the game ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number based on this ball-out information, it corresponds. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into status displays are created based on the various information. Then, it is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 is obtained when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information. A command is created and sent to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, returning to step S539 again, the payout control MPU sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input in step S540, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and this power failure warning. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 Set the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, set the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, perform port output processing in step S548, perform port input processing in step S550, and step S552. Performs timer update processing in step S554, CR communication processing in step S554, full tank and ball out check processing in step S556, command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, and step S562. The main operation setting process is performed, the LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main processing".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for processing the payout control MPU varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that other variable processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). By this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, the writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer to clear (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is regarded as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. The process of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power cutoff process".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power cutoff process is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[11-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on time process shown in FIGS. 148 to 150.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 151 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt enable (step S596) and ends this routine.

[12. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 156. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 154 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[12-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 152. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 152 under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the initial setting processing (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC takes an extremely short time. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, a command related to control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310. And various commands such as commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a V blank signal input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is executed. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), the process returns to step S1006 again to see if the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1. Whether or not it is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the constant processing flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the effect operation unit 300 in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on the detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevating detection sensor 382 (hereinafter, referred to as "various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300"). Various information acquired from the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation. Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction and pressing of the rotation operation unit 302 are monitored. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is reflected in the game effect. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted by the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the schedule data for generation. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the production proceeds with the adjusted volume and the brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. Are set respectively. While the production is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one brightness specified value ranging from the brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. It is possible to update the tone information.

Here, the luminance specified value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value constituting the lamp pallet setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness designation value, one brightness designation value can be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value which is the minimum brightness (off) to the 31st brightness designation value which is the maximum brightness. It is a value that can be set, and the normal palette value and the special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. The player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the 31st luminance which is the maximum luminance from the 1st luminance designated value. It is possible to set one brightness specified value up to the specified value.

For example, a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) specifies a 0th (zero) brightness in which the current brightness is tentatively the minimum brightness (turns off) when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When it is set to the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the value, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance. Along the tone curve (or spline curve tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to increase, while the rotation operation unit 302 is counteracted. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of rotating clockwise, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness specified value. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be low along the tone curve (or a spline curve-like tone curve). When the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In this embodiment, a case where the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) can set the brightness while the production is in progress is prepared in advance, and at this time, the player (or the clerk of the game hall) can set the brightness. Etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the effect is in progress, the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness are obtained. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator showing the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image how much the desired brightness of the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

The normal palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information by the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated with light. be. As the normal pallet value, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve) in which one brightness designation and the corresponding palette value are predetermined in a range of 32 steps from the specified value of the 0th (zero) brightness designation to the 31st brightness designation value. , Or a spline curve tone curve).

The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the above-mentioned luminance designation value. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance designation value which is the above-mentioned luminance designation value in the other palette values. It is a value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In the present embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance for the normal pallet value with respect to various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated with direct light. Of the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the gradation information described above and are directly irradiated as light, the palette is applied to a specific decorative board (LED that is dazzling to the player) that is not shown. A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one step, and is one of the 32 steps in the range from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the above-mentioned luminance designation value. The luminance designation and the corresponding palette value are set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set by using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. The state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light can be visually recognized as the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specified value, which is the minimum luminance (off). As the lowest possible brightness, the normal palette value is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the maximum palette value (100%) is set, and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Of these, one luminance designated value and a corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. With respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light when setting the brightness of While it is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) determines the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the luminance specified value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used. The brightness of the LED used is set to the minimum brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights out)), and is linked to this. Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value at which the brightness is the next highest after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value which is the minimum brightness (turning off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect is set, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After seeing, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker brightness is more effective), and other By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. Even if one luminance specified value is set up to the luminance specified value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one luminance specified value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since one brightness specified value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for each of the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the light emission modes set mutually (bright or dark). It is possible to adjust the brightness extremely easily without breaking the relationship).

Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light by the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, the special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent of the normal palette value) for the LED used as the indirect light. The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is controlled by the normal palette value. Therefore, the LED used as indirect light. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, one screen generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC by reading the image data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC by the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Minutes (one frame) of drawing data are output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but although so-called frame dropping occurs, the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame by the sound data output processing described later will occur. From various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter, referred to as "various speakers"), it is possible to give priority to the production by the production sound such as music or sound effect according to the various production.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the sound data to various speakers from the set output channel. .. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to indicate which screen data is output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. Update the pointer to.

Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate which light emission data is to be output from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

In the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC from the first sound command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to. Electrical drive source The drive data of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that constitutes the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the drive data that should be originally instructed in the scheduler update process is forcibly updated.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the effect. Update random numbers (for example, random numbers used for hold look-ahead related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze the various commands that have been issued. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads out the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the various analyzed commands. (Extract) Set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one of the received command analysis processes. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the above-mentioned brightness designation value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value. And, respectively, are set. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the schedule data for generating the light emission mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs the lamp pallet setting process. By executing this, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value described above. When one brightness specified value up to the 31st brightness specified value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. You can do it.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, or a normal symbol. A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of pending numbers (0 to 4), and a variable pattern for instructing the start of variable effects such as variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special symbols. It analyzes whether it is a command, a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start hold changes, or a big prize opening 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is accepted in the big winning opening 2005, and which game is currently Recognize whether it is in a state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the reception command analysis processing. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, and general. Various commands classified as related to the synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to the normal electric function effect, various commands classified as the notification display, various commands classified as the status display, various commands classified as related to the test, and so on. There are various other commands that are classified. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on a received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, the effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1511, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects, is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging the drive data of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in a time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transferred. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and that one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is stored in the peripheral control ROM. It is read from (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC is one screen that reads image data from the SDRAM and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. Minutes (1 frame) of drawing data are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data instructed by the pointer is selected. Read (extract) from the peripheral control ROM and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , Set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit performs steady processing), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in this sound data creation process. Sound data is output from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is variable by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into a value of 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as a substrate volume 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. Music and sound effects are played from the door. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. It has become like.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data of the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included.

Specifically, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch described above is set as the sub-volume value for the effect sound, and the volume adjustment switch is rotated for the notification sound. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped in the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). 0.5 seconds have passed since the change pattern command was received until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the change display of the decorative symbol, and 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit. Except for (up to)), it can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). A certain period of time (in this example, the periphery) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). 0.5 seconds after the variable pattern command is received by the control unit until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. By operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume control switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate except for (until the elapse of seconds). It is converted into 7 levels of volume 0 to 6, and further, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by setting the board volume by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is calculated. Actually, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 are amplified to the master volume value which is the volume to flow, and the amplified production sound is serialized. It is designed to be output as audio data.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side is used. , The volume flowing from the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 is set to be the allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. The volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value to adjust is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotation operation, and the volume of this combined production sound is actually the top center on the door frame 3 side. The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 are amplified to the master volume value which is the volume to flow, and this amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to be used as a notification sound. On the other hand, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of It is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the frame speaker 622, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 occurs or the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control to play the notification sound in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the fraudulent act against 1, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is set to mute. The sound data of the built-in track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track with the built-in notification sound, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound are combined. , The volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the volume flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. The master volume value is amplified, and the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, only the maximum volume notification sound flows. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, but the production sound is described above. It is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation.

In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute is subordinated to the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch. It is set again as a volume value (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub of the adjusted effect sound. (Set to the volume value), the sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or pachinko. When the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the fraudulent act against the machine 1, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame. Although it flows from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of 4, this muted production sound is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation, so that the notification sound has passed a predetermined period and the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side. When 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 stop flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but the notification sound starts to flow for a predetermined period. It starts to flow again from the point where it progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation until the time has passed.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC peripherally controls the volume from mute to the maximum volume by a program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low level, the production sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers are reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 is used. When a problem has occurred or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff such as the clerk of the game hall from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the fraudulent act of the player due to the notification sound.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for routine processing and back up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The value 0 is set in the flag VB-FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1008 to step S1006. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1008, and a value 1 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG. Then, each process of step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing in step S1038, the process is completed. Become. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[12-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be explained. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 153 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 152 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady state. When the execution of the process is completed, the value is set to 0.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this is as it is. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB. -Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in the determination of step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the execution of the peripheral control unit stationary processing is completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 152. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 152. By setting the value 1 to the constant processing flag SP-FLG in, the peripheral control unit stationary processing is being executed, which is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control in FIG. 152. Peripheral control unit, which is this routine, indicates that the execution of peripheral control unit steady processing is completed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the V blank signal interrupt process, whether or not the value of the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is the routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process. Is designed to determine whether or not the execution has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so that the processing fails.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined by step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 152. It will be in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 152. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time that the above-mentioned processing failed exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[12-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 152 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 154 (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 152, in which the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms timer interrupt is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU of the peripheral control IC adds a value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 152. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. According to the drive data to be driven, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor or solenoid drive process is executed. do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various production units provided in the game board 5) or the like. ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the original) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the various production units provided in the game board 5 are input. (Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC is the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in the various production units provided in the game board 5 based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. By setting or acquiring the movable position, the movable position can be grasped.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the rotation operation unit) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input. The rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. From the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation presence / absence of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 by operating the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are stored in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided and back up. In this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the peripheral control IC RAM and the steady processing backup area provided in the peripheral control IC RAM are set in different areas and are set to SDRAM. The backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the DRAM and the backup area for steady processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 152, various processes related to the production of steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing, restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms Timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[12-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sends the main peripheral serial data to 1 byte (8 bits) at the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC. ) Is fetched into the receive buffer, and when this fetch is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 155 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC inputs 1 byte (8 bits) of information in the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the data is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially input from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a mode in which the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, the status is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, and the CPU is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has not been sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, in the second byte of the main peripheral serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circuit serial data, is sequentially taken out from the receive buffer in a certain mode, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge is performed to generate noise, so that the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data on the peripheral control board 1510 side are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the substrates of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. It can be determined.

In the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), End this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has a sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202. When it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated as it is.

[12-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 156, and whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. (Step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. In the determination of step S1304, when 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has not been input. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is, and when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

In the determination of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started, the power saving process is performed. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation to the motor and solenoid provided in the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing it, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination of step S1312, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. Is determined. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, the CPU of the peripheral control IC cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in the determination in step S1312. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in the determination of step S1312 that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314 to perform the peripheral control IC. The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 152 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state occurs. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[13. Main control board control process]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 157, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 3002. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and this is the first of the RAM. (I) Execute a first start port passage process such as storing in a special symbol hold storage area (step S232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "15R jackpot", 15R A process of opening / closing the big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the big hit game state. Further, when the mode suggesting "2R big hit" is obtained, a process of opening / closing the big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the 2R big hit gaming state.

Further, in the big hit control process (step S235A), after the opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, each set process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is set, and the 2R big hit game is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is an aspect suggesting "2R big hit". It is set when the state is terminated, and when the 15R jackpot gaming state is terminated during the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state. Then, when the time reduction flag becomes a big hit next time, or when the counter value of the time reduction frequency counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 168, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop (not shown) It is reset by the process.

Further, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times of variation display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and is controlled to the time reduction state after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case, when the jackpot game state is terminated, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. Then, the time reduction counter is counted down every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes "0". Occasionally, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 168, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

If the jackpot executing flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0". (Step S237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S238), and the second special symbol is stored in the reserved storage area. On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process process is executed (step S239). As described above, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Assuming that in the process of step S231, it is determined that the first start port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. 158. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is "4", which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not to make a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information (type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize (step S245), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the fluctuation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the first hold storage. A command (first hold number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 0)) for instructing the first hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) while updating to correspond to the number. 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4). It has become like.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation. Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Depending on the type of game effect to be played (such as the type of game effect to be played), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (first hold storage number). (1) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command according to (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that it is stored corresponding to the first start port 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved storages, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the effect display device 1600 Peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variable display according to the start winning prize, such as whether to execute the reach effect as the game effect to be executed or the mode type of the game effect to be executed. You will be able to grasp the IC.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control IC stores the first (earliest) pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is received. Is stored and is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received. The determination information is discarded and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the pre-judgment information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the hold for starting the variable display occurs, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-judgment information.

At the time when the fluctuation display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) of the fluctuation display control is maintained even though the fluctuation display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S233, the second start port sensor 2402 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 160. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on this counter value. ) Is determined (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to the following steps S253 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

However, in the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the fluctuation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the second hold storage. A command for instructing the second hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (second hold number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 0)) while updating to correspond to the number. 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0-1). It has become like.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002 is set to "4", while the game ball is set to the second starting port 2004. The upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on the entry of the ball is set to "1". The second starting port 2002 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than that in the normal state. Even if the upper limit is set to "1", the period in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not performed continues for a long time, or the period in which the second reserved storage number is the upper limit continues for a long time, so that the second starting port 2002 Even if a game ball enters the ball, it is suppressed from being in a disadvantageous state to the player, such as not being able to obtain a chance of a big hit lottery.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for determination. Since only the tables and tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Design normal processing (step S280)
2. 2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the process of determining the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed.
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be performed.

The first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 142).

FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 162, first steps S301. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S302. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. .. Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored in each storage area. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped are shifted by the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start winning is generated when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first one is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). become.

After that, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the big hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), this process is terminated.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a hit determination table shown in FIG. 189 (A) and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 when the first special symbol normal process is being executed, the first special random number. (Ii) When the special symbol normal processing is being executed, the comparison is made with the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 164 (A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, there are three types of hit determination values that match the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of first special random number has won the jackpot and are different from the jackpot determination value. Each of the first special random numbers matches the big hit judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won a small hit, and matches the loss judgment value indicating that the 315 types of first special random numbers are lost. It is associated (big hit probability; 1/319, small hit probability; 3/319). Further, in this example, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number in the second special symbol process process, the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of second special random number has won the jackpot is used. Matching with the small hit judgment value indicating that 144 types of second special random numbers different from the big hit judgment value have won the small hit, and the loss judgment indicating that the 174 types of second special random numbers are the above-mentioned loss. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (big hit probability; 1/319, small hit probability; 144/319). That is, the judgment table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being judged as a small hit than the hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. , When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 is executed than when the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2002 is executed. It is becoming more advantageous for the player.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special read in the second special symbol normal processing. As a result of comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a big hit (step S312), the big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the big hit is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is terminated.

Further, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), the small hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time reduction state and the reach determination table is used when the game state is the non-time reduction state. It is equipped with a reach judgment table in the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach is matched with the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reachable, and is matched with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers are not reachable. Random numbers are associated with each other.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), the change is caused. The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 165, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 164 (B). The type of jackpot is determined in accordance with the above, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. 1. The opening / closing pattern is closed 15 times after the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2005 by the above-mentioned big winning opening sensor 2403. By repeating (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 15R big hit game state where the ball can enter the big winning opening 2005 (easy), and after the big hit game state is over, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) A 15R jackpot that controls the time saving state to be terminated if the jackpot does not occur until the fluctuation display is executed 77 times. The opening / closing pattern is closed twice (for example, after the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the above-mentioned big winning opening sensor 2403 that 10 game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005. (2 rounds) By repeating, the game ball is controlled to the 2R big hit game state where it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2005, and if it is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R big hit game state, the big hit game state ends. After that, if the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, it is controlled to the time saving state where it ends if it does not become a big hit, and it is not before the start of the 2R big hit game state. If the time is controlled to a short time, the jackpot is determined to be one of the two types of jackpots, the 2R jackpot that is controlled to the normal state after the end of the game state.

In the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, eight determination values are distributed in the case of a 15R jackpot, and 192 determination values are distributed in the case of a 2R jackpot. That is, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 4% probability of a 15R big hit and a 96% probability of a 2R big hit. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 196 determination values are distributed in the case of a 15R jackpot, and four determination values are distributed in the case of a 2R jackpot. That is, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 98% probability of a 15R big hit and a 2% probability of a 2R big hit. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of being determined as a 15R jackpot is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. The game is played when the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2002. It is in a state that is advantageous to the person.

Further, when the type of the jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R jackpot is determined, the 15R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing if the small hit flag is set when the big hit flag is not set in step S131 (step S324). The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 164 (C), and when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of large hit is stopped. (Step S325) is determined.

In particular,
1. 1. The opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the character winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed twice to control the game ball into a small hit game state in which the game ball can enter the character winning opening 2006 (easy). It is difficult to accept the game balls to the 1st V winning opening 2007 and the 2nd V winning opening 2008 by guiding all the game balls that have won the prize winning opening 2006 to the 1st losing opening 2535 during the small hit game state. First small hit 2. The opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the prize opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed 9 times to control the game ball into a small hit game state in which the game ball can enter the prize winning opening 2006 (easy). The second V winning opening 2008 by guiding one of the game balls that won the prize winning opening 2006 to the third distribution device 2550 after the bonus winning opening 2006 is closed during the small hit game state. When the game ball is accepted in the second V winning opening 2008, after the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) after the small hit game state, or The game ball can enter the big prize opening 2005 by repeating the opening / closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds) that closes when 10 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2005 by the above big winning opening sensor 2403. It must be controlled to a (easy) 15R jackpot gaming state, and if the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) variation display is executed 77 times after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot must be achieved. Second small hit to control the finished time saving state 3. By executing the opening / closing pattern 9 times in which the prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed, the game ball is controlled to a small hit game state in which the game ball can enter the prize winning opening 2006 (easily). One of the game balls that won the prize winning opening 2006 during the small hit game state is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 after the bonus opening 2006 is closed, and the game ball is the first. Based on the acceptance by the V winning opening 2007, after opening the large winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) after the small hit game state, or after the large winning opening 2005 has won 10 game balls. The opening / closing pattern that closes when detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to control the game ball to the 15R big hit game state where the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2005 (easy), and the big hit game Three types of third small hits that control to a time-saving state that ends if there is no big hit until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the state Decide on one of the big hits from the small hits.

In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 199 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit, and one judgment value is distributed in the case of the third small hit. ing. That is, when a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 99.5% probability of becoming a second small hit, and a 0.5% probability of becoming a third small hit. You won't win a small hit. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed in the case of the first small hit, and 130 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit. , 50 judgment values are distributed in the case of the third small hit. That is, when a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 10% probability of becoming a first small hit, a 65% probability of becoming a second small hit, and a 25% probability of becoming a small hit. It becomes the third small hit. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the small hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number as compared with the small hit symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, the prize winning opening 2006 was won. By guiding one of the game balls to the first V winning opening 2007, the probability of being determined to be the third small hit that will always be the 15R big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state is increased. It is configured and the player is notified when the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2002. It is in an advantageous state.

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of small hit is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the second small hit is determined, the second small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and when the third small hit is determined, the third small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol. .. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), if the first small hit is determined, the first small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and if the second small hit is determined, the small hit symbol is determined. If the second small hit symbol is determined, and if the third small hit is determined, the third small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol.

If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be an outlier symbol (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the above lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, missed reach, or missed) as the process of step S328. (May indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is set to the determination result notification command according to each of the lottery results so that the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted (step S328). ). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed, and the left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle. The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time)). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a small hit from the received determination result notification command as an mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. When the symbol ("final battle") is decided and the 2R jackpot is specified, the combination of the 2R jackpot symbols (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same even-numbered symbols among the symbols "0" to "9". ), And when the 15R jackpot is specified, it is determined to be the 15R jackpot symbol (a combination in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are the same odd-numbered symbols among the symbols "0" to "9"). In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the missed symbol with reach (the combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; reach loss. If it is decided to be a design) and an outlier is specified, it is decided to be an outlier symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left / right decorative symbol is a different symbol among the left / middle / right decorative symbols) and changes. When the variation time specified from the pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) up to 77 times after the big hit game state, but the time reduction state is possible. The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of big hits after the transition control is performed. Specifically, if a predetermined number of big hits (for example, two times) occur after the big hit game state is controlled, the time reduction state is not controlled after the predetermined number of big hit game states are completed. , It may be controlled to the normal state. Further, even when the number of times of big hits is less than a predetermined number of times, the non-time saving state may be controlled during the big hit gaming state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the big hit gaming state.

FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 166. If so (step S341), a variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of a big hit according to the type of the big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag is selected. If is set and entered (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit according to the type of the small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S346), and neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal. In the case of loss (loss that does not execute the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the determination variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

The fluctuation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Therefore, the main control MPU includes the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing. By comparing the above and acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

Further, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, it is determined as the process of step S351 whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter for which the continuation number of the time reduction state is set is "0". do. Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S353). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is terminated is set (step S354).

If it is determined in the process of step S351 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", or if it is determined in the process of step S353 that the time reduction counter is not "0", that time point In step S355, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol change process (step S283), this process is terminated.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of off, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second in the time saving state is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), while The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a way that the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds in the non-time saving state is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). .. That is, the variation pattern at the time of deviation selected in the time-saving state has an extremely short time required for the variation display control of the special symbol as compared with the variation pattern at the time of deviation selected in the non-time reduction state. The fluctuation time information of the above special symbol is set.

FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 167, first steps S371. As the process of, the variation timer in which the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variation pattern is set is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 168, first steps S381. As the process of, display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 is used. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), the time reduction control (control of the time reduction state) is terminated and the non-time reduction control is performed. (Control of normal state) will be started.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game (step S387), and the jackpot game is started. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot to the jackpot count counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot count counter becomes "0", it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. Control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the big winning opening pre-opening process (step S401) and the big winning opening opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big hit count counter becomes "0", and the big winning opening is opened. When the round is completed in the opening processing (step S402), the jackpot count counter is subtracted by 1 to become "0", and the game shifts to the large winning opening post-processing (step S403) to end the jackpot game. Perform control to make it.

Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. As a result, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, the jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. It has become.

Further, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is, specifically, when the jackpot game is terminated, the jackpot is hit in the jackpot control process (step S235A) after the jackpot opening post-processing (step S403). Opening / closing control of the first prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or after the first prize opening 2005 has won 10 game balls is the above. It is reset when the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing control in which the opening / closing pattern to be closed when detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 is repeated 2 or 15 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the big hit game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first function display unit 1400 is used. The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

If the big hit flag is not set (step S386) and the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. The small hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying the start of the small hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of small hit. In step S391, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command, third small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) Start command) is set. As a result, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, the small hit start command (first small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) The hit start command, the second small hit start command, and the third small hit start command) are set.

Further, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is the small hit middle process (step S411) of the small hit control process (step S236A), which will be specifically described later, when the small hit game is terminated. ) Ends the open / close control of the prize winning opening 2006 according to the type of small hit (for example, the opening / closing control in which the opening / closing pattern of opening the winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is repeated 2 or 9 times). Will be reset when you do. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, the waiting time until the next special symbol fluctuation display is started (the time during which the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed) is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. At (step S395), this process ends.

FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. 1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the mode when the variable display is stopped is the jackpot symbol. Large winning opening pre-opening process (step S401) that waits until it is performed by 1510 or waits until the next round is started.
2. 2. The first big prize opening 2005 is controlled based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped is the big hit symbol, or the first big winning opening 2005 is started based on the start of the next round. Is controlled to the open state, and after the first big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or 10 game balls are won in the first big winning opening 2005, it is detected by the above-mentioned big winning opening sensor 2403. Processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S402) to close when
3. 3. After opening the big winning opening, the player waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big hit game state ends when all the rounds are finished (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. Further, in the above-mentioned processing during opening of the big winning opening (step S402), at the start of the round for controlling the first big winning opening 2005 in the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the first big winning opening is won. At the end of the round that controls the mouth 2005 to be closed, the jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the jackpot game according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit control process (step S236A). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

1. 1. Small hit start process (step S410) to execute the setting process for starting the small hit game state.
2. 2. Small hit medium processing (step S411) for monitoring the entry and opening time of the game ball during the small hit game state.

The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S410) should be performed in the process of step S42. In addition, when the entry of the game ball into a specific area is detected in the small hit middle process, the big hit executing flag is set and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit game state (15 rounds in this example) is set as the number of big hits. Set to the counter and end the process. As a result, the big hit game state is started following the small hit game state.

FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 is in the ON state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal winning opening 2003, as shown in FIG. 171. As the process of step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. Execute the winning process.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S803) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. 2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S805) that waits until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Normal symbol stop processing (step S806) to stop the variable display of the symbol
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped becomes the mode suggesting "hit the normal figure", the second start opening door 2411 retracts and the game ball to the second start opening 2004 Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807) for executing a process for controlling acceptance.

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 142).

[14. Game in the small hit game state]
Next, the game in the small hit game state will be described. As described above, in this example, when the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit game in which the opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the bonus opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed a predetermined number of times. All the game balls detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, which are controlled to the state and entered the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small hit game state, are the first loss opening sensor 2515, the third loss opening sensor 3004, When it is detected by either the first V winning opening sensor 2514 or the second V winning opening sensor 3003, that is, when it is ejected from the inside of the accessory winning opening 2006 to the rear of the game board 5, the small hit game state is displayed. It is supposed to end. In addition, the game ball that entered the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small hit game state is accepted by the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, and the first V winning opening sensor 2514 and the second V winning opening. When detected by the sensor 3003, the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state after the small hit game state, and the game ball that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small hit game state becomes the first loss opening 2535 or the third loss opening 2556. When it is accepted and detected by the first loss opening sensor 2515 or the third loss opening sensor 3004, it is controlled to a normal state or a time saving state according to the control state before the small hit after the small hit game state.

Further, as described above, in this example, the first small hit that controls all the game balls that have won the prize winning opening 2006 to be guided to the first loss opening 2535, and the game ball that has won the winning feature winning opening 2006. One of the game balls is controlled to be guided to the third distribution device 2550, and after turning in the croon 2553, either the second V winning opening 2008 or the two third losing openings 2556 A second small hit that controls to be accepted, and a third small hit that controls so that one of the game balls that won the prize winning opening 2006 is guided to the first V winning opening 2007. It is designed to control the small hit game state of any of the above.

In addition, in the first small hit, the number of times the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened and closed is smaller than that in the second small hit and the third small hit, and all the game balls that have won the accessory winning opening 2006 are used as the accessory winning opening. Since it is guided to the first loss opening 2535 closest to 2006 and detected by the first loss opening sensor 2515, the execution period of the small hit game state (the period from the start to the end of the small hit game state) is short, and the first In the three small hits, one of the game balls that won the prize winning opening 2006 is guided to the first V winning opening 2007, which is the next closest to the first losing opening 2535 in the distance from the winning opening opening 2006. Since it is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the execution period of the small hit gaming state is the shortest next to the first small hit. On the other hand, in the second small hit, one of the game balls that won the prize winning opening 2006 is guided to the third distribution device 2550, which is the farthest from the winning opening 2006, and the third swing. The game ball guided by the dividing device 2550 is swiveled in the croon 2553, and then the game ball accepted by the second V winning opening 2008 is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 3003 or accepted by the third losing opening 2556. Since the game ball is detected by the third loss opening sensor 3004, the execution period of the small hit game state is the longest among the above three types of small hits.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when it is determined as a small hit based on the first special random number in the variation display of the first special symbol executed in the above normal state, it is regarded as the second small hit. In the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the above-mentioned time saving state, the second small hit is executed based on the second special random number, whereas the second small hit is executed in most cases in the normal state by setting a high ratio. When it is determined that the third small hit is executed, the rate at which the third small hit is executed is higher than in the normal state, and in the time saving state, the third small hit is executed at a rate of once for every four small hits. ..

That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, if the game ball is accepted in the second V winning opening 2008 during the small hit game state, the time is shortened after the 15R big hit game state, which is advantageous for the player. Since the transition is controlled to, one of the game balls that entered the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small hit game state is swiveled into the croon 2553 to become the second V winning opening 2008. While making people pay attention to whether it is accepted or accepted by the third loss opening 2556 for a certain period of time, the second V prize is won during the small hit game state in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state. Even if the game ball is accepted in the mouth 2008, it is only controlled to the time saving state again after the 15R jackpot game state, so one of the game balls entered in the prize winning mouth 2006 is in the croon 2553. There is a risk that the game will be less enjoyable if the player is turned. Therefore, in this example, in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, the small hit gaming state is shortened during the time saving state by increasing the ratio of the third small hit in which the execution period of the small hit gaming state is short. It is designed to finish in time.

Further, as described above, when the distribution rotating body 2531 rotates from the accommodable state to the unaccommodable state in the third small hit, the game ball accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 enters the first atari passage. It flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through 2536, abuts on the upper surface of the closed distribution door 2544 and is guided to the right, and enters the first V winning opening 2007. .. Therefore, in the third small hit, the game ball distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 by rotating the distribution rotating body 2531 from the accommodating state to the unaccommodable state is discharged to the rear of the game board 5 in a short time. The player cannot see it. Further, the distribution door 2544 can enter the first V winning opening 2007 when the distribution door 2544 is advanced above the second loss opening 2543, but the distribution door 2544 operates in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the operating state. That is, the existence of the distribution door 2544 is difficult for the player to recognize (difficult to see), and the game ball distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 by the distribution door 2544 is placed behind the game board 5 in a short time. Since it is difficult to recognize the existence of the first V winning opening 2007, the player is guided to the first V winning opening 2007, in other words, the first V winning opening 2007 is a game ball. It is hard to notice that it passes. In this way, in order to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game ball is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 when the third small hit occurs in the short time state, a lottery in the small hit game state ( The small hit game state is executed without being aware of whether or not the game ball is accepted by the V winning opening (first V winning opening 2007, second V winning opening 2008), and the end of the small hit gaming state. Later, the 15R jackpot game state can be executed. As a result, the small hit game state and the 15R big hit game state can be continuously generated in a short time, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the case where the game ball is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 as the second small hit and the case where the game ball is distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 as the third small hit, the effect display device 1600 is used. The production of the small hit game state to be executed is different. Specifically, in the case of a second small hit, whether the game ball distributed to the third distribution device 2550 enters the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2556. While the effect of excitement is executed, the effect of not being aware of the rotation of the distribution rotating body 2531 when it becomes the third small hit (for example, when it becomes the third small hit, it is a big hit). It is difficult for the player to realize that the small hit game state is executed by giving the same notification as in the case of the third small hit (notifying that the big hit is not a small hit, etc.). However, as a special bonus chance to obtain a prize ball different from the prize ball that can be obtained in the big hit game state, the same prize ball acquisition opportunity as in the small hit game state is executed before the start of the big hit game state. As a result, the player who recognizes that he / she has won the 15R jackpot is given a special bonus chance before the start of the 15R jackpot gaming state, and is a prize different from the 15R jackpot gaming state. Since you can get the ball, the game fun will improve.

If the time to reach the V winning opening is shorter in the third small hit than in the second small hit, the route until the game ball guided by the second small hit is accepted by the V winning opening ( The length between the first path) and the path (second path) until the game ball guided by the third small hit is accepted by the V winning opening becomes longer in proportion to the arrival time at the V winning opening. Not limited to this, if the arrival time to the V winning opening is longer than the third small hit, the route (first route) until the game ball guided by the second small hit is accepted by the V winning opening is the third small. The game ball guided by the hit may be made shorter than the path (second path) until it is accepted by the V winning opening. For example, by providing a deceleration means for decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball in the first path, the time to reach the V winning opening may be longer than that of the game ball passing through the second path.

Further, in the above example, a plurality of V winning openings of the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are provided, and in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the accessory winning opening 2006 One of the game balls that won the prize is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 having the second V winning opening 2008, and in the variable display of the second special symbol that is executed in a short time state, the winning combination opening. By guiding one of the game balls that won the prize in 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007, which is the next closest to the first losing opening 2535 in the distance from the accessory winning opening 2006, the small hit game state is achieved. Although the execution period is configured to be different, the distance to the V winning opening and the number of V winning openings are not limited to those described above. For example, the present invention is also used in a gaming machine having only one V winning opening. The technical idea of is applicable. Specifically, for example, a means (obstacle, etc.) for obstructing or delaying the acceptance of the game ball into the V winning opening, such as making the game ball acceptable to the V winning opening after turning in the Kroon 2553, is provided. There is no means to block or delay the acceptance of the game ball to the V winning opening and the second small hit, which takes a long time to reach the V winning opening (at least, the number provided is smaller than that of the second small hit). By doing so, the third small hit with a short arrival time at the V winning opening, and the normal state (variable display of the first special symbol) and the time saving state (variation display of the first special symbol) according to the arrival time at the common V winning opening. The execution ratio may be changed with (variable display of the second special symbol).

[14-1. Error notification in small hit game state]
Next, the error notification in the small hit game state will be described. In this example, in the small hit game state, the time until the game ball winning in the prize winning opening 2006 is discharged is monitored, and if it is not discharged even after a predetermined period, an error notification is performed.

FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit start process (step S411). In the small hit start process, the setting process for starting the small hit game state is executed.

When the small hit start process is started, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer set in step S392 of the first special symbol stop process and the second special symbol stop process (step S421), and then the interval baima Times out (step S422), that is, when the waiting time from the stop display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) to the start of the small hit game state elapses, the small hit game state is started. The initial value "0" is set in the elapsed timer for measuring the elapsed time since then (step S423).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects open / close pattern data according to the type of small hit being executed (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) (step S424), and also selects. Based on the opening / closing pattern data, the control of the accessory winning opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 is started (step S425), and the process is shifted to the small hit middle process (step S411). When the small hit process flag of is updated (step S426), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the interval timer has not timed out in step S421, the process ends without executing the subsequent process.

The opening / closing pattern data is provided for each type of small hit, and shows the operation mode of each of the prize winning opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 according to the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game state. It is a thing. In this example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the accessory winning opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on the opening / closing pattern data according to the small hit type selected in step S424. Then, the accessory winning opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 operate in the manner shown in FIG. 123.

FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit medium processing (step S412).

When the small hit middle process is started, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first adds 1 to the progress timer that measures the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game state, and the discharge monitoring timer described later is set. If so, the timer value of this discharge monitoring timer is subtracted by 1 (step S431). When the elapsed timer is added by 1, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has an open / close pattern corresponding to the elapsed timer (elapsed time from the start of the small hit game state) among the open / close pattern data selected in step S424 of the small hit start process. The data is read out, and the opening / closing control of the accessory winning opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 is performed based on the read open / close pattern data (step S432).

Further, if the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the bonus winning slot sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball accepted in the bonus winning slot 2006 turned on (step S433), that is, the game is played in the bonus winning slot 2006. If the ball is accepted, the residual ball counter that counts the remaining balls that have not yet been discharged from the prize winning opening 2006 among the game balls that have won the prize winning opening 2006 is added by 1 (step S434).

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is used when the game ball is first accepted in the prize winning opening 2006 after the small hit game state is started (when the first game ball enters). (Step S435), the assumed longest period provided for each small hit type as the maximum expected period until all the game balls entered in the accessory winning opening 2006 including this game ball are discharged. It is set in the discharge monitoring timer (step S436).

In this example, in the case of the first small hit, all the game balls accepted in the prize winning opening 2006 enter the second losing opening 2535 without being distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531. Therefore, the shortest period among the three types of small hits is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 10000 ms). In the case of the second small hit, one of the game balls accepted in the prize winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531, and the first Atari passage 2536 is assigned. Since the game ball that has entered the third distribution device 2550 through it turns in the crune 2553 and then enters either the second V winning opening 2008 or the two third losing openings 2556, there are three types as the assumed longest period. The longest period of the small hits is set (for example, 180,000 ms). In the case of the third small hit, one of the game balls accepted in the prize winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531, but the first Atari passage 2536. In order to accept the game ball that has passed through the second V winning opening 2008 without entering the third distribution device 2550, a short period next to the first small hit is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 60,000 s).

The discharge monitoring timer is subtracted in step S431, and the mismatch between the number of game balls that have won the prize winning opening 2006 and the number of game balls discharged from the winning box 2006 is until after the time-out of the discharge monitoring timer. If it continues, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity has been performed.

In addition, if the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game state is monitored and this elapsed time reaches the assumed longest period according to the type of small hit being executed, it is said that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity has occurred. It may be determined, or the elapsed time from the first opening timing of the prize winning opening 2006 in the small hit game state is monitored, and this elapsed time is the assumed maximum period according to the type of small hit being executed. If this happens, it may be determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity has been performed, or the timing at which the game balls are actually distributed by the distribution rotating body 2531 (small in the first small hit). With the start of the hit game state, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned on (energized), and the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned off (non-energized) from the state where the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 is facing upward. ), The timing at which the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 operates so as to face to the right (the first distribution operation timing of the distribution rotating body 2531), and the distribution rotating body 2531 in the second small hit. After the first distribution operation timing, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) again, and the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned OFF from the state where the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 is facing upward. Timing when the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 operates so as to face to the right in the (non-energized) state (second distribution operation timing of the distribution rotating body 2531), distribution in the third small hit After the second distribution operation timing of the rotating body 2531, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) again, and the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 is facing upward to the first distribution solenoid. Elapsed time from the timing when the 2532 is turned off (non-energized) and the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 operates so as to face to the right (the third distribution operation timing of the distribution rotating body 2531). If this elapsed time reaches the expected maximum period according to the type of small hit being executed, it may be determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity has occurred.

In addition, the first loss opening sensor 2515 and the first V winning are detected when the ejection of the game ball accepted in the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected, that is, when the gaming ball accepted in the accessory winning opening 2006 is ejected. When a game ball is detected by any of the mouth sensor 2514, the second V winning mouth sensor 3003, and the third lost mouth sensor 3004 (step S437), the residual ball counter is decremented by 1 (step S438).

Then, whether or not the remaining ball counter is "0", that is, whether or not the number of game balls accepted in the bonus winning opening 2006 and the number of game balls discharged from the bonus winning opening 2006 match. (Step S439), and if the residual number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S442 assuming that no abnormality or fraudulent activity has occurred.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S439 that the residual ball counter is not "0", it is determined whether or not the emission monitoring timer has timed out in order to determine whether or not an abnormality or fraudulent activity has occurred (step S440). .. As described above, the discharge monitoring timer is provided corresponding to each small hit type as the longest period assumed from the start of the small hit game state to the discharge of all the game balls from the prize winning opening 2006. It shows the remaining period of the assumed longest period. If the emission monitoring timer has not timed out in step S440, the process ends without executing the subsequent processes. As a result, when the special symbol of the main control side timer interrupt process and the special electric accessory control process (step S114) are executed again, the small hit medium process is executed and the residual ball counter is monitored until the discharge monitoring timer times out. Will be.

If the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in step S440 when the residual ball counter is not "0", it is determined that an abnormality or fraudulent activity has occurred and a discharge error notification is performed (step S441). The hit processing is finished. For discharge error notification, error display in the effect display device 1600, output of notification sound by speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., lighting in a predetermined manner by lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are used. In this example, blinking is included, and in this example, "Discharge is abnormal" or the like is displayed in a part of the area of the effect display device 1600, and the speaker 622, 354, 462, 464 is not output. That is, the state where the residual ball counter is not "0" indicates a minor abnormality such as the game ball that has entered the prize winning opening 2006 is not discharged, so that the abnormality of the gaming machine is notified. Is displayed so as not to make the player uncomfortable or anxious. After notifying the discharge error in step S441, by ending the small hit middle process without updating the small hit process flag, the special symbol of the timer interrupt process on the main control side and the special electric accessory control process (step). When S114) is executed, the small hit middle process is executed again. That is, the RWM clear button 633z is operated by the game clerk on condition that all the game balls accepted in the prize winning opening 2006 are discharged, or the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as the RAM clear switch. Until the push operation unit is operated and the information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU is completely erased (until it is reset), the small hit game state is not terminated and the discharge error notification is performed. Will be executed.

When it is determined in step S439 that the residual ball counter is "0", it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (step S442). When the game ball has not entered the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 in step S442, that is, the game ball has entered the first losing opening 2535 or the third losing opening 2556 and the first losing opening sensor If it is detected by 2515 or the third loss opening sensor 3004, a small hit end command for instructing execution of the effect at the end of the small hit game state is set (step S443), and the small hit start process (step S411) is performed. This process ends when the small hit process flag is updated so that the process can be transferred (step S447).

If the game ball enters the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 in step S442 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514 or the second V winning opening sensor 3003, until the start of the big hit game. After setting the waiting time of the above in the interval timer (step S444), the small hit executing flag is reset and the big hit executing flag is set (step S445). In addition, a V-winning jackpot start command is set (step S446) to instruct the execution of the effect at the start of the jackpot game state based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first V winning slot 2007 and the second V winning slot 2008, and the above-mentioned small hit When the small hit process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the start process (step S411) (step S447), this process ends.

As described above, in this example, when the game ball is accepted in the accessory winning opening 2006, the value of the residual ball counter is added by 1, and the value of the remaining ball counter is set to 1 each time the game ball is ejected from the accessory winning opening 2006. By subtracting, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls remaining without being discharged from the accessory winning device 2006. In addition, the period (estimated longest period) until the discharge error notification is executed differs depending on the small hit type, in other words, the distribution destination of the game ball, and the game ball passing through the first Atari passage 2536 is struck out. In the third small hit received at the second V winning opening 2008 without entering the distribution device 2550, a discharge error is made compared to the second small hit in which the game ball is made to enter the third distribution device 2550 and turns in the crune 2553. The period until the notification is executed (the maximum assumed period) is shortened. That is, a small hit with a shorter time (distance) to reach the V winning opening has a shorter period until the discharge error notification is executed.

Since the game ball is not normally left in the character winning opening 2006, some abnormality (error) occurs when the game ball remains in the character winning opening 2006 for a long period of time. Can be determined to have occurred. In addition, when it is detected that more game balls are ejected than the number of game balls won in the character winning opening 2006, a fraudulent act such as illegally winning the game ball in the character winning opening 2006 is performed. It can be determined that there is a possibility. The pachinko machine 1 of this example monitors the occurrence of these abnormalities and fraudulent acts, and notifies the discharge error when there is a suspicion of these.

Further, in this example, the game ball remains in the character winning opening 2006, or it remains because it is detected that a larger number of game balls are discharged than the game ball winning in the character winning opening 2006. Even after the discharge error notification is performed based on the time-out of the discharge monitoring timer when the ball counter is not "0", the small hit middle process is executed every time the main control side timer interrupt process is executed without stopping the game. Is executed to monitor the value of the residual ball counter, and if the value of the residual ball counter is "0", that is, when it returns to the normal state, the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning It automatically returns to the state of determining the entry of the game ball into the mouth 2008 and ends the small hit game state.

In this example, even if the value of the residual ball counter is not "0" after executing the discharge error notification in step S441 of the small hit middle process, if a more serious abnormality occurs. Priority is given to error notification regarding this serious abnormality. As a serious abnormality, for example, when magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a is detected by any one of a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 (magnetic detection error notification), and when radio wave irradiation is detected (radio wave detection error notification). ), When it is detected that the door frame 3 has been opened (door opening error notification), there is a high possibility that an illegal act has been performed. When such a serious abnormality occurs, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit game state is terminated, and error notification (magnetic detection error notification, radio wave detection error notification, magnetic detection error notification) related to these serious abnormalities is terminated. Etc.) may be executed to restart the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit game state after the error notification related to the serious abnormality is completed, or the error notification related to the serious abnormality may be restarted in the small hit game state. By overwriting the discharge error notification of step S441 in the above, the discharge error notification of step S441 in the small hit game state is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the output of the speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., and the game board. Although it is not reflected in the lighting / blinking of the lamps / LEDs provided in 5 or the door frame 3 (executed so that it can be visually viewed / viewed) (executed behind the scenes), error notification related to a serious abnormality is reported. The content of the discharge error notification is advanced with the passage of time even while the operation is being performed, and when the error notification related to a serious abnormality is completed, the discharge error notification is displayed so that the progressed content can be visually recognized and viewed. It may be reflected in the display on the device 1600, the output of the speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., and the lighting / blinking of the lamps / LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 (for example, a small hit game). When the error notification related to a serious abnormality is started 5 seconds after the discharge error notification in step S441 in the state is started and this error notification is executed for 30 seconds, after the error notification related to the serious abnormality is finished. (Restart from the content 35 seconds after the start of the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit game state).

Further, the mode of the discharge error notification may be different depending on whether the residual ball counter is "1" or more and less than "0" in step S439 of the small hit middle process. When the residual ball counter is "1" or more, it indicates only a slight abnormality that the game ball that has entered the prize winning opening 2006 is not discharged, while when the residual ball counter is less than "0". Indicates a serious abnormality that more game balls are ejected than the number of game balls that have entered the character winning opening 2006, and there is a possibility that the game balls are illegally entered into the character winning opening 2006. There is. Therefore, when a minor abnormality that the game ball that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 has not been discharged occurs, as a discharge error notification 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 174, a “discharge abnormality” is generated in a part of the effect display device 1600. The error sound is not output by continuously outputting the effect sound from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464, and a part of the LED provided in the door frame 3 is partially output. When a serious abnormality occurs in which more than the number of game balls that the game balls have entered is discharged, the discharge error notification 2 is, for example, "illegal occurrence!" In the entire area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to displaying, the speakers 622, 354, 462, 464 suppress the volume of the production sound and output as an error sound "Illegal is being performed" at a loud volume, and the LED provided on the door frame 3 It is also possible to notify the occurrence of fraudulent activity by causing the entire door frame 3 to emit light by emitting light of all of the above.

Further, in this example, the detection signal of the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and the second distribution device 2540 is used in the second small hit game state. When the game ball guided to the strikeout guide path 2551 is detected by the third strikeout detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third strikeout guide path 2551, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays the effect display device 1610 and the speaker 622. , 354, 462, 464, the game ball that controls the lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 to turn the crune 2553 in the third distribution device 2550 is the second V winning opening 2008 and the third. It is designed to carry out an effect that excites which of the two 556 loss mouths is accepted.

The detection signal of the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551 may be input to the main control board 1310. In this case, the third distribution detection sensor 2552 may be input. The presence or absence of an abnormality may be determined according to the detection of the game ball by. For example, when a game ball is detected in a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or the losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type in the above small hit medium processing, or scheduled according to the small hit type. When there is a possibility that a game ball is detected at a V winning opening or a losing opening that is different from the V winning opening or the losing opening (a passage different from the planned passage or the winning opening according to the small hit type) When the game ball faces the winning opening), it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and the distribution error notification may be executed in step S441 of the small hit middle process.

Specifically, as the V winning opening and the losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type, the first losing opening 2535 is planned in the case of the first small hit, and the second in the case of the second small hit. The V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2556 is scheduled, and in the case of the third small hit, the first V winning opening 2007 is scheduled. Then, in the case of the first small hit, when it is detected that the game ball is accepted in any of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third losing opening 2556 in the small hit middle processing, the first In the case of two small hits, when it is detected that a game ball is accepted in one of the first loss opening 2535 and the first V winning opening 2007 in the small hit medium processing, in the case of the third small hit, the small hit medium processing is performed. When it is detected that a game ball is accepted in any of the first loss opening 2535, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third loss opening 2556, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the figure is shown in FIG. 174, for example. In addition to displaying "illegal occurrence!" Etc. in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, the volume of the effect sound is suppressed from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464 as an error sound. "." Is output at a loud volume, and all the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are made to emit light, so that the entire door frame 3 is made to emit light, so that the distribution error notification for notifying the occurrence of fraudulent activity is executed. You may. In this case, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be immediately notified, and the fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage.

Further, a second distribution detection sensor for detecting a game ball circulating inside the second distribution guide path 2541 is provided in the middle of the second distribution guide path 2541 to detect a detection signal of the second distribution guide sensor. It may be input to the main control board 1310, and in the case of the first small hit, the game ball is inserted into one of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third losing opening 2556 in the small hit middle processing. When there is a possibility that the game ball will be accepted, that is, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second distribution taxiway 2541 due to the detection of the game ball by the second distribution detection sensor, the case of the second small hit. Although the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball in the small hit middle processing, the game ball passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is the first because the third distribution detection sensor 2552 cannot detect the game ball. When it is determined that the player is heading toward the V winning opening 2007, in the case of a third small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball in the small hit middle processing, and then the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects the game ball. If it is determined that the game ball passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading toward the third distribution device 2550, a V winning opening different from the planned V winning opening or loss opening, etc. If there is a possibility that the game ball is detected at the taxiway or the loss mouth, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and the distribution error notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to notify when a fraudulent activity is likely to occur, and the fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage.

The mode of the distribution error notification may be different depending on the degree of abnormality (illegal level). For example, in the case of the first small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball, so that the game is played. When it is determined that the ball has entered the second distribution taxiway 2541, or in the case of a second small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball in the small hit middle processing, but the third distribution detection sensor If it is determined that the game ball passing through the second distribution taxiway 2541 is heading toward the first V winning opening 2007 because the game ball cannot be detected by 2552, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high, for example. In addition to displaying "illegal occurrence!" Etc. in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, fraudulent activity occurs by outputting "illegal activity is being performed" from the sensors 622, 354, 462, 464 at a loud volume. Is notified, and in the case of the second small hit, in the small hit medium processing, in the case of the third small hit, in the small hit medium processing, after the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball, the game is played by the third distribution detection sensor 2552. When it is determined that the game ball passing through the second distribution taxiway 2541 is heading toward the third distribution device 2550 by detecting the ball, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is low, for example, an effect display device. It is possible to notify the occurrence of an abnormality different from fraudulent activity by displaying "Exhaust abnormality" or the like in a part of the area of 1600 and not outputting the sensors 622, 354, 462, and 464. .. That is, when the game ball passes through a route in which the game ball enters the V winning opening at a rate higher than the entry rate of the game ball into the V winning opening preset according to the small hit type (execution). If the V prize expectation is higher than the preset V prize expectation according to the small hit type), it is judged that the degree of abnormality is high and cheating is performed. When the game ball passes through the route where the game ball enters the V winning opening at a rate lower than the entry rate of the game ball to the V winning opening preset according to the small hit type (execution). If the V prize expectation is lower than the preset V prize expectation according to the small hit type), it is judged that the degree of abnormality is low and an abnormality different from cheating occurs. May be notified. In addition, if the V-winning expectation is lower than the preset V-winning expectation according to the type of small hit being executed, the player himself suffers a disadvantage, but the game store side suffers damage. Since it does not occur, the distribution error notification may not be performed when the degree of such an abnormality is low.

In addition, a game ball was detected at a V winning opening or a losing opening that is different from the V winning opening or the losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type, and the V winning opening planned according to the small hit type. During the period when the distribution error is notified based on the possibility that the game ball is detected at the V winning opening or the losing opening, which is different from the winning opening or the losing opening, the accessory winning opening 2006 is used in the above small hit medium processing. Even if it is determined that a minor abnormality has occurred that the entered game ball has not been ejected, the game ball has a V winning opening or a losing opening that is different from the planned V winning opening or losing opening according to the small hit type. It is executed based on the fact that it is detected and there is a possibility that the game ball is detected at the V winning opening or the losing opening that is different from the V winning opening or the losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type. The distribution error notification is continuously executed without being terminated. However, the discharge error notification 1 based on the determination that a minor abnormality that the game ball that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 has not been discharged has occurred in the above-mentioned small hit middle processing is in a state where it can be visually recognized and viewed. Although it is not done, it is executed behind the scenes, and the content of the discharge error notification 1 is advanced with the passage of time. Further, in this case, when the game ball that has entered the character winning opening 2006 is discharged and the value of the residual ball counter becomes "0", there is a slight abnormality that the game ball that has entered the character winning opening 2006 is not discharged. The discharge error notification 1 based on the determination that the occurrence has occurred ends. In this way, even if a minor abnormality occurs during the period of error notification (distribution error notification in this example) based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality, error notification based on the occurrence of a minor abnormality (in this example). In this example, the discharge error notification 1) is not executed visually and visually. However, it is quietly executed behind the error notification based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality (in this example, the distribution error notification), and when the minor abnormality is resolved, the error notification based on the occurrence of the minor abnormality (this). In the example, the discharge error notification 1) is terminated.

In this example, even in a state where a small hit game state or a big hit game state has not occurred, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the first losing opening sensor 2515, the second V winning opening sensor 3003, The detection of the game ball by the third loss opening sensor 3004 is monitored, and if the game ball is detected by any of these, it is determined that the fraudulent activity is being performed and the occurrence of the fraudulent activity is notified. It has become. In addition, in a state where a small hit game state or a big hit game state has not occurred, the detection of the game ball by the second distribution detection sensor or the third distribution detection sensor 2552 may be monitored, and the second distribution may be performed. When the game ball is detected by either the detection sensor or the third distribution detection sensor 2552, the degree of abnormality is high, that is, even if it is determined that fraudulent activity is being performed and the occurrence of fraudulent activity is notified. good. That is, in the state where the small hit game state or the big hit game state has not occurred, regardless of the degree (high or low) of the game ball entering the V winning opening, any passage in the accessory winning opening 2006 is used. It may be determined that the fraudulent activity is being carried out even if the fraudulent activity has passed, and the occurrence of the fraudulent activity may be notified.

In the above example, when the discharge error notification is executed in step S441, the game ball is detected at the V winning opening or the losing opening different from the planned V winning opening or losing opening according to the small hit type. Or, when a distribution error notification is performed based on the possibility that a game ball may be detected at a V winning opening or a losing opening that is different from the planned V winning opening or losing opening according to the small hit type. Although the small hit middle process is repeatedly executed to monitor the value of the residual ball counter, the progress of the game may be stopped without monitoring the value of the residual ball counter. Even if the progress of the game is not stopped, the value of the residual ball counter is monitored, and when the value of the residual ball counter becomes normal (“0”), it is automatically restored from the abnormal state and a small hit. You may not end the game state. This makes it possible to reliably grasp the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, after the distribution error notification, if a game ball is detected at the V winning opening or loss opening (regular entrance) scheduled according to the small hit type, or scheduled according to the small hit type. When a game ball rolling on the route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects a second small hit), the distribution error notification is terminated. You may try to do it. In addition, after the discharge error notification is sent, if a game ball is detected at the V winning opening or the loss opening (regular entrance) scheduled according to the small hit type, or according to the small hit type. When a game ball rolling on the route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects a second small hit), the discharge error notification is terminated. May be good. In addition, the measured value of the discharge monitoring timer that causes the discharge error notification is detected for a game ball that rolls on a planned route (regular route) according to the small hit type (for example, a second small hit). In this case, it may be reset every time (detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552). In this case, the discharge monitoring timer is measured again after the reset, and the measured value of the discharge monitoring timer is being executed. It suffices to enable the discharge error notification when the expected maximum period is reached according to the small hit type.

[15-1. Volume control]
The volume control switch is used for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display (first). (1) Special symbol display, 2nd special symbol display) When starting or stopping the variation display of the special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) (in this example, the variation pattern in the peripheral control unit) From receiving the command until 0.5 seconds have passed after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or from receiving the stop display command in the peripheral control unit to 0.5 seconds after the final display of the decorative symbol has been confirmed) Except, the volume adjustment switch is rotated to adjust the volume of the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. It can be adjusted by operating it. As described above, the volume control switch has a variable resistance value by being rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is the resistance at the rotation position of the volume control switch. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023.

In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024-step value is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. Music is controlled from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 by controlling the sound source IC so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6. And sound effects are flowing. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, music, sound effects, etc. are transmitted from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. The production sound of is flowing.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the directing sounds such as music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. (For example, it is highly likely that the screen unfolded on the effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful, or that the game state will be advantageous to the player. The notification sound for the above is also played from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted in volume. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the switch, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the peripheral control IC by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned substrate volume divided into 7 stages, and it is possible to change the volume from mute to the maximum volume in 5 stages. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume low, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame 4 on the door frame 3 side can be set. Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass is reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating. In the form, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent activity due to the notification sound.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and special. A fixed period (peripheral control in this example) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). 0.5 seconds after receiving the variation pattern command in the unit until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or after receiving the stop display command in the peripheral control unit and after confirming the display of the decorative symbol. Except for the elapse of time, in addition to adjusting the volume of the production sound of music and sound effects by rotating the volume adjustment switch, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically,) A special symbol in the peripheral control unit (the period until the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002) are completed) and the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). 0.5 after the variation display of the decorative symbol starts after the variation pattern command is received by the peripheral control unit for a certain period when the variation display of (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped (in this example, the peripheral control unit receives the variation pattern command). Until a second elapses, or 0.5 seconds elapses after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed after receiving the stop display command in the peripheral control unit), and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the variable effect. And the operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 (the valid period for accepting the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the so-called button effect), etc., the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing of the effect operation unit 300. By operating the operation unit 303, it is possible to adjust the volume of the production sound of music and sound effects. Specifically, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a special symbol display (first). The variation pattern command for a certain period (in this example, the peripheral control unit in this example) when the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol display (second special symbol display). From the time when Operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the variable effect (effective period for accepting the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect) and the like. Except for, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated. It is possible to change the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect to a desired volume (any of 1 of the minimum volume to 5 of the maximum volume).

Specifically, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the effect sound becomes 1. The volume is changed to a step-up volume, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the effect sound is produced. The volume is changed to a volume that is one step lower.

FIG. 175 shows the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass of the main body frame 4 according to the rotation operation of the volume control switch and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. In the state where the volume of the effect sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 is set to the volume 5, the effect display device 1600 starts the variable effect of displaying the decorative symbol in a variable manner, and the effect operation unit 300 is in the middle of the variable effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of the case where the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, and the case where the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is subsequently rotated.

As shown in FIG. 175, in order to change the volume of the effect sound from the volume 5 to the volume 4 in the middle of the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is not operated. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise and the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the effect sound is lowered by one step from the volume 5 and changed to the volume 4, and the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed. The change according to the operation is immediately reflected in the effect sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. That is, in order to change the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the body frame 4, the rotation operation unit of the effect operation unit 300 At the timing of t1 when the 302 is rotated, the changed volume is reflected in the output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. It has become.

Further, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes its scale according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. This makes it possible to visually determine the currently set volume. Further, in this example, the indicator displayed in response to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in which the effect effect by the decorative symbol or the like is executed. Further, this indicator is displayed on the outermost surface of the image displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this example, by displaying the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 semi-transparently, it is possible to recognize an image such as a variable effect executed on the back of the indicator. It should be noted that a sub-display device different from the effect display device 1600 in which the variation effect by the decorative pattern or the like is executed may be provided. In this case, according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. The indicator may be displayed on the sub display device. Further, in this example, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 s) has elapsed from the end of the operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears. After displaying the indicator on the effect display device 1600 based on the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. You may let it. The indicator described above may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or the lower right display area or the like that does not overlap with the effect image or the like in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is partitioned to the right. An indicator may be displayed in the lower display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and an indicator may be displayed on this display device.

Further, when the scale of the indicator and the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect change by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, a specific sound (such as "pip") corresponding to the changed volume is generated. Electronic sound) is output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. As a result, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated, the effect sounds of music and sound effects are produced by the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body for bass of the main body frame 4. Even if it is not output from the frame speaker 622, the actual volume is due to the specific sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. You can adjust the volume while checking. It should be noted that the specific sound may not be output during the execution of the variable effect. That is, during the execution of the variable effect, the effect sound corresponding to the content of the variable effect is output, and the actual volume can be confirmed without outputting the specific sound. As a result, it is possible to prevent a specific sound unrelated to the content of the variable effect from being output during the variable effect, thereby hindering the variable effect being executed and deteriorating the game entertainment.

This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and the notification sound, it is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. Adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch according to the operation. There are two methods, one is to do it and the other is to do it. Since the volume control switch is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Then, only the clerk in the hall can rotate the volume control switch. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the sound effect of the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the sound effect of the music or sound effect may be noisy. be. Therefore, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. It has become like. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the production sound of the music or the sound effect to the desired volume, so that the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the production sound of the music or the sound effect. Can operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 to increase the volume to a desired level, and feel the volume adjusted by the hall clerk to increase the effect sound of music and sound effects. If it feels noisy, the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not playing is continued for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 1 is in the waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), the previous time. The volume adjusted by the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch. As a result, if the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear the production sound of music or sound effects, this time, the front of the pachinko machine 1 A player who sits on the pachinko machine and plays a game can operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 to increase the volume to a desired level. If the player who is playing the game feels the volume adjusted loudly and feels the production sound of music or sound effects noisy, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game is the production operation unit 300. The rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[15-2. Volume control for a specific frequency band]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, a predetermined value is added or subtracted from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch. In addition to adjusting the volume of the production sound of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume, it is possible to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band. Specifically, it is possible to suppress (may mute) the sound output in the high frequency range (above a predetermined frequency band).

That is, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display (first special symbol). The variation pattern command is received by the peripheral control unit for a certain period (in this example, the peripheral control unit receives the variation pattern command) when the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the display (display, second special symbol display). After that, until 0.5 seconds have passed after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or 0.5 seconds after the confirmation display of the decorative symbol has been received by the peripheral control unit), further variation effect The operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the above (effective period for accepting the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect) and the like. Except, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, an environment change mode for setting various environments of the pachinko machine 1 (whether or not high-pitched sound is output, whether or not the LED of the door frame 3 emits light, etc.) is performed. The screen of is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the screen for performing the environment change mode, the environment that can be changed (whether or not high-pitched sound is output, whether or not the LED of the door frame 3 emits light, etc.) is displayed in a list, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 will eventually display it. By operating the pressing operation unit 303 with the environment setting selected, it is possible to execute the process of changing the environment setting. In this way, by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 according to the screen of the environment change mode, the sound output in a specific frequency band can be suppressed, or the volume adjustment switch can be rotated. It is possible to output at a volume set according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. Further, although the screen of the environment change mode is displayed on the outermost surface of the images displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is displayed semi-transparently so that the image of the back can be recognized.

Specifically, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, a state in which the sound output in a specific frequency band is suppressed and a specific frequency band by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 in a state where the rotation operation unit 302 is operated and the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is selected. A selection screen is displayed to indicate that the sound output of is not suppressed (for example, a mini character for volume setting is displayed, and "high frequency cut-on" or "high frequency cut-off" is displayed in the mini character's balloon, and the rotation operation is performed. The display is switched each time the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by a predetermined rotation amount), and the rotation operation unit 302 is operated again to suppress the sound output in a specific frequency band and the sound output in a specific frequency band is not suppressed. By pressing the pressing operation unit 303 while one of the above is selected, the change to the selected state is determined, and the decision screen is displayed (in the balloon of the mini character for volume setting, "high frequency range". "There is a cut in the treble range" or "There is no cut in the high frequency range" is displayed). After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 s) elapses, the environment change mode is terminated by eliminating the determination screen displayed on the effect display device 1600. After the decision screen is displayed, the decision screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be erased based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the determination screen may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or the effect image or the effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The lower left display area that does not overlap with the display of the indicator at the time of adjusting the volume of the sound may be divided, and the screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the decision screen may be displayed in this lower left display area. In addition, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 is provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and the display device displays a screen for performing the above-mentioned environment change mode, a selection screen, and a decision screen. You may.

By pressing the pressing operation unit 303 without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the rotation operation is performed. Even if the unit 302 is rotated, the volume control of the effect sound is invalidated, and the indicator is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated without pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 after the end of the environment change mode, the volume adjustment of the effect sound becomes effective and the indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 175, in the middle of the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is adjusted by the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch or the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. When the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to suppress the volume higher than the volume set according to the operation, the rotation operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed at the timing of t2 when these operations are completed. Changes according to the operation of the unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are not reflected in the production sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. .. Then, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped based on the timing of t3 when the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 ends (the stop display command instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol is received from the main control MPU). The volume adjustment switch reflects the change according to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, that is, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band. The volume is suppressed to be higher than the volume set according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300.

It should be noted that the volume adjustment of the production sound in the specific frequency band is invalid after the timing of t2 when the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are completed in the volume adjustment of the production sound in the specific frequency band in the middle of the fluctuation effect. To. Then, when the change in the volume adjustment of the effect sound in a specific frequency band according to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is reflected at the timing of t3 when the fluctuation effect ends, a specific change is reflected. The volume adjustment of the production sound in the frequency band is effective. Further, in this example, even if the volume adjustment of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is invalidated, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. The screen for performing the change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band cannot be selected. In addition, during the period in which the volume adjustment of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is disabled, the environment change mode is performed even if the press operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. The screen may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 300 are used to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600. When the unit 303 is operated, the changes corresponding to these operations are not immediately reflected, but are reflected after the variation effect executed by the effect display device 1600 is completed. Normally, from the start to the end of the variable effect, the effect sound according to the content of the variable effect is continuous from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. Therefore, when adjusting the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band during the variable production (the continuously output production sound is interrupted for a moment, and then the volume in the specific frequency band is interrupted). There is a risk of giving the player a sense of discomfort (due to the resumption of output of the suppressed effect sound or the unsuppressed effect sound of the volume of a specific frequency band, etc.).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the variation effect, the variation effect is generated. By reflecting the change according to this operation after the end of the fluctuation effect without reflecting it until the end, the effect sound that continuously flows during the variation effect is output with the preset contents and changes. Volume of a specific frequency band by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 after the production is completed and the output of the effect sound that has been continuously flowing according to the content of the variable effect is stopped. Since it is possible to output a production sound that reflects the adjustment, it does not give the player a sense of discomfort. That is, during the variable effect in which the effect sound is continuously output, the continuously output effect sound is stopped without reflecting the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band, and the next effect sound is output. By reflecting it at the switching timing until it is output, it is possible to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without discomfort.

On the other hand, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed, this operation is performed. The corresponding changes are immediately reflected, and the adjusted production sound of the volume of a specific frequency band is output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. Will be done.

In this way, while the volume adjustment of the effect sound during the variable effect is immediately reflected, the volume adjustment of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is not immediately reflected. That is, for sound-related information that may adversely affect the planned effect of the variable effect during execution, such as giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the change of the effect sound, the change during the variable effect is prohibited to reduce the effect of the effect. It is designed to be deterred.

Further, if the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is not immediately reflected, the player may be notified by displaying the effect on the effect display device 1600. For example, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the variable effect, the volume adjustment in the specific frequency band is performed. Although it is not reflected immediately, the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band can be adjusted by displaying a mini character for volume setting on the production display device 1600 and displaying a standby display such as "Wait a minute" in the balloon of this mini character. The player may be notified that the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is normally accepted. In addition, a standby display for notifying the player that the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is normally accepted is specified. It may be changed according to the remaining time until the timing to reflect the volume adjustment of the frequency band of, for example, a mini character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and "Wait a moment" in the balloon of this mini character. The player acknowledges that the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band by performing the standby display 1 such as "ne" is normally accepted. After notifying to, when the remaining time until the timing to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band reaches the predetermined time, a mini character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and in the balloon of this mini character. The standby display 2 for counting down such as "3", "2", and "1" may be performed. Further, when the timing for adjusting the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is reached, a notification to that effect may be given. For example, a mini character for volume setting may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to display the mini character of this mini character. A reflection display such as "Selection reflection start!" May be displayed in the balloon.

Further, in the above example, as the volume control of a specific frequency band, the equalizer setting A in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed and the equalizer setting B in which the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed are set in advance as equalizer setting patterns. By switching between the equalizer setting A and the equalizer setting B by adjusting the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band, the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed and the specific frequency. It is designed to switch between two stages (on and off), one in which the volume of the band is suppressed. It should be noted that a plurality of equalizer settings having different degrees of suppression of the volume of a specific frequency band are stored in advance as an equalizer setting pattern, and by switching between these multiple equalizer settings, a plurality of equalizer settings having different degrees of suppression of the volume of a specific frequency band are obtained. You may switch to the state. For example, the equalizer setting A in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed, the equalizer setting B in which the volume of the specific frequency band is muted, and the volume of the specific frequency band are the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch and the effect operation unit 300. Equalizer setting C (for example, if the set volume is volume 6 is changed to volume 3), which is suppressed to half the volume set according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of By switching to one of the equalizer setting A, the equalizer setting B, and the equalizer setting C by memorizing as the setting pattern of and adjusting the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band, the volume of the specific frequency band can be adjusted. The unsuppressed state, the state in which the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and the volume of a specific frequency band are set according to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. It may be possible to switch between a state in which the volume is suppressed to half of the current volume and a state in which the volume is suppressed to half. This makes it possible to make settings that suit the tastes of various players.

Further, the effect sound in a specific frequency band is not limited to the above-mentioned one, but also includes the frequency band and the bass range of the voice. For example, the volume of the dialogue emitted from the character or the like during the variable effect can be adjusted. It may be adjusted (if there are a plurality of characters, they may be adjusted collectively or individually), or the volume of the bass range may be adjusted. In addition, it may be possible to adjust the effect sound (confirmed sound) for notifying the confirmation of the big hit, the payout sound at the time of paying out the prize ball, and the like. Further, the volume of a plurality of frequency bands may be adjusted as a specific frequency band, and for example, the volume of both the high frequency range and the low frequency range may be adjusted. In this case, the treble range and the bass range may be adjusted together (for example, an operation of switching between a state in which the treble range is not suppressed and a state in which the bass range is not suppressed, and a state in which the bass range is not suppressed and suppressed). The operation to switch to one of the states is performed in one operation), and each is adjusted (for example, the operation to switch to one of the state where the treble range is not suppressed and the state where the bass range is not suppressed and the state where the bass range is not suppressed and the state is suppressed. The operation of switching to one of the states may be performed separately). That is, the player may be able to select one of a plurality of setting modes (treble cut, payout sound cut, jackpot fixed sound cut, etc.). This makes it possible to make settings that suit the tastes of various players.

Further, when a continuous effect sound is output during a big hit game state or a small hit game state, the volume of the effect sound can be adjusted by using the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side. While it is immediately reflected in the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band may be reflected after the end of the big hit game state and the small hit game state. As a result, the continuous output of the effect sound is stopped, and the volume of the specific frequency band is adjusted at the switching timing until the next effect sound is output. The top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, By reflecting it in the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, it is possible to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without discomfort. During the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the player's attention to the effect content is lower than that of the variable effect, so the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is the same as the volume adjustment of the above effect sound. The output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the 3rd side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 may be immediately reflected.

Further, when a continuous effect sound is output in a game state different from the normal state such as during a time saving state, the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side. , The output from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 is immediately reflected, and the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is performed to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band in the middle of the variable production. When the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 300 is operated, the change corresponding to this operation is not reflected until the variation effect is completed, but is reflected after the variation effect is completed, and the variation effect is performed. Top center speaker 462 and top on the door frame 3 side when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band when it is not broken. The output from the side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 may be immediately reflected. That is, it is specified when the player does not pay much attention by reflecting the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band after the end of the variable effect without reflecting the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band during the execution of the player's most noticeable effect called the variable effect. It may be possible to reflect the volume adjustment of the frequency band of the above and change the effect sound according to the adjustment without discomfort.

Even when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected, the actual production sound is produced from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. The changed production sound is not output until is output. Therefore, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the variation effect, the specific frequency is specified after the end of the variation effect. Even if the volume adjustment of the band is reflected, the effect sound after the change will be the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4 after the start of the next variable effect. Is output from. That is, the actual output will be performed after the lottery process (winning determination lottery, etc.) for starting the next variation effect is performed. Similarly, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the period when the effect display device 1600 is performing the demonstration. Immediately reflects the volume adjustment of the production sound in a specific frequency band, but if the production sound is not output as a demonstration, the changed production sound will be the door frame 3 until the next variable production is started. It is not output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, but is output after the start of the variation effect.

Further, the volume control of a specific frequency band is initialized at the same time when the volume of the effect sound is initialized. That is, when the state in which the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 1 is continued for a predetermined time, the customer is in a waiting state, and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 last time. The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in the game is canceled, the volume is initialized, and at the same time, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is also initialized (the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed). State) is to be done.

Further, in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the execution of the error notification in which the notification sound is output at a loud volume (may be the maximum volume), the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit 300 When 303 is operated, whether or not to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound is appropriately set according to the degree of abnormality (illegal level) that caused the error notification. good.

For example, as shown in FIG. 176, when a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs, such as the full tank detection sensor 154 detecting that the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is full of game balls. When the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band during the execution full tank error notification, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is immediately set as the notification sound. When a slight abnormality (full tank error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is continuously reflected in the notification sound, and the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side is reflected. The changed notification sound may be output from the 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. In this example, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side (for example, "Please pull out the ball!") Reflects the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band as a full tank error notification. (For example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, it is output by a female voice, and if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, it is output by a male voice).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 177, the volume of a specific frequency band is set during the door opening error notification executed when a serious abnormality (door opening error) such as detecting that the door frame 3 is opened occurs. When the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated for adjustment, or when a serious abnormality (door opening error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, a specific frequency band The volume control of is not reflected in the notification sound. In this example, it is possible to adjust the volume of the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side (for example, "the door is open!") In a specific frequency band as a door opening error notification. (For example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, it is output by a female voice, and if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, it is output by a male voice). When an abnormality occurs, the volume control in a specific frequency band is invalidated, and the notification sound in which the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output.

That is, as shown in FIG. 176, a full tank error occurs when a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs, such as the full tank detection sensor 154 detecting that the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is full of game balls. During the notification, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated to adjust the volume, the operation is accepted as valid, but this volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound. The volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound, and the changed notification sound is output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. do. Further, as shown in FIG. 177, during the door opening error notification when a serious abnormality (door opening error) such as the detection that the door frame 3 has been opened occurs, the effect operation unit 300 is used to adjust the volume. When the rotation operation unit 302 of the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the operation is accepted as valid, but this volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound, and the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is not reflected in the notification sound. It has become like. By appropriately setting whether or not to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound according to the degree of abnormality (illegal level) that caused the error notification in this way, it is possible to ensure that a serious abnormality is detected. You will be able to discover it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 177, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are operated so as to suppress the volume of a specific frequency band, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side are operated. If a serious abnormality occurs while the changed effect sound is being output from the 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, the environment change mode or the operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed. The suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band is forcibly released (off) without adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band, and the notification sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output. As described above, the notification sound is output for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the output of the effect sound is restarted after the notification sound is stopped, a specific environment change mode or operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed. Without adjusting the volume of the frequency band, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band that was forcibly released is set (on) again, and the suppressed production sound of the volume of the specific frequency band is on the door frame 3 side. It is output from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example enables the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band, and reflects the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. When the effect sound and the notification sound can be output immediately, and when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is not immediately reflected in the output of the effect sound. The case where the timing is delayed so that the changed effect sound and the notification sound can be output and the case where the changed state and the notification sound can be output are appropriately set according to the state (game state, error state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect and to reliably detect a serious abnormality.

[16. Change settings such as winning probability]
An example of changing the probability of a big hit, a small hit, or the like according to a set value in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. Here, it is assumed that the payout control board 633 outputs the operation signals from the setting key, the setting change switch, and the setting confirmation switch on the setting board, and the payout control board 633 is not provided with the RWM clear button 633z having a plurality of functions. A RAM clear switch, an error release switch, etc. shall be provided separately. Although the setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 in this example, it may be connected to the power supply board 630 in the power supply board cover 631 or the setting board may be connected to the main control board 1310. Further, the setting board is not an independent board, but may be a part of a payout control board 633, a power supply board 630, or a main control board 1310. That is, a setting key, a setting change switch, a setting confirmation switch, and a setting indicator may be mounted on any of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, or the main control board 1310.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 has a setting board for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 of the board unit 620, and the payout control unit 633a acquires the operation state of each switch provided on the setting board and displays the set or selected set value. Control the vessel.

On the setting board, a setting key for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode, a setting change switch for changing the setting value, a setting confirmation switch for confirming the changed setting value, and a setting confirmation switch. , A setting display that displays a setting or a selected setting value is provided, and functions as a setting change operation unit that accepts a setting change operation. As described above, the setting board is provided on the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row on the game island in a game store, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. This makes it possible to change the settings.

In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key, the setting change switch, and the setting confirmation switch on the setting board are taken into the payout control unit 633a. Further, the setting display is controlled by the payout control unit 633a. The confirmed setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU responds to the setting as a table (hit determination table, big hit symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.) used in a special lottery or the like. Select the table. The tables used in the special lottery and the like are provided for each setting, and each table is set so that at least a part of the values is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178, in this example, the "big hit probability", the "small hit probability", the "small hit type", the "normal symbol hit probability", and the "second according to the normal symbol hit type". The opening / closing pattern of the starting port ”is set corresponding to each of the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won in the hit determination table) is set to a different value for each set value, and the set value 1 is "1/319" and the set value 2 is "1/319". It is "1/309", the set value 3 is "1/299", the set value 4 and the set value 6 are "1/279", and the set value 5 is "1/289". In this example, the jackpot probability increases as the set value increases from the set value 1 to the set value 5, but the jackpot probability is lower than the set value 5 at the set value 6 having the highest set value. There is. The jackpot probability may be improved in proportion to the set value. In this case, the jackpot probability may be set to increase as the set value increases from the set values 1 to 6.

In addition, the small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit judgment table) is set to a different value for each set value, and in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, the table is used. The set value 1 to 4 is set to "1/100", the set value 5 and the set value 6 are set to "1/90", and in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, the set value 1 to 1 to Up to the set value 5, it is "50/100", and with the set value 6, it is "66/100". In this example, in the case of a high setting value (setting value 5 or setting value 6), the frequency of occurrence of the big hit gaming state is indirectly increased by increasing the small hit probability more than other setting values (low setting value). It has become. In this way, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, the set value is estimated by the winning frequency of the small hit in the normal state by changing the small hit probability according to the set value, while the second special symbol is used. In the table used for the special lottery, the small hit probability is made almost the same for all set values so that the continuation of the time-saving state (Ren-chan) can be enjoyed purely in the time-saving state.

Further, in the table mainly used for the special lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the small hit probability of the set value 5 and the set value 6 is set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 4. On the other hand, in the table mainly used for the special lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, only the small hit probability of the set value 6 is set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5. Therefore, with the set value 4 and the set value 5, the lottery is performed with different small hit probabilities in the special lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, but in the special lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state. Is designed to have a small hit lottery with the same probability. However, the jackpot probability and the determination ratio of the small hit type described later are set to be higher in the set value 5 than in the set value 4, so that the set value 5 is more advantageous than the set value 4 as a whole. Has been done.

In addition, since the jackpot probability in the normal state is high but the small hit probability is low, there is a high possibility that the hit as an opportunity to be controlled to shift to the time saving state as in the set value 4 is a "big hit". A game that is unlikely to be a big hit through a "small hit" and a "small hit" that is unlikely to be a "big hit" as an opportunity to be controlled to shift to a time-saving state like the set value 5. It is possible to realize a game that is likely to be a big hit through the game by changing the set value, and to provide a new game property that makes the set value guess according to the type of hit as an opportunity to shift to the time saving state and be controlled. Can be done.

The small hit probability may be improved in proportion to the set value. In this case, the small hit probability may be increased as the set value increases from the set values 1 to 6. .. Further, the small hit probability corresponding to some of the set values 1 to 6 is lower than the small hit probability corresponding to any of the set values lower than some of the set values. You may try to do it. For example, the small hit probability of the set value 4 may be 1/100, and the small hit probability of the set value 3 which is lower than the set value 4 may be 1/90. In this case, by setting the ratio determined for the small hit type (third small hit in this example), which is advantageous in the case of a small hit, so that the set value 4 is higher than the set value 3. The setting value 4 may be more advantageous than the setting value 3.

In addition, the determination ratio when determining the small hit type based on the decision to make a small hit as a result of the above special lottery (hit determination process (step S305)) is also set in the small hit symbol determination table. Selection ratio), different values are set for each set value. In this example, when it is decided to make a small hit as a result of the special lottery of the first special symbol, the set value 1 to the set value 3 are determined to be the second small hit at a rate of 9/10 for 10 minutes. It is decided to be the third small hit at the ratio of 1 of, and it is decided to be the second small hit at the ratio of 8/10 at the setting value 4 and the setting value 5, and it is decided to be the third small hit at the ratio of 2/10. At the set value of 6, the first small hit is determined at a rate of 1/10, the second small hit is determined at a rate of 6/10, and the third small hit is determined at a rate of 3/10. It has become like.

In addition, when it is decided to make a small hit as a result of the special lottery of the second special symbol, the set value 1 and the set value 2 are decided to be the first small hit at a ratio of 3/10, and 6/10. The ratio is determined to be the second small hit, the ratio is determined to be the third small hit at a ratio of 1/10, and the set value 3 and the set value 4 are determined to be the first small hit at a ratio of 2/10. The ratio of 6 is determined to be the second small hit, the ratio of 2/10 is determined to be the third small hit, and the set value 5 and the setting value 6 are determined to be the first small hit at the ratio of 1/10. The second small hit is determined at a rate of 6/10, and the third small hit is determined at a rate of 3/10.

Further, as described above, the first small hit is to guide the game ball accepted in the prize winning opening 2006 to the first loss opening 2535, and there is no possibility that the big hit gaming state will occur, or the big hit gaming state. The possibility of occurrence is extremely low. Then, in this example, when it is decided to make a small hit as a result of the special lottery of the first special symbol, the first small hit is selected only when the set value is 6, and another set value (set value) is selected. By making it not selected in 1 to 5), if it is a small hit in a state that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the normal state, which is a time saving state, if it is a set value 1 to a set value 5, it is always a big hit game. It is possible to execute the small hit gaming state while generating the second small hit or the third small hit having the possibility of generating the state and having the expectation for the big hit gaming state. That is, when the set value 1 to the set value 5 is a small hit in a state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state, which is a time-saving state, the player pays attention to the small hit game state while holding expectations for the big hit game state. , The player's disappointment increases when he recognizes that all the game balls accepted in the prize winning opening 2006 are guided to the first loss opening 2535 and there is no possibility of a big hit gaming state, but at least. By generating a second small hit or a third small hit that has the possibility of generating a big hit gaming state, it is possible to draw attention to the big hit gaming state during the small hit gaming state, and the gaming interest is reduced. Can be deterred. On the other hand, in the case of the set value 6, the first small hit may be selected, but it can be determined that the set value 6 is the highest set value by executing the first small hit in the normal state. , It is possible to give the player more joy than the disappointment of winning the first small hit, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, when it is decided to make a small hit as a result of the special lottery of the second special symbol, the first small hit is selected. In the short time state, the small hit probability is higher than in the normal state, so that the small hit game state is executed more frequently. Therefore, even if it is recognized that the first small hit is executed and all the game balls accepted in the prize winning opening 2006 are guided to the first loss opening 2535, and there is no possibility of the big hit gaming state occurring. Do not discourage the player. In addition, when it is decided to make a small hit as a result of the special lottery of the second special symbol, the determination ratio of the first small hit is increased at the low setting value (setting value 1 or setting value 2), and at the high setting value. The decision rate of the first small hit is reduced. That is, at the high setting value, when it is decided to make a small hit as a result of the special lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of the small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player is lowered as compared with the low setting value. The high setting value is more advantageous to the player than the low setting value.

Further, as described above, the third small hit guides the game ball accepted in the accessory winning opening 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007, and the decision to be the third small hit is a big hit. It is almost the same state as that. In other words, a higher decision rate for the third small hit is synonymous with a higher probability of winning a big hit. In this example, a high set value (set value 5 or set value 6) determines the third small hit. By increasing the ratio, the probability of occurrence of a big hit game state is indirectly improved.

In addition, the winning probability of the normal lottery (the ratio of the normal symbol hit judgment value indicating that the normal symbol hit judgment random number is a normal hit) is set to a different value for each set value, and the set values 1 to 5 are set. It is set to "1/2", and the set value 6 is set to "1/2". Therefore, at the set value 6, when the game ball is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 and the normal lottery is performed, the second starting door 2411 always advances and the game ball can be accepted in the second starting opening 2004. This is a state that is more advantageous to the player than other set values.

Further, in this example, when it is decided to be a normal hit as a result of the normal lottery, A per normal symbol (symbol A per normal symbol) and B per normal symbol (design B per normal symbol (design B1 to normal symbol B1 to)). It is designed to be determined from a plurality of normal symbol hit types, that is, a normal symbol per symbol B5)) and a normal symbol per C (normal symbol per symbol C), according to the determined normal symbol hit type. Aspects (symbol A per ordinary symbol, symbol B per ordinary symbol, symbol C per ordinary symbol) are derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display. Further, the opening / closing mode of the second starting port door 2411 is different for each set value. Specifically, when the number is A per normal symbol in the normal state, the opening / closing mode of "performing 0.1s opening once" is executed with all the set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and the time is shortened. Occasionally, when the normal symbol hit A is executed, the opening / closing mode of "execute 6s opening once" is executed with all the set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and when the normal symbol hit B is obtained in the normal state. The odd-numbered set values (setting value 1, setting value 3, and setting value 5) are used to execute the opening / closing mode of "performing 0.1s opening twice", and the even-numbered setting values (setting value 2, setting value 4, setting) are executed. In the value 6), the opening / closing mode of "execution of 0.1s opening once" is executed, and when the normal symbol hit B is obtained in the time saving state, "6s opening is executed once" from the set value 1 to the set value 3. The opening / closing mode is executed, the setting value 4 and the setting value 5 execute the opening / closing mode of "executing the 3s opening twice", and the setting value 6 executes the opening / closing mode of "executing the 3s opening once".

Further, in the case of the set value 1 to the set value 5, one of the two types of the normal symbol hit type, the normal symbol hit A and the normal symbol hit B, is determined as the normal symbol hit type. In the case of the set value 6, the normal symbol hit type is determined to be one of three types of normal symbol hit types: normal symbol hit A, normal symbol hit B, and normal symbol hit C. .. Then, when the normal symbol hits C in the normal state, the opening / closing mode of "executing 0.1s opening 6 times" is executed with the set value 6, and when the normal symbol hits C in the time saving state, the setting is made. At a value of 6, the opening / closing mode of "executing 1s opening 6 times" is executed.

In this way, the operation mode of the second start port door 2411 (opening / closing mode of the second start port 2004) for opening the second start port 2004 based on the normal lottery result being a normal hit is set for each set value. Therefore, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be suggested depending on the operation mode of the second starting port door 2411.

The above setting key serves as an opportunity to change to the setting change mode by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and maintaining the short-circuited or open state of the contacts by turning the key to the set position. It is a switch that outputs a signal. It should be noted that other switches may be used in combination without providing the setting key. In this case, the setting change mode is started by operating the setting change switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press), and the setting change mode is ended by long pressing the setting change switch in the setting change mode. You may.

Further, the setting change mode may be started / ended by operating the RAM clear switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (holding down). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch in the setting change mode.

By doing so, even an employee who does not have the key for the setting key can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation by turning down the setting change switch.

The setting change switch is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to switch and select a set value (1 to 6) in order. That is, when the setting change switch is pressed once, the set value is incremented by 1, and when the setting value = 6, when the setting change switch is operated, the set value = 1. It should be noted that the set value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch without providing the setting change switch. The set value is not limited to 6 steps, but may be a smaller step (for example, 2 steps) or a larger step (for example, 8 steps).

The set value changes the operation ratio of the condition device (that is, the hit probability of the special symbol). The set value = 1 has a low hit probability, and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability variable jackpot ratio, the time reduction (ST) ratio after the jackpot, the number of time reductions, the number of rounds and counts of the jackpot, the probability of hitting a normal figure, the prize ball of the general winning opening, the starting opening, and the big winning opening. Various parameters related to the game, such as the number, may be changed to change the number of prize balls that the player can obtain.

The setting confirmation switch is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary type switch. The setting change switch and the setting confirmation switch may be composed of switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that both switches are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch may be configured as a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch may be configured as a momentary toggle switch.

The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key to the normal position may be confirmed without providing the setting confirmation switch. Further, the set value selected may be determined by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the operation of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, the contact detection by the handle touch sensor 192 by touching the handle 182, the operation of the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the operation of the ball lending button, the operation of the return button, and the like. The selected setting may be confirmed by detecting the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 2002 and 2004. The operation unit that substitutes for the setting confirmation switch may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

That is, in order to set the game performance on the pachinko machine 1 of this example, three switches (including the setting key) are provided on the setting board, but it is sufficient to provide one or two switches on the setting board. ..

Further, the setting change operation may be possible only by the RAM clear switch without providing any of the setting key, the setting change switch and the setting confirmation switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (holding down). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Furthermore, instead of the setting change switch, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch for less than the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in the setting change mode, and instead of the setting confirmation switch, the predetermined time of the RAM clear switch is used. By the above operation (hold down), the set value can be confirmed. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch after the setting is confirmed.

The setting display is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays a setting value selected by operating a setting change switch, and displays a current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating a setting key). The setting display may be configured not with the 7-segment LED but with the number of LEDs having a settable value. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up and the set value is displayed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the payout control board 633 is provided with an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED that displays the type of the payout error. The set value and the current setting value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is advisable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dot may be turned on when displaying the set value. Further, the display of the error type may be a lighting display (not blinking), and the display of the set value may be a blinking display.

[16-1. Setting change process]
Next, the process related to the setting change will be described. FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing a procedure for changing the above set value.

In this example, the main control side power-on processing is executed based on the fact that the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and the setting change mode start condition is satisfied in the main control-side power-on processing. The above setting value is changed.

Specifically, the main control MPU determines the state of the setting key after setting the initial value and starting setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT of the main control side power-on processing, and the setting key is turned on. If it is operated, the setting change mode for changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. When the setting key is operated, the setting key operation signal is output from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU determines that the setting key is turned on when the setting key operation signal is received. .. In addition, the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 is operated, the handle touch sensor 192 is detected by touching the handle 182, or the prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit (there is a balance of the prepaid card). , If there is a balance put into the cash sand, the setting change mode may not be started. Further, even if there is a possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed on the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a magnetic error has been detected), the setting change mode may not be started.

When the setting change mode is started, the main control MPU uses data other than the game state (for example, probabilistic state, time saving state, information about the prize ball) in the game control area (also referred to as a specific area) of the built-in RAM. Therefore, the first RAM clear process for clearing the data indicating the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 is executed.

Next, by performing the setting change operation, the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are switched. That is, when the main control MPU finishes the first RAM clear process, the payout control unit 633a sends a first RAM clear process end command, and when the first RAM clear process end command is received, the payout control unit 633a sets a value on the setting display. The initial value (for example, setting value 0) is blinked and displayed, and the setting value displayed on the setting display is switched every time the setting change switch is operated (loop from setting value 1 to setting value 6).

When the main control MPU executes the first RAM clear process, the set value is cleared and becomes an unset state. In addition, the setting change mode cannot be terminated when the setting value is not set, and if the power is cut off during the setting change mode when the setting value is not set, the power is turned on again. Then, the setting change mode will be performed. At this time, if the setting key is turned off, a loop process is performed to monitor the state of the setting key until the setting key is turned on, and the setting change mode is set according to the setting key being turned on. It will be started.

Further, the payout control unit 633a confirms whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, that is, whether the main body frame open switch is off, and the main body frame open switch is turned on (the main body frame 4 is the outer frame 2). If it is set to (not open from), it loops until the main body frame open switch is turned off, and the operation of the setting confirmation switch is not accepted. That is, the setting change operation is not completed until the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2.

When the main body frame open switch is off or the main body frame open switch is off and the setting confirmation switch is operated, the payout control unit 633a confirms and displays the setting value displayed on the setting display ( (Ends blinking display and lights up), and sends a setting change end command indicating the confirmed setting value to the main control MPU.

When the main control MPU receives the setting change end command, it stores the set value indicated by the received setting change end command in the game control area of the built-in RAM. As a result, the lottery process or the like according to the fixed set value will be performed.

Then, when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the main control MPU performs the power failure clearing process (step S14).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the set value is changed by the above-mentioned processing.

When the setting change mode ends, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the payout control unit 633a ends the display of the set value on the setting display (does not display the set value). You may. Also, if the setting key is turned on after the setting change mode is finished, the setting change mode is not executed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting display. As a result, the game clerk can change the set value after grasping the current set value.

Further, when the setting change mode is executed, a notification to that effect may be given. For example, when it is determined that the setting key is turned on, the setting change mode start command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 to start the setting change mode is transmitted, and the setting change mode start command is received. Based on this, the peripheral control unit 1511 may perform a predetermined display (setting is being changed, etc.) on the effect display device 1600. In this case, when the setting change mode is terminated, that is, when the setting key is operated to be turned off, a setting change mode end command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 to end the setting change mode is transmitted, and the setting is performed. The peripheral control unit 1511 may end the predetermined display performed by the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the change mode end command. In addition, the setting value confirmed as a predetermined display or the setting value displayed on the setting display may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and in this case, it may be deleted at the end of the setting change mode. good.

Further, the main control MPU may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be a display in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all the special symbol indicators are turned off or on).

On the other hand, after the initial value setting and the start setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT of the main control side power-on processing are performed, the state of the setting key is determined, and if the setting key is not turned on, the step The processing after S14 is executed.

Then, in the main control side power-on processing, the main control MPU determines when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, or in step S30. When it is determined that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in the determination in step S32, that is, the main control side power cutoff process. When it is determined that the checksum has not been completed normally, the data other than the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 in the game control area in step S38 and is the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, and the information regarding the prize ball). ) Is executed, and then the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set (step S40). As described above, unlike the first RAM clear process, the set value information is not initialized in the second RAM clear process. That is, the first RAM clear process can be executed by operating the setting key when the power is turned on to clear the set value information of the pachinko machine 1, and the second RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch when the power is turned on. It is possible to execute the process to clear the information regarding the gaming state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, and the information regarding the prize ball). Also, by operating the setting key to turn on when the power is turned on, the first RAM clear process is executed to clear the set value information of the pachinko machine 1, and then the RAM clear switch is operated to execute the second RAM clear process. Clear the information about the state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the information about the prize ball), that is, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 and the information about the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the information about the prize ball). It is also possible to clear both. In this way, one or both of the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process can be selectively executed according to the information to be cleared.

In this example, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key is operated, but the payout control unit 633a may determine. Further, the setting key operation signal transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 can be transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a predetermined number of pulses of a predetermined frequency) can be transmitted, or the power supply voltage can be grounded. A signal having an intermediate potential that is not a voltage may be output. This is because, in order to prevent fraudulent acts that short-circuit the terminal of the setting key and activate the setting change mode, a signal related to the operation of the setting key is sent from the main control board 1310 by a signal that cannot occur by short-circuiting the terminal. This is because it is preferable to transmit to.

[16-2. Variable production according to the set value]
Next, the variable effect according to each set value will be described. FIG. 180 is a variation pattern table referred to in the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process).

In this example, a variation pattern table is provided for each set value, and the variation pattern type selected according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is different. Specifically, when the first special lottery result is out of reach in the normal state, the special figure 1 balloon variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process ( In FIG. 180 (A)), for example, a mini character for suggesting a setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and "maybe low?" Or "maybe one of 1, 2, or 3?" Is displayed in the balloon of the mini character. By doing so, the balloon variation pattern 25 that executes the "low setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is 1, 2, or 3 can be selected from the set value 1 to the set value 3. For example, by displaying a mini character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600 and displaying "maybe it is expensive?" Or "maybe any of 4, 5, 6?" In the balloon of the mini character, the pachinko machine 1 The balloon variation pattern 26 for executing the “high setting suggestion effect” suggesting that the set value is any of 4, 5 and 6 can be selected from the set value 4 to the set value 6. Therefore, when the "high setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, the player can recognize that the set value is at least 4 or more, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 can display a mini character for suggesting a setting on the effect display device 1600 and display "maybe even number?" Or "maybe any of 2, 4, or 6?" In the balloon of the mini character. The balloon variation pattern 27 that executes the "even number setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the setting value of is 2, 4, or 6 can be selected with the setting value 2, the setting value 4, and the setting value 6, for example. The setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a mini character for suggesting the setting, and by displaying "maybe an odd number?" Or "maybe one of 1, 3, or 5?" In the balloon of the mini character. The balloon variation pattern 28 for executing the “odd number setting suggestion effect” suggesting that is 1, 3, or 5 can be selected with the set value 1, the set value 3, and the set value 5. Therefore, when the "even number setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, it is one of the setting value 2, the setting value 4, and the setting value 6, and when the "odd number setting suggestion effect" is executed, the setting value 1 and the setting value are set. 3. The player can recognize that it is one of the set value 5. It is possible to infer the set value by combining it with the execution history of "low setting suggestion effect" and "high setting suggestion effect". That is, if the "odd number setting suggestion effect" and the "low setting suggestion effect" are executed, the setting value 1 or the setting value 3 is executed, and the "odd number setting suggestion effect" and the "high setting suggestion effect" are executed. If so, the setting value is 5, and if the "even number setting suggestion effect" and the "low setting suggestion effect" are executed, the setting value is 2, and the "even number setting suggestion effect" and the "high setting suggestion effect" are used. If is executed, it can be inferred that the set value is 4 or the set value is 6. As described above, this example provides a new game property in which the set value is estimated by the combination of the executed setting suggestion effects among the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects.

Further, in this example, for example, the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is set by displaying a mini character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600 and displaying "maybe the best?" Or "maybe 6?" In the balloon of the mini character. The balloon variation pattern 29 for executing the "highest setting suggestion effect" suggesting that the value is 6 can be selected only with the set value 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, the player can recognize that the set value is the maximum setting value 6, and the game entertainment is improved. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, it is possible to select the deviation variation pattern 31 that executes the "highest setting confirmation effect" in the case of the deviation that does not reach or the reach is lost, so that the player can select the setting value. It is possible to notify that the setting value 6 of the maximum setting is confirmed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment by making the player recognize that the maximum setting has been confirmed.

Further, when the first special lottery result is a small hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 180) referred to when the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined in the first fluctuation pattern setting process. In (B)), for example, the pachinko machine 1 is set by displaying a mini character for suggesting a setting on the effect display device 1600 and displaying "highest setting confirmed!" Or "6 confirmed!" In the balloon of the mini character. The small hit variation pattern 33 and the small hit variation pattern 34 that execute the "highest setting confirmation effect" for notifying that the value is 6 can be selected only with the set value 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect in the case of a small hit, the player can recognize that the set value is the maximum setting value 6, and the game entertainment is improved. ..

Further, when the first special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 180 (C)) referred to when the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined in the first fluctuation pattern setting process. In)), the jackpot fluctuation pattern 34 for executing the "highest setting confirmation effect" can be selected only with the set value 6. Therefore, when the "maximum setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect in the case of a big hit, the player can recognize that the set value is the maximum setting setting value 6, and the big hit game state is further executed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player double joy, which improves the interest in the game.

Further, when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the time saving state, the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 180) referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the second fluctuation pattern setting process. In (D)), the small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the "highest setting confirmation effect" can be selected only with the set value 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect in the case of a small hit, the player can recognize that the set value is the maximum setting setting value 6, and further, the prize winning opening. By guiding the game ball entered in 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007 and winning the third small hit that generates a big hit game state, it is possible to give the player double joy, so that the game can be played. The interest will improve.

As described above, in this example, the small hit probability is changed according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the normal state, the set value 1 to the set value 4 have a small hit probability of "1/100", whereas the set value 5 and the set value 6 are higher than the set value 1 to the set value 4 "90 minutes". It is said to be 1 ". Similarly, in the time saving state, the set value 1 to the set value 5 is set to the small hit probability "1/10", while the set value 6 is "1/9" higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5. It is said that.

Further, the small hit variation pattern 34 that executes the "highest setting confirmation effect" that can be selected in the second variation pattern setting process when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the time saving state is for a long period (155 s). This is executed, and is longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected from the setting value 1 to the setting value 5 lower than the setting value 6. Further, in the set value 6, the selection rate of the small hit fluctuation pattern 20 having a longer fluctuation time than the small hit fluctuation patterns 1 to 3 is higher than the set values 1 to 5 which are lower than the set value 6. That is, at the set value 6 in which the small hit probability is higher than the other set values, the variation time of the variation effect executed in the time saving state is long. As described above, at the set value 6, the small hit probability is higher than that at the set values 1 to 5, and when a small hit is made, the game ball that has entered the prize winning opening 2006 is used as the first V winning opening 2007. Since the ratio determined for the third small hit that induces the big hit game state is also set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5, it becomes possible to acquire a large number of prize balls in a short time. Therefore, in the case of the set value 6, the selection rate of the small hit fluctuation pattern 20 or the small hit fluctuation pattern 34 in which the fluctuation time set longer than the other small hit fluctuation patterns is set is increased from the set value 1 to the set value 5. The number of executions of the variable effect per unit time is suppressed, and the improvement of gambling is suppressed.

Further, in this example, the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern are distributed in substantially the same manner for all the set values, but in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6, the fluctuation pattern peculiar to the set value 6 (out-of-order fluctuation pattern 29 to out-of-order fluctuation) is distributed. Since the pattern 31, the small hit variation pattern 33, the small hit variation pattern 34, and the large hit variation pattern 34) are provided, the distribution of the random numbers for determining the variation pattern is different. Therefore, in this example, in the variation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6, only the variation pattern determination random numbers distributed to the specific variation patterns (adjustment variation patterns) are adjusted and the variation pattern determination random numbers are distributed. In this way, in the variation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6, only the variation pattern determination random numbers allocated to the specific variation pattern are adjusted without changing the distribution of the variation pattern determination random numbers of all the variation patterns. Therefore, the load of adding or deleting fluctuation patterns is reduced, and the design of the gaming machine becomes easy. It should be noted that the specific fluctuation pattern maintains a certain frequency of appearance even if the number of random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern is reduced, and at least the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern set in other set values are used. It may be adjusted so that it has 60% or more of the number of distributions, and the appearance rate may not be excessively lowered as compared with other set values.

In this way, in this example, the small hit probability and the variable time of the variable effect executed when the special lottery result is a small hit are made different according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1, thereby balancing the gambling. I'm taking.

In addition, the above setting suggestion effect (low setting suggestion effect, high setting suggestion effect, even number setting suggestion effect, odd number setting suggestion effect, highest setting suggestion effect, highest setting confirmation effect) is out of the first special lottery result in the normal state. Or, it is most easily executed when the reach is out of reach, and there are many types of feasible setting suggestion effects. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result in the time saving state is out of reach or reach, or the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) in the normal state and the time saving state is a small hit or a big hit. In this case, it is more difficult to execute than in the case where the first special lottery result in the normal state is out of reach or out of reach, and there are few types of feasible setting suggestion effects. That is, by reducing the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect as compared with the case where the setting suggestion effect is out of the normal state or the reach is out of the normal state during the time saving state or the small hit, the acceptance of the game ball into the V winning opening is focused on. There is.

[17. Guide passage group consisting of first guide passage and second guide passage]
[17-1. When the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, in the case where the right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is provided, FIG. This will be described with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 181 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage 2521, and FIG. 182 is a specific production example at the time of executing a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404. ..

As shown in FIG. 181, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below (near the entrance) the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521. The right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 always passes through. That is, when the game ball B is driven (so-called right-handed) with the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2505 and abutting against the abutment portion 1006, the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 is entered. When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. On the other hand, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not come into contact with the abutment portion 1006 (a strength that is weaker than right-handed hitting) after entering the upstream space portion 2505, it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided inside the first guide passage 2521, so that the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. There is no.

The right detection sensor 2404 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 is input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the right detection sensor 2404 determines that the game ball B has been driven into the game. If the passage of the ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not in the state of being driven into the first guide passage 2521.

In the present embodiment, it is necessary to change the way of hitting the game ball B (launching intensity) according to the game state, and to make the area and the passage where the game ball B is hit different. First, during the small hit game, the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 is opened, and the game ball B is inserted into the opened accessory winning opening 2006. Is required. Therefore, during the small hit game, the game ball enters the upstream space portion 2505 and abuts on the abutment portion 1006 so that the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. It is necessary to hit B (so-called right-handed).

Further, during the big hit game, the big winning opening 2005 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500 is opened, and the game ball B is required to enter the open big winning opening 2005. However, in the guide passage group 2520, it is configured so that the game ball B is discharged from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 with a higher probability than the exit of the first guide passage 2521 to enter the large winning opening 2005. ing. In addition, during the time saving state, the second starting port 2004 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500 is opened based on the entry into the normal winning opening 2003 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500. It is required to enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2005 which is in the open state, but the second guide passage 2522 is more than the exit of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520. It is configured so that the game ball B is discharged from the exit of the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2005 with a higher probability. Therefore, during the big hit game and the time saving state, the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2505 and does not abut on the abutment portion 1006 so that the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520. It is preferable to hit the game ball B with a force (strength that is weaker than right-handed).

Further, during the normal state, it is required to insert the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 provided below the center accessory 2500. Therefore, during the normal state, the highest of the outer peripheral surfaces of the center accessory 2500 is such that the game ball B flows down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 where the game ball B can enter the first starting port 2002. It is necessary to hit the game ball B (so-called left-handed) with the strength to enter the left side of the front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) from the part where the ball has become.

In the present embodiment, it is necessary to change the way of hitting the game ball B (launch intensity) according to the game state and make the area or passage where the game ball B is driven different, but the game ball is in the recommended area or passage. If B is not driven, the player is alerted to hit the game ball B into the recommended area or passage. Specifically, when the game state is not such that the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B. When the state is continued for a predetermined time, the player is alerted.

First, it is recommended to drive the game ball B into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 during the big hit game and the time saving state, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and that state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds). To warn the player that the game ball B should be driven into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182 (A), the effect display device 1600 executes the first warning effect to notify the message "Please drive into the second guide passage". As a result, during the big hit game and during the time saving state, the hitting method is changed to a strength that does not come into contact with the abutment portion 1006 (strength that is weaker than right-handed hitting) by entering the upstream space portion 2505, and the second guide. The player can grasp that the game ball B should be driven into the passage 2522. Then, if the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, for 5 seconds) after the execution of the first warning effect, the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521. It is determined that the state in which the player has been driven has been resolved, and the first warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B during the big hit game and the time saving state, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer is set. At the same time as starting, the count value is counted up every time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, when the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time after the start of the monitoring timer (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), the first 1 When the warning effect is executed but the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B ends with the detection of less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), the game is played in the first guide passage 2521. Assuming that the state in which the ball B has been driven has been resolved, the first warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. In addition, even when the game state is switched from the big hit game or the time saving state after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B should no longer be driven into the second guide passage 2522, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. ing. Then, after the execution of the first warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first In addition to ending the first warning effect assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2521 has been resolved, the second guide passage 2522 is also used when the game state is switched from the big hit game or the time saving state. The first warning effect has been completed because the game ball B is no longer in a state where it should be driven.

Further, during the normal state, it is recommended to drive the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B. Then, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and when that state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), the center role The player is warned that the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the object 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182 (B), the effect display device 1600 executes a second warning effect for notifying the message "Please hit left". As a result, during the normal state, the striking method is changed to the strength of entering the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 to the left side of the front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) from the highest portion. , The player can grasp that the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. When the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, for 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 is resolved. It is judged that the second warning effect has been completed.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B during the normal state, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, the monitoring timer is started, and the monitoring timer is started. Every time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer, the count value is counted up. Then, when the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time after the start of the monitoring timer (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), the first 2 When the warning effect is executed but the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B ends with the detection of less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), the game is played in the first guide passage 2521. Assuming that the state in which the ball B has been driven has been resolved, the second warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. In addition, even if the game state is switched from the normal state after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B should no longer be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. ing. Then, after the execution of the second warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first In addition to ending the second warning effect assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2521 has been resolved, even when the game state is switched from the normal state, the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 is displayed. The second warning effect has been completed because the game ball B is no longer in a state where it should be driven.

As described above, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B when the game state is not such that the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520. When the displayed state continues for a predetermined time, a warning screen (first and second warning effects) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the warning content is changed according to the game state. As a result, which area or passage is recommended even when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 when the game state is not such that the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521. , The player can accurately grasp.

On the other hand, during the small hit game, it is recommended to drive the game ball B into the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is the game ball B. If it is not detected that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the game is played in the first guide passage 2521. Warn the player that the ball B should be hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182 (C), the effect display device 1600 executes a third warning effect to notify the message "Please drive into the first guide passage". As a result, during the small hit game, the method of hitting should be changed to the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2505 and contacting the abutment portion 1006, and the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521. Can be grasped by a person. Then, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, and the third warning effect is terminated. I have to.

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer is used. Has started. Then, when the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, for 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the third warning effect is executed, whereas the predetermined state is executed. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within the time (for example, 5 seconds), the third warning is assumed that the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved. The effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Further, even when the game state is switched from the small hit game after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B is no longer in a state where the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521, the information of the monitoring timer or the like is cleared. Then, after the execution of the third warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521. In addition to ending the 4th warning effect as resolved, even when the game state is switched from the small hit game, the 3rd warning effect is assumed that the game ball B is no longer in the state where the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521. Is finished.

In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below (near the entrance) the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but the game ball B which has entered the first guide passage 2521 is always provided. Any position may be provided as long as it passes through, for example, an entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, an exit at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, and the inside of the first guide passage 2521.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but on the downstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006. It may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small hit game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the open character winning opening 2006. Therefore, the frequency with which the game ball B passes through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from passing excessively and causing a malfunction in the right detection sensor 2404.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects exemplify displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the game ball B is displayed in any mode in each game state. When the driving area instruction display (for example, the right-handed display consisting of a right-arrow image or the left-handed display consisting of a left-arrow image) is separately performed to make the player always know that the player should be driven, this hitting is performed. It is desirable to execute the first to third warning effects so as not to obstruct the display of the embedded area instruction. For example, a "display area for displaying the input area instruction display" is provided in the upper right portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 different from that area is provided. It is desirable to divide and provide a "display area for displaying the first to third warning effects" in the upper left portion of the above so that each guide is not superimposed and obstructed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects exemplify displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such a warning is realized as an effect by voice instead of display. In that case, the priority of the allocation to the channel provided finitely for outputting the sound becomes higher than the various production sounds set in the normal state, the big hit game, or the time saving state. It is desirable to set so as to output as much as possible even in a situation where there is no vacancy (unused channel) in the finitely provided channels. This makes it possible to effectively suppress the disadvantage of a player who is unfamiliar with the game characteristics having various types of hits of the game ball B.

[17-2. When detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, the right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 out of the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the second guide passage 2522 are entered. A case where the left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the game ball B and the left detection sensor 2405 is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184. FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and FIG. 184 shows a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. This is a concrete production example at the time of execution.

As shown in FIG. 183, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below (near the entrance) the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, and the second A left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below (near the entrance) the entrance which is the upper end of the guide passage 2522. The right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 always passes through. That is, when the game ball B is driven (so-called right-handed) with the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2505 and abutting against the abutment portion 1006, the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 is entered. When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404.

On the other hand, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 always passes through. That is, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not come into contact with the abutment portion 1006 (a strength that is weaker than right-handed hitting) after entering the upstream space portion 2505, it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B is detected by the left detection sensor 2405.

The right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 has a detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. Has been entered. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, and is based on the detection signal from the left detection sensor 2405. Therefore, it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is driven into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the left detection sensor 2405 determines that the game ball B has been driven into the game. When the passage of the ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the second guide passage 2522, and the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 have not detected the passage of the game ball B. It is determined that the game ball B is not in a state of being driven into either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522.

In the present embodiment, as described above, it is necessary to change the way of hitting the game ball B (launching intensity) according to the game state, and to make the area and the passage where the game ball B is hit different, but it is recommended. If the game ball B is not driven into the recommended area or passage, the player is alerted to drive the game ball B into the recommended area or passage. Specifically, since the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the normal state in which the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. When, the state in which either the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 or the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B is a predetermined time. If it continues, it is possible to alert the player.

More specifically, it is recommended to drive the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 during the normal state, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is the game ball B. When the passage is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and when the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B, the second It is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2522, and those states continue for a predetermined time (for example, the game ball B is caused by one or both of the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 for 5 seconds. (5 or more balls are detected), the player is warned that the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184 (A), the effect display device 1600 executes a fourth warning effect for notifying the message "Please hit left". As a result, during the normal state, the striking method is changed to the strength of entering the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 to the left side of the front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) from the highest portion. , The player can grasp that the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, for 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 is reached. It is determined that the state in which the game ball B has been driven has been resolved, and the fourth warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B during the normal state, the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. The monitoring timer is started, and the count value is counted up every time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, when the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time after the start of the monitoring timer (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds). In the case), the fourth warning effect is executed, but when the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B ends with the detection of less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), the fourth warning effect is executed. Assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved, the fourth warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. In addition, even if the game state is switched from the normal state after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B should no longer be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. ing. Then, after the execution of the fourth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 have not detected the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, for 5 seconds). In addition to ending the fourth warning effect assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved, when the game state is switched from the normal state. However, the fourth warning effect has been completed because the game ball B is no longer in a state where it should be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

During the small hit game, it is recommended to drive the game ball B into the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is the game ball B. If it is not detected that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the game is played in the first guide passage 2521. Warn the player that the ball B should be hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184 (B), the effect display device 1600 executes the fifth warning effect to notify the message "Please drive into the first guide passage". As a result, during the small hit game, the method of hitting should be changed to the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2505 and contacting the abutment portion 1006, and the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521. Can be grasped by a person. Then, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, and the fifth warning effect is terminated. I have to.

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer is used. Has started. Then, when the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, for 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the fifth warning effect is executed, whereas the predetermined state is executed. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within the time (for example, 5 seconds), the fifth warning is assumed that the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved. The effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Further, even when the game state is switched from the small hit game after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B is no longer in a state where the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521, the information of the monitoring timer or the like is cleared. Then, after the execution of the fifth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521. In addition to ending the 5th warning effect as resolved, even when the game state is switched from the small hit game, the 5th warning effect is assumed that the game ball B should no longer be driven into the first guide passage 2521. Is finished.

On the other hand, it is recommended to drive the game ball B into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 during the big hit game and the time saving state, but the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 is used. If the passage of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not in the state of being driven into the second guide passage 2522, and when that state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the second guide passage Warn the player that the game ball B should be driven into 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184 (C), the effect display device 1600 executes the sixth warning effect to notify the message "Please drive into the second guide passage". As a result, during the big hit game and during the time saving state, the hitting method is changed to a strength that does not come into contact with the abutment portion 1006 (strength that is weaker than right-handed hitting) by entering the upstream space portion 2505, and the second guide. The player can grasp that the game ball B should be driven into the passage 2522. Then, when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved, and the warning effect is terminated. There is.

More specifically, if the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the big hit game and the time saving state, it is determined that the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522. , The monitoring timer is starting. Then, when the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, for 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the sixth warning effect is executed, whereas the predetermined state is executed. When the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B within the time (for example, 5 seconds), the sixth warning is assumed that the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved. The effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Further, even when the game state is switched from the big hit game or the time saving state after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B should no longer be driven into the second guide passage 2522, the information of the monitoring timer or the like is cleared. Then, after the execution of the sixth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522 is set. In addition to ending the 6th warning effect as resolved, even when the game state is switched from the big hit game or the time saving state, the 6th is not in the state where the game ball B should be driven into the second guide passage 2522. The warning effect has been completed.

In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below (near the entrance) the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but the game ball B which has entered the first guide passage 2521 is always provided. Any position may be provided as long as it passes through, for example, an entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, an exit at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, and the inside of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided slightly below (near the entrance) the entrance which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, but the game ball B which has entered the second guide passage 2522 always passes through. It may be provided at any position, for example, an entrance at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, an exit at the lower end of the second guide passage 2522, and the inside of the second guide passage 2522.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but on the downstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006. It may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small hit game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the open character winning opening 2006. Therefore, the frequency with which the game ball B passes through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side decreases, and it is possible to prevent the right detection sensor 2404 from malfunctioning due to the excessive passage of the game ball B.

Further, in the present embodiment, the detection sensors (right detection sensor 2404, left detection sensor 2405) are provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520. One detection sensor may be provided at a position where the game ball B entering the passage group 2520 always passes. For example, one detection sensor is provided in the passage on the front side of the game ball B that has entered the upstream space portion 2505 before it branches into either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. Whether or not the game ball B enters the passage group 2520 can be detected by one detection sensor. That is, when one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage group 2520, and one detection sensor has not detected the passage of the game ball B. Then, it is possible to determine that the game ball B is not in the state of being driven into the guide passage group 2520. Even in such a case, when the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, if the state in which one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time, the game is played. By alerting the person, the player can grasp at least whether or not the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects exemplify displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the game ball B is displayed in any mode in each game state. When the driving area instruction display (for example, the right-handed display consisting of a right-arrow image or the left-handed display consisting of a left-arrow image) is separately performed to make the player always know that the player should be driven, this hitting is performed. It is desirable to execute the 4th to 6th warning effects so as not to obstruct the display of the embedded area instruction. For example, a "display area for displaying the input area instruction display" is provided in the upper right portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 different from that area is provided. It is desirable to divide the "display area for displaying the 4th to 6th warning effects" in the upper left part of the above so that the respective guidances are not superimposed and obstructed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects exemplify displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such a warning is realized as an effect by voice instead of display. In that case, the priority of the allocation to the channel provided finitely for outputting the sound becomes higher than the various production sounds set in the normal state, the big hit game, or the time saving state. It is desirable to set so as to output as much as possible even in a situation where there is no vacancy (unused channel) in the finitely provided channels. This makes it possible to effectively suppress the disadvantage of a player who is unfamiliar with the game characteristics having various types of hits of the game ball B.

[17-3. When a ball clogging clearing hole is provided in the stigma where the first guide passage and the second guide passage are lined up in the front-rear direction]
As an embodiment different from the above, in the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, a ball capable of removing the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side is possible. The case where the clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186. 185 and 186 are explanatory views showing an embodiment in which the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

Although the details have been described above, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction at the portion extending vertically on the left side of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the first guide passage 2521. It has a weighted portion 2520a that can be seen overlapping from the above. In this heavy viewing portion 2520a, the second guide passage 2522 is located behind the first guide passage 2521.

As shown in FIGS. 185 and 186 (A), a predetermined rod-shaped member is attached to the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521. A ball clogging clearing hole 2523 that can be inserted and that can remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side by inserting the rod-shaped member is provided. Specifically, a ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided at a portion adjacent to the front surface side of the first guide passage 2521, the rear surface side of the first guide passage 2521, and the front surface side of the second guide passage 2522. Further, the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 provided in a portion adjacent to the rear surface side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 is provided on the front side of the first guide passage 2521 visually as seen from the front. It is positioned so as to coincide with the ball clogging clearing hole 2523, and is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. As a result, the rod-shaped member can be smoothly inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. That is, when a ball jam occurs in the second guide passage 2522, a rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, whereby the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side is inserted. A rod-shaped member can come into contact with the ball-clogging game ball B, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the front-rear direction, the ball jam in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed.

If a cover member is provided on the front side of the guide passage group 2520 composed of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the cover member can also be visually recognized from the front of the first guide passage. The ball jam clearing hole 2523 may be provided at a position corresponding to the ball jam clearing hole 2523 provided on the front surface side of the 2521. As a result, when the ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be inserted from the front side of the cover member toward the second guide passage 2522 without removing the cover member.

Further, the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly larger than that of the rod-shaped member. As a result, when the rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be freely moved not only in the front-rear direction but also in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. .. That is, when a ball jam occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed by moving the rod-shaped member not only in the front-rear direction but also in the vertical direction and the left-right direction. be able to.

Further, a plurality of ball clogging clearing holes 2523 are provided at predetermined intervals at a portion where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 extend vertically in the weighted portion 2520 arranged in the front-rear direction. As a result, regardless of the position of the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted portion 2520, the rod-shaped member may be inserted from the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 provided near the position. , The ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed.

Of the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 is curved only in the left-right direction, whereas the second guide passage 2522 is complicated in that the passage is bent not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-back direction. The second guide passage 2522 is more likely to be clogged with balls than the first guide passage 2521. Further, the weighted portion 2520 in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction is either an entrance at the upper end or an exit at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Since it is a portion separated from the inlet and after bending from the inlet and the outlet, even if the rod-shaped member is inserted from the inlet and the outlet, the rod-shaped member does not reach the portion. In this regard, it is possible to insert a rod-shaped member from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction. A possible ball jam clearing hole 2523 is provided. As a result, the rod-shaped member can be inserted not only when the ball is clogged in the first guide passage 2521 on the front side of the weighted portion 2520a but also when the ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side. The ball jam can be easily removed.

In the above, in the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, the ball penetrates in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Although the clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided, another example of the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 capable of clearing the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side is shown below.

As a first alternative, as shown in FIG. 186 (B), on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, A predetermined rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, and by inserting the rod-shaped member, a ball jam clearing hole 2523 capable of removing the ball jam in the second guide passage 2522 is provided. You may. In such a case, when a ball jam occurs in the second guide passage 2522, a rod-shaped member is inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, so that the ball-shaped ball is inserted into the game ball B jammed in the second guide passage 2522. The members can come into contact with each other, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction, it is possible to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522. In the present embodiment, a transparent plate-shaped light guide plate 3102 is provided on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 composed of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and the light guide plate 3102 is provided. It is located behind the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and allows the rod-shaped member to be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 without being obstructed by the light guide plate 3102.

Further, as a second alternative example, as shown in FIG. 186 (C), the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction is on the front side of the first guide passage 2521. A ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction toward the second guide passage 2522, but the shape of the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is not a circular shape but a slit shape extending in the vertical direction. It may be formed in. In such a case, when the rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be greatly moved in the vertical direction, and the ball in the second guide passage 2522. The clogging can be easily removed.

Further, in the vicinity of the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided side by side in the left-right direction. Then, as a third alternative example, as shown in FIG. 186 (D), at a place where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, a predetermined rod-shaped member is attached to the second guide passage 2522. A ball clogging clearing hole 2523 that can be inserted from the left side of the above and can remove the ball clogging in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (back side) by inserting the rod-shaped member may be provided. That is, the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 may be provided so as to penetrate in the left-right direction from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 toward the first guide passage 2521. In such a case, when a ball jam occurs in the first guide passage 2521, the ball is jammed in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (back side) by inserting a rod-shaped member from the left side of the second guide passage 2522. A rod-shaped member can come into contact with the game ball B, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction, it is possible to remove the ball clogging in the first guide passage 2521.

Further, when the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 as in the first alternative example and the third alternative example, the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided from the left side of the second guide passage 2522. By inserting a rod-shaped member via 2523, it is possible to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522, but the light guide plate 3102 is provided at a position adjacent to the rear of the second guide passage 2522. Therefore, when the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging clearing hole 2523, the rod-shaped member may come into contact with the light guide plate 3102. Then, when the light guide plate 3102 is scratched by the rod-shaped member, when the light guide plate 3102 is light-emittingly decorated with a pattern (first pattern 3102a, second pattern 3102b), there is also a scratched portion unrelated to the pattern. Although it guides light (reflects light), if the scratched part overlaps with the pattern, there is a problem that the pattern becomes difficult to see. Therefore, it is desirable not to provide a light guide decorative region on which a pattern is displayed in the right region portion of the light guide plate 3102, which is a portion adjacent to the second guide passage 2522. Further, the light guide plate 3102 is attached to a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, but the light guide plate 3102 is manually left to the left so that the light guide plate 3102 is separated from the second guide passage 2522. When the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging clearing hole 2523, the rod-shaped member can be moved to a position where the rod-shaped member does not come into contact with the light guide plate 3102 as a preliminary step. You may. Further, on the left side of the second guide passage 2522, a movable member capable of moving to a position where the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 is concealed and a position where the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is not concealed is provided. When the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging clearing hole 2523, the movable member may be configured to be able to move to a position where the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is not concealed as a preliminary step. In such a configuration, when it is not necessary to remove the ball jam in the second guide passage 2522, the movable member is located at a position concealing the ball jam clearing hole 2523, and the player visually recognizes the ball jam clearing hole 2523. There is an advantage that it becomes difficult and the decorativeness as a whole including the second guide passage 2522 is not impaired.

[17-4. About the ball clogging prevention structure near the exits of the first guide passage and the second guide passage that are installed side by side]
As described with reference to FIG. 121 (a), the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutment portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (. (So-called right-handed), the game ball B in contact with the abutment portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening door 2511 that closes the accessory winning opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then the guide passage group. It is discharged from the right exit at the lower end of the 2520 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side. Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 has a first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the attack ball B and the attacker unit 2400. It is guided to enter either the normal winning opening 2003 or the part on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with a similar probability.

On the other hand, as described in FIG. 121 (b), when the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2505 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it twists backward. After being aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction in the Shigemi portion 2520a, it is twisted forward and discharged from the left exit of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side. Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is left side of the normal winning opening 2003 or the normal winning opening 2003 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the attacker unit 2400 and the game ball B. It is guided to enter any of the sites of the attacker, and rarely to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is placed on the lower right rail 1004 from the discharging port portion 2435 that is lower than the large winning opening 2005. It is discharged and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

At the lower end of the guide passage group 2520, the exits of the first guide passage 2521 are located on the right side and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is located on the left side. In the vicinity of the exits of the passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a large amount of the game balls B discharged from those outlets flow in in a short time, and ball clogging is likely to occur below the outlets. In this regard, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and the first opening 2431 thereof is provided. When the game ball B enters, it is guided to the out port 1008 through the attacker right passage 2430. As a result, in the vicinity of the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a part of the game balls B discharged from those outlets is guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from staying in the vicinity of the exit of the ball and prevent the ball from being clogged. Further, even if ball clogging occurs below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B discharged from those outlets is guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being piled up inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

As described above, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, but the position thereof is the exit of the second guide passage 2522. It is provided so that the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is closer than that. Inside the first guide passage 2521, there is a prize winning opening 2006 that is open during the small hit game, but due to the ball clogging below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the first When the game ball B is piled up to the position of the character winning opening 2006 provided inside the guide passage 2521, the game ball B flows into the opened character winning opening 2006 more than expected, and the player is illegal. You will be able to get a good profit. In this respect, since the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided so that the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is closer than the exit of the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the first guide passage 2521 are provided. Even if a ball jam occurs below the exit of the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B near the exit of the first guide passage 2521 can be efficiently guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being piled up to the position of the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the guide passage 2521.

In the present embodiment, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, the attacker right capable of guiding the game ball B to the out opening 1008. Although the first opening 2431 of the passage 2430 is provided, the attacker right passage 2430 is provided with an out port different from the out port 1008, and the game ball B that has entered from the first opening 2431 is provided with another out port. It may be discharged from the out port to the outside of the game area 5a. Even in such a case, a part of the game ball B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is efficiently guided to the outside of the game area 5a from an out port different from the out port 1008. This makes it difficult for the game balls B to stay in the vicinity of their outlets, and it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring.

Further, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the attacker right passage capable of guiding the game ball B to the out port 1008 at a position close to the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Although the first opening 2431 of 2430 is provided, the passage where the game ball B can be guided to the out port 1008 or the outside of the game area 5a is also located near the exit of the second guide passage 2522. An out port different from the out port 1008 capable of discharging the game ball B may be provided. Even in such a case, a part of the game ball B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided to the outside of the game area 5a, and in the vicinity of those exits. The game ball B is less likely to stay, and it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring.

In the above, near the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 capable of guiding the game ball B to the out opening 1008 is provided. However, near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a passage capable of guiding the game ball B to the out port 1008 and the game ball B can be discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. An out port different from the possible out port 1008 may be provided. The following is another example of the case where the second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. show. FIG. 187 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the second out port 1013 is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

As shown in FIG. 187, the game ball B can be discharged to the outside of the game area 5a between the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522. A second out port 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2505 and abutting against the abutment portion 1006, the first guide passage 2521 is entered with a high probability. , A part of the driven game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, if the game ball B is driven into the upstream space portion 2505 with a strength that does not abut on the impact portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than that of a right-handed strike), the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. However, a part of the driven game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. That is, a part of the game ball B driven so as to enter the upstream space portion 2505 enters the second out port 1013. As a result, a part of the game ball B driven so as to enter the upstream space portion 2505 regardless of whether the player aims at the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 or the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. However, since the game balls B are guided to the outside of the game area 5a from the second out port 1013, the number of game balls B entering the inside from those entrances is reduced, and the balls are clogged inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Can be prevented from occurring.

In addition to the above, what is the out port 1008 in which the game ball B can be discharged to the outside of the game area 5a only when the ball is clogged inside the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522? Another out port may be provided. The following is another example of the case where the second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided in the vicinity of the exit inside the first guide passage 2521. FIG. 188 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the second out port 1013 is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage 2521.

As shown in FIG. 188 (A), slightly above the exit at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, on the front surface of the game area 5a (game board 5) which is flush with the rear surface of the first guide passage 2521. A second out port 1013 is provided which is open and capable of discharging the game ball B out of the game area 5a. Further, inside the first guide passage 2521, an accessory winning opening 2006 that is open during the small hit game is provided, but the second out opening 1013 is on the downstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006. It is provided in the following position. In such a configuration, when the ball is not jammed below the second out port 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide passage 2522, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the second out It will pass in front of the second out opening 1013 as it is without entering the mouth 1013.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 188 (B), when a ball jam occurs below the second out port 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the game is played up to the position of the second out port 1013. When the balls B are piled up, the game ball B that has further circulated through the first guide passage 2521 will enter the second out port 1013. That is, inside the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is prevented from being stacked up to a position above the second out port 1013. As described above, the inside of the first guide passage 2521 is provided with the accessory winning opening 2006 which is opened during the small hit game, but the cause is that the ball is clogged near the exit of the first guide passage 2521. As a result, when the game ball B is piled up to the position of the character winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B more than expected flows into the opened character winning opening 2006. Players will be able to obtain unfair profits. In this respect, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a only when the ball is clogged inside the first guide passage 2521 on the downstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006 inside the first guide passage 2521. Since the second out port 1013 is provided, even if the ball is clogged near the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 Before the game balls B are piled up to the position, the game balls B can be discharged from the second out port 1013 to the outside of the game area 5a, and a situation occurs in which the player can obtain an illegal profit. Can be prevented.

[18. Out port detection when an abnormality occurs]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, the ball entry openings (first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006, etc.) provided on the game board 5 are reached. When the game ball B enters the game ball B and when the game ball B enters the out port 1008, the number of each ball entered is counted and a predetermined calculation is performed, and the calculation result is used as information about the pachinko machine 1. It is designed to be displayed on a predetermined display device (for example, base monitor 1310h). In addition, when an abnormality occurs, whether to continue or stop (stop) the calculation depends on whether the abnormality is mild or severe, and if a serious abnormality occurs, the calculation is performed. I am trying to stop (stop). The execution state of the calculation when such an abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution state of an operation when an abnormality occurs.

First, in the main control board 1310, as the entry openings provided on the game board 5, the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory When the game ball B enters the winning opening 2006, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the winning combination prize, respectively. The mouth sensor 2513 detects the game ball B and adds it to the ball entry counter corresponding to each. With such a ball entry counter, it is possible to grasp the number of entry of the game ball B that has entered each entry opening among the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a.

Further, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 is the game ball B. Is detected, and both are added to the out count counter. With this out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of the game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 among the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a.

Then, in the main control board 1310, a predetermined calculation is performed using the number of incoming balls counter and the number of outs counters. As a specific example, by adding all of the ball entry counters, the total number of game balls B that have entered the entry slot provided on the game board 5 among the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a. Can be calculated. Further, by adding all the incoming ball count counters and the out number counters, the total number of game balls B driven into the game area 5a can be calculated.

The above-mentioned calculation result is displayed on a predetermined display device as information about the pachinko machine 1. However, as the information displayed on the predetermined display device, the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the respective entry / exit openings / out ports 1008 is used as it is based on the respective entry / exit number counters and out number counters. It is also possible to output. Further, examples of the predetermined display device include an effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5, a hall computer managed by the hall side outside, and the like. Further, a monitor (base monitor 1310h) may be mounted on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and displayed on the monitor (base monitor 1310h). Of these, when the information is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it can be grasped at a position that can be visually recognized by both the player and the hall side, whereas the monitor of the hall computer or the main control board 1310 can be grasped. When the information is displayed on (base monitor 1310h), it can be grasped at a position where only the hall side can see it.

Further, as the information displayed on the predetermined display device, the total number of game balls B that have entered the entry port provided on the game board 5 and the total number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 are displayed. In that case, it is possible to determine from these ratios whether or not the degree to which the game ball B enters the entry / exit opening 1008 is within the normal numerical range. When a normal game is performed, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a enters the entrance opening at a predetermined ratio. For example, the game ball B enters the out opening 1008. If the total number of game balls B that have entered the ball opening is too large, it can be suspected that the ball is being entered into the ball opening by an illegal act, and it is possible to suspect that the ball is being entered into the ball opening. On the other hand, if the total number of game balls B that have entered the out opening 1008 is too large, it can be suspected that the ball is being entered into the out opening 1008 by an illegal act.

In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 850, the payout detection sensor 950 detects the game ball B and adds it to the payout number counter. With this payout number counter, it is possible to grasp the payout number of the game ball B paid out to the player. Then, since the total number of game balls B driven into the game area 5a calculated by all the input number counters and the out number counters is the total number of game balls B used by the player, the operator is notified. The net increase number of the game ball B can be calculated by calculating the difference from the payout number of the game ball B paid out, and the net increase number of such a game ball B is displayed on a predetermined display device. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port or the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5 passes through the ball discharge port 629 provided in the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1. A frame-side out port sensor 3037 capable of detecting the game ball B passing through the ball discharge port 629, which is discharged to the rear outside (island facility side of the game hall) (see FIG. 94), is provided. There is. When the frame-side out port sensor 3037 detects the game ball B that has passed through the ball discharge port 629, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B enters the ball entry port or the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, and then the merged game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. The frame-side out-port sensor 3037 detects the game ball B and adds it to the frame-side out-number counter. With this frame-side out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of balls entered in the game ball B driven into the game area 5a.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is also the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower full tank ball. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball pulling passage 610c to the ball pulling guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620 through the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the path unit 610, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharging port 629. It is discharged to the outside behind the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall), and is discharged downward not only from the game ball B driven into the game area 5a but also from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580. The game ball B is also configured to be detectable by the frame side out port sensor 3037. Here, considering the purpose of grasping the number of balls of the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, the number of the game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 is calculated. It is hoped that various calculations will be made by excluding (invalidating). In response to this, in the configuration in which the frame-side out-port sensor 3037 also detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball-extracting passage 580b of the payout device 580, it is located upstream of the frame-side out-port sensor 3037. Is provided with another ball removal detection sensor (not shown) so that the ball removal detection sensor detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580, and further, the ball removal detection sensor is provided. It is desirable to configure so that the number of game balls detected by is subtracted from the out number counter. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball ejection detection sensor, once subtracted from the out number counter, and then detected by the frame side out port sensor 3037. Therefore, the number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be substantially not reflected in the out number counter. In such a form, when the game ball B is discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 (when the ball ejection action of the payout device 580 is performed) while the game machine 1 is not energized. There is no problem because neither the ball ejection detection sensor nor the frame side out port sensor 3037 can detect itself, but with the gaming machine 1 energized, downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580. When the game ball B is released (when the payout device 580 is pulled out) or when the game machine 1 is not energized, the game ball B is released downward from the ball pull-out passage 580b of the payout device 580. However, the problem is solved when the gaming machine 1 is energized during the ball removal process (the ball is removed from the payout device 580). Further, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 pass through separate passages without merging, and the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1. It may be configured so that it is discharged to (the island equipment side of the game hall), and only the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be detected by the frame side out port sensor 3037. In such a configuration, it is not necessary to subtract the number of game balls detected by the above-mentioned ball ejection detection sensor from the out number counter.

As described above, the number of incoming balls of the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be grasped by the frame-side out number counter, but the total number of incoming ball counters and the out number counter can also be added. The total number of game balls B driven into the game area 5a can be calculated. That is, in a state where the game is not performed and the game ball B is not driven into the game area 5a, the frame-side out number counter matches the value obtained by adding all the ball in number counters and the out number counter. Will be done. On the other hand, in the state where the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a, after the game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided at the entry port or the out port 1008, the frame side out port separated by a predetermined distance. Since it passes through the sensor 3037, the value obtained by adding all of the number of incoming balls and the number of outs counters is slightly larger than that of the number of outs counters on the frame side.

In the present embodiment, when an abnormality occurs, whether the addition to the counter or the calculation is continued or stopped (stopped) differs depending on whether the abnormality is mild or severe. As shown in FIG. 189 (A), when a minor abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are continued without being stopped (stopped). As this minor abnormality, the game ball B is full in the upper plate 201 and the game ball B cannot be paid out from the payout device 580, or the game ball B should be driven into the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500. There is a state where you are not hitting right. In these states, an effect of warning the game ball B on the upper plate 201 to be guided to the lower plate 202 and an effect of warning to hit right are executed. Further, in these states, with respect to the ball entry port and the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 in a state where the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are not released from the outer frame 2. Therefore, the game ball B cannot be artificially inserted. Therefore, when a minor abnormality occurs, the number of balls entered and the number of outs will not increase due to fraudulent acts, and the addition to the counter and the calculation will be continued without being stopped (stopped). There is.

On the other hand, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition to the counter or calculation is stopped (stopped). The severe abnormality includes a state in which the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2. In these states, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2, and the entrance and exit openings 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 are artificially provided. It is a state in which the game ball B can be inserted. Therefore, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are stopped (stopped) so that the number of balls entered and the number of outs counters do not increase due to an illegal act.

Further, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition to the counter or calculation is stopped (stopped), but the detection sensor itself provided at the entry / exit port 1008 passes through the game ball B. It is being detected. In addition, when a serious abnormality occurs, the numerical value of the counter such as the number of balls entered and the number of outs before the occurrence and the calculation result are held, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are the outer frame 2. After the serious abnormality has been resolved, such as when the counter is closed, the addition to the counter and the calculation are restarted. In addition, when a serious abnormality occurs and addition to the counter or calculation is stopped (stopped), addition to the counter or calculation is performed by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting audio from a speaker. A cancellation effect is being executed to notify that the cancellation has been completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 189 (B), a serious abnormality occurs in the addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out number counter. From time to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are continued without being stopped (stopped), and when the predetermined time elapses, the out number counter is continued. The calculation related to the addition to and the out number counter is stopped (stopped). As a result, when a serious abnormality such as the door frame 3 being released from the outer frame 2 occurs, the number of balls of the game ball B entering the out port 1008 can be grasped until a predetermined time elapses. ..

For example, if the game ball B becomes grape-shaped in the game area 5a and the ball is clogged, normal game cannot be performed. Therefore, the person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and the grape-shaped game ball B However, there is a high possibility that the removed game ball B will flow into the out port 1008 at the lower end as it is. Such a grape-shaped game ball B is originally a game ball B having a high possibility of being discharged from the out port 1008 if it does not become grape-shaped. In this regard, when the door frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 in order to remove the grape-shaped game ball B, addition to the out number counter and calculation related to the out number counter until a predetermined time elapses. Since the game is continued without being stopped (stopped), the number of balls that the grape-shaped game ball B has flowed into the out port 1008 can be grasped, and the reliability of the information regarding the out port 1008 can be improved. After the lapse of a predetermined time, it is unlikely that the grape-shaped game ball B will flow into the out port 1008, and it is suspected that the ball is being entered into the out port 1008 by an illegal act. It is decided to stop (stop) the calculation related to the addition to and the out number counter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 189 (C), a serious abnormality occurs in the addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out number counter. From time to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are continued without being stopped (stopped), but the predetermined time elapses. Even before, if a large amount of game balls B are continuously detected by the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033, the addition to the out number counter or the out number counter is performed at that time. The calculation related to is stopped (stopped). In such a case, it is possible that more than the number of balls that are expected to flow into the out port 1008 due to the removal of the grape-shaped game ball B when the door frame 3 is opened has flowed into the out port 1008. Since it is suspected that the ball has been entered into the out opening 1008 due to an expensive and fraudulent act, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped).

Further, as shown in FIG. 189 (D), when the door frame 3 is opened among the cases where a serious abnormality occurs, the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 is performed. Regarding the calculation related to the addition and its out number counter, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped) from the time when the door frame 3 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is opened, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped) at that time. It is considered that this is because the door frame 3 is opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game ball B in the game area 5a, whereas when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is opened in the game area 5a. This is because the main body frame 4 that does not need to be opened is opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game ball B. That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is opened for another purpose such as removing the ball clogging on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped). I'm supposed to do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the game ball B enters the ball entry port or the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, the merged game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. At this time, the frame-side out-port sensor 3037 detects the game ball B, but as shown in FIG. 189 (E), the frame-side out-number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame-side out-port sensor 3037. Regarding the calculation related to the addition to the frame side out number counter and the calculation related to the frame side out number counter, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the frame side out number counter and the calculation related to the frame side out number counter are stopped (stopped). Therefore, when a person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and removes the grape-shaped game ball B, the out corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 within a predetermined period. While the addition to the number counter is performed, the addition to the frame side out number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame side out port sensor 3037 is not performed, so that all the ball entry count counters and the out number counter are used. From the difference between the value obtained by adding the above and the value of the frame-side out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of balls entered in the grape-shaped game ball B removed when the door frame 3 is opened. It should be noted that the number of such grape-shaped gaming balls B can be displayed on a predetermined display device as information regarding the pachinko machine 1.

Further, as described above, in the state where the game is not performed and the game ball B is not driven into the game area 5a, the frame-side out number counter sets all of the incoming ball number counters and the out number counter. It will match the added value. On the other hand, in the state where the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a, after the game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided at the entry port or the out port 1008, the frame side out port separated by a predetermined distance. Since it passes through the sensor 3037, the value obtained by adding all of the number of incoming balls and the number of outs counters is slightly larger than that of the number of outs counters on the frame side. In this way, as long as the normal game is performed, a difference of a predetermined number or more may occur in the numerical value obtained by adding all the ball entry counters and the out number counters as compared with the frame side out number counters. Since there is no such difference, it is possible to determine whether or not a normal game is being performed by monitoring whether or not a difference of a predetermined number or more has occurred.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, when there is a difference of a predetermined number or more with respect to the numerical value obtained by adding all the ball entry counters and the out number counters as compared with the frame side out number counters, it is special. It is judged that the abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the counter and the calculation are stopped (stopped). In addition, when a special abnormality occurs and addition to the counter or calculation is stopped, addition to the counter or calculation is stopped by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting audio from a speaker. The effect at the time of cancellation is being executed to notify that there is. Then, if there is a difference of a predetermined number or more with respect to the numerical value obtained by adding all the incoming ball count counters and the out number counters with respect to the frame side out number counter, for example, an illegal act is performed on the game board 5. After an object other than the game ball B is passed only through the provided entry / exit port 1008, or after the game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided at the entry / exit port 1008. It is possible to suspect that ball clogging may have occurred before passing through the frame-side out port sensor 3037. As a result, it is possible to detect at an early stage that an obstacle such as an illegal act or a ball jam has occurred, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a serious abnormality, a state in which the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are not limited to this. If a situation is detected in which the game is supposed to be progressing due to an illegal act even if is not released from the outer frame 2, addition to various counters or calculation is stopped (stopped). You may do it. For example, when magnetism at a level that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (impact) with respect to the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that normal game is not performed. Then, it can be exemplified that addition to various counters and calculation are stopped (stopped). In addition, either when the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is not opened from the outer frame 2 and an illegal magnetism or vibration is detected. However, although the addition to various counters and the calculation are stopped (stopped), it is considered illegal only when the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is not opened from the outer frame 2 and an illegal magnetism or vibration is detected. It may be determined that the progress of the game including the launch of the game ball B is immediately stopped.

[18-1. About out port detection when multiple out ports are provided]
As an embodiment different from the above, apart from the out port 1008 provided on the downstream side of the game area 5a, the second out port 1013 is provided on the upstream side and the third out port 1014 is provided on the middle flow side, respectively, from the out port. A case where a detection sensor capable of detecting the ejected game ball B is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 and 192. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 and a third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008. FIG. 192 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution state of an operation when a second out port 1013 and a third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008.

As shown in FIG. 191, the game ball B can be discharged to the outside of the game area 5a between the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522. A second out port 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2505 and abutting against the abutment portion 1006, the first guide passage 2521 is entered with a high probability. , A part of the driven game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, if the game ball B is driven into the upstream space portion 2505 with a strength that does not abut on the impact portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than that of a right-handed strike), the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. However, a part of the driven game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. That is, a part of the game ball B driven so as to enter the upstream space portion 2505 enters the second out port 1013.

Further, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, but the attacker right passage 2430 is provided. A third out port 1014 different from the out port 1008 is provided, and the game ball B that has entered from the first opening 2431 is discharged from the third out port 1014 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The effect of providing the second out port 1013 around the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520, and the provision of the third out port 1014 around the exit thereof. Although the details of the above are described above, the provision of the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 causes the ball to be clogged inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Can be prevented from occurring.

In the present embodiment, the second out port sensor 3035 capable of detecting the game ball B discharged to the outside from the second out port 1013 and the game ball B discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014 are detected. A third out port sensor 3036, which can be detected to be used, is provided. When the second out port sensor 3035 detects the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310, whereas the third out port sensor 3036 has the third out port sensor 3036. When the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 is detected, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the second out port 1013, the second out port sensor 3035 detects the game ball B and adds it to the second out number counter. On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014, the third out port sensor 3036 detects the game ball B and adds it to the third out number counter. The second out number counter keeps track of the number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013, while the third out number counter determines the number of game balls B that have entered the third out port 1014. It is possible to grasp the number of balls entered.

In the main control board 1310, a predetermined calculation is performed using not only the number of incoming balls and the number of outs but also the second number of outs and the third number of outs. As a specific example, among the game balls B driven into the game area 5a by adding the out number counter, the second out number counter, and the third out number counter, the first one provided on the game board 5. It is possible to calculate the number of game balls B discharged to the outside without entering the ball into the ball entry port such as the start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Further, by adding the number of incoming balls counter, the number of outs counter, the second number of outs counter, and the third out number counter, the total number of game balls B driven into the game area 5a can be calculated.

In the present embodiment, in a state where the game ball B is driven into the right side area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more (for example, 30 or more balls out of 100 balls that can be launched per minute) per unit time is the second out port. It is designed so that it does not enter the 1013. Therefore, in the time saving state or the big hit game state, the second out number counter is used to determine whether or not the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time. It is monitored and it is judged that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game when the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 192 (A), when the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is executed to warn that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game by the sound output from the speaker or the speaker. Then, this warning effect is set to end when the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013 is less than a predetermined number per unit time.

For example, when the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013 is a predetermined number or more per unit time, the entry is on the downstream side of the second out port 1013 in the right region of the game area 5a. The chances of the game ball B entering the ball opening (ordinary winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006) are reduced, which is disadvantageous for the player. Will be. In this regard, if the number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is provided so that the game ball B can easily enter the second out port 1013. It is possible to suspect that 5 may have been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to detect at an early stage that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above, it is monitored whether or not the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time in the time saving state or the big hit game state. The number of game balls B that entered the second out port 1013, and the entry and out ports (out port 1008, third out port 1014) that are downstream of the second out port 1013. A ratio of the game ball B to the number of balls entered may be calculated, and whether or not the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined rate may be monitored. Even in such a case, if the entry rate of the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

Similarly, in a state where the game ball B is driven into the right side area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more (for example, 30 or more balls out of 100 balls that can be fired in one minute) per unit time is sent to the third out port 1014. It is designed so that it will not enter the ball. Therefore, in the time saving state or the big hit game state, the third out number counter is used to determine whether or not the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 is a predetermined number or more per unit time. It is monitored and it is judged that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game when the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 192 (B), when the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is executed to warn that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game by the sound output from the speaker or the speaker. Then, this warning effect is set to end when the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 is less than a predetermined number per unit time.

For example, when the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 is a predetermined number or more per unit time, the entry is on the downstream side of the third out port 1014 in the right region of the game area 5a. The chances of the game ball B entering the ball opening (normal winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005) are reduced, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this regard, if the number of game balls B that have entered the third out port 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is provided so that the game ball B can easily enter the third out port 1014. It is possible to suspect that 5 may have been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to detect at an early stage that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above, it is monitored whether or not the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time in the time saving state or the big hit game state. The ratio of the number of balls B that entered the third out port 1014 to the number of balls B that entered the entry port or the out port 1008 downstream of the third out port 1014. May be calculated and it may be monitored whether or not the ratio is equal to or higher than the predetermined ratio. Even in such a case, if the entry rate of the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, when the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 becomes a predetermined number or more per unit time in the time saving state or the big hit game state. The addition to the second out number counter and the third out number counter and the calculation related to those out number counters are continued, but as in the above embodiment, when the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time. , It may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the second out number counter or the third out number counter and the calculation related to those out number counters may be stopped. In such a configuration, even if the game ball B is inserted into the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 by an illegal act, the second out number counter and the third out number counter do not increase. , The reliability of the information regarding the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, the game ball B should be driven into the left side region of the game area 5a, but when the game ball B is driven into the right side area of the game area 5a, the second in the right side area thereof. The game ball B may enter the out port 1013 or the third out port 1014. Therefore, in the normal state, when the second out port sensor 3035 or the third out port sensor 3036 detects the game ball B, the image is displayed on a predetermined display device or the sound is output from the speaker from the right-hand side. We are executing an instruction effect to instruct to change to left-handed.

[19. About the light emission history after the light emission effect using the light guide plate]
In the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 performs the variation display of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 is displayed during the variation display. The light guide plate 3102 provided on the front surface of the display area of the above is decorated with light emission multiple times, and the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is changed stepwise by the multiple times, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit for the variable display. The production is feasible. Further, when the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting decorated, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (around the opening 3010a of the back box 3100) are provided with the same light-emitting color as the light guide plate 3102. Although light is emitted, even after the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, as a history of the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102, a history effect of continuously emitting light of a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 with the light emitting color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 is produced. It is feasible.

Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is satisfied), the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the fluctuation pattern command is received in the command analysis process of step S601, whether or not to execute the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 based on the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. To decide. Further, when it is decided to execute the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light emitting color of the light emitting plate 3102 in the light emitting effect is changed by referring to the light emitting color pattern table based on the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. Determines one of a plurality of types of emission color patterns set multiple times.

Further, on the light guide plate 3102, by changing the emission color of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102, the first one is white, green, blue, or red. It is possible to decorate the pattern 3102a (see FIG. 136) by light emission, but in the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is set to a predetermined light emission color three times with the light emission color set in the light emission color pattern. I try to decorate it with light emission at the timing. Further, the time for light emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 at one timing is a short time (for example, less than 1 second), and the light is turned off until the next light emitting decoration after the light guide plate 3102 is light emitting and decorated. The time spent is longer. Further, the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting decorated at one timing is only once, but the light-emitting plate 3102 may be light-emitting decorated multiple times at each timing.

Further, the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed in the variation display of the decorative pattern, but at the timing during the reach effect after the reach is formed. It may be executed, and for example, 1 to 3 times out of 3 times of light emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 may be executed at the timing during the reach effect after the reach formation.

Further, the light guide plate 3102 can emit a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 to emit light and decorate the first pattern 3102a. It is possible to illuminate the second pattern 3102b by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view, but the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is used. Then, the first pattern 3102a is light-emittingly decorated. As a result, it is possible to clearly understand that the three times of light emitting decoration of the first pattern 3102a in the light emitting effect is a series of effects.

Next, the emission color pattern table in which the emission color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set will be described with reference to FIG. 193. The emission color pattern table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 193 is an emission color pattern table in which the emission color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set.

As described above, a plurality of types of emission color patterns are set in the emission color pattern table, and the emission color of the light emission plate 3102 is set in the emission color pattern as many times as the number of times the light emission display is decorated. How it changes is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, a light emitting pattern is set in the light emitting color pattern table so that the light guide plate 3102 can be light-emitting decorated with a predetermined light-emitting color and then changed twice.

Further, the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 set in the emission color pattern is set so as to be decorated with emission in any of four colors of white, green, blue, and red. Then, when the emission color pattern is determined from the emission color pattern table, as a result of the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher in the order of white → green → blue → red. Has been done. That is, when the lottery result specified from the fluctuation pattern is a big hit, a light emitting color pattern having a high expectation of a big hit (for example, red) is determined with a high probability as the final light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102. When the lottery result specified from the fluctuation pattern is a loss (loss, reach loss), there is a high probability that the final emission color of the light guide plate 3102 will be an emission color (for example, white) with a low expectation of a big hit. I will decide. As a result, when the final emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated with a emission color having a high expectation for a big hit, the player's expectation for the big hit is increased.

In the light emitting color pattern, the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 does not change in the reverse order of white → green → blue → red, and when the light emitting plate 3102 is light-emitting and decorated next time. Is set so that the emission color is maintained or the emission color has a high expectation of a big hit. As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emitting color having a low expectation of a big hit, there is a possibility that the color will change to a light emitting color having a high expectation of a big hit unless the three timings of the light emitting effect are completed. Therefore, the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 can be expected to be noticed until the emission effect is completed.

Further, in the emission color pattern, it is not always necessary to change the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 in the order of green → blue → red after the emission color is decorated with white, and the emission color other than white can be started from one. It is also set to skip the above emission color and change to the next emission color (for example, change from white to red). As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emitting color with a low expectation of a big hit, it is not possible to predict which light emitting color the next light emitting color will change to, and the light guide plate will be used until the light emitting effect is completed. The emission color of 3102 can be noticed with expectation.

Next, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 194. As described above, the back effect unit 3200 has a plurality of hemispherical decorative bodies 3210 so as to surround the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, that is, to surround the display area of the effect display area 1600 in the front view. There is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 194, four decorative bodies 3210 are provided so as to be arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display area 1600. Further, behind these decorative bodies 3210, a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front is mounted is provided. Further, in the plurality of decorative bodies 3210, it is possible to perform light emitting decoration in any of white, green, blue, and red, similar to the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102.

When the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting and decorated in the light-emitting effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 emit light in the same light-emitting color as the light-emitting plate 3102. Further, in the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting decorated three times at predetermined timings, but even after the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off at each timing, a plurality of decorative bodies are used. The light emission of 3210 is maintained. As described above, when the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed, as the history of the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102, the history effect of continuously emitting light of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 with the light emitting color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 is performed. Running.

Specifically, at the first or second timing of emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are emitted with the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102, and after the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting and decorated, the next time. The light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until the timing of the light emission decoration. Further, at the third timing of emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are emitted with the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102, and after the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting and decorated, the variation display of the decorative pattern is terminated. The light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until this is done. As a result, the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 at one timing is a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the light emitting color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. By maintaining the above, even if the light emitting color is overlooked when the light guide plate 3102 is light emitting and decorated, the light emitting color can be grasped after the light emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102.

Further, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are provided with a number corresponding to the number of light emitting colors capable of light emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 by the light emitting effect. The number of light emitting colors of the decorative body 3210 is different depending on the light emitting colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210. In order from the lower side of the decorative body 3210, the number of light emitting the decorative body 3210 is set to increase. Specifically, when the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 that is light-emitting and decorated by the light-emitting effect is white, which is the light-emitting color with the lowest expectation of big hit, four each on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display area 1600. Of the decorative bodies 3210, one of the lower decorative bodies 3210a is set to emit white light. When the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is green, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are set to emit green light. When the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is blue, the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c are set to emit blue light. Further, when the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is red, which is the light emitting color having the highest expectation of big hit, all four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are set to emit red light. Thereby, even if the jackpot expectation cannot be grasped from the emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, the jackpot expectation can be easily grasped from the number of light emittings of the decorative body 3210.

Further, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102 and are capable of emitting light toward the front. When the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting and decorated in the light emitting effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same light emitting color as the light guide plate 3102, but the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102. The light guide plate 3102 is irradiated with light not only by the plurality of LEDs for illuminating and decorating the first pattern 3102a on the light guide plate 3102, but also by the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 that emit light. As a result, the first pattern 3102a that is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102 becomes more emphasized, and the effect using the light guide plate 3102 can be made more conspicuous.

Further, the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed in the variable display of the decorative pattern, but during the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102, the light emitting effect is performed. Other notice effects using the effect display device 1600 are not newly started. That is, at the timing when the light guide plate 3102 is not light-emitting and decorated, another notice effect using the effect display device 1600 is started. As a result, the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 does not hinder the visibility of other advance notice effects, and other advance notice effects are started. But don't miss it. That is, it is possible for the player to firmly grasp the light emitting effect of illuminating and decorating the light guide plate 3102 and the other advance notice effect.

Next, a specific example of the effect of the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 at the time of executing the light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. 195. FIG. 195 is a specific example of the effect of the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 at the time of executing the light emission effect.

FIG. 195 describes a case where a emission color pattern in which the emission color for illuminating and decorating the light guide plate 3102 changes from white to green to red is determined by the emission effect. First, as shown in FIG. 195 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that, as shown in FIG. 195 (B), at the first timing of luminescent decoration of the light guide plate 3102 by the light emitting effect, the light guide plate 3102 is luminescently decorated with the second pattern 3102b in white and the effect display area 1600. Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area, one of the lower decorative bodies 3210a emits light, but the emission color thereof is white, which is the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (C), the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decorative body 3210a that is already emitting white light is not included. The light emission in white is maintained until the second timing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 195 (D), at the second timing of luminescent decoration of the light guide plate 3102 by the light emitting effect, the light guide plate 3102 is luminescently decorated with the second pattern 3102b in green and the effect display area 1600. Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are increased to emit light, but the emission color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. It emits green light. Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (E), the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decorative bodies 3210 and 3210b that are already emitting green light are provided. Maintains its green emission until the third timing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 195 (F), at the third timing of luminescent decoration of the light guide plate 3102 by the light emitting effect, the light guide plate 3102 is luminescently decorated with the second pattern 3102b in red and the effect display area 1600. Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area, all four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are increased to emit light, but the emission color is red, which is the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102. It is emitting light at. Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (G), the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decorative bodies 3210 to 3210d already emitting red light are provided. As shown in FIG. 195 (H), the light emission in red is maintained until the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished.

In the present embodiment, when the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting and decorated in the light emission effect, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are emitted with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102, but at that time, the light guide plate does not emit light. From the time when the light emitting decoration of the 3102 is turned off, a plurality of light emitting bodies may be made to emit light in the light emitting color immediately before the light guide plate 3102. Even in such a case, the emission color can be grasped after the emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of light emitting pieces of the decorative body 3210 is different depending on the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, and the larger the number of light emitting pieces of the decorative body 3210, the higher the emission color expected to be a big hit. Although it is shown that there is, it may indicate the number of times that the light guide plate 3102 is already light-emitting-decorated out of the three timings of light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102. For example, at the first timing of emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 in the light emitting effect, one of the four decorative bodies 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display area 1600, which is the lower one, emits light. At the second timing, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b may be emitted, and at the third timing, the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c may be emitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting decorated three times at a predetermined timing in the light emitting effect, but the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting decorated at the first timing, but the light guide plate is light-emitting decorated at the second and third timings. A pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is not light-emitting decorated at the first and second timings, or a pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting decorated at the first and second timings but is not light-emitting decorated at the third timing may be provided. In such a case, it is not possible to know how many times the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 continues in the light emitting effect, and it is possible to pay attention to how many times the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 can be changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, a light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed as an effect showing the degree of expectation of a big hit for the variable display of the decorative symbol. Alternatively, light emission using the light guide plate 3102 is applied over a plurality of fluctuations from the time when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 (the starting condition is satisfied) until the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed due to the entry. You may try to perform the production. For example, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is satisfied), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and a pre-determination command is transmitted on the peripheral control board 1510. Is received, whether or not to execute the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 based on the fluctuation pattern specified from the predetermination command, and when it is decided to execute the light emitting effect, the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is determined. It may be configured to determine. Further, in the light emitting effect using such a light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at a predetermined timing among a plurality of fluctuations each time, and the light guide plate is decorated even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off. It may be configured so that the light emission of the plurality of light emitters is continued with the light emission color immediately before 3102. In such a case, it is possible to pay attention to how the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changes until the emission effect is completed over the plurality of fluctuations.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 are made to emit light to decorate the first pattern 3102a by light emission. However, when a failure or the like occurs and a plurality of LEDs do not emit light, the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is not performed at the timing of emitting and decorating, and the expected degree of jackpot indicated by the emission color is grasped. Can't. In this respect, after the timing of emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102, since the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102, even if the light guide plate 3210 cannot be light-emitting and decorated, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are emitted. The degree of expectation of a big hit can be grasped by the emission color of the decorative body 3210.

Further, in the present embodiment, when an abnormality (error) occurs, a warning effect for notifying that the abnormality has occurred is executed with priority over other effects. For example, when magnetism at a level that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (impact) with respect to the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that normal game is not performed. Then, a warning effect is being executed. In this regard, if an abnormality (error) occurs at the timing when the light emitting effect is executed and the light guide plate 3102 is light emitted and decorated, the warning effect is prioritized and the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 or the light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is emitted. However, when the abnormality is resolved after the timing of emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 (before the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol), the light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is started. There is. As described above, even when the warning effect is prioritized over the light emission effect, the jackpot expectation can be grasped from the emission colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 after the abnormality is resolved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation is suggested by the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the emission color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 in the light emission effect and the history effect. Is executed, and the set value may be suggested by the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 or the emission color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210. In such a configuration, for example, when the emission color pattern is determined from the emission color pattern table, the set value is higher in the order of white → green → blue → red as a result of the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end. It may be set to suggest that. That is, among the setting suggestion effects, the high setting suggestion effect is the emission pattern in which the final emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red, and the low setting suggestion effect is the final emission color of the light guide plate 3102. The emission pattern that becomes white may be executed. As a result, when the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 or the light emitting color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is decorated with a light emitting color suggesting that the set value is high, the player's light emitting color with respect to the high set value (set value 6) is used. You can raise your expectations.

[20. About image production similar to the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate]
In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is provided in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the light guide plate 3102 not only emits and decorates a predetermined pattern, but also guides the light guide plate 3102 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. By displaying a pattern that is a visual mode similar to the pattern that is light-emittingly decorated on the light plate 3102, it is possible to execute an imitation effect that makes the light plate visually as if there are a plurality of light guide plates. In this imitation effect, the pattern luminescent and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally one of the patterns is displayed. , The reach effect that is executed after that is different.

Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is satisfied), the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process of step S601, the variation pattern is specified from the variation pattern command, but the variation pattern for executing the first reach effect is specified. In this case, the pattern to be luminescently decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally the pattern is luminescently decorated on the light guide plate 3102. By executing the production, the process proceeds to the first reach production after that. On the other hand, when the variation pattern for executing the second reach effect is specified, the pattern luminescent and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. Finally, by executing an imitation effect of displaying a pattern in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to the second reach effect.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned imitation effect is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed in the variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, among the reach effects, the first reach effect is set so that the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the second reach effect. As a result, in the imitation effect during normal fluctuation, when the light guide plate 3102 is finally decorated with light emission, the process proceeds to the first reach effect with high expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the pattern is finally displayed on the light guide plate 3102. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not to decorate with light emission.

Next, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the imitation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 196. FIG. 196 is a pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 196 (A), on the light guide plate 3102 in which the imitation effect is being executed, as the second pattern 3102b, the characters "CHANGE!" .. In addition, while the light guide plate 3102 can emit light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102, the first pattern 3102a can be light-emitting and decorated. It is possible to illuminate the second pattern 3102b by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view, but the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102 is possible. In, only the light emitting decoration of the second pattern 3102b is used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 196 (B), in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the imitation effect is being executed, the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed, along with the characters "LUCKY!" In the center and an effect pattern around the display area. it's shown. Although it is possible to display a moving image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a still image is displayed like the imitation pattern 1600a described above while the imitation effect is being executed.

Further, while the light guide plate 3102 emits and decorates the characters "CHANGE!" As the second pattern 3102b, the characters "LUCKY!" Are displayed as the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, the characters of the imitation pattern 1600a have the same line thickness, font type, and size as those of the second pattern 3102b. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the character forms are the same, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

Further, while the light guide plate 3102 emits and decorates the effect picture as the second picture 3102b, the effect picture is displayed as the imitation picture 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect pattern that is a part is the same as the effect pattern that is a part of the second pattern 3102b. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the effect pattern shared as a part of the pattern is displayed, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

Further, while the light guide plate 3102 emits and decorates the second pattern 3102b with a plurality of LEDs in a single color, the imitation pattern 1600a is also displayed in a single color in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Further, in the light guide plate 3102, when the second pattern 3102b is light-emittingly decorated, the light-emitting decoration of the second pattern 3102b is shaded depending on the distance from the plurality of LEDs, but the display area of the effect display device 1600 is also imitated. The pattern 1600a is displayed so as to have shades. Further, when the second pattern 3102b is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102, a black image without displaying any information is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the effect display device 1600 When the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area, a black image is displayed as the background image thereof. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the visual recognition mode of the pattern is the same as a whole, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

Further, the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the size of the light guide plate 3102 is configured to be larger than the display area of the effect display device 1600. The area where the second pattern 3102b is light-emitting and decorated on the 3102 is substantially the same as the area where the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the areas in which the patterns are displayed are substantially the same, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b luminescently decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, but each display is performed once. The time is the same for both. Further, during the execution of the imitation effect, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a, or around the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600. A complex effect is performed in which the provided members are operated in a predetermined operation mode (for example, lighting of a lamp provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 or operation of a movable member). Even at the timing of displaying the pattern of, a common effect is executed as a complex effect. However, at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a, although the lamps provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are turned on, their emission colors are turned on in different colors. You may. As described above, in the imitation effect, there is no difference in effect between the case where the second pattern 3102b is light-emitting and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the case where the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp which of the light plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

Next, a specific example of the effect of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the imitation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 197. FIG. 197 is a specific example of the effect of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed.

In FIG. 197, a variation pattern for executing either a chance reach effect as a first reach effect or a lucky reach effect as a second reach effect is determined, and an imitation effect is performed before executing those reach effects. The case of execution will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 197 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that, as shown in FIG. 197 (B), when the imitation effect is started, the light guide plate 3102 has a second pattern 3102b with the characters "CHANCE!" In the center and an effect pattern around it for a predetermined time (. For example, less than 1 second), it is decorated with light emission in red. Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (C), when the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the display area of the effect display device 1600 has an imitation pattern 1600a with the characters "LUCKY!" In the center. The effect pattern is displayed in blue around the area for a predetermined time (for example, less than 1 second). The display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the display time for displaying the second pattern 3102b on the light guide plate 3102.

As described above, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b in red, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are used in the case where the second pattern 3102b is light-emitting and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the case where the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it is difficult to grasp which of the two is used, it is possible to grasp which of the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed from the display color.

Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b luminescently decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately repeated a plurality of times (for example, 5 times). Although it is displayed, after repeating it a plurality of times, as shown in FIG. 197 (D), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and a black image without displaying any information is displayed. There is. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to which of the second pattern 3102b, which is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102, and the imitation pattern 1600a, which is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is stopped as a result of the imitation effect. can.

Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (E), when the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out and then the second pattern 3102b is light-emitting-decorated on the light guide plate 3102 in red, the variation display of the decorative pattern is reached. As a reach effect corresponding to the second pattern 3102b, a chance reach effect (first reach effect) is performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 197 (F), when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600 after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. After forming the reach in, the lucky reach production (second reach production) is performed as the reach production corresponding to the imitation pattern 1600a. Further, the display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in FIG. 197 (F) is the same as the display time for displaying the second pattern 3102b on the light guide plate 3102 in FIG. 197 (E). (For example, 3 seconds).

In the present embodiment, the characters and the effect picture are displayed by the second picture 3102b that is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation picture 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It suffices to display a pattern having a similar visual mode so that the elements of the above match, and for example, a pattern of a character having a similar style may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, after blacking out the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second pattern 3102b that is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102, and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, after blacking out the display area of the effect display device 1600, neither the second pattern 3102b nor the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed, and the first reach effect and the second reach effect are displayed. A pattern that does not progress to any of the reach effects may be set. In such a case, as a result of the imitation effect, it is possible to pay more attention to what kind of result is notified after blacking out the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second pattern of the second pattern 3102b that is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the start of the imitation effect. Although it starts from the light emitting decoration of 3102b, a pattern starting from the display of the imitation pattern 1600a may be set. Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b is light-emitting and decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but any part or all of them are displayed. When the color is developed, a pattern to be executed in a different color may be set. In this way, when the imitation effect is executed with a display or color different from the usual one, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission by setting so that the expectation of a big hit for the variable display of the decorative symbol is high. It is possible to pay attention not only to which of the two patterns 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped, but also the content of the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the imitation effect is executed, the second pattern 3102b that is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. However, in addition to the imitation effect, the effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed. For example, as an effect other than the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102, an effect of suddenly emitting and decorating the second pattern 3102b on the light guide plate 3102 is executed without displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b is light-emitting and decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to such a pattern, a pattern in which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided while the second pattern 3102b is light-emitting and decorated in blue on the light guide plate 3102 so as to invert the color development. It is set. In these patterns, red color is used to indicate that the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of blue. For example, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3102b in red, the big hit is higher than in blue. It notifies that the degree of expectation is high, and similarly, when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is notified that the degree of expectation of big hit is higher than that of displaying in blue. As described above, in the imitation effect, since it is possible to display both the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a in blue and red, either the light guide plate 3102 or the effect display device 1600 can be displayed. It can be difficult to grasp whether or not you are using.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b luminescently decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally. By displaying one of the patterns, the reach effect to be executed after that is suggested, but by executing the imitation effect as the setting suggestion effect described above and finally displaying one of the patterns. , May be configured to suggest a set value. In such a configuration, for example, as a high setting suggestion effect among the setting suggestion effects, an imitation effect of finally displaying the second pattern 3102b in red on the light guide plate 3102 is executed, and the low setting suggestion effect is final. The imitation effect of displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be executed. As a result, when the light guide plate 3102 is finally decorated with the second pattern 3102b in red when the imitation effect is executed, the player's expectation for the high set value (set value 6) can be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the light guide plate 3102, it is possible to emit light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 to illuminate and decorate the first pattern 3102a. On the other hand, it is possible to make the second pattern 3102b emit light and decorate by emitting light of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view. The brightness of the LED can be changed by the player operating the pressing operation unit 303. That is, when the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is set to be weak, the second pattern 3102b emitted and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 has a dark display mode, whereas the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is increased. When set, the second pattern 3102b luminescently decorated on the light guide plate 3102 has a bright display mode. Then, in the imitation effect, when the second pattern 3102b luminescently decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is in a dark display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a dark display mode. On the other hand, when the second pattern 3102b luminescently decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is in a bright display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a bright display mode. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the effect is executed so that the brightness corresponds to both the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a, any of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600. It can be difficult to grasp whether or not you are using. When the player operates the pressing operation unit 303 during the brightness adjustment, both the brightness of the plurality of LEDs for the light guide plate 3102 and the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 are changed. May be good.

[21. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, some of the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 to 200. FIG. 198 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIGS. 199 and 200 show the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 198 to the peripheral control board. It's a table.

[21-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 198 to 200, a status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a status indicating the type of the command have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 198 to 200, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the special figure 2 tuning effect, the jackpot related, the power on, the normal figure synchronized effect related, the normal electric role effect related, and the notification display. , Status display, and others.

[21-1-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, and as shown in FIG. 198, the special figure 1 is related to the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. FIG. 1 consists of commands named start of synchronization effect, designation of special symbol 1, end of special figure 1 synchronization effect, and designation of state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as a status and "** H" as a mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is off, specific jackpot, The non-specific jackpot is designated, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command is instructed to end the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the variable time state designation command is to instruct the gaming state. It should be noted that the gaming state is composed of a time-saving state instructing that the time-saving state is in effect, a probabilistic state instructing that the time-saving state is in effect, and a normal state instructing that neither the time-saving state nor the probable-changing state is present. Has been done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a special figure 1 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and a special drawing 1 tuning effect end command are provided for each set value of the pachinko machine 1. Then, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits the special figure 1 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 tuning effect end command, the main control built-in RAM becomes a set value dedicated area in a specific area. Select and send the command according to the stored setting value. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by changing the modes of the special figure 1 tuning effect start command (variable pattern command) and the special figure 1 tuning effect end command, which have been conventionally used, the peripheral control board 1510 can be used. The setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted, and the setting value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side. It has become like.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 1 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[21-1-2. Special figure 2 entrainment production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, and as shown in FIG. 198, the special figure 2 is related to the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. FIG. 2 consists of commands named start of synchronization effect, designation of special symbol 2, and end of special figure 2 synchronization effect. These various commands are assigned "B * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command is off, specific jackpot, The non-specific jackpot is designated, and the special figure 2 tuning effect end command is instructed to end the special figure 2 tuning effect.

In addition, the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command are the pachinko machine 1 in the same manner as the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a special figure 2 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and a special figure 2 tuning effect end command, a specific area of the main control built-in RAM is provided for each set value of. Select and send the command according to the setting value stored in the dedicated area. It should be noted that the special figure 2 tuning effect (variable effect of the second special symbol based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 2004) is mainly executed in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by changing the modes of the special figure 2 tuning effect start command (variable pattern command) and the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, which have been conventionally used, the pachinko machine can be mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. The set value information of the machine 1 can be transmitted, and the set value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 even in the probable change state and the time saving state, and the pachinko machine 1 is on the peripheral control board 1510 side. It is possible to grasp the set value of.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1--3. Big hit related]
As shown in Fig. 198, the categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot 1 open Nth display, jackpot 1 closed display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 15th rounds (Nth opening of the first jackpot 2005). The round opening or opening start) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command starts during closing of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (closed or closed between the rounds of the first major winning opening 2005). ), And the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 has been counted (to the first large winning opening 2005 detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403). The number of balls of the game ball that has entered) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command instructs the jackpot symbol information display.

Further, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command indicates the start of the small hit opening (during the opening or opening of the accessory winning opening 2006 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is used to produce a small hit medium and large prize opening prize (when a game ball that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 during a small hit is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513. The V-passing command is used to instruct the production), and the V-passing command is detected by the V-winning opening winning effect (the game ball that has won the character winning opening 2006 during the small hit is detected by the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008. The small hit ending command is instructed to start the small hit ending. It should be noted that the V passage command corresponding to each of the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (the first V winning opening command when the game ball is detected by the first V winning opening 2007, the second V A second V winning opening command) when a game ball is detected by the winning opening 2008 may be provided.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the big hit opening, and the Nth display command for opening the big winning opening 1 is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 15th rounds (first big winning opening). It is sent when the Nth round of 2005 is opened), and the big winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the big winning opening 1 is closed (when the first big winning opening 2005 is closed), and the big winning opening 1 count display is displayed. The command is issued when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the first large winning opening 2005 is opened, and the game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 2005 is used by the large winning opening sensor 2403. (When detected), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is transmitted when the jackpot symbol is opened (when the first jackpot 2005 is opened).

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (when the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened at the time of the small hit), and the small hit count display is displayed. The command is sent at the time of winning the small hit medium and large winning opening (when the game ball that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is , Sent at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1--4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 199, the power-on category is named as power-on state, power-on main control return destination, setting key ON operation command, setting key OFF operation command, setting change command, and error display command. It consists of the commands of. These various commands are assigned "D * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on status command is operated by the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633 when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on and when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Information instructing that when the RAM is cleared (when the RWM clear button 633z is operating as the RAM clear switch and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button is operated), and when the power is turned on (power is turned on). In addition to the case of turning on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, which of the above-mentioned normal state, time saving state, and probable change state is restored? It is composed of information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

In addition, when creating so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type, for example, the model code of the pachinko machine is for the copyright of which work, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation). When it occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It specifies whether it is a specification (so-called ST machine, etc.), whether the pachinko machine has a plurality of set values, or whether the pachinko machine has only one set value. In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is to specify the series code to specify which type is the max type, middle type, or Amadeji type indicating the model type, and to specify the copyright of the work. In addition to the copyright code of the game specification and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability change in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited. It is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine) or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is generated, and a setting value code for whether the pachinko machine 1 has one or more setting values.

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information instructing the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2414 and the accessory winning port solenoid 2512.

The ON operation command of the setting key indicates to confirm the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the control built-in RAM, and the OFF operation command of the setting key is the main control built-in RAM. It indicates that the confirmation of the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area has been completed.

The setting change command indicates that the setting value has been changed and that the setting value has been changed. In this example, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 by changing the mode of the setting change command, and the peripheral control board 1510 side pachinko by the received setting change command. It is possible to grasp the set value of the machine 1. The setting change command may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on regardless of whether or not the setting value is changed. If the setting value is not changed when the power is turned on, the current setting value may be sent. You may also send a setting notification command to instruct. As a result, the latest set value can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

The error display command indicates that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM.

These commands are transmitted when the power of the main control board is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control built-in RAM is transmitted by the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side game control main process. It is stored in the information storage area, and the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-5. Fuzu-tuned production-related]
The normal-figure tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, and as shown in FIG. 199, the normal-figure tuning effect of the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started. It is composed of commands named, normal symbol designation, normal figure synchronization production end, and state specification at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal-figure synchronization effect start command (normal-figure variation pattern command) instructs the start of the normal-figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (normal-figure variation pattern) specified in the mode. The jackpot and the non-specific jackpot are designated, the normal map synchronization effect end command is instructed to end the normal map synchronization effect, and the variable time state specification command is to indicate the game state. As described above, the gaming state is composed of a time saving state instructing that the time saving state is in effect and a normal state instructing that the game state is not in the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol fluctuation, the normal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. It is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the command for specifying the variable state is sent immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric service production-related is related to the second start opening door 2411 which is moved forward and backward by the drive of the start opening solenoid 2412, and as shown in FIG. And it consists of a command named ending per solenoid. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts while the normal power is open (the second start door 2411 protrudes forward by the drive of the start port solenoid 2412). The ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per drawing is transmitted at the start of the opening per drawing, and the opening display command is sent when the opening is open (the second starting door 2411 drives the starting solenoid 2412). (When projecting forward), and the ending command for the normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending for the normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-10. others]
As shown in FIG. 200, the other categories include start opening winning, variation shortening operation end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, special symbol type look-ahead, variation pattern look-ahead 1, variation pattern look-ahead 2, variation pattern. It is composed of commands named look-ahead 3, variable pattern look-ahead 4, variable pattern look-ahead 5, variable pattern look-ahead 6, normal winning opening winning, and normal symbol memory. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command commands the start of the starting opening winning effect, and is the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, respectively, and the variable shortening operation end designation command is variable. It is an instruction to change the state from the shortened operation state to the variable shortened non-operation state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is a function of 0 to 4 special symbol 1 hold (a game ball enters the first starting port 2002). The first special symbol display of the display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 2 hold. (The number of balls (holding number) that the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400). The special symbol type look-ahead command pre-reads the special symbol 1 hold before it is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the first special symbol based on the special symbol 1 hold is used. Before the display result (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) and the special symbol 2 hold are used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the display result (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) is read ahead and the special symbol 2 is used. The display result (small hit symbol, big hit symbol) by the second special symbol display based on the hold is specified respectively.

Further, the variable pattern look-ahead command 1 to the variable pattern look-ahead command 6 are read ahead before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. 1 The fluctuation pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol based on the hold, and the special symbol 2 hold is pre-read before being used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. The fluctuation pattern used in the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the symbol 2 hold is specified, and the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command 1 is a command corresponding to the setting value 1 of the pachinko machine 1, and the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command 2 is used. Is a command according to the setting value 2 of the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command 3 is a command according to the setting value 3 of the pachinko machine 1, and the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command 4 corresponds to the setting value 4 of the pachinko machine 1. The variable pattern look-ahead command 5 is a command corresponding to the set value 5 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variable pattern look-ahead command 6 is a command corresponding to the set value 6 of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the command including the setting value information of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 1 (special figure 1 tuning effect start command, special figure 1 tuning effect end command, special figure 2 tuning effect start command, special figure 2 tuning effect end command, setting change command). ) Is an example, and other commands may be provided for each set value.

In addition, the normal winning opening winning command instructs the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the normal symbol storage command functions to hold 0 to 4 normal symbols (the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003). The normal symbol display of the display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening winning command is used when the starting opening winning command (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or the second When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 2402), it is transmitted from the speakers 462, 464, 622 mainly to notify the effect by voice, and the fluctuation is shortened. The operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation shortenings has been completed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is sent when the number of special symbol 1 operation hold balls changes (after the stop period has elapsed). When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is used for variable display of a special symbol on the first special symbol display and the number of holdings decreases) The special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted, and when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation changes (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases, or when the number of reserved balls increases, the second special symbol is displayed from the reserved number. It is sent when the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it to display the fluctuation of the special symbol on the device), and the special symbol type look-ahead command is sent when the number of special symbols 1 and 2 is held and the number of reserved balls is increased (first start port 2002 or second). It is transmitted when the game ball enters the start port 2004 and the number of holdings increases), and the variation pattern look-ahead command is transmitted immediately after the transmission of the special symbol type look-ahead command. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

Further, the normal winning opening winning command is transmitted when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of holding balls for normal symbol operation changes (the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the number of holdings is changed. It is transmitted when the number is increased or when the number of holdings is reduced by using the normal symbol display for variable display of the normal symbol. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is used when the starting opening is won (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or when the game ball enters the second starting opening. When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 2402), it is transmitted from the speakers 462, 464, 622 mainly to notify the fact by voice, but peripheral control. How the board 1510 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment is designed to be used not only for voice notification from the speakers 462, 464, 622 but also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification that the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command and does not notify by voice from the speakers 462, 464, 622.

[22. Setting information error notification]
Next, among the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 described above, a process of notifying when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal based on the command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1. Will be explained. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting information determination process executed when a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310 in the reception command analysis process (step S1022).

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the setting information determination process, it determines whether or not the setting abnormality notification flag described later is set (step S1500). The setting abnormality notification flag is a flag that is set when a setting value abnormality is notified. If the setting abnormality notification flag is set in step S1500, it is determined that the setting value abnormality is being notified, and the process proceeds to step S1507. If the setting abnormality notification flag is not set in step S1500, the setting value abnormality is detected. It is determined that the above is not notified, and the process proceeds to step S1501.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the received command is the above setting change command (step S1501), and if the setting change command is received, the pachinko machine indicated by the setting change command. The set value of the pachinko machine 1 is stored in the set information storage area based on the set value information of 1 (step S1502), and the process is terminated. As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 1 set when the power is turned on is stored in the setting information storage area, and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

If the received command is not the above setting change command (in this example, the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the variation pattern). When the look-ahead command 1 to the variable pattern look-ahead command 6 are received), the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command and the set value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502 match. Whether or not it is determined (step S1504), and if it does not match, an abnormality has occurred in the set value information (step S1504), and a setting abnormality notification flag indicating that the setting value information abnormality is being notified is set. Set and end the process (step S1505).

Further, when it is determined in step S1500 that the setting abnormality notification flag is set, that is, when the setting value information is being notified of an abnormality, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command and the setting in step 1502 are set. It is determined whether or not the set value information stored in the information storage area matches (step S1507), and if it does not match, the abnormality notification of the set value information is continued.

On the other hand, if the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command and the set value information stored in the set information storage area in step 1502 match, the abnormality notification of the set value information is terminated (step S1508). , The setting abnormality notification flag is reset and the process ends (step S1509).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is set on the peripheral control board 1510 side by transmitting a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. If there is an error in the set value information indicated by the command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310, specifically, the normal process (set value change process) has not been performed. Nevertheless, when the set value is changed, it is determined that an error or fraud has occurred and a process for notifying the fact is executed. The game progresses even during the abnormality notification of the set value information, and the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect or the like. Therefore, the abnormality notification of the set value information is performed so as not to interfere with the execution of the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the control to display "setting abnormality!" Etc. in the area that does not overlap with the fluctuation effect executed in the effect display device 1600, and the variation effect executed in the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized. Control to display "setting error!" Etc. semi-transparently in the area that overlaps with the fluctuation effect, control to output "setting error has occurred" from the speakers 462, 464, 622, and provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3. One or a plurality of controls such as light emission control, etc. are executed in combination in a predetermined mode (for example, blinking red).

When there is an abnormality in the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is not executed or the abnormality notification of the setting value information is executed. At the same time, the effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 to be described later is prevented from being executed, and the execution of this effect is stopped when the effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. You may do it. That is, the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like, and the setting value information indicated by this command changes to an abnormal value, or the peripheral control board 1510. The setting of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 because the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area has changed to an abnormal value due to the influence of noise or the like. When there is an abnormality in the consistency between the value information and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510, if an effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed, the reliability of this effect is increased. descend. Therefore, in such a case, the effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may not be executed, and if the effect is being executed, the effect may be stopped to suppress the deterioration of reliability. ..

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value information. In this case, the game is stopped when an abnormality occurs in the set value information. You may do it. For example, when the set value is changed in the set value change process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is placed in a reference area different from the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Also stores the changed setting value, and is stored in the setting value dedicated area at any timing (for example, the timing to send the special figure 1 tuning effect start command or the special figure 2 tuning effect start command) and for reference. It may be determined whether or not the set value stored in the area matches, and if it is determined that the set value does not match, the game may be stopped and the abnormal notification of the set value information may be performed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after the abnormality notification of the set value information is started, when the abnormality is resolved, the abnormality notification of the set value information is automatically terminated without any operation by the game clerk. Therefore, when the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like and the setting value information is changed to an abnormal value, it is stored in the setting information storage area. If an error notification of the set value information is started because it does not match the set value information, and then a command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received in a normal state, the setting is immediately set. It is possible to end the abnormality notification of the value information.

In the above example, a setting change command indicating the changed setting value when the setting value is changed in the setting change process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value instructed by the command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 side. It is configured to determine whether or not an error has occurred in the set value information according to whether or not it matches the stored set value, but whether or not an error has occurred in the set value information. The method of determining whether or not is not limited to this. For example, when a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310, the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting indicated by the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 received last time. It may be determined whether or not the value and the value match, and if they do not match, the abnormality notification of the set value information may be performed. In this case, when the setting change command transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the change of the set value is received, the abnormality notification of the set value information may not be performed.

Further, in connection with the fluctuation effect, a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted multiple times from the main control board 1310, and when at least a part of the commands does not match, an abnormality notification of the setting value information is sent. You may do it. Specifically, it is indicated by the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the above-mentioned special figure 1 synchronization effect start command and special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, and the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command and special figure 2 synchronization effect end command. It may be determined whether or not the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 matches, and if the set value information does not match, the abnormality notification of the set value information may be performed.

Further, in the above example, the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the variation pattern look-ahead command are set values of the pachinko machine 1. Although the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is shown for each, if the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is notified from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The command to be notified is provided separately from the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the variation pattern look-ahead command, and is the main control. Whenever a command is transmitted from the board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, or when a specific command is transmitted, a command for notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 may also be transmitted. For example, a setting notification command 1 to a setting notification command 6 for notifying the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 are provided, and a setting notification command (setting value 1) corresponding to the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is provided from the main control board 1310 at an arbitrary timing. If this is the case, the setting notification command 1 may be transmitted, if the setting value is 2, the setting notification command 2 ... If the setting value is 6, the setting notification command 6) may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the command design for each model (one with a plurality of setting values and one with only one setting value), and the labor of design can be saved.

Further, in this case, a command (for example, a special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, a special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, etc.) related to the effect (special figure synchronization effect, hold notice effect described later, etc.) executed by the effect display device 1600, Not only when the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, fluctuation pattern look-ahead command, etc. are transmitted, but also commands that are not related to the effect executed by the effect display device 1600 (for example, a normal winning opening winning command, etc.) ) Is also sent to notify the setting information of the pachinko machine 1, and the consistency between the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510. It may be determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the command. With this configuration, it becomes possible to frequently determine whether or not the set value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal, and avoid problems due to noise or the like. The accuracy of the noise can be further improved.

[23. Hold notice production]
Next, the hold notice effect will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a command (first holding number) instructing the first holding storage number when the first holding storage number changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002. The designated commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600, and the second is based on the fact that the game ball enters the second starting port 2004. When the number of reserved storages changes, a command for instructing the number of second reserved storages (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 for the second. The reserved storage number is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game ball has entered the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, and based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402. When the special symbol type look-ahead command and the variation pattern look-ahead command are received from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, the special symbol type look-ahead command and the variation pattern look-ahead command are used. In response to the special lottery result for which the start of the suggestion is suspended, the display mode of the first reserved storage 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is changed to suggest the special lottery result. It is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit at the time of execution.

In this example, the first hold storage number specified by the first hold number specification command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second hold storage number specified by the second hold number storage command, the variation pattern look-ahead command, and the special Peripheral control board 1510 according to each of the pre-judgment information (may be one that can notify the type of big hit such as loss, small hit, big hit, probabilistic big hit, normal big hit, etc.) indicated by the symbol type look-ahead command. Is provided with a hold notice determination table for determining the presence / absence of a hold notice and the type of hold notice pattern when the hold notice is executed.

Then, when the decision to execute the hold notice is made and the hold notice pattern type to be executed is decided, the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are different from the usual ones. It is displayed in a display mode (display color different from normal in this example). In this example, the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are usually displayed in white, which is the basic color, and when the hold notice is executed, it is displayed in blue, green, red, or a ladybug pattern. do. Further, the display modes of the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are set so that the expectation of a big hit increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern.

In addition, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit as the preliminary judgment information, a hold notice pattern that has a high expectation of a big hit (for example, red or ladybugs pattern) is determined with a high probability as the final hold display mode, and the advance is made in advance. When the lottery result is specified as a loss as the judgment information, the final hold display mode is determined by determining the hold notice pattern in which the jackpot expectation is low (for example, blue) as the final hold display mode with high probability. When a mode with a high jackpot expectation is displayed as a mode, the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

In addition, in the hold notice pattern, every time the suggestion of the special lottery result (variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol)) is performed during the execution of the hold notice effect (every time the hold is exhausted), the effect display is displayed. How the display mode of the first reserved storage 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved storage 1701a displayed on the apparatus 1600 changes is set. In the hold notice pattern, the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is the reverse of the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybugs pattern. It is set so that it does not change in order (that is, the jackpot expectation does not decrease), and every time a suggestion of a special lottery result (variation display of decorative symbols (variation display of special symbols)) is performed (holding is exhausted). The display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the mode has a high expectation of a big hit. Is set to. Therefore, even if the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with a low expectation of a big hit, the suggestion of the special lottery result that is the execution target of the hold notice starts. Until this is done, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display will change to a mode with a high expectation of a big hit, and the mode of the hold display can be paid attention to with expectation until the end.

Further, in the hold notice pattern, it is not always necessary to change the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a in the order of blue → green → red → ladybug pattern after displaying them in white (basic color). Starting from the display mode in the middle (for example, the first hold memory 1700c is displayed in red based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002). , The display mode changes to the next display mode without going through the display mode in the middle (for example, when the first reserved memory 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the special lottery result is completed and the next special lottery result is displayed. It is also set to change from white to a ladybug pattern when the first reserved memory 1700d is moved to the first reserved memory 1700c according to the start). Therefore, even if the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a has few chances to change (the number of hold), the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d are displayed in a display mode with high expectation of big hit. (Ii) It is possible to display the hold memory 1701a. Further, even if the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d or the second reserved memory 1701a is displayed in the display mode with a low expectation of big hit, it is not possible to predict which display mode will be changed next, and the first It is possible to pay attention to the display mode of the reserved memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a with expectation until the end.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a is different from the above hold notice, together with the hold notice effect suggesting the above-mentioned jackpot expectation. By changing to, it is possible to execute the set value hold suggestion effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the setting value hold suggestion effect and the set value hold suggestion effect according to the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command transmitted from the main control board 1310. It is equipped with a set value hold suggestion judgment table for determining the set value hold suggestion pattern type. Then, a decision is made to execute the set value hold suggestion effect, and when the set value hold suggestion pattern type to be executed is determined, the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are determined. Is displayed in an unusual display mode (in this example, an unusual shape).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 202 (A), when the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are normally displayed as circles, which are the basic shapes, and the set value hold suggestion effect is executed. It is displayed by any of the square shown in the first reserved memory 1700c of FIG. 202 (B), the triangle shown by 1700c of FIG. 202 (C), and the star shown by 1701a of FIG. 202 (D). Further, in the display mode of the first reserved storage 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved storage 1701a, the degree of expectation for the set value of the pachinko machine 1 (the degree of expectation for the high set value) increases in the order of circle → square → triangle → star. Is set to.

Further, when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 5 or 6 based on the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command, the set value hold is a mode (for example, a star) with a high expectation for a high set value as the final hold display mode. When the suggestion pattern is determined with a high probability and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, the setting value in which the expectation for the high setting value is medium (for example, a triangle) as the final mode of the hold display. When the hold suggestion pattern is determined with a high probability and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2, the set value is the mode in which the expectation for the high set value is the lowest (for example, a square) as the final hold display mode. By determining the hold suggestion pattern with a high probability, the player's expectation for the high setting value is increased when the mode with high expectation for the high setting value is displayed as the final hold display mode. There is.

In addition, in the set value hold suggestion pattern, every time the suggestion of the special lottery result (variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol)) is performed during the execution of the set value hold suggestion effect (every time the hold is exhausted). ), How the display mode of the first reserved storage 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes is set. In the set value hold suggestion pattern, the display modes of the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are in the reverse order of circle → square → triangle → star. It is set so that it does not change (that is, the degree of expectation for a high setting value does not decrease), and every time a suggestion of a special lottery result (variation display of decorative symbols (variation display of special symbols)) is performed (holding is exhausted). The display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the degree of expectation for a high setting value is maintained. It is set to have a high aspect. Therefore, even if the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode in which the degree of expectation for a high set value is low, the special setting value hold suggestion effect is executed. Until the suggestion of the lottery result is started, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display will change to the mode with high expectation for the high set value, and it is necessary to pay attention to the mode of the hold display with expectation until the end. can.

Further, in the set value hold suggestion pattern, it is not always necessary to change the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d or the second hold memory 1701a in the order of square → triangle → star after displaying them as circles (basic shape). Starting from the display mode (for example, the first hold memory 1700d is displayed as a square based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002). The display mode changes to the next display mode without going through the display mode of (for example, when the first reserved memory 1700d is displayed as a square, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result starts. Therefore, when the first reserved memory 1700d is moved to the first reserved memory 1700c, it changes from a square to a star). Therefore, even if the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a has a small chance of changing (the number of holds), the first hold memory 1700a to 1700a to the display mode have a high degree of expectation for a high set value. It is possible to display 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a. Further, even if the first reserved storage 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved storage 1701a are displayed in a display mode with a low expectation for a high setting value, it is not possible to predict which display mode will be changed next. , The display mode of the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a can be noticed with expectation until the end.

Further, since the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect are determined separately, the effect display device 1600 displays the hold notice pattern based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect. The display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a is changed to a mode having a high expectation for a high set value, and is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect. The display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the case where the display mode is changed to the mode in which the expectation for the high setting value is high and the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect. While changing the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a to a mode having a high expectation for a high set value, the effect display device 1600 is based on the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect. When the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the display mode is maintained, and the first hold memory 1700a to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect. The first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect while maintaining the display mode of the 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a. There is a case where the display mode of is changed to a mode in which the degree of expectation for a high setting value is high.

For example, when the display mode of the hold notice effect is "white" and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect is "circle", the hold is digested and displayed on the effect display device 1600. (Ii) When moving the hold memory 1701a, the display mode "white" of the hold notice effect is changed to "red" and the display mode "circle" of the set value hold suggestion effect is changed to "square" (color and shape). (Change both), when the display mode of the hold notice effect is "red" and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect is "circle", the hold is exhausted and the first hold memory 1700a displayed on the effect display device 1600a. When moving ~ 1700d or the second hold storage 1701a, the display mode "red" of the hold notice effect is maintained without being changed, while the display mode "circle" of the set value hold suggestion effect is changed to "square". (Maintaining the color and changing the shape), When the display mode of the hold notice effect is "white" and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect is "triangle", the hold is digested and displayed on the effect display device 1600. When moving the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d or the second hold storage 1701a, the display mode "white" of the hold notice effect is changed to "blue", while the display mode "triangle" of the set value hold suggestion effect is changed. It may be maintained without change (change color to maintain shape).

That is, in this example, the process of determining the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect and the process of determining the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect are performed separately, and the suggestion of the special lottery result is suggested based on each change pattern ( Display of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 every time the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is performed (every time the hold is exhausted). The mode is maintained (the display mode is not changed), or the mode is changed to a mode with high expectation for a high set value.

The final display mode of the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect is separately determined, and the change scenario of the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a according to the determination result is shown. One of a plurality of types of change patterns may be executed.

Further, the start timing of the set value hold suggestion effect (timing at which the display mode is displayed in a mode different from the usual one) is first based on the fact that the game ball B is accepted by the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Not limited to the timing of displaying the hold memory 1700a to 1700d or the second hold memory 1701a, the timing after that (the timing after displaying in the basic shape, for example, the suggestion of the special lottery result is completed and the next special lottery result is started. Correspondingly, it is also started in (for example, when moving the first reserved storage 1700b to d to the first reserved storage 1700a to c). As a result, even if the set value hold suggestion effect is not executed, the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a can be noticed with expectation until the end.

The execution frequency of the set value hold suggestion effect is set lower than that of the hold notice effect. That is, the hold notice effect is executed based on the prior determination information, and when the special lottery result is suggested based on the Tobetsu lottery result based on the hold memory executing the hold notice effect, the content of the hold notice effect is reset. On the other hand, since the content of the set value hold suggestion effect continues without being reset until the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the set value hold suggestion effect is lower than that of the hold notice effect. By setting, it is suppressed that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified.

Further, as shown in the first hold storage 1700c of FIGS. 202 (A) and 202 (B) and the second hold storage 1701a of FIG. 202 (D), the set value hold suggestion effect is executed at the same time as the hold notice effect. In some cases, as shown in the first hold storage 1700c of FIG. 202 (C), the set value hold suggestion effect may be executed independently. The hold notice pattern may include a change pattern of the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect. In this case, the hold notice determination table may be further provided for each set value of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 203, the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a plurality of types of image data in which the display mode of the hold notice effect and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect are combined, and the hold notice of the hold notice effect is provided. The target hold storage is displayed based on the image data corresponding to both the pattern and the set value hold suggestion effect of the set value hold suggestion effect. That is, after determining the color as the display mode of the hold notice effect of the target memory and the shape as the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect, a display mode in which these are combined is generated, and this combined display mode is generated. Is displayed as a hold memory.

Specifically, in the example of FIG. 203 (A) in which the hold storage in which only the hold notice effect is executed and the set value hold suggestion effect is not executed is displayed, the first hold memory 1700a and 1700b are referred to as “composite pattern white 1”. Is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern blue 1", and the first hold storage 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "synthetic pattern blue 1". Further, in the example of FIG. 203 (B) in which the hold storage in which both the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are executed is displayed, the first hold memory 1700a and 1700b are the image data of the “composite pattern white 1”. The first hold storage 1700c is displayed based on the image data of the “composite pattern blue 2”. Further, in the example of FIG. 203 (C) in which each of the hold storage in which only the hold notice effect is executed and the hold storage in which only the set value hold suggestion effect is executed is displayed, the first hold storage 1700a is referred to as a “composite pattern”. The first reserved storage 1700b is displayed based on the image data of "blue 1", the first reserved storage 1700b is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern white 1", and the first reserved storage 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern white 3". Is displayed.

Further, also in the second hold storage 1701a, the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are executed, and the hold memory in which both the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are executed is displayed. FIG. 203 (D). In the example of, the second reserved storage 1701a is displayed based on the image data of the “composite pattern red 4”.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the hold notice effect suggesting the jackpot expectation and the pachinko machine 1 by controlling the display of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a in a mode different from the usual mode. It is possible to execute a set value hold suggestion effect that suggests a set value. It should be noted that the hold notice effect is executed based on the prior determination information, while the set value hold suggestion effect is not based on the prior determination information. That is, the hold notice effect can be executed by acquiring the reserved special lottery result in advance, while the set value hold suggestion effect can be executed without acquiring the hold special lottery result in advance. be.

It should be noted that the special lottery results for which the start of the suggestion is suspended are not limited to those displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d or the second reserved memory 1701a, and the special lottery for which the suggestion is being executed is considered to be in progress. The hold storage according to the result may also be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the pending storage during execution. In this case, the final display mode in the above-mentioned hold notice effect or set value hold suggestion effect may be displayed in the running hold memory, and by configuring in this way, the suggestion of the special lottery result can be obtained. Since it is possible to pay attention to the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect until the time when the game is executed, the big hit and the high set value can be expected, so that the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed.

Further, in the above example, the display mode of the hold notice effect is changed by changing the display color of the hold storage, and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect is shown to change the shape of the hold storage. It is not limited to the above as long as it can be determined that it is being executed. For example, the display color of the hold notice effect is changed as the display mode of the hold notice effect, and the numerical value or the hold storage corresponding to the set value suggested without changing the shape of the target hold storage as the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect. Additional information such as the effect mode (glittering effect or flame effect) around the object may be displayed in association with the hold memory.

Further, when displaying the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port 2002, or the second hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004. When displaying 1701a, when updating and displaying the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d or the second hold memory 1701a based on the fact that the hold has been exhausted (the first hold memory 1700b to 1700d is changed to the first hold memory 1700a to 1700c). The set value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested by outputting a sound effect when moving or moving the first hold storage 1700a or the second hold storage 1701a to the running hold storage). For example, when it is suggested that the set value is "1", the sound effect (for example, "pip") corresponding to the set value "1" is output from among a plurality of types of sound effects, and the set value is "2". When suggesting that, the sound effect corresponding to the set value "2" (for example, "pip") is output from among a plurality of types of sound effects, and ... it is suggested that the set value is "5". If this is the case, the sound effect corresponding to the set value "5" (for example, "pip pip pip") is output from among multiple types of sound effects, and if it is suggested that the set value is "6", multiple types of effects are output. Of the sounds, a sound effect (for example, "Pampakapan") corresponding to the set value "6" may be output.

Further, when the hold notice effect or the set value hold suggestion effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree and the pachinko machine 1 are set according to the operations of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. The value may be suggested. In this case, after displaying the operation instruction image instructing the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 on the effect display device 1600. The jackpot expectation degree and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested according to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. In addition, the operation instruction image may be shared between the case where the jackpot expectation and the suggested setting value are maintained and the case where the jackpot expectation and the suggested setting value are further increased. It becomes impossible to determine whether or not the jackpot expectation and the suggested set value can be increased by the effect (the effect of displaying the operation instruction image) that is a precursor to the execution of the hold suggestion effect, and the rotation of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. It is possible to induce the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to be positively operated.

In addition, it may be possible to select whether or not there is a hold notice effect and whether or not there is a set value hold suggestion effect during the demonstration (demo effect performed while waiting for the player). This makes it possible to execute an effect that suits the taste of the player, and even for a player who does not want to suggest the jackpot expectation level or the set value of the pachinko machine 1, the hold notice effect or the set value hold suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the suggestion of the jackpot expectation and the set value of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, a demonstration (a player waiting state, etc.) of the mode suggested by the set value hold suggestion effect (the mode that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and not the mode that suggests the jackpot expectation degree, etc.) is demonstrated. It may be executed at the time of executing (demo production) or the suggestion of the special lottery result (during the variable display of the decorative pattern). As a result, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the jackpot from being improved due to being mistaken for the jackpot expectation when the set value hold suggestion effect is executed.

Further, the pre-judgment information instructed by the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command and the special symbol type look-ahead command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball enters the first start port 2002 during the execution of the time saving state or the probability change state. Preliminary judgment information instructed by the variable pattern look-ahead command and the special symbol type look-ahead command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 without executing the hold notice effect based on. It may be possible to execute only the hold notice effect based on the above. Further, the set value hold suggestion is displayed in relation to the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 2002 even during the execution of the time saving state or the probability change state. You may try to perform the production. As a result, even when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 during the time saving state or the probability change state, it is possible to have expectations for the set value hold suggestion effect.

[24. Set value continuous suggestion effect]
Next, the set value continuous suggestion effect will be described. In this example, it is possible to execute a set value continuous suggestion effect that suggests a set value of the pachinko machine 1 over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbol. It should be noted that the variable display of the decorative symbol is not limited to one executed once for one variable display of the special symbol, but is executed multiple times for one variable display of the special symbol (so-called pseudo-continuous). Fluctuation) is also included.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 continuously suggests the set value according to the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the special figure 1 tuning effect start command and the special figure 2 tuning effect start command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Presence / absence of effect and set value Continuous suggestion effect Set value for executing continuous suggestion effect The set value continuous suggestion effect table for determining the pattern type is provided. Then, when a decision is made to execute the set value continuous suggestion effect and the type of the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern to be executed is determined, the set value is set every time the effect display device 1600 starts variable display of the decorative symbol. Any one of a plurality of setting suggestion characters 1702 having different display modes is made to appear.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 204 (A), when the effect display device 1600 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, "1" is drawn on the head as the setting suggestion character 1702 according to the set value 1. The set suggestion character 1702 is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 204 (C), when the next variation display of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600, "3" is drawn on the head as the setting suggestion character 1702 according to the setting value 3. When the next variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 204 (E), the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed as the setting suggestion character 1702 according to the setting value 4. The setting suggestion character 1702 with "4" drawn on the head is displayed.

Further, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as "6" based on the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command and the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the setting suggestion according to the setting value "6" is used as the final mode. The setting value continuous suggestion effect pattern to be the character 1702 is determined with a high probability, and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1, the setting is set to be the setting suggestion character 1702 according to the setting value "1" as the final mode. By determining the value continuous suggestion effect pattern with a high probability, when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the high setting value is displayed as the aspect of the final setting suggestion character 1702, the player's expectation for the high setting value. The degree is increasing.

Further, in the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern, how is the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 each time the variation display of the decorative symbol is started during the execution of the set value continuous suggestion effect? It is set whether it changes to. In the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern, the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 ( That is, it is set so that the degree of expectation for a high setting value does not decrease), and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained every time the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. (The display mode does not change), or the mode is set according to the high setting value. Therefore, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode corresponding to the low setting value, the mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 is a high setting value until the set value continuous suggestion effect is completed. There is still a possibility that the mode will change according to the situation, and the mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 can be paid attention to with expectation until the end.

Further, in the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern, it is not always necessary to change the setting suggestion character 1702 in the order of 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 after displaying the setting suggestion character 1702 in the mode corresponding to the set value “1”. (For example, the setting value continuous suggestion effect is started and the setting suggestion character 1702 is first displayed with the setting value "2"), and the display mode is changed to the next display mode without going through the display mode in the middle. (For example, when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value "2" is displayed, the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to "4" is displayed according to the start of the next variation display of the decorative symbol. It is also set to be issued). Therefore, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed in the display mode corresponding to the low setting value, it is not possible to predict which display mode will be changed next, and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 cannot be predicted. Can be noticed with expectation until the end.

It should be noted that the execution frequency of the set value continuous suggestion effect is set lower than that of the hold notice effect as in the above set value hold suggestion effect. That is, the hold notice effect is executed based on the prior determination information, and when the special lottery result is suggested based on the Tobetsu lottery result based on the hold memory executing the hold notice effect, the content of the hold notice effect is reset. On the other hand, since the content of the set value continuous suggestion effect continues without being reset until the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the set value continuous suggestion effect is lower than that of the hold notice effect. By setting, it is suppressed that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting value continuous suggestion effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed by displaying the setting suggestion character 1702 over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol. It is supposed to get. Since the set value continuous suggestion effect is not based on the prior determination information like the set value hold suggestion effect, it can be executed without acquiring the special lottery result in advance.

It should be noted that the set value continuous suggestion effect for expressing the setting suggestion character 1702 can be executed beyond the upper limit of the number of reserved storages (the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is 4, the upper limit of the second reserved storage number is 1). (For example, over 5 variations of the decorative pattern). In addition, when the number of reserved storage becomes 0 during the execution of the set value continuous suggestion effect, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. The setting value continuous suggestion effect may be restarted to display the setting suggestion character 1702 when the setting value continuous suggestion effect is restarted. In this case, the setting value continuous suggestion effect is produced until the set value continuous suggestion effect is restarted. The display device 1600 may continue to display. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the set value continuous suggestion effect is continued and the game can be continued, and even if the game is quit, the new player can be made to continue the set value continuous suggestion effect. You can make them interested in playing games on the game machine.

Further, the set value continuous suggestion effect may be executed in parallel with the set value hold suggestion effect. Thereby, it is possible to provide a new game in which the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is estimated from both the effect mode in the set value hold suggestion effect and the effect mode in the set value continuous suggestion effect. Further, a plurality of types of setting suggestion characters 1702 may be provided so that any setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed according to the degree of expectation of a big hit.

[25. Use of surplus settings other than big hit probability and small hit probability]
In the present embodiment, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button in a state where the setting of the set value can be changed, the set value (setting) is performed by pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. The values 1 to 6) can be changed, and as the table used in the special lottery, etc. (hit judgment table, big hit symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.), a table corresponding to the determined set value is used. I am using it. In the above-described embodiment, the tables corresponding to the respective set values are set according to the "big hit probability", "small hit probability", "small hit type", "normal symbol hit probability", and "normal figure hit type". The combination of the "opening and closing pattern of the second starting port" is set to be different, but as another example, even though the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are the same set values, the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are set. Information other than the "hit probability" may be set so that the monitoring system for fraudulent activity is different.

As described above, in the fraud detection process of step S112, various frauds are monitored. Specifically, various winning openings and gates (gates) provided in the game board 5 by changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned by the game board 5 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 ) Is provided with a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects fraudulent activity such as entering a ball, and the main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 and monitors the fraudulent activity by the magnet. ing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 to become the game board 5. By providing a vibration sensor that detects fraudulent activities such as entering a ball into various winning openings and gates (gates) provided, the main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activities based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. We are monitoring fraudulent activities caused by vibration. In this example, as a fraud monitoring system, the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detects fraud is changed, or the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detects fraud is used. It is possible to change the part (target area) that is determined to be fraudulent, and to change the conditions for canceling the error status when it is determined to be fraudulent and the error status is entered.

As shown in FIG. 205, in this example, the "big hit probability", "small hit probability", and "fraud monitoring system" are set to the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1'to 3', respectively. Correspondingly set.

Specifically, as the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot was won in the hit determination table), the set value 1 and the set value 1'are "1/319", the set value 2 and the set value. "1/309" is set for 2', and "1/299" is set for the set value 3 and the set value 3'. In this example, each of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1'to 3'is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the jackpot probability.

Further, as the small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit judgment table), in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, the set value 1 to 3 and the set value 1 While "1/100" is set for each of "~ 3", in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1'to 3'are respectively. Is set to "50/100". It should be noted that each of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1'to 3'may be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the small hit probability.

Further, as a fraud monitoring system, "fraud monitoring A" is set in the set values 1 to 3 and "fraud monitoring B" is set in the set values 1'to 3'. In this example, "fraud monitoring A" is set so that the monitoring system is strengthened more than "fraud monitoring B".

In this example, the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are the same set values for each of the set value 1 and the set value 1', the set value 2 and the set value 2', and the set value 3 and the set value 3'. However, the fraud monitoring system is set to either "fraud monitoring A" or "fraud monitoring B". For example, in the setting change board 1311 provided with the setting key switch 1311a or the like, when it is possible to set six setting values, if it is necessary to set only three types of "big hit probability", three types are required. In addition to the three set values corresponding to the "big hit probability" of, three surplus set values will be generated. In this way, when the setting change board 1311 that can set 6 setting values is diverted to other gaming machines, a surplus setting value may occur, but as in this example, the surplus setting By using the value for changing the monitoring system for fraudulent activity, the surplus setting value can be effectively used and the change in the program can be minimized.

As a display mode of the selected setting value at the time of the operation related to the setting change, "1", "2", and "3" are displayed on the setting display 1310g composed of the 7-segment LED display alone in the settings 1 to 3. At the same time, while the 7-segment LED is displayed so as to blink normally, in the setting 1'to 3', "1", "2", and "3" are displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the 7th segment LED is displayed. The segment LED is displayed so as to blink at high speed (blinking earlier than settings 1 to 3). Thereby, when the operator changes the setting of the set value, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the set value being changed is the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 1'to 3'. However, when the set value is determined after changing the setting of the set value, the 7-segment LED is normally blinking or high speed in both of the settings 1 to 3 and the setting 1'to 3'as the display mode of the set value. It stops blinking and is displayed with normal lighting. Therefore, when the operator determines the set value after changing the setting, it is unclear whether the set value is the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 1'to 3'.

Further, as another example of the above, regarding the display mode of the selected setting value at the time of the operation related to the setting change, in the settings 1 to 3, "1" and "2" are added to the setting display 1310g composed of the 7-segment LED display alone. "3" is displayed, whereas in the setting 1'to 3', "1." "2." "3." is displayed on the setting display 1310g, as compared with the setting 1 to 3. You may add dots. In the case of such another example, even if the 7-segment LED is normally blinked during the change, it is clearly distinguished whether the setting value being changed is the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 1'to 3'. be able to. Further, when the set value is determined after the setting of the set value is changed, the determined setting value is set 1 even if the 7-segment LED is displayed in the normal lighting after the normal blinking of the 7-segment LED is terminated. It is possible to clearly distinguish between ~ 3 and setting 1'~ 3'.

Next, as specific monitoring systems of "fraud monitoring A" and "fraud monitoring B", the first specific example to the fifth specific example can be mentioned. In this example, as "fraud monitoring A" and "fraud monitoring B", any one or more of the first specific example to the fifth specific example may be executed. First, as a first specific example, a case where the detection sensitivities of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) for detecting fraudulent activity are different will be described below.

As a first specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) for detecting fraudulent activity is increased, whereas in "fraudulent monitoring B", fraudulent activity is detected. The detection sensitivity of the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) is lowered. If the detection sensor that detects fraudulent activity detects excessively due to individual differences in the pachinko machine 1 or the installation location in the hall, select "fraudulent monitoring B" to prevent the excessive detection. be able to. On the other hand, when the detection by the detection sensor that detects fraudulent activity is dull, it is possible to prevent the dull detection by selecting "fraudulent monitoring A". Further, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasures against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the cheating by the magnet goto and the vibration goto by selecting "Cheating A".

In "fraud monitoring A", when a detection signal is input from a detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detects fraudulent activity, the time for which the detection signal is input is short, or the detection signal is used. Even if the number of input is small, it is judged to be fraudulent, whereas in "fraud monitoring B", when the detection signal is input for a long time or the number of times the detection signal is input is In many cases, it may be determined that the act is fraudulent. Even in such a case, the same effect as described above can be obtained when the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor for detecting fraudulent activity is different.

Next, as a second specific example, a case where the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) for detecting fraudulent activity has a different part (target area) for determining fraudulent activity will be described below.

In this example, as a magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity by a magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. A magnetic sensor 2010a and a game area portion magnetic sensor 2010b capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. Then, depending on the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, the person other than the person who monitors whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, and changes the setting of the set value or displays the confirmation is the same. It monitors fraudulent activities such as changing settings and trying to display confirmation. On the other hand, the game area magnetic sensor 2010b monitors whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a, changes the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a, and is provided on the game board 5. It monitors fraudulent activities such as entering balls into various winning openings and gates (gates).

Similarly, as a vibration sensor for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration, a setting operation unit vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 located behind the game board 5 and the setting key switch 1311a. And a game area portion vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third distribution device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5. Then, depending on the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit, it is monitored whether vibration is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, and the person other than the person who changes the setting of the set value or displays the confirmation is the person. It monitors fraudulent activities such as changing settings and trying to display confirmation. On the other hand, the game area vibration sensor monitors whether vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550, changes the course of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550, and changes the course of the game ball B to the second V winning opening 2008. We are monitoring fraudulent activities such as letting the game ball B enter the ball.

As a second specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", all the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) for detecting fraudulent activity are used to increase the number of parts to be determined to be fraudulent activity. In "fraud monitoring B", it is determined that the fraudulent activity is performed by using only the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and the setting operation unit vibration sensor, which are a part of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) for detecting the fraudulent activity. The number of parts to be used is reduced. That is, in the "fraud monitoring A", not only the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 located on the rear side of the game board 5 and the setting key switch 1311a is detected, but also the game area located on the front side of the game board 5 is detected. While it is possible to detect the generation of magnetism and vibration in front of 5a, in "fraud monitoring B", magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located behind the game board 5 It is possible to detect only the occurrence of magnetism or vibration. For example, if the magnetic sensor 2010b in the game area and the vibration sensor in the game area have a problem and such a detection sensor frequently detects the sensor even though no fraudulent activity has been performed, "fraud monitoring B" is used. By selecting, it is possible to prevent the frequent detection. If you want to strengthen the countermeasures against magnet goto and vibration goto, you can select "Fraud monitoring A" to monitor cheating even in front of the game area 5a and cheat by magnet goto or vibration goto. Monitoring can be strengthened.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity by the magnet, two magnetic sensors, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and a game area unit magnetic sensor 2010b, are provided, but magnetism is generated. It is possible to specify a location (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 located on the rear side of the game board 5 or the setting key switch 1311a, or in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5). One magnetic sensor may be provided. Similarly, two vibration sensors, a setting operation unit vibration sensor and a game area vibration sensor, are provided as vibration sensors for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration. It is possible to specify whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side, or around the third distribution device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5. One vibration sensor may be provided. Even in such a case, in "fraud monitoring B", only when it is specified that magnetism or vibration is generated around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located behind the game board 5, the fraudulent act is performed. By determining that there is, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Next, as a third specific example, a case where the condition for canceling the error state is different when the error state is determined to be a fraudulent act will be described below.

As a third specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the error state is entered, the error state can be canceled by turning on the power again. , "Fraud monitoring B" makes it possible to automatically cancel the error state after a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed when the error state is determined to be a fraudulent act. ing. That is, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the error state is entered, the hall clerk performs the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and operates the power switch 630a. Then, the error state cannot be canceled unless the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. If the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detects fraudulent activity detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, it shifts to an error state and uses the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker. , An abnormality generation effect for notifying that an abnormal state is caused by the generation of magnetism or vibration is executed, and it becomes difficult to normally grasp the progress of the game. For this reason, when "fraud monitoring A" is selected, when the hall clerk determines that it is a fraudulent act and shifts to an error state, the hall clerk needs to work, and the hall clerk grasps the fraudulent act. Therefore, it is possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent activities. Further, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasures against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent activity by the magnet goto and the vibration goto by selecting "fraud monitoring A".

Next, as a fourth specific example, when it is determined that the pachinko machine is fraudulent and the error state is entered, the information regarding the error state is transmitted to the hole installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The case of making a difference whether or not to output to a computer will be described below.

As a fourth specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that the machine is fraudulent and the state shifts to an error state, information on the error state is transmitted to the game hall via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. While it is output to the hall computer installed on the side, in "fraud monitoring B", even if it is judged that it is a fraudulent act and it shifts to the error state, the information about the error state is output to the hall computer. I try not to. In other words, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that the fraud is fraudulent and the error state is entered, the hall clerk can immediately grasp the fraudulent activity even if he / she is not there. Deterrence can be increased. Further, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasures against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent activity by the magnet goto and the vibration goto by selecting "fraud monitoring A".

Next, as a fifth specific example, whether or not to externally notify the information about the error state by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the state shifts to the error state. The case of making the difference will be described below.

As a fifth specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the error state is entered, magnetism or vibration is generated by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker. While the information about the error status is externally notified by executing an error occurrence effect to notify that the status is abnormal, "Fraud monitoring B" determines that it is a fraudulent activity and the error status. Even if it shifts to, the information about the error status is not notified to the outside. In other words, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that the fraudulent activity is performed and the error status is entered, the fraudulent person is warned by the external notification of the information regarding the error status, and the deterrence against the fraudulent activity is high. can do. Further, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasures against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent activity by the magnet goto and the vibration goto by selecting "fraud monitoring A".

In this example, "fraud monitoring A" is set for the setting values 1 to 3 and "fraud monitoring B" is set for the setting values 1'to 3', and the main control MPU is set toward the peripheral control board 1510. By transmitting the information regarding the value as a command, it is possible to determine whether the peripheral control board 1510 should wait in "fraud monitoring A" or "fraud monitoring B". Therefore, when the main control MPU transmits information about the error state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the state shifts to the error state, the peripheral control board 1510 side. It is possible to determine whether or not to externally notify the information regarding the error status.

In "fraud monitoring B", when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the state shifts to the error state, the information regarding the error state is externally notified, and at that time, the image, the lamp, or the speaker of the effect display device 1600 is used. The output of may be executed in a mode that is more suppressed (inconspicuous) than that of "fraud monitoring A". For example, in the "fraud monitoring B", when the information regarding the error state is externally notified, the output from the lamp or the speaker may be stopped and only the image of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed. Even in such a case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above, which is the case where whether or not the information regarding the error state is notified to the outside is different.

In the above, the case where it is necessary to set only three types of "big hit probabilities" using the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six setting values and three surplus setting values are generated has been described. In other words, with the set values 1'to 3', the fraud monitoring system is set to "fraud monitoring A" even though the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are the same as the set values 1 to 3. "Fraud monitoring B" is set for the set values 1 to 3, but it is not limited to this, and for example, the set values 1 to 5 corresponding to the five types of "big hit probabilities" are set. When one surplus setting value is generated, the fraud monitoring system may be different for the one surplus setting value. For example, in the setting value 1'which is one surplus setting value, even though the setting value 1 and the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability" are the same setting values among the setting values 1 to 5, fraud monitoring is performed. "Fraud monitoring B" may be set for the set values 1 to 5 in which the system is set to "Fraud monitoring A". Even in such a case, the surplus setting value can be effectively utilized.

Further, in the above, either "fraud monitoring A" or "fraud monitoring B" is set as the fraud monitoring system, but "fraud monitoring A" and "fraud monitoring B" having different fraud monitoring systems are set. , "Fraud monitoring C" may be set. In addition, the monitoring of fraudulent activities is strengthened in the order of "fraud monitoring C", "fraud monitoring B", and "fraud monitoring A". For example, if setting values 1 and 2 corresponding to two types of "big hit probabilities" are set and four surplus setting values occur, the setting for monitoring fraudulent activity is set to "fraud monitoring A". Although the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are the same set values for the values 1 and 2, the set values 1'and 2'set in "fraud monitoring B", "big hit probability" and "small hit" Even though the "probability" is the same setting value, the setting values 1'' and 2''' set in the "fraud monitoring C" may be set as the surplus setting value. Even in such a case, the surplus setting value can be effectively utilized.

In the above, although the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are set to the same set value, the case where the monitoring system for fraudulent activity is set to be different has been described, but the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" have been described. Other information may be set so that the operating systems of all or part of the plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are different. A case where the operation system of a part of a plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is set to be different will be described below as a sixth specific example.

As shown in FIG. 206, in the sixth specific example, it is set as an operation system of a specific accessory (specific movable object) among a plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The first setting of the "fraud monitoring system" is that the values 1 to 3 are set to "with specific accessory operation" and the set values 1'to 3'are set to "no specific accessory operation". It is different from the specific example to the fifth specific example. That is, in the sixth specific example, the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability" are set for each of the set value 1 and the set value 1', the set value 2 and the set value 2', and the set value 3 and the set value 3', respectively. Although the set values are the same, the operation system of the specific accessory (specific movable object) is set to either "with specific accessory operation" or "without specific accessory operation". It should be noted that the plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can each operate by using a drive source such as a drive motor or a solenoid. For example, the specification of the present embodiment is specified. The accessory is composed of the effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 described above, and the effect operation unit 300 can be moved up and down by the operation mechanism described above. Since the effect operation unit 300 can be operated by the player in direct contact with the effect operation unit 300, there is a high possibility that a failure or malfunction will occur as compared with other accessories. Then, in the "with specific accessory operation", the specific accessory is controlled to operate at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific accessory (the effect operation unit 300 moves up and down). On the other hand, in the case of "no specific accessory operation", the specific accessory is controlled so as not to operate without executing the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific accessory. For example, if a problem occurs in the operation mechanism of the specific accessory and the specific accessory does not operate normally, the operation of the specific accessory can be stopped halfway by selecting "No operation of the specific accessory". It is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to continue the game.

In this example, when the fluctuation pattern in which the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the movement of the specific accessory is set is determined among the plurality of fluctuation patterns, "with specific accessory movement" indicates the specific accessory. While the specific accessory is controlled to operate at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the movement, in the "no specific accessory operation", the movable object effect accompanied by the movement of the specific accessory is executed. It is controlled so that the specific accessory does not operate. On the other hand, the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern may be changed between "with specific accessory operation" and "without specific accessory operation". For example, "with specific accessory operation" may be used. , Of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, it is possible to determine a fluctuation pattern in which the execution of a movable object effect accompanied by the movement of a specific accessory is set, whereas in "no specific accessory movement", the specific accessory is set. It may be controlled so as not to determine the fluctuation pattern in which the execution of the moving object effect accompanied by the operation of is set. Even in such a case, in the case of "no specific accessory operation", the same effect as described above can be obtained by controlling the specific accessory so that it does not operate without executing the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific accessory. Can be obtained.

Further, in this example, when the operation system of the specific accessory (specific movable object) is set to the set values 1 to 3 in which "the specific accessory operates", the specific accessory is assigned when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed). While the initial operation of the object is performed, when the setting value 1'to 3'that is "no specific accessory operation" is set, the initial operation of the specific accessory is performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed). I try not to do it. As a result, it is possible to recognize again that the specific accessory (specific movable object) among the plurality of accessories (movable objects) is excluded from the operation target. In addition, it is possible to confirm whether or not the set value is intended by the operator regarding the operation of the specific accessory (specific movable object), and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operator makes a mistake in the unintended set value. be able to.

Unlike the above, when prioritizing the presence or absence of defects related to the operation of the specific accessory (specific movable object), "with specific accessory operation" and "without specific accessory operation" to accurately notify it. Regardless of which of the above is set, the initial operation of the specific accessory may be performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed).

Further, which of "with specific accessory operation" and "without specific accessory operation" is set can be confirmed by the setting value displayed on the setting display 1310g, but other than the setting display 1310g. However, it may be notified. For example, when the setting change of the set value is completed, the notification of "set with specific accessory operation / set without specific accessory operation" is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Whether a specific accessory (specific movable object) among a plurality of accessories (movable objects) is an operation target by performing a notification to that effect as a standby screen during the period when the game is not performed. I can recognize it.

Further, in this example, it is possible to set either "with specific accessory operation" or "without specific accessory operation" by changing the setting value by the operator. After setting, the player may be able to change the initial setting to another setting. For example, it may be possible for the player to change to either "with a specific character action" or "without a specific character action" while the standby screen is displayed during the period when the game is not performed. That is, the set values 1 to 3 are set to "with specific accessory operation", and the setting values 1'to 3'are set to "without specific accessory operation", and the main control MPU is set toward the peripheral control board 1510. By sending information about the value as a command, one of the settings will be executed as the initial setting on the peripheral control board 1510 side, but if the player changes to the other setting after the initial setting, On the peripheral control board 1510 side, the setting changed by the player is prioritized over the initial setting.

Further, the specific accessory (specific movable object) among the plurality of accessories (movable objects) is not limited to the effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300, but is provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3. The effect display device 1600 may operate from the outside of the front of the screen toward the front of the screen. Further, in this example, it is possible to change the operation system of a specific accessory (specific movable object) among a plurality of accessories (movable objects) by changing the setting value, but the operation system is not limited to the specific accessory. It is possible to change the movement system of multiple characters (movable objects) or all the characters, and set the target character to either "with character movement" or "without character movement". You may do so. Further, the accessory (movable object) may be provided not only on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, but also on the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the operation system of such an accessory can be changed. It may be an object to be used.

[26. Fraud monitoring]
In the present embodiment, various fraudulent acts are monitored in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112 described above. Specifically, various winning openings and gates (gates) provided in the game board 5 by changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned by the game board 5 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 ) Is provided with a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects fraudulent activity such as entering a ball, and the main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 and monitors the fraudulent activity by the magnet. ing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 to become the game board 5. By providing a vibration sensor that detects fraudulent activities such as entering a ball into various winning openings and gates (gates) provided, the main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activities based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. We are monitoring fraudulent activities caused by vibration. Regarding the monitoring of these fraudulent activities, the mode of monitoring is different between the normal time and the state in which the setting value is changed and the setting value is confirmed and displayed.

[26-1. About fraud monitoring during normal times]
First, the monitoring of fraudulent activities during normal times will be described below. Here, the normal time is a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed and the setting value setting is not changed or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, and the symbol variation, the big hit game, the small hit game, etc. It refers to the state in which it is possible to play the game.

In this example, as a magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity by a magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. A magnetic sensor 2010a and a game area portion magnetic sensor 2010b capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. Then, in a normal state, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used to monitor fraudulent acts against a predetermined area on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in normal times, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a uses magnetism (due to unauthorized access) that should not originally occur in the area provided with the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. It monitors whether magnetism has occurred (whether the magnet is approaching), and monitors fraudulent activities such as trying to change the setting or display the confirmation by someone other than the person who changes the setting of the set value or displays the confirmation. Examples of fraudulent acts against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using magnets include a metal fraudulent instrument in the island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed). A magnet that indirectly operates the metal fraudulent equipment is installed, and the magnet and the metal fraudulent equipment are installed through the slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment and the opening that destroyed a part of the pachinko machine 1. It is conceivable that the pachinko machine 1 is operated to illegally access the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the detection signal from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is input, the fraud using a magnet is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. Is determined to be done.

Similarly, in normal times, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2010b is used to monitor fraudulent activity against a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in normal times, the game area magnetic sensor 2010b monitors whether magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not originally be generated is generated (whether the magnet is approaching) in the area in front of the game area 5a. However, fraudulent acts such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a and allowing the ball to enter various winning openings and gates provided in the game board 5 are monitored. In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the detection signal from the game area magnetic sensor 2010b is input, it is determined that the fraud using a magnet is performed in the area in front of the game area 5a. is doing.

In this example, two magnetic sensors, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and a game area unit magnetic sensor 2010b, are provided as magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity by magnets. These two magnetisms are provided. The sensors 2010a and 2010b may have the same performance. That is, although not shown, the two magnetic sensors 2010a and 2010b are composed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and have a first direction having high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to one side surface. To enable magnetic detection in a magnetic detection region and magnetic detection in a second magnetic detection region having a directional sensitivity that is highly sensitive in the direction perpendicular to the opposite side surface. It has become. Note that "strong sensitivity in the vertical direction" means that the sensitivity is stronger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side surface, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. The game area magnetic sensor 2010b is arranged so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body expand in the left-right direction or the up-down direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1. , Multiple of a wide range on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the large winning opening 2005, and other main parts of the ball flow path). The location) can be monitored. On the other hand, in the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, the first magnetic detection region and the second magnetic detection region emitted from the side surface of the above-mentioned sensor body are widened in the front-rear direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1 and One of the magnetic detection regions is arranged so as to include the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the region on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a can be monitored.

It should be noted that the two magnetic sensors 2010a and 2010b may have embodiments that do not have the same performance. For example, instead of the magnetic sensors 2010a and 2010b, a game located on the front side of the game board 5, whether it is around a place where magnetism is generated (a setting change board 1311 located on the rear side of the game board 5 or a setting key switch 1311a). One magnetic sensor capable of identifying (whether it is in front of the region 5a) may be provided. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet has approached the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, or whether the magnet has approached the area in front of the game area 5a. ..

Further, in this example, as a vibration sensor for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration, a setting operation capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is possible. A part vibration sensor and a game area part vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third distribution device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 are provided. Then, in normal times, the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activities. That is, in normal times, the setting operation unit vibration sensor monitors whether vibration (vibration due to unauthorized access) that should not originally occur is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. However, fraudulent activities such as attempts to change the settings or display confirmations are monitored by anyone other than those who change the settings or display confirmations. In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the detection signal from the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit is input, the fraud due to vibration is performed in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It is judged that it is.

On the other hand, during normal times, only during the small hit game, the game area vibration sensor is used to monitor the fraudulent activity, and other than the small hit game, the game area vibration sensor is not used to monitor the fraudulent activity. This is because in the small hit game, in the third distribution device 2550, the game ball B distributed to the second V winning opening side by the second distribution device 2540 is either the second V winning opening 2008 or the loss side. However, when vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550, the course of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 is changed and the game ball B is placed in the second V winning opening 2008. This is to prevent such fraudulent activities because it becomes possible to enter the ball. That is, during the small hit game during normal times, the game area vibration sensor monitors whether vibration (vibration due to unauthorized access) that should not originally occur is applied to the third distribution device 2550. However, fraudulent acts such as changing the course of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 and causing the game ball B to enter the second V winning opening 2008 are monitored. In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the detection signal from the game area vibration sensor is input, it is determined that the fraudulent act due to vibration is performed on the third distribution device 2550.

In this example, two vibration sensors, a setting operation unit vibration sensor and a game area vibration sensor, are provided as vibration sensors for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration. Identify whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the board 5, or around the third distribution device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5. It is also possible to provide one vibration sensor capable of this. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether vibration is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550. can.

Further, in the normal time, in the launch permission signal setting process in step S113, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B is set, and the player sets the logic. It is possible to fire the game ball B when the handle 182 is operated.

Further, in the normal state, when the game ball B wins a prize in the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005, the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of them are obtained. Is input by the main control MPU so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid. Specifically, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B wins a prize in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the symbol does not change and the game ball B does not change. However, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, the symbol changes when the game ball B wins a prize in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. At the same time, it is possible to pay out the game ball B.

Further, in a normal state, the volume output from the speaker, the screen of the lamp, the effect display device 1600, etc., except for the period during which the effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 is executed during the symbol change It is possible to adjust the amount of light output from the light emitting member. Specifically, after displaying an image for adjustment on the effect display device 1600 by operating the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by rotating the rotation operation unit 302. During the period when the effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is being executed during the symbol variation, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are waiting to be operated for the effect. Since it is in a state, even if the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted during the prohibited period.

[26-2. About fraud monitoring while changing the setting value]
Next, monitoring of fraudulent activity while changing the setting of the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity while changing the setting of the set value.

When changing the setting of the set value, first, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state where the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off). Perform the work (timing t1), then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Set the setting key switch 1311a to ON the setting key (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), it becomes possible to change the setting of the set value (change permission state). In such a change permission state, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button, the set value (set value 1 to 6) can be changed each time the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise to the second ON operation, and then the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the decision key. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return it to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder and turning it off (timing t4). That is, the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 is a state in which the setting of the set value can be changed (change permission state), and after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the set value is set. It becomes impossible to change the settings (unchangeable state). Then, by pulling out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the game can be played. Become.

In this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 142 and 143), but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. Until this is done, the setting change process in step S37 is not terminated (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a was turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, thereafter. It is forbidden to prevent the interrupt permission setting in step S52 from being performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed as compared with the normal power-on. Since the main control side timer interrupt process (see FIG. 144) is not started until the interrupt enable setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input process in step S104 and the fraudulent activity detection in step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt process. The processing, the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113, and the like are not executed and are in a standby state. That is, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is possible to change the setting of the set value (change permission state), but the monitoring of fraudulent activity should not be executed, and the game ball B should be changed. It is a special period in which firing is not permitted and the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins a prize in the winning opening. In the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the information regarding the setting change of the set value is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. , The hall clerk can know that the setting is being changed.

Specifically, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, fraudulent activity monitoring using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor 2010b are performed. I try not to perform the entire monitoring. This means that in the change permission state, a legitimate worker who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button). This is because there is no room for cheating using a magnet except for a legitimate worker who changes the setting of the set value. In addition, when changing the setting of the set value, even if the legitimate worker who changes the setting has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act using a magnet. , It is possible to suppress the obstruction of the regular setting change work.

Similarly, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the game area are executed. I try not to. This means that in the change permission state, a legitimate worker who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button). This is because there is no room for cheating by vibration except for a legitimate worker who changes the setting. In addition, when changing the setting of the set value, even if the legitimate worker who changes the setting vibrates, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act due to the vibration, and the legitimate setting change work is performed. Inhibition can be suppressed.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B should not be set. And the launch of the game ball B is prohibited. As a result, even if a regular worker who changes the setting of the set value touches the handle 182, the game ball B can be prevented from being fired, and the obstruction of the regular setting change work can be suppressed. Further, even if the player operates the handle 182 in the change permission state, the game ball B cannot be fired.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005 and various gates (gates) ), When the game ball B enters the ball, the main control MPU does not input the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each ball, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the detection sensor itself may not detect the game ball B, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be input but treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lottery, the symbol change, or the game ball B No payout will be performed, and as a result, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of changing the setting of the set value. , It is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

Further, although not shown, the main control MPU inputs a detection signal from a detection sensor corresponding to each of the winning opening and the gate portion (gate) in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input by the main control MPU, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state is measured by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) or the like is detected in the change permission state and the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid the situation where the measurement (added to the out number counter) is performed.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, even if the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the screen of the lamp, the effect display device 1600, etc. The amount of light output from the light emitting member of is not adjustable.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A setting change notification (setting change related notification) is being executed to notify that the change is in progress. As a notification during setting change, a voice that repeats "setting is being changed", a message "setting is being changed!" Is displayed, and a lamp is emitted in a color corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6 in the selection operation process. It is supposed to be. This setting changing notification is a notification (effect) performed only in the change permission state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame opening notification performed in a state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. That is, in the state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening notification (display of "frame is open", voice, etc.) is normally performed, but in the change permission state, the main body frame opening notification is performed. It is decided that the notification during setting change is executed with the highest priority without performing. In addition, the main body frame opening notification and the setting changing notification are executed in parallel, the setting changing notification is prioritized over the main body frame opening notification, and the main body frame opening notification is performed after the setting changing notification is completed. The morphology can also be exemplified.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, in addition to the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600, the notification by the function display unit 1400 is also given as the above-mentioned setting change notification. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 has a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal hold display, a first special symbol display, a first special hold number display, and a second special. In addition to the symbol display, the second special hold number display, and the round display, the setting changing display consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting of the set value is being changed (change permission state), the setting value A confirmation display displaying indicator including one LED indicating that the confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state) is provided. Then, in the change permission state, only the LED of the display being changed in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other indicators are turned off. Thereby, in the change permission state, it is possible to grasp that the game does not proceed by the notification by the function display unit 1400.

Further, at the time of timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting change processing in step S37 in the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 142 and 143) is completed (setting key in step S222 of the setting change processing). It is determined that the switch 1311a has been turned off), and the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed. Then, it becomes possible to start the main control side timer interrupt process (see FIG. 144), and the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the launch permission signal setting in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process. Processing etc. will be performed. However, in the present embodiment, until the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed (timing t5), it is detected when the game ball B is allowed to be launched or when the game ball B wins a prize in the winning opening. It does not allow the input of signals and keeps the state where the game cannot be started. That is, the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5 is a period in which the detection signal is not input even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening due to an illegal act, and an illegal profit cannot be obtained. Further, since there is a possibility of receiving an impact of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, fraudulent activity monitoring using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor 2010b It is in a state of waiting as unexecuted monitoring of actions, monitoring of fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit, and monitoring of fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor of the game area section.

In addition, the game ball B can be launched from the time t5 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and it is possible to perform games such as symbol fluctuation, big hit game, and small hit game. In this state, monitoring of various fraudulent activities is started according to the contents explained in [Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times].

Further, during the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 is waiting for the start of the game. An image notifying that is displayed (game standby notification). Then, during a predetermined period from the timing t5, after the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, a game such as a symbol variation, a big hit game, or a small hit game is started. An image (game start notification) is displayed to notify that the game has become possible.

In this example, the game ball B is launched during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). Although the logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit is not set, in consideration of checking the launch operation by the handle 182 in the change permission state, etc. The logic of the firing permission signal may be set during that period so that the game ball B can be fired when the operator operates the handle 182. However, during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4), the permission until the launch of the game ball B is limited. , It is desirable to prevent the detection signal from being input even if the game ball B is inserted into various winning openings and gates (gates) so that the game does not proceed unreasonably. ..

Further, in this example, the game ball B is launched during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). The logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to be permitted is not set, and the game ball B is launched from the time of timing t5 (may be timing t4). Although it is in a possible state, when the handle 182 is operated (contacts with the handle 182) for the first time after the change permission state is finished and the launch of the game ball B is permitted, the setting of the set value is changed in the change permission state. Notification is being executed after changing the settings. As notification after changing the setting, the voice of "setting changed", the message "setting changed" is displayed, and the lamp is emitted. In addition, this notification after changing the setting operates the handle 182 for the first time after changing the setting of the set value even if a person other than the legitimate worker who changes the setting of the set value changes the setting of the set value due to an illegal act. It is supposed to be executed at the time of contacting 182). As a result, if a legitimate worker who changes the setting of the setting value does not change the setting of the setting value, but the notification is executed after the setting change, the setting of the setting value is changed due to fraudulent activity. It becomes known to the outside that it has been done, and it is possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Further, in this example, the game ball B is launched during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). The logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to be permitted is not set, and the game ball B is launched from the time of timing t5 (may be timing t4). Although it is possible, if the handle 182 is operated (contacts with the handle 182) before the launch permission of the game ball B is permitted, the contact with the handle 182 is temporarily released after the launch permission of the game ball B is permitted. The game ball B is not fired unless the handle 182 is touched (operated) again (with the contact detection turned off). That is, even if the contact of the handle 182 has been turned on before the timing t5, unless the edge from which the contact detection to the handle 182 changes from OFF to ON is detected after the timing t5, the continuous handle 182 is reached. The contact is disabled and the game ball B is restricted from being fired. As a result, even if a legitimate worker who changes the setting of the set value comes into contact with the handle 182 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. When the game ball B is closed, the game ball B is not inadvertently fired, and it is possible to reliably prevent the player from suffering a loss.

Further, unlike the above, in consideration of accelerating the start of the game based on the end of the change permission state, when the handle 182 is operated from the time before the launch permission of the game ball B, the handle 182 is operated. While the contact is continued, the continuous contact with the handle 182 may be enabled so that the game ball B can be launched from the time when the game ball B is permitted to be launched. In such a case, the handle 182 is operated before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to prepare for launching the game ball B, and immediately after closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You will be able to start the game.

Further, in this example, the game ball B can be launched from the time t5 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and the game such as a symbol change, a big hit game, and a small hit game can be played. Although it is in a state where it can be played, it may be in a state where the game can be played immediately at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. That is, from the time of timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game ball B can be launched, and games such as symbol fluctuation, big hit game, and small hit game can be performed. Fraudulent monitoring at times] may be used to monitor fraudulent activities. In such a configuration, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5. An image (game start notification) notifying that it is possible to start a game such as a winning game may be displayed.

As another example, after the power is turned on, at least before starting the setting change process in step S37, at least in the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113. It may be configured to perform the corresponding processing in advance. With such a configuration, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting of the set value is changed (change permission state), but fraudulent activity is not monitored and the game ball. The firing of B may not be permitted, and the input of the detection signal may not be valid when the game ball B wins a prize at the winning opening.

Further, in the above-mentioned alternative example, the change permission state (which may be the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, includes the magnetic sensor 2010 or the like. While monitoring fraudulent activity using a vibration sensor, it may be configured not to notify that the abnormal state is detected when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected. Further, normally, when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is performed, the value of the magnet goto counter or vibration goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1, but from timing t3 to timing t4. In the change permission state (which may be the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), which is the period of, even if it is determined that a magnet or vibration is used for fraudulent activity, the magnet It may be configured so that the value of the goto counter or the vibration goto counter is not added. Even with such a configuration, when changing the setting of the set value, even if a legitimate worker who changes the setting approaches the magnet or applies vibration, it is illegal due to the magnet or vibration. No notification or addition is performed as an act, and it is possible to prevent the monitoring of fraudulent activity from becoming an obstacle when changing the setting of the set value.

Since various needs related to the above-mentioned change permission state may exist depending on the environment of the game hall and the like, it may be possible to select and set for each game field. For example, when the power is turned on with the operation of the normal RAM clear switch instead of the change permission state (since the RWM clear button 633z is in the state of operating as the RAM clear switch, while operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. (When the power is turned on), when the operator of the amusement park generates a state in which various processes related to the change permission state can be selected, and then the change permission state is generated, the state is selected. Various processes related to the change permission status are to be executed in the settings. As a result, in the game hall A, fraud monitoring is not monitored in the change permission state, but the contact with the handle 182 is set to be valid, and in the game hall B, the fraud monitoring is performed in the change permission state. It can be set to be non-monitoring and to invalidate the contact with the handle 182, and the needs of the amusement park, such as whether or not to check the launch operation by the handle 182 while the change is permitted. You will be able to adjust to.

[26-3. About fraud monitoring while confirming and displaying the set value]
In the above, regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activity while changing the setting value, it was explained that the fraudulent activity is not monitored while the setting value setting is being changed. It may be configured in either a state in which fraudulent activity is not monitored during the confirmation display of the set value, or a state in which fraudulent activity is partially monitored. First, a case where fraudulent activity is not monitored during the confirmation display of the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is not monitored during the confirmation display of the set value.

When confirming the currently set value, first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and also confirm that the symbol has not changed (there is no hold). , Open the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and watch the clock in the same way as when changing the setting. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees in the direction and performing the first ON operation (timing t6). At this time, the current setting value (the value set among the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. do. Then, by rotating the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on (timing t7), the setting display is operated. The state of displaying the set value for 1310 g is switched to the state of not displaying it. That is, the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7 is a state in which the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state), and after the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the confirmation of the set value is performed. It becomes a state where the display is not performed (unconfirmable state). Then, by pulling out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t8), it is possible to play a game. Become.

At the time of timing t6 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the current setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g unless the game ball B such as a prize ball is paid out. ing. Further, even if the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, the game ball B such as the prize ball is paid out. If this is the case, the setting key switch 1311a may not be turned on (the setting key remains OFF), or the setting key switch 1311a may be turned on after the payout of the game ball B such as the prize ball is completed. The setting key may be turned on so that the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

As another example, when confirming and displaying the currently set value, the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on) as in the case of changing the setting of the set value. In the blocked state), the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By setting the key switch 1311a to ON and operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the setting value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). You may. Further, when the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch (the RWM clear button 633z is in a state of operating as the RAM clear switch, so the RWM When the power is turned on while operating the push operation part of the clear button 633z), the state shifts to the state where the setting of the set value can be changed (change permission state), while when the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch, It may be configured to shift to a state in which confirmation display of the set value can be performed (confirmation display state). In such a configuration, by turning on the setting key switch 1311a and turning on the power without operating the RAM clear switch, the state shifts to the state where the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state). The state in which the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state) corresponds to the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7.

In this example, for the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state), but the monitoring of fraudulent activity is not executed, and the game ball B It is a special period in which the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins a prize in the winning opening. In the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the information regarding the confirmation display of the set value is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. , The hall clerk can know that the confirmation is being displayed.

Specifically, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, fraudulent activity monitoring using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor 2010b are performed. I try not to perform the entire monitoring. In the confirmation display state, a legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and a person other than the legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value is an illegal act using a magnet. This is because there is no room to do. In addition, when confirming and displaying the set value, even if the legitimate worker who displays the confirmation has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act using a magnet. , It is possible to suppress the obstruction of the regular confirmation display work.

Similarly, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the game area are executed. I try not to. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and there is room for a person other than the legitimate worker who displays the confirmation to perform fraudulent acts due to vibration. Because there is no such thing. In addition, even if a legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display vibrates when confirming the set value, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act due to the vibration, and the legitimate confirmation display work is performed. Inhibition can be suppressed.

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B should not be set. And the launch of the game ball B is prohibited. As a result, even if a regular worker who confirms and displays the set value touches the handle 182, the game ball B can be prevented from being fired, and the obstruction of the regular confirmation display work can be suppressed. Further, even if the player operates the handle 182 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B cannot be fired.

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005 and various gates (gates) are displayed. ), Even if the main control MPU inputs a detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each ball B, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the detection sensor itself may not detect the game ball B, or the detection signal itself from the detection sensor may not be input. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lottery, the symbol change, or the game ball B No payout will be performed, so that even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value. , It is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

Although not shown, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to the winning opening, the gate portion (gate), etc. in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input by the main control MPU, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is measured by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) or the like is detected in the confirmation display state and the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid the situation where the measurement (added to the out number counter) is performed.

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, even if the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the screen of the lamp or the effect display device 1600, etc. The amount of light output from the light emitting member of is not adjustable.

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A confirmation display notification (confirmation display related notification) is being executed to notify that the display is in progress. As the notification during confirmation display, the voice that repeats "confirmation display is in progress", the message display "confirmation display in progress!", And the lamp emission in the color corresponding to the set value of 1 to 6 in the confirmation process are executed. There is. This confirmation display notification is a notification (effect) performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame opening notification performed in a state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. That is, in the state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening notification (display of "frame is open", voice, etc.) is normally performed, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame opening notification is performed. It is decided that the notification during confirmation display is executed with the highest priority without performing. In addition, the main body frame opening notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, the confirmation display notification is prioritized over the main body frame opening notification, and the main body frame opening notification is performed after the confirmation display notification is completed. The morphology can also be exemplified.

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, in addition to the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker, the notification by the function display unit 1400 is also given as the above-mentioned confirmation display notification. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 has a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal hold display, a first special symbol display, a first special hold number display, and a second special. In addition to the symbol display, the second special hold number display, and the round display, the setting changing display consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting of the set value is being changed (change permission state), the setting value A confirmation display displaying indicator including one LED indicating that the confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state) is provided. Then, in the confirmation display state, only the LED of the display during confirmation display in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other indicators are turned off. Thereby, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to grasp that the game does not proceed by the notification by the function display unit 1400.

Further, the confirmation display state (which may be a period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, includes the first start port 2002 and the second start port. When the game ball B wins a prize in the winning openings such as 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005, even if the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each, the game ball B is detected. However, when such a detection signal is input, the launch of the game ball B is not permitted due to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Despite the period during which the game ball B does not win a prize in the winning opening, the warning effect C for notifying the winning opening that the game ball B has won a prize is executed. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the confirmation display notification and the main body frame opening notification. That is, when the warning effect C is executed, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing the confirmation display notification or the main body frame opening notification.

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, it is not possible to permit the launch of the game ball B or input a detection signal when the game ball B wins a prize at the winning opening, so that the game can be played. Although it is in a state where it cannot be started, the state is maintained until the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed after that (timing t8). That is, the period from the timing t7 to the timing t8 is a period in which the detection signal is not input even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening due to an illegal act, and an illegal profit cannot be obtained. Further, since there is a possibility of receiving an impact of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, fraudulent activity monitoring using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor 2010b It is in a state of waiting as unexecuted monitoring of actions, monitoring of fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit, and monitoring of fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor of the game area section.

In addition, the game ball B can be launched from the time t8 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and it is possible to perform games such as symbol fluctuation, big hit game, and small hit game. In this state, monitoring of various fraudulent activities is started according to the contents explained in [Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times]. It should be noted that the game ball B can be launched even before the timing t6 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, and the symbol changes and a big hit. It is possible to play games such as games and small hit games, and monitoring of various fraudulent activities is started according to the contents explained in [Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times].

Further, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 is waiting for the start of the game. An image notifying that is displayed (game standby notification). Then, during a predetermined period from the timing t8, after the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, a game such as a symbol variation, a big hit game, or a small hit game is started. An image is displayed to notify that the game has become possible (game start notification).

Further, in the normal state when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a should not be in the state of turning on the setting key, but when such a setting key is turned on. The warning effects A and B are executed to notify that the setting key is illegally turned on by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (timing t1) while the symbol is being changed during normal times, the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Until (timing t2), the warning effect A is being executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (timing t3) while the symbol is not constantly changed, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. During the period (timing t4), the warning effect B is being executed. Further, the warning effects A and B are executed with priority over the effect being executed. That is, when the warning effects A and B are executed, the effects being executed are stopped regardless of whether or not the symbol is changed, and the warning effects A and B are executed with the highest priority. Although the warning effects A and B are performing the effects in the same manner, the effects may be executed in different modes so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol is in a state of being changed.

In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during the period of monitoring fraudulent activity due to magnets or vibration, the magnetism or vibration is generated over a predetermined period by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker. An abnormal occurrence effect is executed to notify that the abnormal state is caused by the occurrence of. Further, in the abnormality generation effect, the content of the abnormality (magnetic or vibration) depends on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, the game area magnetic sensor 2010b, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area vibration sensor detects the abnormality. Which occurrence was detected), the part where the abnormality was detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, or the third distribution device. Is it the area around 2550?) And so on. In addition, the effect of generating an abnormality is executed with priority over the effect being executed. That is, when the abnormality occurrence effect is executed, the effect being executed is stopped regardless of whether or not the symbol is changed, and the abnormality occurrence effect is executed with the highest priority.

In this example, the game ball B is launched during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7). Although the logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to allow is not set, in consideration of checking the launch operation by the handle 182 in the confirmation display state, etc. The logic of the firing permission signal may be set during that period so that the game ball B can be fired when the operator operates the handle 182. However, during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7), the permission until the launch of the game ball B is limited. , It is desirable to prevent the detection signal from being input even if the game ball B is inserted into various winning openings and gates (gates) so that the game does not proceed unreasonably. ..

Further, in this example, the game ball B is launched during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7). The logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit is not set, and the game ball B is launched from the time of timing t8 (may be timing t7). However, if the handle 182 is operated (contacts with the handle 182) from the time before the launch permission of the game ball B is permitted, the contact with the handle 182 is temporarily made after the launch permission of the game ball B is permitted. The game ball B is not fired unless it is separated (contact detection is turned off) and the handle 182 is touched (operated) again. That is, even if the contact of the handle 182 has been turned on before the timing t8, unless the edge from which the contact detection to the handle 182 changes from OFF to ON is detected after the timing t8, the continuous handle 182 is reached. The contact is disabled and the game ball B is restricted from being fired. As a result, even if a legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value is in contact with the handle 182 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. When the game ball B is closed, the game ball B is not inadvertently fired, and it is possible to reliably prevent the player from suffering a loss.

Further, unlike the above, in consideration of speeding up the game start based on the end of the confirmation display state, if the handle 182 is operated from the time before the launch permission of the game ball B, the handle 182 is reached. The continuous contact with the handle 182 may be enabled so that the game ball B can be launched from the time when the game ball B is allowed to be launched. In such a case, the handle 182 is operated before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to prepare for launching the game ball B, and immediately after closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You will be able to start the game.

Further, in this example, the game ball B can be launched from the time t8 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and the game such as a symbol change, a big hit game, and a small hit game can be played. Although it is in a state where it can be played, it may be in a state where the game can be played immediately at the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. That is, from the time of timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game ball B can be launched, and games such as symbol fluctuation, big hit game, and small hit game can be performed. Fraud monitoring at the time] may be used to monitor fraudulent activities. In such a configuration, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from the timing t7 to the timing t8. An image (game start notification) notifying that it is possible to start a game such as a winning game may be displayed.

Further, as another example, the confirmation display state (which may be the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, includes the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor. Although the fraudulent activity is monitored by using the above, when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, it may be configured not to notify the abnormal state. Further, normally, when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is performed, the value of the magnet goto counter or vibration goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1, but from timing t6 to timing t7. In the confirmation display state (which may be the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), which is the period of It may be configured so that the value of the goto counter or the vibration goto counter is not added. Even with such a configuration, even if a legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display moves the magnet close to it or applies vibration when confirming the set value, it is illegal due to the magnet or vibration. No notification or addition is performed as an act, and it is possible to prevent the monitoring of fraudulent activity from becoming an obstacle when confirming and displaying the set value.

Since various needs related to the above-mentioned confirmation display state may exist depending on the environment of the amusement park and the like, it may be possible to select and set each of the amusement parks. For example, when the power is turned on with the operation of the normal RAM clear switch instead of the confirmation display state (since the RWM clear button 633z is in the state of operating as the RAM clear switch, while operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. (When the power is turned on), the operator of the amusement park generates a state in which various processes related to the confirmation display state can be selected, and then when the confirmation display state occurs, the selection is made. Various processes related to the confirmation display status are to be executed in the settings. As a result, in the game hall A, fraud monitoring is not monitored in the confirmation display state, but the contact with the handle 182 is enabled, and in the game hall B, the fraud monitoring is performed in the confirmation display state. It can be set to be non-monitoring and to invalidate the contact with the handle 182, and the needs of the amusement park, such as whether or not to check the launch operation by the handle 182 in the confirmation display state. You will be able to adjust to.

Next, a case where fraudulent activity is partially monitored during the confirmation display of the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when a fraudulent activity is partially monitored during confirmation display of the set value. Here, the points different from the case where the fraudulent activity is not monitored during the confirmation display of the above-mentioned set value shall be described below.

In this example, for the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state), but the launch of the game ball B is not permitted and the game ball is placed in the winning opening. It is a special period in which the input of the detection signal is not valid when B wins a prize, and among the fraudulent acts, only the fraudulent acts against the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided are monitored. There is.

Specifically, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the game area magnetic sensor 2010b is not used to monitor fraudulent activity, whereas the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used. I try to monitor fraudulent activities using it. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and a regular worker who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, but the set value. A person other than a legitimate worker who performs a confirmation display of the above acts to bring the magnet closer to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the set value is changed illegally. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

On the other hand, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening by fraudulent act, the detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is not possible to do so, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2010b in the game area.

The setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used not only in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7 but also in the period until the timing t8 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. I try to monitor all fraudulent activities. That is, regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, whether the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, whether the setting key switch 1311a is in the normal state or the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. Regardless of the confirmation display state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is constantly monitored.

Similarly, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, fraudulent activity is not monitored using the game area vibration sensor, whereas fraudulent activity is performed using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. I try to monitor the behavior. This is because in the confirmation display state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and a regular worker who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, but the set value. A person other than a legitimate worker who performs a confirmation display of the above performs an illegal act so as to apply vibration to the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, and the setting value is changed illegally. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

On the other hand, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening by fraudulent act, the detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is not possible to do so, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor in the game area.

It should be noted that the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7 but also in the period until the timing t8 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. I try to monitor the fraudulent activity. That is, regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit, whether the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, whether the setting key switch 1311a is in the normal state or the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. Regardless of the confirmation display state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is constantly monitored.

Further, during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7), the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used. Monitoring of fraudulent activity, setting operation unit The vibration sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activity. When these sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the image of the effect display device 1600 is used to monitor the magnetism The abnormality generation effect A for notifying that the state is abnormal due to the generation of vibration is executed. Further, in the abnormality occurrence effect A, the content of the abnormality (whether the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected) or the abnormality is determined depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The detected part (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided) and the like are notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, the time at the timing t7 (which may be the time at the timing t8), which is the end of the confirmation display state in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF, is executed. The abnormality occurrence effect A is forcibly terminated. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when confirming and displaying the set value, the legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display operates the setting key switch 1311a. It cannot be ruled out that the magnet may have been unintentionally brought closer or vibrated. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is performed by a magnet or vibration, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormal occurrence effect A being executed is forcibly performed. It is supposed to end.

As described above, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8, fraudulent activity monitoring is performed using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, and fraudulent activity monitoring is performed using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. However, even during normal times other than that period, fraudulent activity monitoring using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, fraudulent activity monitoring using the game area magnetic sensor 2010b, and setting operation unit vibration sensor The fraudulent activity is monitored using the above, and the fraudulent activity is monitored using the vibration sensor in the game area. Further, when the generation of magnetism or vibration is detected in such a normal time, the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600 causes an abnormal state due to the generation of magnetism or vibration for a predetermined period. An abnormality occurrence effect B for notifying the existence is being executed. Here, in the abnormality generation effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality generation effect A, only the image of the effect display device 1600 is used, and the abnormality occurs. It is decided to execute the production in a manner that is less conspicuous than the production B. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the person who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the legitimate worker who displays the confirmation is not intentional. This is because the possibility that the magnet has been brought closer or vibration has been applied cannot be ruled out. In the abnormality generation effect B, the content of the abnormality (magnetic, vibration) depends on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, the game area portion magnetic sensor 2010b, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area portion vibration sensor detects the abnormality. Which occurrence was detected), the part where the abnormality was detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, or the third distribution. Is it the area around the device 2550?) And so on.

Further, as described above, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 which is the period from the timing t5 to the timing t8, the outer frame 2 is generated by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. The main body frame opening notification for notifying that the main body frame 4 is in the opened state is being executed. Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A confirmation display notification (confirmation display related notification) is being executed to notify that the display is in progress. Then, after performing the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the confirmation display state is entered by turning on the setting key switch 1311a, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame opening notification is obtained. When the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the confirmation display state, the main body frame is opened. The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed with priority over the notification and the notification during confirmation display.

[26-4. About a modified example of fraud monitoring while changing the setting value]
In the above, regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activity while changing the setting value, it was explained that the fraudulent activity is not monitored while the setting value setting is being changed. good. A case where fraudulent activity is partially monitored during such setting change of the setting value will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when a fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting value is changed. Here, the points different from the case where fraudulent activity is not monitored while changing the setting of the above-mentioned setting value shall be described below.

In the above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the main control MPU starts the processing at the time of turning on the main control power (see FIGS. 142 and 143), but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. Until, the setting change process of step S37 is not completed (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and the subsequent steps are taken during the period from timing t3 to timing t4. It is forbidden to prevent the interrupt permission setting of S52 from being performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is delayed as compared with the normal power-on. That is, since the main control side timer interrupt process (see FIG. 144) is not started until the interrupt enable setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input process in step S104 and the fraud detection in step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt process. The processing, the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113, and the like are not executed and are in a standby state. On the other hand, after the power is turned on, before starting the setting change process in step S37, it corresponds to at least the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the emission permission signal setting process in step S113. The process (same process) may be configured to be performed in advance. With such a configuration, in this example, the setting change of the set value is performed (change permission state) for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, but the launch of the game ball B is not permitted. At the same time, a special period is set in which the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins the prize opening, and the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided in the fraudulent activity. I try to monitor only cheating.

Before starting the setting change process in step S37, the process corresponding to the fraud detection process (same process) in step S112 is performed in advance, and among the fraudulent acts, the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch are performed. When only the fraudulent activity in the area provided with 1311a is monitored, in the process, the magnet is input when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 or the vibration sensor is input, as in the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112. It is determined that fraudulent activity is being performed due to vibration or vibration, and the values of the magnet goto counter and vibration goto counter are added (incremented) by the value 1. However, in the main control power-on processing, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, and after the setting change processing in step S37 is completed (the setting key switch 1311a is turned off in step S222 of the setting change processing). After making a determination), in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared except for a specific area. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is performed in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the values of the magnet goto counter and the vibration goto counter are added (incremented). By clearing the RAM at the end of the change permission state, the value 0 (zero) is set (initialized) as the initial value in the value of the magnet goto counter or the vibration goto counter. In this way, at the end of the change permission state, the values of the magnet goto counter and the vibration goto counter are initialized, but in the change permission state, the person who changes the setting of the set value is the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z. (The RWM clear button 633z is in a state of operating as a setting switching button.) When changing the setting of the set value, the person who changes the setting unintentionally brings the magnet closer. It is not possible to rule out the possibility of chilling or adding vibration. For this reason, even if it is determined that fraudulent activity is being performed by magnets or vibration, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the values of the magnet goto counter and vibration goto counter are initially set. It is supposed to be changed.

Specifically, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the game area magnetic sensor 2010b is not used to monitor fraudulent activities, whereas the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used. I try to monitor fraudulent activities using it. This is because in the change permission state, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z (RWM clear button) are set by a regular worker who changes the setting of the set value while the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. 633z is in a state of operating as a setting switching button.) However, a region other than a regular worker who changes the setting of the setting value is provided with the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunctions such as illegally changing the set value by performing fraudulent acts so as to bring the magnet closer to the target.

On the other hand, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening by fraudulent act, the detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is not possible to do so, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2010b in the game area.

The setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used not only in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 but also in the period until the timing t5 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. I try to monitor all fraudulent activities. That is, regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, whether the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, whether the setting key switch 1311a is in the normal state or the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. Regardless of the change permission state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is constantly monitored.

Similarly, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, fraudulent activity is not monitored using the game area vibration sensor, whereas fraudulent activity is performed using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. I try to monitor the behavior. This is because in the change permission state, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z (RWM clear button) are set by a regular worker who changes the setting of the set value while the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. 633z is in a state of operating as a setting switching button.) However, a region other than a regular worker who changes the setting of the setting value is provided with the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunctions such as illegally changing the set value by performing fraudulent acts so as to vibrate against the switch.

On the other hand, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening by fraudulent act, the detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is not possible to do so, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor in the game area.

It should be noted that the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used not only in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 but also in the period until the timing t5 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. I try to monitor the fraudulent activity. That is, regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit, whether the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, whether the setting key switch 1311a is in the normal state or the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. Regardless of the change permission state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is constantly monitored.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. The setting is being changed to notify that it is being changed. The change permission state (which may be the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, includes the first start port 2002 and the second start port. When the game ball B wins in the winning openings such as 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005, even if the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each, the game ball B is detected. However, when such a detection signal is input, the launch of the game ball B is not permitted due to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Even though it is a period in which the game ball B does not win a prize in the winning opening, a warning effect C for notifying the winning opening that the game ball B has won a prize is executed. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the setting change notification and the main body frame opening notification. That is, when the warning effect C is executed, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing the setting change notification or the main body frame opening notification.

Further, during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4), the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used. Monitoring of fraudulent activity and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, but if those sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the image of the effect display device 1600 will be used for magnetism. The abnormality generation effect A for notifying that the state is abnormal due to the generation of vibration is executed. Further, in the abnormality occurrence effect A, the content of the abnormality (whether the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected) or the abnormality is determined depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The detected part (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided) and the like are notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, the time at the timing t4 (which may be the time at the timing t5), which is the end of the change permission state in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF, is executed. The abnormality occurrence effect A is forcibly terminated. This means that in the change permission state, a legitimate worker who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button). Therefore, when changing the setting of the set value, it cannot be ruled out that the legitimate worker who changes the setting may have intentionally brought the magnet closer or vibrated. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is performed by a magnet or vibration, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormal occurrence effect A being executed is forcibly performed. It is supposed to end.

As described above, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5, fraudulent activity monitoring is performed using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, and fraudulent activity monitoring is performed using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. However, even during normal times other than that period, fraudulent activity monitoring using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, fraudulent activity monitoring using the game area magnetic sensor 2010b, and setting operation unit vibration sensor The fraudulent activity is monitored using the above, and the fraudulent activity is monitored using the game area vibration sensor. Further, when the generation of magnetism or vibration is detected in such a normal time, the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600 causes an abnormal state due to the generation of magnetism or vibration for a predetermined period. An abnormality occurrence effect B for notifying the existence is being executed. Here, in the abnormality generation effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality generation effect A, only the image of the effect display device 1600 is used, and the abnormality occurs. It is decided to execute the production in a manner that is less conspicuous than the production B. This means that in the change permission state, a legitimate worker who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button). This is because, when changing the setting of the set value, it cannot be ruled out that the legitimate worker who changes the setting may have intentionally brought the magnet closer or vibrated. In the abnormality generation effect B, the content of the abnormality (magnetic, vibration) depends on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, the game area portion magnetic sensor 2010b, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area portion vibration sensor detects the abnormality. Which occurrence was detected), the part where the abnormality was detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, or the third distribution. Is it the area around the device 2550?) And so on.

Further, as described above, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t5 after the power is turned on, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used. , The main body frame opening notification is executed to notify the outer frame 2 that the main body frame 4 is in the opened state. Further, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 after the power is turned on, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used. A setting change notification (setting change related notification) is being executed to notify that the setting of the set value is being changed. Then, after performing the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the change permission state is entered by turning on the power with the setting key switch 1311a turned on as the setting key ON, but in the change permission state, the main body frame When the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the change permission state, the main unit is set to execute the setting change notification with priority over the open notification. The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed with priority over the frame opening notification and the setting changing notification.

[27. Modification example of setting change such as winning probability]
In the above example, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the result of the special lottery, and the game ball is accepted in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small hit gaming state. Shown the one that changes the setting such as the winning probability for the one that is controlled to shift to the big hit game state, but as shown in FIG. 211, the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 is not provided, or Even if a game ball is accepted by the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small hit gaming state, the setting of the winning probability or the like may be changed for those that are not controlled to shift to the big hit gaming state. Hereinafter, a modified example of changing settings such as winning probability in a pachinko machine in which the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are not provided will be described as a second embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment replaces the accessory winning opening 2006 of the pachinko machine 1 of the above example (the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are arranged inside). The second major winning opening 2006 (the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are not arranged inside) is provided, and other configurations are the same.

[27-1. Game content of the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit") that is advantageous to the player. , "Small hit", "Time reduction (time reduction) hit", "Probability fluctuation (probability change) hit") is generated. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested (derived) to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In the present embodiment, when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the second special lottery result corresponding to the acceptance in the second starting port 2004 is preferentially suggested (deriving). do. The game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 without prioritizing (deriving) the result of the special lottery according to the acceptance in the second starting port 2004 (priority change). The special lottery results may be suggested (deriving) in the following order (sequential variation), or the first special lottery result according to the acceptance to the first starting port 2002 and the acceptance to the second starting port 2004 may be accepted. It may be possible to suggest (derive) the result of the second special lottery in parallel at the same time (simultaneous fluctuation).

In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "miss", "small hit", "2R probability change big hit", and "15R probability change big hit". , "15R normal jackpot" and the like. In the present embodiment, the second special lottery result includes a "small hit", while the first special lottery result does not include a "small hit". In addition, while making sure that both the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result include "small hit", the second special lottery result wins the "small hit" more than the first special lottery result. The probability may be set high.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a "small hit", the first After a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s) has elapsed after the two major winning openings 2006 are in an open state in which the game ball B can be accepted, a "small hit" game in which the game ball B is closed unacceptably is performed. Will be executed. Since the second big winning opening 2006 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, if a "small hit" is drawn, "right-handed" and the first guide The game ball B is driven into the passage 2521. Further, in the small hit game of the second embodiment, although the period for opening the second big winning opening 2006 is shorter than that of the big hit game, keep hitting the game ball so as to flow down the first guide passage 2521. For example, at least one game ball B can enter the second large winning opening 2006 in one small hit game. During the small hit game, the game state before the start of the small hit game state (probability change state, time saving state, etc., which will be described later) is maintained, and after the small hit game, the game state before the start of the small hit game state continues. ..

The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are either "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot". In that case, after a predetermined time (for example, 29 s) has elapsed after the first big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, or a predetermined limit number of pieces to the first big winning opening 2005 ( For example, if any of the conditions of accepting the game ball B (10) is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball B unacceptable is performed 15 times. Repeated "big hit" games are performed. If the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery are "15R normal jackpot", the lottery is performed by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 after the end of the jackpot game. The variation time of the special symbol for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player is the suggestion of the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery). It is controlled to shift to the "time saving state" in which the time until the next "hit" is drawn is shortened by making it shorter than usual until the number of times reaches 100 times. If the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery are "15R probability variation big hit", after the end of the "big hit" game, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are reached until the next "big hit". The variation time of the special symbol for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the player is shorter than usual, and the first special lottery result and the second Control is performed to shift to a "probability change state (high probability state)" that improves the probability that the special lottery result will be a "hit".

If the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is "2R probability variation jackpot", the second big winning opening 2006 , An opening / closing pattern that makes the game ball B unacceptable after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 s) has elapsed after the opening state in which the game ball B can be accepted (one opening / closing pattern is defined as one round). A "big hit" game is executed in which (referred to) is repeated twice. In addition, after the end of the "big hit" game, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 until the next "big hit". "Probability change state (high probability state)" that shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbol for suggesting the result to the player and improves the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will be "hits". ) ”.

Since the second big winning opening 2006 and the first big winning opening 2005 are mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500, the hitting of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to let the player perform the inclusive operation. When the game ball B is accepted by the second big winning opening 2006 or the first big winning opening 2005 when the second big winning opening 2006 and the first big winning opening 2005 are open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 A predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the 2nd big winning opening 2006 and the 1st big winning opening 2005 are able to accept the game ball B, by making the 2nd big winning opening 2006 and the 1st big winning opening 2005 accept the game ball B, many things are done. The game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

In the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the first guide passage 2521 side is easier to perform the driving operation than the second guide passage 2522 side, but the second guide passage 2522. Since it is less likely to be accepted by the first prize opening 2005 than on the side, it is possible to let the player choose which passage to perform the driving operation, and it is difficult for the player to get bored with various games. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, only the game ball driven into the first guide passage 2521 side can be accepted in the second big winning opening 2006.

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the result of the special lottery due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is accepted in the start opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. To. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. As for the suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the combination of the lit LEDs suggests the special lottery result. In the following, the blinking of the LED for suggesting the first special lottery result to the player for a predetermined time is referred to as "variable display of the first special symbol", and the second special lottery result is suggested to the player. The blinking of the LED for a predetermined time may be referred to as "variation display of the second special symbol", and the lighting combination pattern of the LED suggesting the result of the first special lottery to the player is "stop symbol of the first special symbol". The LED lighting combination pattern that suggests the result of the second special lottery to the player may be referred to as a "stop symbol of the second special symbol".

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the suggestion of the special lottery result is performed as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

It should be noted that the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed). It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to stand out by 367, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the effect unit 3200, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is suppressed. can do.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the correct operation is performed when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 may display to that effect.

Further, when the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, a lottery of the normal lottery result as to whether or not the second starting opening door 2411 is opened in a predetermined pattern is performed on the main control board 1310. Then, the drawn ordinary lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 s to 6000 s, also referred to as an ordinary fluctuation time) on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol for suggesting the normal lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 to the player is set to "6000s" in the normal state, while the probability change state. And in the time saving state, it is set to "0.1s".

In addition, the probability of hitting a normal figure (the probability that the normal lottery result will be a "normal hit") is set to "10/11", and when the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, it is "normal" in most cases. It becomes a "hit" and the second starting door 2411 is opened. Further, when the normal lottery result is "normal hit", the period for opening the second starting door 2411 is "0.1s" in the normal state, while "2" in the probable change state and the time saving state. It is set to "0.0s". Therefore, in the normal state, the second start opening door 2411 is opened only at intervals of 6000 s at the shortest, and the period of opening is extremely short, so that the game ball is very accepted to the second starting opening 2004. It is considered difficult. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts aimed at accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 in the normal state. On the other hand, in the probable change state, not only the second start opening door 2411 is frequently opened, but also the open state is long, so that the game ball can be easily accepted into the second start opening 2004. It should be noted that the probability of hitting a normal figure may be different between the normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and the time saving state (low probability time saving state) or the probabilistic state (high probability time saving state). For example, in the normal state. The probability of hitting a normal figure is set to "1/11", the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to "1/11" in a time-saving state or a probable change state, and the acceptance of a game ball into the second starting port 2004 is very high in a normal state. On the other hand, by facilitating the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 in the time saving state or the probabilistic change state, the game ball is frequently accepted into the second starting port 2004 in the time saving state or the probabilistic change state. It is also possible to suppress fraudulent acts aimed at accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 in the normal state. In addition, while the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to zero (0/11) in the normal state (low probability non-time saving state), the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to "10/11" in the time saving state or the probability change state. Or "11/11", and the fraudulent activity aimed at accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 in the normal state may be further suppressed.

As described above, in the normal state, the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs, and the suggestion of the result of the first special lottery mainly based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 (first special symbol). Fluctuation display) is performed. On the other hand, in the probable change state and the time saving state, since the game ball B is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is frequently accepted into the second start port 2004, mainly the second start. The suggestion of the result of the second special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the mouth 2004 (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed.

Further, if the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 between the start of the normal lottery and the suggestion of the normal lottery result due to the acceptance of the game ball B in the normal winning opening 2003, the suggestion of the normal lottery result. Since the above cannot be started, the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the normal lottery result previously drawn is completed. The number of reserved ordinary lottery results is limited to four for the ordinary winning opening 2003, and for more than that, the ordinary lottery result is suspended even if the game ball B is accepted in the ordinary winning opening 2003. Instead, I try to discard it. Instead of this example, the game ball B was accepted in the ordinary winning opening 2003 between the start of the ordinary lottery and the suggestion of the result of the ordinary lottery due to the acceptance of the game ball B in the ordinary winning opening 2003. In that case, the ordinary lottery result may be discarded without being withheld. This further prevents the operation of driving the game ball B aiming at the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 in the normal state, and the second special lottery is performed in the normal state to win a small hit. It is possible to prevent it from occurring, and it is possible to further suppress fraudulent acts aimed at accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

Further, the suggestion of the normal lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 in the same manner as the special lottery result. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 directly controls and suggests the normal lottery result. The suggestion of the normal lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that an LED different from the LED suggesting the special lottery result is repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the normal lottery is performed by the combination of the lit LEDs. Suggest results.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the normal state, the game ball B is driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the first special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002. The result is suggested (variation display of the first special symbol). In addition, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal jackpot" in the normal state, the game ball B is driven aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 by controlling the transition to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game. The suggestion of the result of the second special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed. When the predetermined number of fluctuations (the total number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the second special lottery is 100) is reached without a big hit in the time saving state, the time saving state is terminated and the normal state is reached. The game ball B is driven again aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the suggestion of the first special lottery result based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 (first special symbol). Fluctuation display) is performed.

In addition, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R probability change big hit" or "2R probability change big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state, the transition to the probability change state (high probability state) is controlled after the big hit game is completed, and the center character is used. The game ball B aimed at the right side of 2500 is driven, and the suggestion of the second special lottery result based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed. The probability change state is continuously executed until the next big hit, and when the second special lottery result becomes "15R normal big hit" in the probability change state, the game is controlled to shift to the time reduction state after the end of the big hit game, and the big hit occurs in the time reduction state. When the predetermined number of fluctuations (the number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the number of suggestions of the second special lottery is 100) is reached, the time saving state is terminated and the transition to the normal state is controlled.

Further, when the second special lottery result becomes "15R probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" in the probability variation state, the transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) is controlled again after the jackpot game ends. In this way, the probabilistic state is continued until the "15R normal jackpot" is reached, and when the "15R normal jackpot" is reached, the transition to the time saving state is controlled after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, when only the first special lottery result is reserved without the reserved second special lottery result, or when there is no reserved second special lottery result, the game ball is sent to the first starting port 2002. If it is accepted, the suggestion of the result of the first special lottery (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed even in the time saving state or the probable change state. Then, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal big hit" in the time saving state or the probability change state, the transition control is performed to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game, and the first special lottery result becomes "15R" in the time saving state or the probability change state. When it becomes "probability change big hit" or "2R probability change big hit", the transition control to the probability change state is performed after the end of the big hit game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of becoming a "small hit" as a result of the second special lottery (small hit probability) is set to be much higher than the big hit probability (for example, the big hit probability of 10 in the probability change state). About twice). In addition, during the time saving state or the probable change state, the game ball is frequently accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the second special lottery is held, so that small hits frequently occur and the second big winning opening. 2006 is in the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, small hits frequently occur in the second special lottery in the time saving state or the probable change state, and even if it is not a big hit, the prize balls that exceed the firing amount are obtained little by little. It is possible, and the longer the time saving state or the probable change state continues, the more prize balls can be won. Therefore, not only the number of game balls does not decrease in the time saving state or the probable change state, but also the number of balls held by the player can be increased by the prize balls obtained by the generated small hits. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game in a normal state where the consumption of the game ball is large, and not only the consumption of the game ball is small but also the number of balls held by the player increases even if the big hit does not occur due to the occurrence of a small hit. It is possible to control the game to a completely different state from the game executed in the time saving state and the probabilistic state.

[27-2. Change of settings such as winning probability of the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, the probabilities of big hits, small hits, etc. that are changed according to the set values will be described.

In the second embodiment as well, as in the above-described example, a table corresponding to the set value is selected as the table (hit determination table, big hit symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.) used in the special lottery or the like. The table used in the special lottery or the like is provided for each set value, and each table is set so that at least a part of the values is different.

As shown in FIG. 212 (A), in the present embodiment, the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability" are set corresponding to each of the set values 1 to 6.

In addition, the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won in the hit judgment table), which is common to the first special lottery and the second special lottery, is set to a different value for each set value, and is usually set. The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state and the time saving state (low probability state) is "1/319" at the set value 1, "1/309" at the set value 2, and the set value 3 Is "1/299", the set value 4 is "1/289", the set value 5 is "1/279", and the set value 6 is "1/269". In addition, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the probabilistic state (high probability state) is "1/30" for the set value 1, "1/40" for the set value 2, and the set value 3. Is "1/50", the set value 4 is "1/60", the set value 5 is "1/70", and the set value 6 is "1/80".

In this way, in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state), the higher the set value, the higher the jackpot probability, but in the probabilistic state, the set value becomes higher as opposed to the normal state and the time saving state. The jackpot probability is getting lower. That is, the jackpot probability of the set value 6 is the highest in the normal state and the time saving state, while the jackpot probability of the set value 1 is the lowest in the probability variation state. The jackpot probability is not limited to being proportional to or inversely proportional to the set value, and for some cases, the jackpot probability set to a set value lower than the set value is higher than the jackpot probability set to an arbitrary set value. It may be set to be high.

As shown in FIG. 212 (A), the small hit probability in the first special lottery (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit was won in the hit judgment table) is "0" in all the set values. It is difficult to win a prize ball by a small hit in the normal state and the short time state (there is no chance of winning a small hit), while the small hit probability in the second special lottery (small hit in the hit judgment table). The ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the player has won the prize) is set to "1/3" which is common to all the set values, and the probability is very high compared to the big hit probability. Hits occur frequently, making it easier to win prize balls.

In the probabilistic state, the jackpot probability is the lowest at the set value 6, so the jackpot is less likely to occur (delay) than at the low set value, which causes the probabilistic change state to continue for a long period of time, so the set value is high. Indeed, the number of small hits that occur before a big hit will increase. That is, the higher the set value, the more prize balls can be won by the small hit, and the next big hit is promised, and the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage. In other words, in the probabilistic state, the next big hit is promised regardless of the set value, but the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than the big hit is different for each set value, and the higher the set value, the bigger the hit. The expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in other places is increasing.

In addition, the duration of the probability change state is not set to the next big hit, and the predetermined number of fluctuations is the same as in the normal state and the time saving state (the number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery is 100 times). While the configuration is such that it ends when the value reaches, the higher the set value, the higher the jackpot probability, and the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of jackpot occurrence, thereby increasing the degree of advantage. It is also good (so-called number-cut probability change). In this case, although the next big hit is not promised, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than the big hit is different for each set value, and the higher the set value, the more the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than the big hit. Although the expected value increases, it is possible to realize a game property in which a big hit is expected to occur by the time the end condition of the probable change state is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest. In order to realize such game characteristics, the jackpot probabilities in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time-saving state are set so as not to have a setting difference (uniform at 1/319), and the probability changes. As described above, the setting difference may be provided only for the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state.

Further, in realizing the playability of the second embodiment, in the case of a set value lower than a specific set value, the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state is made higher than the small hit probability in the second special lottery. In the case of a set value higher than a specific set value, the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state may be made lower than the small hit probability in the second special lottery. Specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state) is set to "1/250" with the set value 1 and "240" with the set value 2. "1/1", setting value 3 is "1/230", setting value 4 is "1/180", setting value 5 is "1/170", and setting value 6 is "1/160". The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the probabilistic state (high probability state) is "1/25" for the set value 1, "1/24" for the set value 2, and "1/24" for the set value 3. "1/23", setting value 4 is "1/18", setting value 5 is "1/17", setting value 6 is "1/16", while the second special lottery is small. It can be exemplified that the hit probability (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit is won in the hit judgment table) is set to "1/20" which is common to all the set values.

In the case of such a configuration, since the small hit probability in the second special lottery is lower than the big hit probability in the probable change state at the set values 1 to 3, the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit in the probable change state. While the number is relatively small, with the set values 4 to 6, the probability of a small hit in the second special lottery is higher than the probability of a big hit in the probable change state, so the prize that can be obtained by the small hit in the probable change state. The number of balls will be relatively large. In particular, when the set value is 4 or more, the big hit probability becomes lower than the small hit probability in the probabilistic state, and it becomes difficult for the big hit to occur. It is possible to create a game that gives a sense of expectation that a ball can be acquired. Further, the history information of the probability of the big hit generated in the probable change state after the power is turned on and the probability of the small hit generated in the probable change state is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM or the like) of the peripheral control unit 1511. By displaying various hit probability information based on the history information on the effect display device 1600, the player can be made aware that the probability of a small hit is higher than the probability of a big hit in the probabilistic state. It is possible to give a person a feeling of expectation that "the set value may be 4 or more", and to give new fun and fun that has never existed before while the game is being continued in the probabilistic state. In addition, the player feels that the probabilistic state continues for a long period of time and that a large number of prize balls can be obtained by a small hit in the probable change state. It can also be recognized, and in this respect as well, it can add new enjoyment and fun that has never existed before. As described above, with a specific set value (setting value 4 in this embodiment) as a boundary, and with a set value higher than that, the game is transformed into a game in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained by a small hit. Can be further improved.

Further, as another embodiment, the higher the set value in the probabilistic state, the higher the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery, and the higher the set value, the higher the second special lottery. You may try to increase the probability of a small hit at. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212 (B), the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state) is the small hit probability with the set value 1. "1/319", setting value 2 is "1/309", setting value 3 is "1/299", setting value 4 is "1/289", and setting value 5 is "1/279". , The set value is 6 and it is "1/269". The small hit probability in the probabilistic state (high probability state) is "1 / 31.9" at the set value 1, "1/30.9" at the set value 2, and "29.9 minutes" at the set value 3. 1 ”, the setting value 4 is“ 1 / 28.9 ”, the setting value 5 is“ 1 / 27.9 ”, and the setting value 6 is“ 1 / 26.9 ”. As described above, in the probabilistic state, the jackpot probability of all the set values is increased 10 times as compared with the normal state and the time saving state.

In addition, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is "1/7" for the set value 1, "1/6" for the set value 2, "1/5" for the set value 3, and "1/5" for the set value 4. The set value is "1/4", the set value 5 is "1/3", and the set value 6 is "1/2". Therefore, with the set value 1, a small hit is generated once every 7 times the second special lottery is performed, whereas with the set value 6, a small hit is generated every time the second special lottery is performed twice. It will occur only once, and the frequency of small hits will increase. That is, at the set value 6, small hits occur more frequently than at the set value 1, and it is easier to obtain a prize ball by the small hit. The expected value of the number of balls is increasing.

In addition to changing the settings of the big hit probability and the small hit probability described above, or without changing the settings of the big hit probability and the small hit probability, the determination ratio of the big hit type is different for each set value to increase the degree of advantage. You may change it. As described above, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the second special lottery is mainly executed and a small hit can be generated, while in the normal state, the first special lottery is mainly executed and a small hit cannot be generated. Therefore, the degree of advantage changes according to the duration of the probable change state or the time saving state.

Also, in the probabilistic state, as in the normal state and the time saving state, the higher the set value, the higher the jackpot probability, and the higher the set value, the higher the small hit probability. May perform a so-called fall lottery in which a lottery is made as to whether or not to end the probability change state when the special lottery result becomes "missing" during the probability change state. Further, in this case, the fall probability (probability of ending the probabilistic state) may be common without being different for each set value, or the fall probability may be different for each set value.

For example, as shown in FIG. 212 (C), the fall probability in the high probability state may be set to "1/100" common to all the set values, and in this case, the fall lottery result ends the probability change state. Although the probability of showing is not different for each set value, as shown in FIG. 212 (B), the jackpot probability improves as the set value is higher, so the frequency and frequency of jackpot occurrence are different for each set value. The degree of advantage is changed, and the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage.

Further, the fall probability in the high probability state may be changed for each set value. For example, as shown in FIG. 212 (D), the fall probability is "1/80" for the set value 1 and the set value 2, "1/90" for the set value 3 and the set value 4, the set value 5 and the setting. A value of 6 may be set to "1/100".

In this case, with the set value 1, the jackpot probability is "1 / 31.9", whereas the fall probability is "1/80", and the jackpot probability is about 2.5 times higher than the fall probability. On the other hand, with the set value 6, the jackpot probability is "1 / 26.9", while the fall probability is "1/100", and the jackpot probability is about 3.7 of the fall probability. It has been doubled. That is, by increasing the jackpot probability as the set value increases and increasing the rate of winning the jackpot before the fall lottery result is obtained, the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage. There is.

In addition, when the fall lottery result that ends the probabilistic state is obtained during the probable change state, the jackpot probability is returned from the probability of the probable change state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), while the second special lottery. Control to make the fluctuation time of the special symbol shorter than usual for suggesting the result to the player may be continued, and in this case, the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is a predetermined number of times (for example, the first special). The control may be terminated and the control may be performed to shift to the normal state based on the fact that the number of suggestions (the total number of suggestions of the lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion is 100) is reached. That is, when a fall lottery result for ending the probability change state is obtained during the probability change state, the probability change state may be ended and the transition to the time saving state may be controlled. In addition, when the fall lottery result for ending the probability change state is obtained, the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is already a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery are totaled 100 times. ) Is reached, the transition control to the normal state may be performed without the transition control to the time saving state after the probability change state is terminated.

In addition, when the fall lottery result that ends the probability change state is obtained during the probability change state, the jackpot probability is returned from the probability of the probability change state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), and the second special lottery result is changed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol for suggesting to the player may be returned to the normal fluctuation time. That is, when a fall lottery result for ending the probability change state is obtained during the probability change state, the probability change state may be ended and the transition to the normal state may be controlled. In this case, the fall lottery may be performed even during the time saving state, and when the fall lottery result for ending the time saving state is obtained during the time saving state, the time saving state is terminated and the normal state is entered. It may be controlled.

In the example shown in FIG. 212 (E), the occurrence ratio of the jackpot type in which the probability variation state ends when the special lottery result becomes "big hit" after the transition to the probability variation state is controlled after the jackpot game ends. By changing it, the degree of advantage is changed. Specifically, when the result of the first special lottery mainly executed in the normal state (low probability non-time saving state) is "big hit", the occurrence ratio of the big hit type is the same for all the set values. "15R probability change big hit" which is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game and "2R probability change" which is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game but the number of prize balls acquired is smaller than "15R probability change big hit" The probability of occurrence of "big hit" is set to "40/100" respectively, and the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game (for example, the number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery is 100 times). The rate of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to a shorter time state until it reaches, is set to "20/100".

On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery mainly executed in the probability change state and the time saving state is "big hit", the generation ratio of the big hit type is different for each set value, and the setting value 1 is set. The rate of occurrence of "15R probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is set to "45/100", and the number of prize balls acquired although the transition is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game. However, the rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", which is less than "15R probability variation jackpot", is set to "15/100". The rate of occurrence of the "15R normal jackpot" is set to "40/100".

With the set value 2, the occurrence rate of "15R probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is set to "46/100", and the prize is that the transition is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game. The rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", in which the number of balls acquired is less than "15R probability variation jackpot", is set to "19/100", and the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The probability of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to a shorter time state until the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery is 100), is set to "35/100".

With the set value 3, the occurrence rate of "15R probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is set to "47/100", and the prize is that the transition is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game. The rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", in which the number of balls acquired is less than "15R probability variation jackpot", is set to "23/100", and the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The probability of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to a shorter time state until the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery is 100), is set to "30/100".

With the set value 4, the occurrence rate of "15R probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is set to "48/100", and the prize is that the transition is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game. The rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", in which the number of balls acquired is less than "15R probability variation jackpot", is set to "27/100", and the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The probability of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to a shorter time state until the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery is 100), is set to "25/100".

With the set value 5, the occurrence rate of "15R probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is set to "49/100", and the prize is that the transition is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game. The rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", in which the number of balls acquired is less than "15R probability variation jackpot", is set to "31/100", and the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The probability of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to a shorter time state until the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery is 100), is set to "20/100".

With the set value 6, the occurrence rate of "15R probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is set to "50/100", and the prize is that the transition is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game. The rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", in which the number of balls acquired is less than "15R probability variation jackpot", is set to "35/100", and the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The probability of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to a shorter time state until the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery is 100), is set to "15/100".

In this way, when the result of the second special lottery executed mainly in the probabilistic state and the time saving state becomes "big hit", the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and the second) The rate of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to a shorter time state until the total number of suggestions of the special lottery is 100), is changed for each set value, and the higher the set value, the more "15R normal jackpot" occurs. By reducing the ratio, it becomes difficult to end the probabilistic state. As a result, the higher the set value, the more difficult it is to end the probabilistic state once the transition to the probabilistic state is controlled, and the number of large hits can be increased. It will be possible to acquire. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the probable change state.

The higher the set value, the lower the rate of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", while the rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot" is higher than that of "15R probability variation jackpot" to suppress the number of prize balls acquired. It is possible to suppress an excessive advantage to a person.

[27-3. Setting value suggestion effect of the second embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in the probable change state and the expected value of the number of small hits that can be won are configured to be different for each set value. Specifically, in FIG. 212 (A), the jackpot probability in the probability variation state of the set value 1 is set to "1/30" and the small hit probability is set to "1/3", so that after the jackpot game is completed. The expected value of the number of small hits that can be won from the control to the probabilistic state to the next big hit is "9 times". In addition, since about one game ball B can enter the second big winning opening 2006 in one small hit game, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in one small hit game. Is "15 balls". That is, when the set value is 1, the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the probable change state is "135 balls" of "9 times x 15 balls". Similarly, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probable change state when the setting value is 2 is "195 balls" of "13 times x 15 balls", and is obtained by the small hit in the probable change state when the setting value is 3. The expected value of the possible prize balls is "240 balls" of "16 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the probable state when the set value is 4 is "19 times x 15 balls". "285 balls", the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probable change state when the set value is 5, "345 balls" of "23 times x 15 balls", and the small hit in the probable change state when the set value is 6. The expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained is "390 balls" of "26 times x 15 balls".

Further, in FIG. 212 (B), the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probable change state when the set value is 1 is "60 balls" of "4 times x 15 balls", and the probable change state when the set value is 2. The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit is "75 balls" of "5 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit in the probable state when the set value is 3 is "5 times". The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the case of "75 balls" of "x15 balls" and the set value of 4 is "105 balls" of "7 times x 15 balls", and the case of the set value of 5 The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probable change state is "135 balls" of "9 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probable change state is " It is "195 balls" of "13 times x 15 balls".

In this way, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit and the expected value of the number of small hits that can be won differ depending on the set value (in FIG. 212 (B), some of them are the same. Therefore, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game, it is possible to estimate the set value according to the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game and the number of times the small hit is won before the next big hit. can. It should be noted that an effect of suggesting a set value (set value suggestion effect) may be executed according to the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game, the number of times the small hit is won, and the like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 213, the peripheral control unit 1510 displays a gauge unit having 6 scales 1600a from 1 to 6 on the effect display device 1600 as a set value suggestion effect so as to correspond to the set value of 6 stages. The scales of the gauge section are colored according to the number of prize balls acquired (number of payouts) by winning the second major winning opening 2006, and the gauge section is staged from the initial display mode as the number of prize balls acquired in small hits increases. It may be made to be colored (increase the coloring display between the scales), and it may be suggested that the high setting value is obtained by coloring all the scales of the gauge portion. Specifically, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 213 (A), the scale 1600a and the character 1600b of the initial display mode and the balloon 1600c in which the dialogue of the character is displayed are displayed. It is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this initial display mode, assuming that the number of prize balls acquired is "0", only one scale on the leftmost side of the six scales is colored and displayed as a setting value corresponding to the "setting". It suggests that the value is 1 or more, and displays "What is the set value ...?" In the balloon 1600c to suggest to the player through the character 1600b that the gauge unit suggests the set value.

Then, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 1 and is within the range of the expected value at the set value 2. , The setting value is 2 or more by further coloring and displaying the 6 scales from the left side to the 2nd scale in the gauge part (the first and 2nd scales from the left side are colored and displayed). In addition to suggesting, "maybe 2 or more?" Is displayed in the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 2 or more (FIG. 213 (B)).

Further, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 2 and is within the range of the expected value at the set value 3. , Of the 6 scales in the gauge section, the 3rd scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the 1st to 3rd scales from the left side are colored and displayed), so that the setting value is 3 or more. In addition to suggesting, "Is it 3 or more?" Is displayed in the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 3 or more (FIG. 213 (C)).

Further, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 3 and is within the range of the expected value at the set value 4. , Of the 6 scales in the gauge section, the 4th scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the 1st to 4th scales from the left side are colored and displayed) to indicate that the set value is 4 or more. In addition to suggesting, "4 or more !?" is displayed in the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 4 or more (FIG. 213 (D)).

Further, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 4 and is within the range of the expected value at the set value 5. , Of the 6 scales in the gauge section, the 5th scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the 1st to 5th scales from the left side are colored and displayed) to indicate that the set value is 5 or more. In addition to suggesting, "more than 5 ??" is displayed in the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 5 or more (FIG. 213 (E)).

Further, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 5 and is within the range of the expected value at the set value 6. , The 6th scale from the left side of the 6 scales in the gauge section is further colored and displayed (all scales are colored and displayed) to suggest that the setting value is 6 and the character 1600b. As a line, "You did it! 6 may be !!!!" is displayed on the balloon 1600c to more clearly suggest that the set value is 6 (FIG. 213 (F)).

Then, after the state in which the 6th scale from the left side of the 6 scales in the gauge section is colored and displayed (the state in which all the scales are colored and displayed), the final stage display has already been reached, so a big hit. The display of the gauge part is not changed according to the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the game, and the next big hit game is started, or if there is an end condition in the probable change state, the end condition is satisfied. Until then, all the scales are colored and displayed.

It should be noted that further setting suggestions may be made separately in a state where all six scales in the gauge unit are colored and displayed. For example, a big hit game in a state where all six scales in the gauge unit are colored and displayed. When paying out the prize ball in the later small hit game, the maximum setting is confirmed to inform the player that the maximum setting (setting value 6) is confirmed based on the ball entry detection at the second big winning opening 2006. A special production lottery for performing the production may be performed. Specifically, with all six scales in the gauge section displayed in color, a special production lottery will be held to win 1/1000 each time a ball is detected at the second major winning opening 2006. By winning, the voice output in a special mode (message voice of congratulations on setting 6), various lamps of the door frame 3 in the special mode (lamps in rainbow colors using 7 colors), and the effect display device 1600. It can be illustrated that the highest setting confirmation effect consisting of the special display (message display of congratulations on setting 6) is performed at the same time. By executing the highest setting confirmation effect with all the scales displayed in color in this way, the effect related to the setting suggestion performed earlier gives a sense of satisfaction, and the player is not bored. A feeling of satisfaction can be given to the player, and the game entertainment can be further improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, if a big hit occurs before all the scales are colored and displayed, the display mode of the gauge portion is cleared after the big hit, so that the big hit occurs and the big hit game. Since the setting value suggestion effect is executed every time the transition to the probabilistic state is controlled later to suggest the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, the actual setting value is estimated by statisticizing the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect. You will be able to. That is, if the probability change state is executed only once, the number of prize balls acquired by the small hit during this probability change state and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained according to the set value may differ. Therefore, the set value. Although it is difficult to determine, if the number of prize balls acquired by small hits is counted for each probability change state between big hits, the ratio near the specific number of prize balls will increase, so the specific number of prize balls is set as the expected value. By comparing, the set value can be inferred. In this example, it can be inferred that the setting value having the highest suggested ratio in the setting value suggestion effect executed a plurality of times is the actual setting value.

In the case of a big hit, the display mode of the gauge unit may be taken over until the probability change state is completed without clearing the display mode of the gauge unit. Further, in this case, the six scales in the gauge section are set to 1 as the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in one probable change state or the number of small hits that can occur in one probable change state according to the set value. It is possible that all the scales are not colored in the probability change state of the times. As a result, the set value can be suggested based on the number of prize balls, the number of small hits, and the like acquired in the probable change state over a long period of time, so that the reliability of the suggested set value can be improved.

In addition, the various set value suggestion effects described above are executed by the peripheral control unit 1511, and the prize ball acquired by the small hit game executed in the probable state during the period from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit. Since it is based on numbers and not on actual settings, the suggested and actual settings may differ. Information about the set value (set value information) may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the prize obtained in the small hit game after the big hit game as a setting value suggestion effect. In addition to the number of balls, the set value may be suggested based on the set value information. Specifically, when the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, the suggestion mode of the set value suggestion effect is not changed. Alternatively, if the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game is less than the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, the set value or the set value information indicated by the set value information by lottery or the like. It is also possible to change to the suggestion mode of the set value suggestion effect according to the set value below the set value indicated by. With this configuration, the reliability of the set value suggestion effect can be increased, and the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect can be focused on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1510 grasps the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game, and the peripheral control unit 1510 states that the total number of the prize balls exceeds the expected value in each set value. However, the setting suggestion in the probabilistic state is not limited to this form, and the setting suggestion in the probable change state may be made as follows, although the display of the gauge unit is changed to suggest the setting in the probable change state.

For example, when there is a 6-step gauge unit as described above, each time the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the prize ball paid out by a small hit has reached a certain value, one scale 1600 is colored. , It may be suggested to the player that the setting is high by achieving the coloring of the scale 1600 in the final stage. In this case, it is preferable to achieve the final stage coloring of the scale 1600 by using the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the hit game at the set value 6 as a guide, for example, setting. If the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the small hit game after the hit game with a value of 6 is "195 balls", the payout of "195 balls + α balls (α <195)" is colored with a scale of 1600 at the final stage. It can be exemplified by the achievement timing.

Further, it is not based on the prize ball paid out by the small hit, but based on the judgment by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of times that the result of the second special lottery becomes the small hit result reaches a certain value, 1 By coloring one scale 1600 and achieving the coloring of the final stage scale 1600 (for example, the number of times the result of the second special lottery is a small hit result reaches 80 times), it is set high. You may try to suggest something to the player. In this case, the difficulty of achievement changes depending on the relationship between the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the probabilistic state in the set value actually set. And, depending on the display situation of the gauge part (for example, the situation where the final stage is reached by coloring one more scale), the result of the second special lottery may be a small hit rather than a big hit in anticipation of the setting value suggestion. It is also possible to provide a new game feature of paying attention to.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a new game in which the set value is estimated according to the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game and the number of winnings of the small hit game when controlled to the probable change state. Can provide sex.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board of FIG. 137 has the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 137 as the game control central processing unit capable of controlling the progress of the game. A control board 1310 is provided. The main control board 1310 has a test connector 1310k of FIG. 141 that can be electrically connected to a test harness as wiring for taking out an output signal from the main control MPU 1310a and transmitting it to a test device for testing the pachinko machine 1. You can be prepared.

When the pachinko machine 1 is tested by the test device, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x which is the surface side of the main control board 1310, whereas the test connector is used. The 1310k is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y, which is the back surface side of the main control board 1310.

Since the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back surface side of the main control board 1310 in this way, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested by a specific testing institution, and the pachinko machine 1 is a game hall. Even when it is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to Japan, the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is not formed as an empty area on the surface side of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of the main control board 1310 can be increased.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310'in FIG. 139 (a) as a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game. .. These plurality of electronic components include a ZIP type main control MPU (described as part number "MIC1" in the figure) included in the lead type of FIG. 139 (a) as a lead type electronic component, and a surface mount type electronic component. As an electronic component, it is composed of the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 shown in FIG. 139 (a) and mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x'of the main control board 1310', respectively.

The main control board 1310'includes the component list area 1310xb' in FIG. 139 (a) as an information area. The component list area 1310xb'can represent information corresponding to an identifier of a surface mount type electronic component. As the information displayed in the component list area 1310xb', the name of the manufacturer of the surface mount type electronic component (including abbreviations and symbols), the product number of the surface mount type electronic component, and the like can be mentioned.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the part list area 1310xb'is a part list of electronic parts composed of a part number and a part number (number published in a catalog) arranged in an arrangement manner. Is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The size of the part number and the part number is larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part placement area 1310xa'. Is printed in white (or black). A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. .. By this delimiter, the part number and the part number (number published in the catalog) can be distinguished and identified. In addition to the product number (number published in the catalog), the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing.

In this way, even when the display mode of the identifier attached to the surface mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310'is difficult to see, the information corresponding to this identifier (manufacturing company name, product number, etc.) ) Is displayed in the component list area 1310xb'provided in the main control board 1310'. Therefore, the identifier of the surface mount type electronic component can be reliably visually recognized.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 of FIG. 137 as a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, and the main body thereof is mounted. The control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 141 as a sealing board box having a sealing means.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z formed in the transparent cover body 1301 of FIG. 141 as holes having a shape smaller than the shape of the surface mount type electronic component among the plurality of electronic components. Has been done.

As described above, since a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z, which are holes having a smaller shape than the shape of the surface mount type electronic component, are provided in the main control board box 1320, the surface mount type electronic component is provided by some illegal means. Even if an attempt is made to remove the surface mount type electronic component from the main control board 1310 and replace it with an illegal electronic component, the surface mount type electronic component cannot be taken out from the ventilation hole 1301z, which is a plurality of holes provided in the main control board box 1320. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the surface mount type electronic component from being replaced with an illegal electronic component.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game can be played, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 111 is used as the first operation unit capable of accepting a predetermined operation. After the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 are operated as the second operation unit, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 111 is provided as a setting changing means capable of changing a set value in which a probability advantageous to the player is set. The RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is provided separately from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. The pachinko machine 1 further includes notations and the like that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z as a guiding means for guiding information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633.

In this way, since the information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is guided, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are separated. Even if it is provided on the body, the person who operates the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 does not have to be confused by the operation procedure. Security can be enhanced by providing the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 separately. Therefore, crime prevention can be enhanced.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 is shown to be composed of two guide passages, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be composed of one or more guide passages.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520, after twisting 90 degrees, twisting 90 degrees in the opposite direction shows that the arrangement of the entrance and the arrangement of the exit are the same, but the arrangement is not limited to this. Instead, the arrangement of entrances and the arrangement of exits may be twisted so as to be different. Alternatively, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 may be twisted a plurality of times so as to form a spiral.

Further, in the embodiment, of course, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the embodiment, a pachinko machine is exemplified as a game machine, but it can also be applied to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (reel or a reel) can be used by using a game medal. It can also be applied to slot machines that rotate reels). Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. 214. FIG. 214 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 214, the slot machine 6000 is configured to include a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. The front door 6002 and the main body portion 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the main body portion 6004 by inserting the key into the keyhole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with this hinge as the center of rotation.

The upper half of the front door 6002 is provided with the game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door 6002 is formed with a protrusion protruding forward from the game panel 6006. A medal insertion slot 6008, a bet button 6010, 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, storage settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a position approximately in the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through this display window, an effect device (not shown), and the like are shown. It can be seen through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached to and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the front door 6002.

On these variable rotating bodies, a translucent symbol band on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a tubular variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and when the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols continuously change from the top to the bottom from the above-mentioned display window. It is designed to look like.

The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and a peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of a plurality of movable effectors, the drawing control of the effect display device 1600, the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, etc., based on various commands from the main control board 1310. By performing various controls, the progress of the production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

In the main control board 1310, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 as a game medium, and the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, and the right The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as a game medium to the tray 6026.

In the fusion gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008', and in the main control board 1310, a predetermined number of game balls are thrown into the ball slot 6008' as a game medium, and the start lever 6014 is operated. Based on this, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of the game ball as a game medium to the tray 6026.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 2000 Table unit 2003 Ordinary winning opening (privilege granting part)
2004 Second start port (privilege granting department)
2005 Grand prize opening 2400 Attacker unit 2500 Center accessory 2505 Upstream space 2510 Upper right peripheral wall 2510
2520 Guidance passage group 2520a Shigemi part 2521 First guide passage (guidance passage)
2522 Second guide passage (guide passage)

Claims (2)

A lottery is performed based on the game ball launched into the game area entering the starting port in the game area, and a symbol variable game is performed in which the symbol is variablely displayed based on the result of the lottery. In a gaming machine that executes a predetermined hit game when a hit result is derived as a result of
A launching means that can launch a game ball,
A setting determination mode generating means for generating a setting determination mode capable of determining setting information regarding the execution probability of the winning game based on the first operation being performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.
A setting confirmation mode generating means for generating a setting confirmation mode in which the setting information can be confirmed separately from the setting determination mode based on the second operation being performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.
Equipped with
Although the launching means launches a game ball on condition of contact with a predetermined contact detection unit, the launching means does not launch the game ball even if it is in contact with the contact detection unit during the setting confirmation mode. To be
When the setting confirmation mode ends, if the contact detection unit is continuously in contact from the setting confirmation mode, the contact with the contact detection unit from the end of the setting confirmation mode is performed. As an effective contact, the launching means launches a game ball,
Further, it is equipped with a base value display means capable of displaying a base value calculated by calculation using the number of game balls used for the game.
The setting information is not erased even if a ram clear process for clearing predetermined game information is performed .
Further, the setting confirmation mode generating means generates the setting confirmation mode before the interrupt processing capable of executing the processing related to the game progress is executed.
The interrupt process can be executed after the setting confirmation mode ends.
After the setting confirmation mode is completed and the interrupt process is executed, the setting confirmation mode cannot be generated at least until the power is turned on again.
A gaming machine characterized by that. A lottery is performed based on the game ball launched into the game area entering the starting port in the game area, and a symbol variable game is performed in which the symbol is variablely displayed based on the result of the lottery. In a gaming machine that executes a predetermined hit game when a hit result is derived as a result of
A launching means that can launch a game ball,
A setting determination mode generating means for generating a setting determination mode capable of determining setting information regarding the execution probability of the winning game based on the first operation being performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.
A setting confirmation mode generating means for generating a setting confirmation mode in which the setting information can be confirmed separately from the setting determination mode based on the second operation being performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.
Equipped with
Although the launching means launches a game ball on condition of contact with a predetermined contact detection unit, the launching means does not launch the game ball even if it is in contact with the contact detection unit during the setting confirmation mode. To be
When the setting confirmation mode ends, if the contact detection unit is continuously in contact from the setting confirmation mode, the contact with the contact detection unit from the end of the setting confirmation mode is performed. The launching means launches the game ball on condition that the launching means is disabled so that the gaming ball does not fire and the contact detection unit is newly contacted.
Further, it is equipped with a base value display means capable of displaying a base value calculated by calculation using the number of game balls used for the game.
The setting information is not erased even if a ram clear process for clearing predetermined game information is performed .
Further, the setting confirmation mode generating means generates the setting confirmation mode before the interrupt processing capable of executing the processing related to the game progress is executed.
The interrupt process can be executed after the setting confirmation mode ends.
After the setting confirmation mode is completed and the interrupt process is executed, the setting confirmation mode cannot be generated at least until the power is turned on again.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images